SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK - Ashland Part II Tech Specs.pdf · 2007-10-05 · SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.0 GENERAL ... CMAA Crane Manufacturers Association of America, Inc

City of Ashland 01010-1 August 2007 Water Treatment Plant Process Improvements

SECTION 01010

SUMMARY OF WORK 1.0 GENERAL

The work covered under this contract will be performed at the site of the City of Ashland Water Treatment Plant at 1400 Granite Street, Ashland, Oregon. 2.0 DESCRIPTION OF OWNER'S PROJECT The work to be performed in this contract is to improve the treatment safety, capacity, redundancy and efficacy of the Ashland water treatment. 3.0 CONTRACTS There are no other construction projects ongoing at the site in the vicinity of the specified work. 4.0 WORK OF THIS CONTRACT

The work to be performed under this contract includes:

1. Sodium hypochlorite conversion including the purchase and installation of new metering pumps, new hypochlorite tanks and all associated controls, piping, valving and ancillary equipment.

2. 115 feet of overflow piping including collection box, pipe supports and ancillary equipment.

3. 52 feet of 30” piping across the creek including pipe supports and structural requirements.

4. 102 feet of new 30” waste piping including pipe supports.

5. Installation of new sump pumps and miscellaneous waste piping improvements.

6. Chemical feed piping improvements including the installation of 50 feet of 10” steel piping over the creek to be used as conduit to for chemical feed piping.

7. New valving and improvements at water treatment plant waste pond.


8. Installation of new 24” magmeter and 24” transit time meter including all ancillary instrumentation and electrical equipment.

9. Providing a temporary Sodium Hypochlorite Feed System.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 01011

CONTRACT TIME 1.0 COMPLETION DATE SCHEDULE

Time for completion of the contract work is 100 calendar days from the written Notice-to-Proceed date. The project shall be completed fully within this time frame unless otherwise agreed to in writing.

A. Complete all work covered by Pay Items on Bid Schedule, for the work Water

Treatment Plant Process Improvements, not later than 100 days from Notice of Award issue date.

B. The daily amount of liquidated damages will be $1,000.00 per Calendar Day.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 01014

WORK SEQUENCE

1.0 CONTINUITY OF PLANT OPERATIONS

A. GENERAL:

The existing water treatment plant is currently and continuously receiving and treating water, and those functions shall not be interrupted except as specified herein. The Contractor shall coordinate the work to avoid any interference with normal operation of plant equipment and processes.

2.0 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULE OF CONSTRUCTION

To permit continuous treatment of potable water and compliance with regulatory quality requirements, the construction schedule required in Section 01310 shall provide for the following specific conditions:

a. Hypochlorite Conversion

1. The Hypochlorite Conversion shall not commence until the treatment plant is experiencing flows lower than 4MGD on a 3 day average which is expected to occur in late October.

2. Disinfection shall be maintained at all time that water is being treated.

3. Temporary Disinfection Facilities shall be provided by the Contractor.

4. Contractor shall demolish gaseous chlorination facilities

5. Install new hypochlorite feed system including all electrical and

instrumentation. Test facility.

6. Remove temporary hypochlorite feed facilities.

b. The 30” waste line and 10” overflow piping along with all ancillary piping and sump shall not be tied into the existing waste piping until the water treatment plant has a flow of 4MGD on a 3 day average which is expected to occur in late October.


c. Plant Shutdowns.

Several plant shutdowns will be required during the course of this project. Plant shutdowns to tie into existing facilities shall be coordinate with plant staff a minimum of 48 hours prior to each shutdown. Shutdowns shall be limited to a minimum of 4 hours without prior written approval of plant staff.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 01015

CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES

The Owner's operating personnel will be responsible for operating the existing treatment plant throughout the execution of this contract. Equipment presently installed in the treatment plant must be available to plant personnel at all times for use, maintenance, and repair. If it is necessary in the course of operating the plant, for the Contractor to move his equipment, materials, or any material included in the work, he shall do so promptly and place that equipment or material in an area which does not interfere with the plant operation. The Contractor shall not adjust or operate serviceable or functioning equipment or systems except as specifically required by this contract.

The existing treatment plant will remain in operation throughout the execution of this contract. The Contractor shall schedule and conduct his work to minimize necessary shutdowns and interference with normal plant operations and maintenance.

The Contractor shall notify the Construction Manager, in accordance with Section 01014, 1 week in advance of the time it is necessary to take out of service any existing tank, pipeline, channel, electrical circuit, equipment or structure. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing whatever temporary piping, pumping, power, and control facilities as are required to maintain continuous plant operation and complete treatment except as otherwise specified. The integrity of existing plant utilities shall be maintained by the Contractor at all times.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 01050

SURVEY INFORMATION

The Owner will establish reference benchmarks and baselines for the project. From the information provided, the Contractor shall develop and make such additional surveys as are needed for construction, such as control lines, slope stakes, batter boards, and stakes for pipe locations and other working points, lines, and elevations. Survey work performed by the Contractor shall be performed under the supervision of a licensed land surveyor or registered civil engineer. Contractor shall reestablish reference benchmarks and survey control monuments destroyed by his operations at no cost to the Owner. Contractor shall review all survey work with the Owner’s Representative prior to construction to confirm that the location work meet the intent of the drawings.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 01060

SAFETY AND HEALTH 1.0 GENERAL

The project involves construction of chemical feed facilities including the use of sodium hypochlorite and the dismantling of a chlorine gas feed system. By submittal of a bid for this project, Contractor shall attest that it is familiar with the hazards associated with working with these chemicals and will provide all necessary training and protective equipment and emergency response facilities as required. At a minimum, emergency eye wash and shower facilities shall be provided by the contractor in the immediate vicinity of the work if such facilities do not currently exist. 2.0 SAFETY AND HEALTH REGULATIONS

The Contractor shall comply with Safety and Health Regulations for Construction, promulgated by the Secretary of Labor under Section 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, as set forth in Title 29, C.F.R. Copies of these regulations may be obtained from Labor Building, 14th and Constitution Avenue N.W., Washington, DC 20013.

The Contractor shall also comply with the provisions of the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Act, as amended.

The Contractor shall comply with all State of Oregon heath and safety regulations applicable

to work of this nature.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 01071

STANDARD REFERENCES Wherever used in the project manual, the following abbreviations will have the meanings listed: AA Aluminum Association Incorporated P.O. Box 753 Waldorf, MD 20604 AABC Associated Air Balance Council 1518 K Street N.W. Washington, DC 20005 AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association 1540 East Dundee Road, Suite 310 Palatine, IL 60067 AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials 444 North Capitol Street, N.W., Suite 249 Washington, DC 20001 ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association 1200 19th Street N.W., Suite 300 Washington, DC 20036 ACI American Concrete Institute 22400 West Seven Mile Road P.O. Box 19150, Redford Station Detroit, MI 48219 AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies 600 North 18th Street P.O. Box 2641 Birmingham, AL 35291 AGA American Gas Association ATTN: Records 1515 Wilson Boulevard Arlington, VA 22209 AGMA American Gear Manufacturer's Association, Inc. 1500 King Street, Suite 201 Alexandria, VA 22314 AHA American Hardboard Association 1210 West Northwest Highway Palatine, IL 60067 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction One East Wacker Drive, Suite 3100 Chicago, IL 60601


AISI American Iron and Steel Institute 1101 Seventeenth Street, NW, Suite 1300 Washington, DC 20036 AITC American Institute of Timber Construction 7012 South Revere Parkway, Suite 140 Englewood, CO 80112 ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee P.O. Box 210 Germantown, MD 20875 AMCA Air Movement and Control Association, Inc. 30 West University Drive Arlington Heights, IL 60004 ANSI American National Standards Institute 11 West 42nd Street, 13th Floor New York, NY 10036 APA American Plywood Association 7011 South 19th Street Tacoma, WA 98466 API American Petroleum Institute 1220 "L" Street N.W. Washington, DC 20005 ARI Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute 4301 North Fairfax Drive, Suite 425 Arlington, VA 22203 ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers United Engineering Center 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017 ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange United States of America Standards Institute 10 East 40th Street New York, NY 10016 ASE Code American Standard Safety Code for Elevators, Dumbwaiter and Escalators American National Standards Institute 1430 Broadway New York, NY 10018 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc. 1791 Tullie Circle, NE Atlanta, GA 30329 ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 100 Barr Harbor Drive West Conshohocken, PA 19428


AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association 9549 Old Fredrick Road Ellicott City, MD 21042 or P.O. Box 286 Woodstock, MD 21163-0286 AWS American Welding Society 550 NW LeJeune Road P.O. Box 351040 Miami, FL 33135 AWWA American Water Works Association 6666 West Quincy Avenue Denver, CO 80235 BOCA Building Officials and Code Administrators, International, Inc. 4051 West Flossmoor Road Country Club Hills, IL 60478 CALTEST Materials Manual, State of California, Business and Transportation Agency Department of Public Works State of California, Department of Transportation 6002 Folsom Boulevard Sacramento, CA 95819 CALTRANS Standard Specifications, State of California, Department of Transportation State of California, Business and Transportation Agency P.O. Box 1499 Sacramento, CA 95807 CBM Certified Ballast Manufacturers 2120 Keith Building Cleveland, OH 44115 CMAA Crane Manufacturers Association of America, Inc. (Formerly called: Overhead Electrical Crane Institute) (OECI) 8720 Red Oak Boulevard, Suite 201 Charlotte, NC 28217 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 933 N Plum Grove Road Schaumburg, IL 60173 CSA Canadian Standards Association 178 Rexdale Boulevard Rexdale, Ontario, M9W IR3, Canada DEMA Diesel Engine Manufacturer's Association 30200 Detroit Road Cleveland, OH 44145 DHI Door and Hardware Institute 14170 Newbrook Drive Chantilly, VA 22021


DIS Division of Industrial Safety California Department of Industrial Relations 2422 Arden Way Sacramento, CA 95825 EEI Edison Electric Institute 90 Park Avenue New York, NY 10016 EIA Electronic Industries Association Order from: Global Engineering Documents 18201 McDurmott West Irvine, CA 92714 EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association 25 North Broadway Tarrytown, NY 10591 ESO Electrical Safety Orders California Administrative Code, Title 8, Chap. 4, Subarticle 5 Office of Procurement, Publications Section P.O. Box 20191 8141 Elder Creek Road Sacramento, CA 95820 FEDSPEC Federal Specifications General Services Administration Specification and Consumer Information Distribution Branch Washington Navy Yard, Bldg. 197 Washington, DC 20407 FEDSTDS Federal Standards (see FEDSPECS) FM Factory Mutual Engineering and Research Corporation 1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike P.O. Box 9102 Norwood, MA 02062 HEI Heat Exchange Institute 1300 Sumner Avenue Cleveland, OH 44115 HI Hydraulic Institute 9 Sylvan Way, Suite 180 Parsippany, NJ 07054 HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association 1825 Michael Faraday Drive P.O. Box 2789 Reston, VA 22090-2789 IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials 20001 Walnut Drive S Walnut, CA 91789


ICBO International Conference of Building Officials 5360 Workman Mill Road Whittier, CA 90601 ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association P.O. Box 440 South Yarmouth, MA 02664 IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 445 Hoes Lane P.O. Box 1331 Piscataway, NJ 08855 IES Illuminating Engineering Society of North America 120 Wall Street New York, NY 10017 ISA Instrument Society of America 67 Alexander Drive P.O. Box 12277 Research Triangle Park, NC 27709 JIC Joint Industrial Council 7901 West Park Drive McLean, VA 22101 MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association 401 N. Michigan Avenue Chicago, IL 60611 MILSPEC Military Specifications Naval Publications and Forms Center 5801 Tabor Avenue Philadelphia, PA 19120 MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. 127 Park Street, N.E. Vienna, VA 22180 NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers 11 South La Salle Street, Suite 1400 Chicago, IL 60603 NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers 1440 South Creek Drive Houston, TX 77084 NBC National Building Code Published by BOCA NEC National Electric Code National Fire Protection Association One Batterymarch Park P.O. Box 9101 Quincy, MA 02269


NELMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association, Inc. P.O. Box 87A Cumberland Center, ME 04021 NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association 2101 L Street, NW, Suite 300 Washington, DC 20037 NESC National Electric Safety Code American National Standards Institute 1430 Broadway New York, NY 10018 NFOR National Forest Products Association (Formerly National Lumber Manufacturer's Association) 1111 19 Street NW, Suite 700 Washington, DC 20036 NFPA National Fire Protection Association One Batterymarch Park P.O. Box 9101 Quincy, MA 02269 NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association 6830 Raleigh LaGrange P.O. Box 34518 Memphis, TN 38184-0518 NSF National Sanitation Foundation 3475 Plymouth Road P.O. Box 130140 Ann Arbor, MI 48113 OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act U.S. Department of Labor Occupational and Health Administration San Francisco Regional Office 450 Golden Gate Avenue, Box 36017 San Francisco, CA 94102 PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute 175 West Jackson Blvd., Suite 1859 Chicago, IL 60604 PPIC The Plumbing & Piping Industry Council, Inc. 510 Shatto Place, Suite 402 Los Angeles, CA 90020 RIS Redwood Inspection Service California Redwood Association 405 Enfrente Dr., Suite 200 Novato, CA 94949 RMA Rubber Manufacturers Association 1400 K Street NW, Suite 900 Washington, DC 20005


SAE Society of Automotive Engineers, Inc. 400 Commonwealth Drive Warrendale, PA 15096 SAMA Scientific Apparatus Makers Association One Thomas Circle Washington, DC 20005 SBC Standard Building Code Published by SBCCI SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International Inc. 900 Montclair Road Birmingham, AL 35213 SCMA Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association 400 Penn Center Boulevard, Suite 530 Pittsburg, PA 15235 SDI Steel Door Institute 30200 Detroit Road Cleveland, OH 44145 SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. P.O. Box 221230 Chantilly, VA 22021 SPI Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc. 1275 K Street NW, Suite 400 Washington, DC 20005 SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau 4709 Scenic Highway Pensacola, FL 32504 SSPC Society for Protective Coatings 40 24th Street, 6th Floor Pittsburgh, PA 15222 SSPWC Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction Building News, Inc. 3055 Overland Avenue Los Angeles, CA 90034 TEMA Tubular Exchanger Manufacturer's Association 25 North Broadway Tarrytown, NY 10591 TPI Truss Plate Institute 583 D'Onofrio Drive, Suite 200 Madison, WI 53719 UBC Uniform Building Code Published by ICBO UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 333 Pfingsten Road Northbrook, IL 60062 UMC Uniform Mechanical Code Published by ICBO


UPC Uniform Plumbing Code Published by IAPMO USBR Bureau of Reclamation U.S. Department of Interior Engineering and Research Center Denver Federal Center, Building 67 Denver, CO 80225 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau 6980 SW Varns St. P.O. Box 23145 Portland, OR 97223 WWPA Western Wood Products Association (Formerly called: West Coast Lumbermen's Association (WCLA)) Yeon Building 522 SW 5th Avenue Portland, OR 97204

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 01200

PROJECT MEETINGS 1.0 GENERAL

Project meetings will be held as often as deemed necessary by the Construction Manager. Meetings will normally be held weekly. Contractor’s representatives shall attend.

The purpose of the meetings will be to discuss schedule, progress, coordination, submittals

and job related problems.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 01300

SUBMITTALS 1.0 GENERAL

Submittals covered by these requirements include manufacturers' information, shop draw-ings, test procedures, test results, samples, requests for substitutions, and miscellaneous work-related submittals. Submittals shall also include, but not be limited to, all mechanical, electrical and electronic equipment and systems, materials, reinforcing steel, fabricated items, and piping and conduit details. The Contractor shall furnish all drawings, specifications, descriptive data, certifi-cates, samples, tests, methods, schedules, and manufacturer's installation and other instructions as specifically required in the contract documents to demonstrate fully that the materials and equip-ment to be furnished and the methods of work comply with the provisions and intent of the contract documents.

The requirements of this section shall be coordinated with the requirements of Paragraph

103.9.00 of the General Conditions, as modified in the Supplementary Conditions. In the case of conflict, the provisions of this section shall prevail. 2.0 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES

The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy and completeness of the information contained in each submittal and shall assure that the material, equipment or method of work shall be as described in the submittal. The Contractor shall verify that all features of all products conform to the specified requirements. Submittal documents shall be clearly edited to indicate only those items, models, or series of equipment, which are being submitted for review. All extraneous materials shall be crossed out or otherwise obliterated. The Contractor shall ensure that there is no conflict with other submittals and notify the Construction Manager in each case where his submittal may affect the work of another contractor or the Owner. The Contractor shall coordinate submittals among his subcontractors and suppliers including those submittals complying with unit respons-ibility requirements specified in paragraph 11000-1.02 C and applicable technical sections.

The Contractor shall coordinate submittals with the work so that work will not be delayed. He shall coordinate and schedule different categories of submittals, so that one will not be delayed for lack of coordination with another. No extension of time will be allowed because of failure to properly schedule submittals. The Contractor shall not proceed with work related to a submittal un-til the submittal process is complete. This requires that submittals for review and comment shall be returned to the Contractor stamped "No Exceptions Taken" or "Make Corrections Noted."

The Contractor shall certify on each submittal document that he has reviewed the submittal, verified field conditions, and complied with the contract documents.


The Contractor may authorize in writing a material or equipment supplier to deal directly with the Construction Manager or with the Owner with regard to a submittal. These dealings shall be limited to contract interpretations to clarify and expedite the work. 3.0 CATEGORIES OF SUBMITTALS

A. GENERAL: Submittals fall into two general categories; submittals for review and comment, and submit-tals which are primarily for information only. Submittals which are for information only are generally specified as PRODUCT DATA in Part 2 of applicable specification sections.

At the beginning of work, the Construction Manager will furnish the Contractor lists of those submittals specified in the project manual. Two separate lists will be provided: submittals for review and comment and product data (submittals) for information only.

B. SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW AND COMMENT:

All submittals except where specified to be submitted as product data for information only shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Construction Manager for review and comment.

C. SUBMITTALS (PRODUCT DATA) FOR INFORMATION ONLY:

Where specified, the Contractor shall furnish submittals (product data) to the Construction Manager for Information only. Submittal requirements for operation and maintenance manuals, which are included in this category, are specified in Section 01730. 4.0 TRANSMITTAL PROCEDURE

A. GENERAL:

Unless otherwise specified, submittals regarding material and equipment shall be accompa-nied by Transmittal Form 01300-A specified in Section 01999. Submittals for operation and maintenance manuals, information and data shall be accompanied by Transmittal Form 01730-A specified in Section 01999. A separate form shall be used for each specific item, class of material, equipment, and items specified in separate, discrete sections, for which the submittal is required. Submittal documents common to more than one piece of equipment shall be identified with all the appropriate equipment numbers. Submittals for various items shall be made with a single form when the items taken together constitute a manufacturer’s package or are so functionally related that expediency indicates checking or review of the group or package as a whole.

A unique number, sequentially assigned, shall be noted on the transmittal form accompany-ing each item submitted. Original submittal numbers shall have the following format: “XXX,” where “XXX” is the sequential number assigned by the Contractor. Resubmittals shall have the fol


lowing format: “XXX-Y,”; where “XXX” is the originally assigned submittal number and “Y” is a sequential letter assigned for resubmittals, i.e., A, B, or C being the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd resubmittals, respectively. Submittal 25B, for example, is the second resubmittal of submittal 25.

B. DEVIATION FROM CONTRACT:

If the Contractor proposes to provide material, equipment, or method of work which devi-ates from the project manual, he shall indicate so under "deviations" on the transmittal form accompanying the submittal copies.

C. SUBMITTAL COMPLETENESS:

Submittals which do not have all the information required to be submitted, including devia-tions, are not acceptable and will be returned without review. 5.0 REVIEW PROCEDURE

A. GENERAL:

Submittals are specified for those features and characteristics of materials, equipment, and methods of operation which can be selected based on the Contractor's judgment of their confor-mance to the specified requirements. Other features and characteristics are specified in a manner which enables the Contractor to determine acceptable options without submittals. The review pro-cedure is based on the Contractor's guarantee that all features and characteristics not requiring submittals conform as specified. Review shall not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or to verifying quantities, dimensions, weights or gages, or fabrica-tion processes (except where specifically indicated or required by the project manual) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. Review of a separate item, as such, will not indicate ap-proval of the assembly in which the item functions.

When the contract documents require a submittal, the Contractor shall submit the specified information as follows:

1. Six copies of all submitted information plus one reproducible original of all information shall be transmitted with submittals for review and comment.

2. Unless otherwise specified, six copies of all submitted information shall be

transmitted with submittals (Product Data) for information only.

B. SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW AND COMMENT:

Unless otherwise specified, within 10 working days after receipt of a submittal for review and comment, the Construction Manager shall review the submittal and return two copies of the marked-up original noted in 1 above. Mark-ups may take the form of a separate list of written comments attached to the returned submittal. The original will be retained by the Construction Manager. The returned submittal shall indicate one of the following actions:


1. If the review indicates that the material, equipment or work method complies

with the project manual, submittal copies will be marked “NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN.” In this event, the Contractor may begin to im-plement the work method or incorporate the material or equipment covered by the submittal.

2. If the review indicates limited corrections are required, copies will be

marked “MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED.” The Contractor may begin implementing the work method or incorporating the material and equipment covered by the submittal in accordance with the noted corrections. Where submittal information will be incorporated in O&M data, a corrected copy shall be provided.

3. If the review reveals that the submittal is insufficient or contains incorrect

data, copies will be marked “AMEND AND RESUBMIT.” Except at his own risk, the Contractor shall not undertake work covered by this submittal until it has been revised, resubmitted and returned marked either “NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN” or “MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED.”

4. If the review indicates that the material, equipment, or work method does not

comply with the project manual, copies of the submittal will be marked “REJECTED - SEE REMARKS.” Submittals with deviations which have not been identified clearly may be rejected. Except at his own risk, the Con-tractor shall not undertake the work covered by such submittals until a new submittal is made and returned marked either “NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN” or “MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED.”

C. SUBMITTALS (PRODUCT DATA) FOR INFORMATION ONLY:

Such information is not subject to submittal review procedures and shall be provided as part

of the work under this contract and its acceptability determined under normal inspection procedures. 6.0 EFFECT OF REVIEW OF CONTRACTOR'S SUBMITTALS

Review of contract drawings, methods of work, or information regarding materials or equipment the Contractor proposes to provide, shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for errors therein and shall not be regarded as an assumption of risks or liability by the Construction Manager or the Owner, or by any officer or employee thereof, and the Contractor shall have no claim under the contract on account of the failure, or partial failure, of the method of work, material, or equipment so reviewed. A mark of “NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN” or “MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED” shall mean that the Owner has no objection to the Contractor, upon his own responsibil-ity, using the plan or method of work proposed, or providing the materials or equipment proposed.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 01310

CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 1.0 SCOPE

This section specifies the procedures for preparing and revising the cost-loaded construction schedule used for planning and managing construction activities. The schedule provides a basis for determining the progress status of the project relative to the completion time, specific dates, and for determining the acceptability of the Contractor's progress payment estimates. 2.0 DESCRIPTION

The Contractor shall prepare a time scale network schedule using a critical path method. A general guide for preparing such a schedule is contained in “The Use of CPM in Construction, a Manual for Contractors,” published by the Associated General Contractors of America.

The schedule shall depict all significant construction activities and all items of work listed in the breakdown of contract prices submitted by the Contractor as required by the Supplementary Conditions. Assigned values for each part of the work shall be indicated. The dependencies between activities shall be indicated so that it may be established what effect the progress of any one activity has on the schedule.

Completion time and all specific dates given in Section 01011, and sequencing requirements described in Section 01014, shall be shown on the schedule. Activities making up the critical path shall be identified.

No activity on the schedule shall have a duration longer than 21 days or assigned value greater than $50,000, except activities comprising only fabrication and delivery may extend for more than 21 days. Activities which exceed these limits shall be divided into more detailed components. The scheduled duration of each activity shall be based on the work being performed during the normal 40-hour work week with allowances made for legal holidays and normal weather conditions. 3.0 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

Within 14 days after the date of the Notice to Proceed or by the Preconstruction Meeting, whichever comes first, the Contractor shall complete a draft construction schedule conforming to paragraph 01310-2.0 and representing in detail all planned procurement and on-site construction activities. The schedule shall be computer-prepared on reproducible paper and may be in draft form. Upon completion of the schedule, the Contractor shall submit the original and two copies to the Construction Manager in accordance with Section 01300.


Within 7 days after receipt of the submittal, the Construction Manager shall review the submitted schedule and return one copy of the marked up original to the Contractor. If the Construction Manager finds that the submitted schedule does not comply with specified requirements, the corrective revisions will be noted on the submittal copy returned to the Contractor for corrections and resubmittal as specified in Section 01300. Within 7 days of approval of the draft schedule, the Contractor will deliver three computer reports to the Construction Manager. The reports will be on 8-1/2-inch by 11-inch sheets as follows: 1. Tabular listing of activities showing early and late start and finish dates. 2. Bar chart schedule of all activities. 3. Report on costs and anticipated payment dates for each activity.

These reports will serve as the basis for the Contractor’s progress payment requests. Approval of the Contractor's schedule and furnishing reports to the Construction Manager shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for the adequacy of the schedule and for managing all construction activities including those of subcontractors and suppliers. 4.0 SCHEDULE REVISIONS

Significant revisions to the accepted cost-loaded construction schedule may be made only with written approval of the Contractor and Owner. Changes in timing for activities which are not on the critical path may be modified with written agreement of the Contractor and Construction Manager. Any change affecting the contract value of any activity, the timing of any activity on the critical path, the completion time and specific dates and work sequencing may be made only in accordance with applicable provisions of Paragraphs 111.3.00 of the General Conditions. 5.0 PROJECT STATUS UPDATE

Within 7 days of acceptance by the Construction Manager of the Contractor’s written progress report and application for payment as specified in Paragraph 111.2.00 of the general Conditions, the Contractor will update the schedule by computer and generate the reports outlined in paragraph 01310-3.0. These reports will reflect the current status of the work and will be provided to and used by the Construction Manager as the basis of his progress payment request.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 01380

PHOTOGRAPHS 1.0 PRECONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

The Contractor shall provide preconstruction photographs in electronic and print format prior to commencement of work on the site. The photographs shall be minimum 5 megapixal resolution, and shall indicate on the front of each print the date, name of work, and the location where the photograph was taken. Before construction may start, one 8-inch by 10-inch glossy print of each exposure, together with an electronic copy on compact disc, shall be delivered to the Construction Manager. Preconstruction photographs shall be taken at locations to be designated by the Construction Manager. The photographer shall be equipped to photograph either interior or exterior exposures, with lenses ranging from wide angle to 135 mm. 2.0 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

The Contractor shall provide construction photographs showing the progress of the work. The photographs shall be taken of such subjects as may be directed, shall be minimum 5 megapixal resolution, and shall indicate on the front of each print the date, job title and brief description of the photograph including the location where the photograph was taken. Starting one month after the date of the preconstruction photographs and continuing as long as the work is in progress, monthly photographs shall be taken.

Upon acceptance of the work, photographs shall be made of the work where directed by the Construction Manager. The photographer shall be equipped to take either interior or exterior exposures, with lenses ranging from wide angle to 135 mm.

One 8-inch by 10-inch glossy print of each exposure, together with the electronic format copy on CD, shall be delivered to the Construction Manager within 10 days following each set of exposures. 3.0 REQUIRED NUMBER OF PHOTOGRAPHS

For the work of this contract, photographs shall be provided as listed:

Color Preconstruction 16 Construction 120 Acceptance 16 Total number of photographs required 152


Photographs required in excess of the total number of exposures required shall be paid for as additional work. The Construction Manager may make additional construction photographs at no cost to the Contractor.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 01400

QUALITY CONTROL

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for quality control services, field inspections and field testing of civil and structural constructs required for this project. Contractor is responsible for the quality assurance and quality control of their respective work. 1.02 DEFINITIONS:

A. Quality Control System (QCS): The quality control, assurance, and inspection system established and carried out to ensure compliance with the Plans and Specifications. Special Inspection is part of the QCS and shall be described in detail therein.

B. QCS Supervisor: That person in responsible charge of the work occurring, under

contract with the Contractor and as designated in the QCS Plan.

C. QCS Inspector: Responsible, certified personnel inspecting the various constructs at specified milestones and during the project overall under contract with the Construction Manager. The Special Inspector is part of the QCS Inspector team.

D. Factory Test: Tests made on various materials, products and component parts

prior to shipment to the job site.

E. Field Tests: Tests and analyses made at or in the vicinity of the job site in connection with the actual construction.

F. Certified Inspection Report: Reports signed by approved inspectors attesting that

the items inspected meet the specification requirements other than any exceptions included in the report

G. Certificate of Compliance: Certificate from the manufacturer of the material or

equipment identifying said manufacturer, product and referenced standard, and shall be signed by a designated officer of the manufacturer.


H. Standard Compliance: Condition whereby specified materials or equipment must conform to the standards of organizations such as the American National Standard Institute (ANSI), American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or similar organization as listed in each technical specification section.

I. Quality Assurance: The day-to-day, in-process supervisory observations of work

and materials conducted by the Contractor to assure that the proper methods and materials are being used and installed by tradesmen.

J. Source Quality Control: The in-process testing and inspections conducted by the

QCS Inspector(s) to verify that the materials, equipment, workmanship and shop manufactured constructs are in compliance with the Contract Documents, applicable Codes and standards.

K. Field Quality Control: The testing and inspections conducted by the QCS

Inspector(s) in the field during and at the completion of each construct to verify that the in-process and completed construction is in compliance with the Contract Documents, applicable Codes and standards.

1.03 REFERENCES: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization, or if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued, or replaced.

Reference Title

ASTM C102 Practice for Laboratories Engaged in the Testing of Building Sealants.

ASTM C802 Practice for Conducting an Inter-Laboratory Test Program to Determine the Precision of Test Methods for Construction.

ASTM C1093 Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Unit Masonry.


Reference Title

ASTM D3740 Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction.

ASTM D4561 Practice for Quality Control Systems for an Inspection and testing Agency for Bituminous Paving Materials.

ASTM E329 Practice for Use in the Evaluation of Inspection and Testing Agencies as Used in Construction.

AISC Steel Construction Manual, 13th Edition, American Institute of Steel Construction

AL SPEC Specification for Aluminum Structures Part I-A - Allowable Stress Design Part I-B – LRFD of Buildings and Similar Type Structures (Aluminum Association)

AISI Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structure Members

ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete, American Concrete Institute, latest edition

OSSC 2004 Oregon Structural Specialty Code 1.04 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES:

QCS Supervisor, designated by the Contractor, shall prepare an initial and final QCS plan to include all of the required information of paragraph 1.10-2.

Monitor quality assurance over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site

conditions, and workmanship, to produce work of specified quality. Schedule specified inspections with the Construction Manager and Building Department

in a timely manner. Provide normal and customary assistance to the Inspectors. Comply fully with manufacturers’ instructions, including each step in sequence. Should manufacturers’ instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request

clarification before proceeding from Construction Manager. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the work except when more

stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.

Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.


1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS:

A. GENERAL: Comply with all Federal, State, and local Codes as referenced herein. Such regulations apply to activities including, but not limited to, sitework and zoning, building practices and quality, on and offsite disposal, safety, sanitation, nuisance, and environmental quality.

Contractor designed structural systems are subject to the same overall inspection requirements as all other work.

B. SPECIAL INSPECTION:

Special Inspection shall be performed by the Special Inspector under contract with the Construction Manager in conformance with Chapter 17 of the IBC and each system’s specification section. Special Inspection is in addition to, but not replacing, other inspections and quality control requirements herein. Where sampling and testing required herein conforms to Special Inspection standards, such sampling and testing need not be duplicated.

C. STRUCTURAL OBSERVATION:

Not Required. 1.06 FIELD SAMPLE PROCEDURES: When field samples are specified in a unit of work, construct each field sample to include work of all trades required to complete the field sample prior to starting related field work. Field samples may be incorporated into the project after acceptance by Construction Manager. Remove unacceptable field samples when directed by Construction Manager. Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the work. 1.07 CONTRACTOR DESIGNED STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS:

A. DESIGN ENGINEERING: Contractor shall employ and pay for engineering services from a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Oregon for structural design of Contractor designed structural systems including but not limited to temporary shoring and bracing, formwork support, concrete mix design, precast concrete units, and support systems for fire sprinkler, plumbing, mechanical, and electrical systems and equipment


B. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS OF CONTRACTOR DESIGNED STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS:

Prior to the start of such work the Contractor shall pay for preliminary testing for all source quality control specified materials including, but not limited to, concrete, grout, and mortar mix designs. Contractor shall pay for required shop inspection of Contractor designed structural systems where required by Code or these specifications. 1.08 MANUFACTURERS’ FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS: When specified in individual specification Sections, product suppliers or manufacturers shall provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust, and balance of equipment as applicable, and to provide instructions when necessary. Contractor shall submit qualifications of observer to Construction Manager 30 days in advance of required observations. QCS Inspector shall record observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers’ written instructions. 1.09 JOB SITE CONDITIONS: Schedule to ensure all preparatory work has been accomplished prior to proceeding with current work. Proceeding with the work constitutes acceptance of conditions. Allow adequate time for materials susceptible to temperature and humidity to “stabilize” prior to installation. Establish and maintain environmental conditions (i.e., temperature, humidity, lighting) as recommended by the various material manufacturers for the duration of the work. 1.10 SUBMITTALS:

The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300:

1. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks () shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the Contractor, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. The Engineer shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any


requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.

2. Written description of Contractor’s proposed QCS plan in sufficient detail

to illustrate understanding and approach. Preliminary submittal of the QCS plan may be made prior to commencing field work. The preliminary submittal will illustrate the project’s initial three (3) month’s work, and be followed one month later by a final QCS plan submittal.

The QCS plan and submittal shall include:

a. QSC Supervisor: Resume and/or three recent similar projects with references and contact telephone numbers or each.

b. Building Department Inspections

c. Special Inspections

d. Source Quality Assurance procedures - See 1.02 I and J.

Reinforcing Steel - Section 03200 Concrete - Section 03300 Concrete Masonry Units - Section 04200 Equipment – Divisions 11, 12, 13, and 14 Mechanical – Division 15 Electrical – Division 16 Instrumentation – Division 17

e. Field Quality Assurance procedures – See 1.02 I and K.

Describe generally how the Contractor plans to implement QA/QC procedures for significant items in each of the categories listed in (d.) above. Address issues related to use of GGBFS as specified in Section 03300.

3. Preliminary structural observation set and scheduled dates as described in paragraph 1.05 C.

4. Complete structural system information describing Contractor designed

structural systems, including sealed calculations, shop and erection drawings, product literature for the various components, ICBO Evaluation Reports for structural components, and a discussion of risk issues associated with the proposed system which could adversely impact overall project completion.

5. If requested by the Construction Manager during the work, manufacturer’s

field services and reports. If not so requested, treat same as Product Data.


1.11 PRE-CONSTRUCTION QCS MEETING: A mandatory pre-construction meeting with the Construction Manager, QCS Supervisor, QCS Inspector, Testing Laboratory, Geotechnical Special Inspector, and Building Department (optional) shall be scheduled by the QCS Inspector to be held (5) days after the preliminary QCS plan is submitted. The purpose of the meeting shall include review of the submitted QCS plan and agree on the procedures to implement the plan. PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL:

A. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES:

Provide source quality control according to the reviewed and accepted QCS plan and paragraph 1.04 herein. Coordinate with Construction Manager to facilitate the work of the Testing Laboratory specified in Section 01410 and Special Inspector. Provide ready access to sampling and inspection locations and incidental labor customary in such sampling and inspections. Timely prepare and submit submittals, and revise as indicated by review comments. Comply with technical requirements in each specification Section that applies to the work.

B. CONSTRUCTION MANAGER RESPONSIBILITIES:

Review Contractor’s tracking of QCS activities at monthly meetings. Facilitate completion of submittal review per Section 01300. Assist Contractor to ensure that Special Inspection occurs where and when specified.

C. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA:

Acceptable characteristics and quality of a particular item or construct is defined in that item’s or construct’s specification section. 2.02 PRODUCT DATA The following product data shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300.

1. Manufacturers’ field services and reports unless requested by Construction Manager to be submitted for review.

2. Special Inspection reports, unless otherwise directed in each technical

specification Section.


PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: Field quality control responsibilities of the Contractor and Construction Manager are substantially the same as described in paragraph 2.01, with the exception that this work occurs primarily on the jobsite as the work progresses, and Special Inspection will occur more often than at the source. Acceptable characteristics and quality of a particular item or construct is defined in that item’s or construct’s specification Section. 3.02 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS:

Section 01410 describes Testing Laboratory sampling, testing and reporting which conforms to Special Inspection requirements. The following types of work require Special Inspection:

A. STRUCTURE FILL Inspection of fill materials, placing and compaction only, as noted in Section 02200

including material verification and compaction testing, which are required but are not special inspections.

B. STRUCTURAL CONCRETE AND REINFORCING:

Verification and Inspection1 Continuous Periodic Referenced

standard IBC reference 1. Inspection of reinforcing steel and placement.

- X ACI 318: 3.5,

7.1-7.7

1903.5, 1907.1, 1907.7

2. Inspection of reinforcing steel welding in accordance with Table 1704.3, Item 5B.

- - AWS D1.4

ACI 318: 3.5.2 1903.5.2

3. Inspect bolts to be installed in concrete prior to and during placement of concrete.

X - - 1912.5

4. Verifying use of required design mix. - X

ACI 318: Ch. 4, 5.2-5.4

1904, 1905.2, 1905.4

5. At the time fresh concrete is sampled to fabricate specimens for strength tests, perform slump and air content tests, and determine the temperature of the concrete.

X -

ASTM C 172 ASTM C 31 ACI 318: 5.6,

5.8

1905.6

6. Inspection of concrete placement for proper application techniques.

X - ACI 318: 5.9,

5.10 1905.9, 1905.10

7. Inspection for maintenance of specified curing temperature and techniques.

- X ACI 318: 5.11

5.13 1905.11, 1905.13

1 Reference IBC Table 1704.4. Required Verification and Inspection of Concrete Construction


C. ANCHOR BOLTS AND POST-INSTALLED ANCHOR SYSTEMS:

1. Cast-in-place Anchor Bolts: Periodic, visual inspection as to size, number, spacing generally, attachment (nuts, washers, etc.), and material type. Inspect all anchor bolts for building structural components (columns, beams, ledgers/lintels, hold-downs, deck and shearwall edges, struts, etc.) and installed equipment as specified elsewhere herein for seismic and lateral force resistance.

2. Post-installed concrete anchors, prior to installation: Confirm that proposed anchors are acceptable for use in accordance with the limitations specified in Section 05501. Verify that a reviewed and accepted ICBO Evaluation Report for each anchor type is on site prior to installation.

3. Post-installed concrete anchors, installation: Periodic, visual inspection as to size, spacing and attachment per the drawings and specifications. Provide additional special inspection as required by the appropriate ICBO Evaluation Report.

D. MASONRY SYSTEMS:

Not Required.

E. STRUCTURAL ALUMINUM:

Not Required. F. STRUCTURAL LUMBER, WOOD SHEATHING, CONNECTIONS, AND

MANUFACTURED TRUSSES:

Not Required.

3.03 CORRECTION OF DEFECTIVE WORK:

Remove and replace defective, rejected, and condemned work at Contractor’s expense until such work meets the requirements of Contract Documents. 3.04 EXCESSIVE RE-INSPECTION: Excessive re-inspection is any required inspection after the first re-inspection which is necessitated by prior inspection failures or cancelled inspections for that item. Contractor shall reimburse Construction Manager for this excessive re-inspection at cost on a monthly basis.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 01410

TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION: This Section specifies Quality Control testing and reporting performed by the Testing Laboratory. City shall select a qualified Testing Laboratory and contract for the services specified herein, except as specifically noted where Contractor may elect to utilize Testing Laboratory to fulfill submittal requirements. Such an arrangement does not relieve the Contractor from their responsibility to provide the completed project as specified, and to perform Quality Assurance according to the QCS as reviewed and accepted. 1.02 REFERENCES: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

ASTM A880 Criteria for Use in Evaluation of Testing Laboratories and Organizations for Examination and Inspection of Steel, Stainless Steel, and Related Alloys

ASTM C802 Conducting an Inter-laboratory Test Program to Determine the Precision of Test Methods for Construction Materials

ASTM C1021 Laboratories Engaged in the Testing of Building Sealants

ASTM Cl077 Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation

ASTM C1093 Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Unit Masonry


Reference Title

ASTM D3666 Specification for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Testing and Inspecting Road and Paving Materials

ASTM D3740 Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction

ASTM D4561 Quality Control Systems for Organizations Producing and Applying Bituminous Paving Materials

ASTM E4 Force Verification of Testing Machines

ASTM E329 Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction

ASTM E543 Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing

ASTM E994 Calibration and Testing Laboratory Accreditation Systems General Requirements for Operation and Recognition.

OSSC 2004 Oregon Structural Specialty Code

1.03 TESTING LABORATORY QUALIFICATIONS:

Testing Laboratory shall satisfy the following qualifications:

1. Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification, published by American Council of Independent Laboratories.

2. Conform to the requirements of ASTM E329 in particular, and other

reference standards as generally pertain to this project.

3. Authorized to operate in the State of Oregon, with personnel and equipment based sufficiently close to the project to allow short-notice site access for sampling and testing.

4. Acceptable to the City, Construction Manager, and local building

authorities. 1.04 TESTING LABORATORY RESPONSIBILITIES: Testing Laboratory shall provide qualified personnel at the site and cooperate with Construction Manager and Contractor in performance of the following services:

1. Perform specified independent inspection, sampling, and testing of products in accordance with specified standards, to determine compliance with requirements of Contract Documents.


2. Provide sampling equipment and personnel, deliver samples to the testing laboratory, record field measurements, and cure samples as required by Contract Documents.

3. Perform Building Department required tests and inspections, including

Special Inspection as specified in Section 01400.

4. Timely prepare and deliver reports summarizing results of tests and inspections.

5. Attend pre-construction conferences and, if requested, a limited number of

progress meetings where Quality Control, testing, and inspection issues require discussion.

6. When directed by the Construction Manager or requested by the

Contractor, provide special and additional tests and inspections to verify material compliance with requirements of Contract Documents.

a. City shall pay for special tests and inspections where work

conforms to the Contract Document requirements.

b. Contractor shall pay for excessive re-inspection tests and inspections where work fails to comply with Contract Document requirements (re-inspection) and for costs associated with cancelled or short-notice re-scheduling of requested sampling, testing, and inspection. See Section 01400-3.04. Testing Laboratory work requested by Contractor to fulfill submittal requirements shall also be considered additional tests.

1.05 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES: Contractor shall deliver adequate samples of materials proposed to be used and which require testing to the Testing Laboratory. Contractor shall cooperate with Testing Laboratory personnel, and provide access to the work and to manufacturer’s facilities. Contractor shall provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to work to be tested, to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested, to facilitate tests and inspections, storage and curing of test samples. Contractor shall notify Construction Manager 48 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring inspection, sampling and testing services.


1.06 TEST AND INSPECTION REPORTS:

A. REPORT CONTENTS: At a minimum, Test and Inspection Reports shall include the following:

1. Project name and date of report. 2. Testing Laboratory name, address, telephone number, name of laboratory

field sampling personnel, lab testing personnel, or QCS Inspector as applicable.

3. Date, time, and location of sampling, testing, and inspecting.

4. Ambient temperature and weather conditions at the site or shop and curing

conditions of samples. 5. Product identification and referenced specification Section number. 6. Type of sample, test, and inspection and industry standard for sampling

and testing. 7. Results of sample, test, and inspection. 8. Evaluation of compliance with requirements in Contract Documents. 9. Certified Inspection Reports shall specifically indicate the qualification of

the inspector to render judgment and certify said inspection. 10. When requested by Construction Manager, interpretation of test results.

B. FINAL SUMMARY REPORT Provide at substantial completion and minimum seven (7) days prior to request for

Certificate of Occupancy. Report style is a letter which lists outstanding test and inspection deficiencies, including Special Inspections. If no deficiencies remain the letter shall so state.

C. DISTRIBUTION OF TEST AND INSPECTION REPORTS:

Test and Inspection reports shall be submitted to the Construction Manager for distribution as Product Data described in Section 01300. Test reports shall be submitted not more than two days after completion of required tests. Inspection reports shall be submitted immediately if deficiencies or significant irregularities are noted, and in no case less than two working days after said inspection. Provide six (6) copies of all reports.


1.07 SUBMITTALS:


1. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks () shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the Contractor, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. The Engineer shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.

2. Form A described in paragraph 3.03 herein, by both Testing Laboratory

and Contractor. Contractor’s QCS Plan, described in Section 01400, may include Form A, and not be resubmitted herein.

1.08 LIMITS ON TESTING LABORATORY AUTHORITY: Testing Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. Testing Laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the work, nor assume any duties of Contractor. Testing Laboratory has no authority to stop the work PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. GENERAL:

Source quality control is defined in Section 01400. This Section provides general guidelines as to the sampling, tests, and inspections required of products and manufactures prior to delivery to the project site, and should be considered a minimum. Additional information and requirements are provided in each technical specification Section and those requirements shall control over this Section when in conflict. Absence of a test, inspection or requirement listed herein from a subsequent specification Section does not relieve the Testing Laboratory or the Contractor from their respective responsibilities specified in this Section.


B. REFERENCE STANDARDS IN OTHER SECTIONS: Codes, standards, and other references called out below, but which are not listed in paragraph 1.02 are described in other specification Sections and not repeated herein.

C. FILL MATERIALS:

1. IMPORTED FILL MATERIALS: Testing Laboratory may conduct additional testing on behalf of Contractor to prepare required submittals specified in Section 02200.

2. TYPE C FILL MATERIAL: Testing Laboratory shall conduct required

testing to verify on-site materials proposed for fill conforms to specification Section 02200. Contractor shall pay Testing Laboratory for such sampling and testing. Sampling and testing shall determine Liquid Limit, Plasticity Index, optimum moisture content and density relationship, and other data as required for proper use of this material.

D. PAVING MATERIALS: Provide sampling and testing requested by Construction Manager or additional testing as requested by Contractor to verify materials proposed for use conform to specification Sections 02200 and 02500.

E. CONCRETE REINFORCING:

Provide sampling and testing requested by Construction Manager or additional testing as requested by Contractor to verify materials proposed for use conform to specification Section 03200.

F. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE:

Provide sampling and testing requested by Construction Manager or additional testing as

requested by Contractor to verify materials proposed for use conform to specification Section 03300. At Contractor’s expense, Testing Laboratory may assist Contractor in formulating concrete mix designs, testing and reporting same, and providing the services of a Professional Engineer to review and seal the mix design.

G. MASONRY:

Not Required.

H. MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK, GRATING:

Provide sampling and testing requested by Construction Manager or additional testing as

requested by Contractor to verify materials proposed for use conform to specification Sections 05505, 05520, and 05530.


I. COATING SYSTEMS:

Provide sampling and testing requested by Construction Manager or additional testing as requested by Contractor to verify materials proposed for use conform to specification Section 09900. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. GENERAL: Field quality control is defined in Section 01400. This Section provides general guidelines as to the sampling, tests, and inspections required of work in progress or completed in the field, and should be considered a minimum. Additional information and requirements are provided in each technical specification Section and those requirements shall control over this Section when in conflict. Absence of a test, inspection or requirement listed herein from a subsequent specification Section does not relieve the Testing Laboratory or the Contractor from their respective responsibilities specified in this Section.

B. REFERENCE STANDARDS IN OTHER SECTIONS: Codes, standards, and other references called out below, but which are not listed in paragraph 1.02 are described in other specification Sections and not repeated herein.

C. FILL:

1. SUBGRADE PREPARATION AND COMPACTION: Verify depth of scarification, moisture content within optimal limits for compaction, and degree of compaction specified in Section 02200. Frequency of testing shall generally conform to 25 foot maximum spacing for strip footings, each isolated pad footing, every 900 square feet for slabs and mat foundations, or as directed by the Construction Manager in light of actual geometry and conditions extent.

2. STRUCTURE FILL: Verify material provided, lift thickness, and

compaction density. Frequency of sampling and testing shall be the same as for Subgrade Preparation and Compaction, each lift.

D. PAVING:

1. Earthwork and Base Aggregate: Provide sampling and testing same as Fill

described above, and specified in Section 02200. Frequency shall conform to Asphalt Concrete Pavement, below.


2. Asphalt Concrete Pavement: Sample and test pavement thickness and installation per WSDOT Standard Specifications. Thickness verification shall be made at a frequency not to exceed 1600 square feet of roadway or parking zones or as directed by the Construction Manager.

3. Sitework Concrete at Pavement: Sitework concrete at pavement consists of curbs, gutters, monolithic curb/sidewalk, inlet structures, catch basins, and other concrete construction in contact with paving or necessary for a complete paving job but not associated with buildings, process structures, or structural work controlled by the IBC. Testing Laboratory shall conduct sampling and testing the same as specified for cast-in-place concrete in Section 03300, except strength cylinder testing shall occur at one-half the frequency (placing rate) as for structural concrete.

E. CONCRETE REINFORCING: Provide Special Inspection for all structural reinforcing in concrete and masonry and mechanical reinforcing connectors and splicing systems per Section 01400.

F. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE:

SPECIAL INSPECTIONS: Conform to Section 01400. Sample the first daily truck load of ready mixed concrete and every 50 cubic yards

thereafter, complying with ASTMC 172. Perform one slump test for the first daily truck load of ready mixed concrete and every 50 cubic yards thereafter or as requested by Construction Manager if consistency is in question, complying with ASTM C143. Perform one air content test for each set of compressive strength specimens, complying with ASTM C 31. Fabricate compressive strength specimens, complying with ASTM C 39. Make one set of 6 of compressive strength specimens for each day of structural concrete placing or each 100 cubic yards or fraction thereof for each class of concrete. Test two specimens after curing 7 days, two specimens after curing 28 days, and retain two specimens for later testing if required. Comply with ACI 318 Section 5.6 for evaluation and acceptance of concrete.

G. ANCHOR BOLTS AND ANCHORS:

1. SPECIAL INSPECTIONS: Conform to Section 01400.


2. SITE INSPECTION OF STRUCTURAL ANCHOR BOLTS: Visually inspect all structural anchor bolts for grade, diameter, embedment, geometry or type (“J” bolt or hex-head), quantity and general location. Contractor shall assume all responsibility for detailed dimensions locating each individual bolt, each bolt group in total, and locations of bolts within each group (template). See also Section 01400.

H. GROUT:

1. SITE INSPECTION OF MASONRY GROUTING: See Masonry section of this specification.

2. CEMENTITIOUS GROUT FOR STRUCTURAL BEARING: Visually

inspect all column baseplates, and grouted zone between structural struts/beams and their supporting wall elements. Determine complete fill beneath baseplate by tapping with hammer and noting hollow reports. Verify grout conforms to specification by observing empty bags, which Contractor shall leave visible adjacent to area used until inspection complete.

I. MASONRY:

Not Required. J. MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK, GRATING:

1. MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK: Provide field inspections and

testing if requested by Construction Manager for the work specified in Section 05505. Sampling and testing shall conform to the applicable Reference Standard or Code listed in that section.

2. GRATING AND GUARDRAILING: Provide field inspections and

testing if requested by Construction Manager for the work specified in Sections 05520 and 05530. Sampling and testing shall conform to the applicable Reference Standard or Code listed in those sections. 3.02 EVALUATION AND CORRECTION:

A. EVALUATION: Satisfactory completion of work will be judged on results of laboratory, shop, and site tests and inspections.

B. CORRECTIONS:

If results of tests and inspections indicate work is below requirements of Contract

Documents, that portion of work is defective and shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at no additional expense to the County by methods specified in each material or system’s Section. Corrective action shall continue until such work meets the requirements of the Contract Documents.


3.03 SCHEDULE OF INSPECTIONS AND TESTS: Form A below shall be used to coordinate sampling and testing provided by Testing Laboratory, Construction Manager, Contractor, and other parties, if any. Testing Laboratory shall fill out Form A with anticipated inspections, sampling, and testing, submit for review by Construction Manager and for information to Contractor, and revise as directed. After receipt of Testing Laboratory’s Form 01410-A submittal, Contractor shall submit Form 01410-A to identify sampling and testing requested for submittal preparation, and with an allowance for additional inspections. Such allowance shall not be less than five percent (5%) of the anticipated Field Quality Control budget for the Testing Laboratory, but shall not contractually commit Contractor to such expenditure, unless additional inspections requested and then only to their extent.


FORM 01410-A ANTICIPATED SAMPLING, TESTING, AND INSPECTIONS BY TESTING

LABORATORY AND CONTRACTOR.

Prepared by : Testing Laboratory Contractor (check one). Electronic version available upon request. Expand each cell as necessary to provide a complete scope description.

Specification Section Source Quality Control Field Quality Control

03200 Reinforcing

03300 Concrete

05501 Anchor Bolts

05505 Miscellaneous Metalwork

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 01500

CONTRACTOR'S UTILITIES

1.0 OFFICE

The Contractor will not be required to maintain an office at the site of the work. 2.0 POWER

The Contractor will be allowed to use the power from the water treatment plant. Owner shall not provide power for construction at the plant site. He shall make

arrangements with the electrical utility and with the Owner for power takeoff points, voltage and phasing requirements, transformers and metering and shall pay the costs and fees arising therefrom. The Contractor shall provide the special connections required for his work. 3.0 TELEPHONE

The Contractor shall provide telephone service at the construction site. Mobile telephone service is acceptable as a substitute for telephone service, though the Contractor must demonstrate adequate service is available at the plant site. 4.0 SANITARY FACILITIES

The Contractor shall provide toilet and wash-up facilities for his work force at the site of work. The facilities shall comply with applicable laws, ordinances, and regulations pertaining to the public health and sanitation of dwellings and camps.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 01560

ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS 1.0 SITE MAINTENANCE

The Contractor shall keep the work site clean and free from rubbish and debris. Materials and equipment shall be removed from the site when they are no longer necessary. Upon completion of the work and before final acceptance, the work site shall be cleared of equipment, unused materials, and rubbish to present a clean and neat appearance. 2.0 TEMPORARY DAMS

Except in time of emergency, earth dams are not acceptable at catch basin openings, local depressions, or elsewhere. Temporary dams of sand bags, asphaltic concrete, or other acceptable material will be permitted when necessary to protect the work, provided their use does not create a hazard or nuisance to the public. Such dams shall be removed from the site as soon as they are no longer necessary.

The Contractor shall provide spill containment and cleanup for any chemicals in the work

area, including sodium hypochlorite and sodium bisulfite. In no case shall these chemical be released to the ground or to the wastewater flow stream, except as approved by the Owner. 3.0 AIR POLLUTION CONTROL

The Contractor shall not discharge smoke, dust, and other contaminants into the atmosphere that violate the regulations of any legally constituted authority. He shall also abate dust nuisance by cleaning, sweeping, and sprinkling with water, or other means as necessary. The use of water, in amounts which result in mud on public streets, is not acceptable as a substitute for sweeping or other methods. 4.0 NOISE CONTROL

Between 7:30 p.m. and 7:00 a.m., noise from Contractor's operations shall not exceed limits established by applicable laws or regulations and in no event shall exceed 86 dBA at a distance of 50 feet from the noise source.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 01605

SHIPMENT, PROTECTION AND STORAGE 1.0 GENERAL

Equipment, products and materials shall be shipped, handled, stored, and installed in ways which will prevent damage to the items. Damaged items will not be permitted as part of the work except in cases of minor damage that have been satisfactorily repaired and are acceptable to the Construction Manager. 2.0 PIPE

Pipe and appurtenances shall be handled, stored, and installed as recommended by the manufacturer. Pipes with paint, tape coatings, linings or the like shall be stored to protect the coating or lining from physical damage or other deterioration. Pipes shipped with interior bracing shall have the bracing removed only when recommended by the pipe manufacturer. 3.0 EQUIPMENT

A. PACKAGE AND MARKING:

All equipment shall be protected against damage from moisture, dust, handling, or other cause during transport from manufacturer's premises to site. Each item or package shall be marked with the number unique to the specification reference covering the item.

Stiffeners shall be used where necessary to maintain shapes and to give rigidity. Parts of equipment shall be delivered in assembled or subassembled units where possible.

B. IDENTIFICATION:

Each item of equipment and valve shall have permanently affixed to it a label or tag with its equipment or valve number designated in this contract. Marker shall be of stainless steel. Location of label will be easily visible.

C. SHIPPING:

Bearing housings, vents and other types of openings shall be wrapped or otherwise sealed to prevent contamination by grit and dirt.

Damage shall be corrected to conform to the requirements of the contract before the assembly is incorporated into the work. The Contractor shall bear the costs arising out of dismantling, inspection, repair and reassembly.


D. FACTORY APPLIED COATINGS:

Unless otherwise specified, each item of equipment shall be factory coated and touched-up in the field. Electrical equipment and materials shall be painted by manufacturer as specified in paragraph 09900-3.03 H.

E. STORAGE:

During the interval between the delivery of equipment to the site and installation, all equipment, unless otherwise specified, shall be stored in an enclosed space affording protection from weather, dust and mechanical damage and providing favorable temperature, humidity and ventilation conditions to ensure against equipment deterioration. Manufacturer's recommendations shall be adhered to in addition to these requirements.

Equipment and materials to be located outdoors may be stored outdoors if protected against moisture condensation. Equipment shall be stored at least 6 inches above ground. Temporary power shall be provided to energize space heaters or other heat sources for control of moisture condensation. Space heaters or other heat sources shall be energized without disturbing the sealed enclosure.

F. PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT AFTER INSTALLATION:

After installation, all equipment shall be protected from damage from, including but not limited to, dust, abrasive particles, debris and dirt generated by the placement, chipping, sandblasting, cutting, finishing and grinding of new or existing concrete, terrazzo and metal; and from the fumes, particulate matter, and splatter from welding, brazing and painting of new or existing piping and equipment. As a minimum, vacuum cleaning, blowers with filters, protective shieldings, and other dust suppression methods will be required at all times to adequately protect all equipment. During concreting, including finishing, all equipment that may be affected by cement dust must be completely covered. During painting operations, all grease fittings and similar openings shall be covered to prevent the entry of paint. Electrical switchgear, unit substation, and motor load centers shall not be installed until after all concrete work and sandblasting in those areas have been completed and accepted and the ventilation systems installed.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 01660

EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEM PERFORMANCE AND OPERATIONAL TESTING

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section contains requirements for the Contractor’s performance in documenting testing work required under this contract. In addition, this section contains requirements the for the Contractor's performance during installed performance testing of all mechanical, electrical, instrumentation, and HVAC equipment and systems, including structures for watertight construction, provided under this contract. This section supplements but does not supersede specific testing requirements found elsewhere in this project manual. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY ASSURANCE MANAGER: The Contractor shall appoint an operations engineer or equally qualified operations specialist as Quality Assurance Manager to manage, coordinate, and supervise the Contractor’s quality assurance program. The Quality Assurance Manager shall have at least 5 years of total experience, or experience on at least five separate projects, in managing the startup commissioning of mechanical, electrical, instrumentation, HVAC, and piping systems. Operations engineers shall be graduates from a minimum 4-year course in mechanical or civil engineering. Operations specialists shall have equivalent experience in plant operation and maintenance. The quality assurance program shall include: 1. A testing plan setting forth the sequence in which all testing work required

under this project manual will be implemented. 2. A documentation program to record the results of all equipment and system

tests. 3. An installed performance testing program for all mechanical, electrical,

instrumentation, and HVAC equipment and systems installed under this contract.

4. A calibration program for all instruments, meters, monitors, gages, and

thermometers installed under this contract. 5. A calibration program for all instruments, gages, meters, and thermometers

used for determining the performance of equipment and systems installed under this contract.


6. A testing schedule conforming to the requirements specified in paragraph

01660-2.02 C. For the purposes of this section, a system shall include all items of equipment, devices and appurtenances connected in such a fashion as their operation or function complements, protects or controls the operation or function of the others. The Quality Assurance Manager shall coordinate the activities of all subcontractors and suppliers to implement the requirements of this section. B. CALIBRATION: All test equipment (gages, meters, thermometers, analysis instruments, and other equipment) used for calibrating or verifying the performance of equipment installed under this contract shall be calibrated to within plus or minus 2 percent of actual value at full scale. Test equipment employed for individual test runs shall be selected so that expected values as indicated by the detailed performance specifications will fall between 60 and 85 percent of full scale. Pressure gages shall be calibrated in accordance with ANSI/ASME B40.1. Thermometers shall be calibrated in accordance with ASTM E77 and shall be furnished with a certified calibration curve. Liquid flow meters, including all open channel flow meters and all meters installed in pipelines with diameters greater than 2 inches shall be calibrated in situ using either the total count or dye dilution methods. Gas flow meters installed in piping systems with diameters greater than 6 inches shall be calibrated in situ using the pitot tube velocity averaging method. Flow meter calibration work shall be performed by individuals skilled in the techniques to be employed. Calibration tests for flow metering systems shall be performed over a range of not less than 10 percent to at least 75 percent of system full scale. At least five confirmed valid data points shall be obtained within this range. Confirmed data points shall be validated by not less than three test runs with results which agree within plus or minus 2 percent. C. REFERENCES: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.


Reference Title

ANSI/ASME B40.1 Gauges Pressure Indicating Dial Type—Elastic Element

ASTM E77 Method for Verification and Calibration of Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers

ASHRAE 41.8 Standard Methods of Measurement of Flow of Gas

Dye Dilution Calibration Method

Flow Measurements in Sanitary Sewers By Dye Dilution, Turner Designs Mountain View, California,

Flow Measurement in Sewer Lines by the Dye Dilution Method, Journal of the Water Pollution Control Federation, Vol. 55, Number 5, May, 1983, pg. 531

Flow Measurement in Open Channels and Closed Conduits, Vol 1, U.S. Department of Commerce, National Bureau of Standards, pg. 361

Techniques of Water-Resources Investigations of the United States Geological Survey, Chapter 16, Measurement of Discharge Using Tracers

1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittal material, to be submitted in accordance with Section 01300, shall consist of the following: 1. A complete description of the Contractor’s plan for documenting the results

from the test program in conformance with the requirements of paragraph 01660-2.02 A, including:

a. Proposed plan for documenting the calibration of all test instruments. b. Proposed plan for calibration of all instrument systems, including

flow meters and all temperature, pressure, weight, and analysis systems.

c. Sample forms for documenting the results of field pressure and

performance tests. 2. The credentials and certification of the testing laboratory proposed by the

Contractor for calibration of all test equipment.


3. Preoperational check-out procedures, reviewed and approved by the respective equipment manufacturers.

4. Detailed testing plans, setting forth step-by-step descriptions of the

procedures proposed by the Contractor for the systematic testing of all equipment and systems installed under this contract.

5. A schedule and subsequent updates, presenting the Contractor’s plan for

testing the equipment and systems installed under this contract. 6. A schedule establishing the expected time period (calendar dates) when the

Contractor plans to commence operational testing of the completed systems, along with a description of the temporary systems and installations planned to allow operational testing to take place.

7. A summary of the Quality Assurance Manager’s qualifications, showing

conformance to paragraph 01660-1.02 A requirements. PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL The Contractor shall prepare test plans and documentation plans as specified in the following paragraphs. The Construction Manager will not witness any test work for the purpose of acceptance until all test documentation and calibration plans and the specified system or equipment test plans have been submitted and accepted. 2.02 DOCUMENTATION A. DOCUMENTATION PLANS: The Contractor shall develop a records keeping system to document compliance with the requirements of this Section. Calibration documentation shall include identification (by make, manufacturer, model, and serial number) of all test equipment, date of original calibration, subsequent calibrations, calibration method, and test laboratory. Equipment and system documentation shall include date of test, equipment number or system name, nature of test, test objectives, test results, test instruments employed for the test and signature spaces for the Construction manager's witness and the Contractor's quality assurance manager. A separate file shall be established for each system and item of equipment. These files shall include the following information as a minimum: 1. Metallurgical tests 2. Factory performance tests 3. Accelerometer recordings made during shipment


4. Field calibration tests1 5. Field pressure tests1 6. Field performance tests1 7. Field operational tests1 Section 01999 contains samples showing the format and level of detail required for the documentation forms. The Contractor is advised that these are samples only and are not specific to this project or to any item of equipment or system to be installed under this contract. The Contractor shall develop test documentation forms specific to each item of equipment and system installed under this contract. Acceptable documentation forms for all systems and items of equipment shall be produced for review by the Construction Manager as a condition precedent to the Contractor's receipt of progress payments in excess of 50 percent of the contract amount. Once the Construction Manager has reviewed and taken no exception to the forms proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall produce sufficient forms, at his expense, to provide documentation of all testing work to be conducted as a part of this contract. B. TEST PLANS: The Contractor shall develop test plans detailing the coordinated, sequential testing of each item of equipment and system installed under this contract. Each test plan shall be specific to the item of equipment or system to be tested. Test plans shall identify by specific equipment or tag number each device or control station to be manipulated or observed during the test procedure and the specific results to be observed or obtained. Test plans shall also be specific as to support systems required to complete the test work, temporary systems required during the test work, subcontractors' and manufacturers' representatives to be present and expected test duration. As a minimum, the test plans shall include the following features: 1. Step-by-step proving procedure for all control and electrical circuits by

imposing low voltage currents and using appropriate indicators to affirm that the circuit is properly identified and connected to the proper device.

2. Calibration of all analysis instruments and control sensors. 3. Performance testing of each individual item of mechanical, electrical, and

instrumentation equipment. Performance tests shall be selected to duplicate the operating conditions described in the project manual.

4. System tests designed to duplicate, as closely as possible, operating

conditions described in the project manual. Test plans shall contain a complete description of the procedures to be employed to achieve the desired test environment. 1Each of these tests is required even though not specifically noted in detailed specification section.


As a condition precedent to receiving progress payments in excess of 75 percent of the contract amount, or in any event, progress payments due to the Contractor eight weeks in advance of the date the Contractor wishes to begin any testing work (whichever occurs earliest in the project schedule), the Contractor shall have submitted all test plans required for the systematic field performance and operational tests for all equipment and systems installed under this contract. Once the Construction Manager has reviewed and taken no exception to the Contractor’s test plans, the Contractor shall reproduce the plans in sufficient number for the Contractor's purposes and an additional ten copies for delivery to the Construction Manager. No test work shall begin until the Contractor has delivered the specified number of final test plans to the Construction Manager. C. TESTING SCHEDULE: The Contractor shall produce a testing schedule setting forth the sequence contemplated for performing the test work. The schedule shall be in bar chart form, plotted against calendar time, shall detail the equipment and systems to be tested, and shall be coordinated with the Contractor's construction schedule specified in Section 01310. The schedule shall show the contemplated start date, duration of the test and completion of each test. The test schedule shall be submitted no later than 4 weeks in advance of the date testing is to begin. The Construction Manager will not witness any testing work for the purpose of acceptance until the Contractor has submitted a schedule to which the Construction Manager takes no exception. The test schedule shall be updated weekly, showing actual dates of test work, indicating systems and equipment testing completed satisfactorily and meeting the requirements of this project manual. 2.03 SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENT PERFORMANCE TESTS Each item of mechanical, electrical, instrumentation, and HVAC equipment installed under this contract shall be tested to demonstrate compliance with the performance requirements of this project manual. Each electrical, instrumentation, mechanical, piping, and HVAC system installed or modified under this contract shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of this project manual. 2.04 OPERATIONAL TESTS Once all equipment and systems have been tested individually, the Contractor shall fill all systems except wastewater, scum sludge and other wastewater derived systems with the intended process fluids. Wastewater-derived process systems shall be filled with water. After filling operations have been completed, the Contractor shall operate all systems for a continuous period of not less than two days, simulating actual operating conditions to the greatest extent possible. The Contractor shall install temporary connections, bulkheads and make other provisions to recirculate process fluids or otherwise simulate anticipated operating conditions. During the operational testing period, the Contractor's Quality Assurance Manager and testing team shall monitor the characteristics of each machine and system and report any unusual conditions to the Construction Manager.


2.05 PRODUCT DATA Product data, to be provided in accordance with Section 01300, shall be the original and three copies of all records produced during the testing program. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL The Contractor's quality control manager shall organize teams made up of qualified representatives of equipment suppliers, subcontractors, the Contractor's independent testing laboratory, and others, as appropriate, to efficiently and expeditiously calibrate and test the equipment and systems installed and constructed under this contract. The objective of the testing program shall be to demonstrate, to the Construction Manager's complete satisfaction, that the structures, systems, and equipment constructed and installed under this contract meet all performance requirements and the facility is ready for the commissioning process to commence. In addition, the testing program shall produce baseline operating conditions for the Owner to use in a preventive maintenance program. 3.02 CALIBRATION OF FIXED INSTRUMENTS Calibration of analysis instruments, sensors, gages, and meters installed under this contract shall proceed on a system-by-system basis. No equipment or system performance acceptance tests shall be performed until instruments, gages, and meters to be installed in that particular system have been calibrated and the calibration work has been witnessed by the Construction Manager. All analysis instruments, sensors, gages, and meters used for performance testing shall be subject to recalibration to confirm accuracy after completion, but prior to acceptance of each performance test. All analysis instruments, sensors, gages, and meters installed under this contract shall be subject to recalibration as a condition precedent to commissioning under the provisions of Section 01662. 3.03 PERFORMANCE TESTS A. GENERAL: Performance tests shall consist of the following: 1. Pressure and/or leakage tests. 2. Electrical testing as specified in Division 16. 3. Wiring and piping, individual component, loop, loop commissioning and

tuning testing as described in Division 17.


4. Preoperational checkout for all mechanical and HVAC equipment. Preoperational check-out procedures shall be reviewed and approved by the respective equipment manufacturers.

5. Initial operation tests of all mechanical, electrical, HVAC, and

instrumentation equipment and systems to demonstrate compliance with the performance requirements of this project manual.

In general, performance tests for any individual system shall be performed in the order listed above. The order may be altered only on the specific written authorization of the Construction Manager after receipt of a written request, complete with justification of the need for the change in sequence. B. PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTS: Pressure and leakage tests shall be conducted in accordance with applicable portions of Divisions 3 and 15. All acceptance tests shall be witnessed by the Construction Manager. Evidence of successful completion of the pressure and leakage tests shall be the Construction Manager’s signature on the test forms prepared by the Contractor. C. FUNCTIONAL CHECKOUT: Prior to energization (in the case of electrical systems and equipment), all circuits shall be rung out and tested for continuity and shielding in accordance with the procedures required in Division 16. D. COMPONENT CALIBRATION AND LOOP TESTING: Prior to energization (in the case of instrumentation system and equipment), all loops and associated instruments shall be calibrated and tested in accordance with the procedures required in Division 17. E. ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE: Electrical resistance testing shall be in accordance with Division 16. F. PREOPERATIONAL TESTS: Preoperational tests shall include the following: 1. Alignment of equipment using reverse dial indicator method. 2. Preoperation lubrication. 3. Tests per the manufacturers' recommendations for prestart preparation and

preoperational check-out procedures.


G. FUNCTIONAL TESTS: 1. GENERAL: Once all affected equipment has been subjected to the required preoperational check-out procedures and the Construction Manager has witnessed and has not found deficiencies in that portion of the work, individual items of equipment and systems may be started and operated under simulated operating conditions to determine as nearly as possible whether the equipment and systems meet the requirements of these specifications. If available, plant effluent may be employed for the testing of all liquid systems except gaseous, oil, or chemical systems. If not available, potable water shall be employed as the test medium. Test media for these systems shall either be the intended fluid or a compatible substitute. The equipment shall be operated a sufficient period of time to determine machine operating characteristics, including noise, temperatures and vibration; to observe performance characteristics; and to permit initial adjustment of operating controls. When testing requires the availability of auxiliary systems such as looped piping, electrical power, compressed air, control air, or instrumentation which have not yet been placed in service, the Contractor shall provide acceptable substitute sources, capable of meeting the requirements of the machine, device, or system at no additional cost to the Owner. Disposal methods for test media shall be subject to review by the Construction Manager. During the functional test period, the Contractor shall obtain baseline operating data on all equipment with motors greater than 1 horsepower to include amperage, bearing temperatures, and vibration. The baseline data shall be collected for the Owner to enter in a preventive maintenance system. Test results shall be within the tolerances set forth in the detailed specification sections of this project manual. If no tolerances have been specified, test results shall conform to tolerances established by recognized industry practice. Where, in the case of an otherwise satisfactory functional test, any doubt, dispute, or difference should arise between the Construction Manager and the Contractor regarding the test results or the methods or equipment used in the performance of such test, then the Construction Manager may order the test to be repeated. If the repeat test, using such modified methods or equipment as the Construction Manager may require, confirms the previous test, then all costs in connection with the repeat test will be paid by the Owner. Otherwise, the costs shall be borne by the Contractor. Where the results of any functional test fail to comply with the contract requirements for such test, then such repeat tests as may be necessary to achieve the contract requirements shall be made by the Contractor at his expense. The Contractor shall provide, at no expense to the Owner, all power, fuel, compressed air supplies, water, and chemicals, all labor, temporary piping, heating, ventilating, and air conditioning for any areas where permanent facilities are not complete and operable at the time of functional tests, and all other items and work required to complete the functional tests. Temporary facilities shall be maintained until permanent systems are in service. 2. RETESTING: If under test, any portion of the work should fail to fulfill the contract requirements and is adjusted, altered, renewed, or replaced, tests on that portion when so adjusted, altered, removed, or replaced, together with all other portions of the work as are affected thereby, shall, unless otherwise directed by the Construction Manager, be repeated within reasonable time and in accordance with the specified conditions. The Contractor shall pay to the Owner all reasonable expenses incurred by the Owner, including the costs of the Construction Manager, as a result of repeating such tests.


3. POST-TEST INSPECTION: Once functional testing has been completed, all machines shall be rechecked for proper alignment and realigned, as required. All equipment shall be checked for loose connections, unusual movement, or other indications of improper operating characteristics. Any deficiencies shall be corrected to the satisfaction of the Construction Manager. All machines or devices which exhibit unusual or unacceptable operating characteristics shall be disassembled and inspected. Any defects found during the course of the inspection shall be repaired or the specific part or entire equipment item shall be replaced to the complete satisfaction of the Construction Manager at no cost to the Owner. 3.04 OPERATIONAL TESTS The Contractor shall provide system operation testing. After completion of all performance testing and certification by the Construction Manager that all equipment complies with the require-ments of the specifications, the Contractor shall fill all process units and process systems, except those employing domestic water, oil, air, or chemicals, with plant effluent water. All domestic water, air, and chemical systems shall be filled with the specified fluid. Upon completion of the filling operations, the Contractor shall circulate water through the completed facility for a period of not less than 48 hours, during which all parts of the system shall be operated as a complete facility at various loading conditions, as directed by the Construction Manager. The operational testing period shall commence after this initial period of variable operation. The operational testing period shall be three days. Should the operational testing period be halted for any reason related to the facilities constructed or the equipment furnished under this contract, or the Contractor's temporary testing systems, the operational testing program shall be repeated until the specified continuous period has been accomplished without interruption. All process units shall be brought to full operating conditions, including temperature, pressure, and flow. As-built documents specified in Section 01720 of facilities involved shall be accepted and ready for turnover to the Owner at the time of operational testing.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 01662

COMMISSIONING

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section contains requirements for the Contractor’s performance during the commis-sioning of the structures, equipment and systems constructed and installed during the course of this contract. All commissioning work, as described in this section, shall be performed by the Contractor. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. CLEANUP: Following completion of the operational testing period, the Contractor shall remove, clean, and replace all permanent and temporary filters and strainers in all pipeline systems; replace all HVAC filters; dewater and clean all sumps; and dewater all process units for final inspection as a condition precedent to commissioning. B. COMMISSIONING TEAM: The Contractor shall assemble a commissioning team under the direction of an individual duly authorized to commit the Contractor’s personnel and resources to respond to requests for assistance on the part of the Construction Manager or, through the Construction Manager, the Owner. The commissioning team shall consist of representatives of the Contractor's mechanical, electrical, and instrumentation subcontractors, and others as appropriate. The commissioning team shall be available at the site of the work during normal working hours (8 hours a day, 5 days a week, Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays excepted) and shall be available within 2 hours' notice at all other times upon notice by telephone. The commissioning team shall at all times be equipped and ready to provide for emergency repairs, adjustments, and corrections to the equipment and systems installed and modified as a part of this contract. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The following information shall be submitted to the Construction Manager in accordance with the provisions of Section 01300: 1. Detailed plans for commissioning each process unit and each system

constructed or modified as a part of the work performed under this contract.


2. The Contractor's plan for providing a commissioning team conforming to the requirements of paragraph 01662-1.02 B during the commissioning period. The plan shall be complete with a daytime staffing plan and names, qualifications, and telephone numbers of those assigned to off-hour standby duty.

PART 2--PRODUCTS Working with representatives of the Owner and the Construction Manager, the Contractor shall develop and produce a detailed, written plan for the startup and initial operation, under actual operating conditions, of the equipment and systems installed and constructed under this contract. The document, after acceptance by the Construction Manager, shall serve as the guidance manual for the commissioning process. PART 3--EXECUTION After completion of the equipment and system performance and operational testing, where required, and agreement on the part of the Construction Manager that the systems did meet all test requirements, commissioning will begin. The commissioning period for each modified or new unit process system shall be one week. The Contractor shall remove all temporary piping, bulkheads, controls and other alterations to the permanent systems that may have been needed during the performance and operational testing and shall perform the tasks necessary to make the improvements constructed under this contract fully operational. The Construction Manager shall confirm in writing the date(s) that the system is ready for commissioning and on which actual commissioning activities commence. Activities conducted prior to such written confirmation shall not constitute commissioning. The following specific tasks are to be performed as a part of the commissioning process:

1. Start up and run the sodium hypochlorite feed pumps, induction mixers and ORP control system. Monitor performance of system and determine process effectiveness in terms of disinfection and chlorine residual.

2. Start up and run the dechlorination and ORP control system. Test the effectiveness of the process by monitoring the chlorine residual in the plant water system. Test system response by adding chlorine to and observing the effectiveness of the control system reaction.

The Owner’s operation and maintenance personnel will be responsible for operation of the systems to be commissioned. The portion of the work to be commissioned shall be fully operational, performing all functions for which it was designed. The Contractor shall be available at all times during commissioning periods to provide immediate assistance in case of failure of any portion of the system being constructed. At the end of the commissioning period and when all corrections required by the Construction Manager to assure


a reliable and completely operational facility are complete, the Construction Manager shall issue a completion certificate. Each system shall have been issued a completion certificate as a condition precedent to the final acceptance of the work of this contract. During the commissioning period, the Owner shall be responsible for all normal operational costs and the Contractor shall bear the costs of all necessary repairs or replacements, including labor and materials, required to keep the portion of the plant being commissioned, operational.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 01664

TRAINING

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section contains requirements for training the Owner's personnel, by persons retained by the Contractor specifically for the purpose, in the proper operation and maintenance of the equipment and systems installed under this contract. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE Where required by the detailed specifications, the Contractor shall provide on-the-job training of the Owner's personnel. The training sessions shall be conducted by qualified, experienced, factory-trained representatives of the various equipment manufacturers. Training shall include instruction in both operation and maintenance of the subject equipment. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The following information shall be submitted to the Construction Manager in accordance with the provisions of Section 01300. The material shall be reviewed and accepted by the Construction Manager as a condition precedent to receiving progress payments in excess of 50 percent of the contract amount and not less than 3 weeks prior to the provision of training. 1. Lessons plans for each training session to be conducted by the

manufacturer's representatives. In addition, training manuals, handouts, visual aids, and other reference materials shall be included.

2. Subject of each training session, identity and qualifications of individuals to

be conducting the training, and tentative date and time of each training session.

PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL Where specified, the Contractor shall conduct training sessions for the Owner's personnel to instruct the staff on the proper operation, care, and maintenance of the equipment and systems installed under this contract. Training shall take place at the site of the work and under the conditions specified in the following paragraphs. Approved operation and maintenance manuals shall be available at least 30 days prior to the date scheduled for the individual training session.


2.02 LOCATION Training sessions shall take place at the site of the work in Redmond, Oregon. 2.03 LESSON PLANS Formal written lesson plans shall be prepared for each training session. Lesson plans shall contain an outline of the material to be presented along with a description of visual aids to be utilized during the session. Each plan shall contain a time allocation for each subject. One complete set of originals of the lesson plans, training manuals, handouts, visual aids, and reference material shall be the property of the Owner and shall be suitably bound for proper organization and easy reproduction. The Contractor shall furnish ten copies of necessary training manuals, handouts, visual aids and reference materials at least 1 week prior to each training session. 2.04 FORMAT AND CONTENT Each training session shall be comprised of time spent both in the classroom and at the specific location of the subject equipment or system. As a minimum, training session shall cover the following subjects for each item of equipment or system: 1. Familiarization a. Review catalog, parts lists, drawings, etc., which have been

previously provided for the plant files and operation and maintenance manuals.

b. Check out the installation of the specific equipment items. c. Demonstrate the unit and indicate how all parts of the specifications

are met. d. Answer questions. 2. Safety a. Using material previously provided, review safety references. b. Discuss proper precautions around equipment. 3. Operation a. Using material previously provided, review reference literature. b. Explain all modes of operation (including emergency). c. Check out Owner's personnel on proper use of the equipment.


4. Preventive Maintenance a. Using material previously provided, review preventive maintenance

(PM) lists including: 1) Reference material. 2) Daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual

jobs. b. Show how to perform PM jobs. c. Show Owner's personnel what to look for as indicators of equipment

problems. 5. Corrective Maintenance a. List possible problems. b. Discuss repairs--point out special problems. c. Open up equipment and demonstrate procedures, where practical. 6. Parts a. Show how to use previously provided parts list and order parts. b. Check over spare parts on hand. Make recommendations regarding

additional parts that should be available. 7. Local Representatives a. Where to order parts: name, address, telephone. b. Service problems: 1) Who to call. 2) How to get emergency help. 8. Operation and Maintenance Manuals a. Review any other material submitted. b. Update material, as required.


PART 3--EXECUTION Training shall be conducted in conjunction with the operational testing and commissioning periods. Classes shall be scheduled such that classroom sessions are interspersed with field instruc-tion in logical sequence. The Contractor shall arrange to have the training conducted on consecutive days, with no more than 6 hours of classes scheduled for any one day. Concurrent classes shall not be allowed. Training shall be certified on Form 11000-B specified in Section 01999. Acceptable operation and maintenance manuals for the specific equipment shall be provided to the Owner prior to the start of any training. Video taping shall take place concurrently with all training sessions. The following services shall be provided for each item of equipment or system as required in individual specification sections. Additional services shall be provided, where specifically required in individual specification sections. 1. At a minimum classroom equipment training for operations personnel shall

include: a. Using slides and drawings, discuss the equipment's specific location

in the plant and an operational overview. b. Purpose and plant function of the equipment. c. A working knowledge of the operating theory of the equipment. d. Start-up, shutdown, normal operation, and emergency operating

procedures, including a discussion on system integration and electrical interlocks, if any.

e. Identify and discuss safety items and procedures. f. Routine preventative maintenance, including specific details on

lubrication and maintenance of corrosion protection of the equipment and ancillary components.

g. Operator detection, without test instruments, of specific equipment

trouble symptoms. h. Required equipment exercise procedures and intervals. i. Routine disassembly and assembly of equipment if applicable

(as judged by the Owner on a case-by-case basis) for purposes such as operator inspection of equipment.


2. As a minimum, hands-on equipment training for operations personnel will include:

a. Identify location of equipment and review the purpose. b. Identifying piping and flow options. c. Identifying valves and their purpose. d. Identifying instrumentation: 1) Location of primary element. 2) Location of instrument readout. 3) Discuss purpose, basic operation, and information interpre-

tation. e. Discuss, demonstrate, and perform standard operating procedures

and round checks. f. Discuss and perform the preventative maintenance activities. g. Discuss and perform start-up and shutdown procedures. h. Perform the required equipment exercise procedures. i. Perform routine disassembly and assembly of equipment if

applicable. j. Identify and review safety items and perform safety procedures, if

feasible. 3. Classroom equipment training for the maintenance and repair personnel will

include: a. Theory of operation. b. Description and function of equipment. c. Start-up and shutdown procedures. d. Normal and major repair procedures.


e. Equipment inspection and troubleshooting procedures including the use of applicable test instruments and the "pass" and "no pass" test instrument readings.

f. Routine and long-term calibration procedures. g. Safety procedures. h. Preventative maintenance such as lubrication; normal maintenance

such as belt, seal, and bearing replacement; and up to major repairs such as replacement of major equipment part(s) with the use of special tools, bridge cranes, welding jigs, etc.

4. Hands-on equipment training for maintenance and repair personnel shall

include: a. Locate and identify equipment components. b. Review the equipment function and theory of operation. c. Review normal repair procedures. d. Perform start-up and shutdown procedures. e. Review and perform the safety procedures. f. Perform Owner approved practice maintenance and repair job(s),

including mechanical and electrical adjustments and calibration and troubleshooting equipment problems.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 01700

RESTORATION OF IMPROVEMENTS 1.0 STRUCTURES

The Contractor shall take all precautions necessary to protect the integrity and usefulness of all existing plant facilities. If necessary, the Contractor may, with the approval of the Owner, remove such existing structures, including curbs, gutters, pipelines and utility poles as may be necessary for the performance of the work, and shall rebuild the structures thus removed in as good a condition as found with the requirements specified. He shall also repair existing structures which may be damaged as a result of the work under this contract. 2.0 ROADS AND STREETS AND PLANT PAVEMENT

Unless otherwise specified, roads and streets and travel surfaces in the treatment plant in which the surface is removed, broken, or damaged, or in which the ground has caved or settled during the work under this contract, shall be resurfaced and brought to the original grade and section. Roadways used by the Contractor shall be cleaned and repaired. Before resurfacing material is placed, edges of pavements shall be trimmed back far enough to provide clean, solid, vertical faces, and shall be free of loose material. All paved surfaces shall be cut with a pavement saw. Rough cuts are not allowed. Repair work shall conform to the paving specifications. 3.0 CULTIVATED AREAS AND OTHER SURFACE IMPROVEMENTS

Cultivated or planted areas and other surface improvements which are damaged by actions of the Contractor shall be restored as nearly as possible to their original condition. Restoration shall take place within 1 week or sooner as directed by the Construction Manager.

Existing guard posts, barricades, and fences shall be protected and replaced if damaged. 4.0 PROTECTION OF EXISTING INSTALLATIONS

The Contractor shall protect all existing operating facilities and structures from damages. However, if damage occurs, the Contractor shall immediately correct or replace existing equipment, controls, systems, structures, or facilities which are damaged in any way as a result of his operations.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 01705

PROSECUTION, PROGRESS AND COMPLETION OF WORK

1.0 GENERAL

Work shall be continued at all times with such force and equipment as will be sufficient, in the judgment of the Engineer, to complete it within the specified time. The Contractor expressly proposes that he has taken into consideration and made allowances for all ordinary delays and hindrances to the work to be performed and that he will complete the work within the time specified.

2.0 CONTRACT COMPLETION

Final completion of the Contract shall be within the number of days from the date of the Execution of the Contract by the Owner, as stated in the Contract Documents.

3.0 PROSECUTION OF WORK

To minimize public inconvenience and possible hazard and to restore the jobsite landscaping, equipment, and other work areas to their original condition and former state of usefulness as soon as practicable, the Contractor shall diligently prosecute the work to completion. If, as determined by the Engineer, the Contractor fails to prosecute the work to the extent that the above purposes are not being accomplished, the Contractor shall, upon orders from the Engineer, immediately take the steps necessary to fully accomplish said purposes. All costs of prosecuting the work as described herein shall be absorbed in the Contractor's bid.

If work is suspended through no fault of the Owner, all expenses and losses incurred by the Contractor during such suspensions shall be borne by the Contractor. If the Contractor fails to properly provide for public safety, traffic, and protection of the work during periods of suspension, the Owner may elect to do so and deduct the cost thereof from monies due the Contractor. Such action will not relieve the Contractor from liability.

4.0 RESTORATION OF SURFACES

As soon as possible under the provisions of these specifications, the Contractor shall backfill all excavations and restore to usefulness all improvements existing prior to the start of the work. Specific requirements for restoration of pavement and structures are included in Section 02600, Roadway and Structure Restoration.

5.0 CLEAN UP

Cleaning shall conform to the requirements specified in Section 01710, Cleaning.


6.0 COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE

Completion and acceptance shall conform to the requirements specified in Section 01700, Contract Close Out.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 01710

FINAL CLEANUP

As a condition precedent to final acceptance or release of a structure, space or process unit for use by the Owner, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean all floors, walls, woodwork, and windows to leave same in first-class condition.

All pits and sumps shall be cleared of silt, sand, debris and construction materials. Ductwork air intakes and exhaust grilles shall be inspected and cleared of extraneous material, and all grounds shall be cleared of all debris. Finished floors shall be thoroughly cleaned, sealed and given a final coat of wax. Carpeted areas shall be thoroughly vacuumed and steam cleaned. Drapes shall be vacuumed and steamed.

**END OF SECTION*


SECTION 01720

RECORD DRAWINGS

Record drawings refer to those documents maintained and annotated by the Contractor during construction and are defined as (1) a neatly and legibly marked set of contract drawings showing the final location of piping, equipment, electrical conduits, outlet boxes and cables; (2) additional documents such as schedules, lists, drawings, and electrical and instrumentation diagrams included in the specifications; and (3) Contractor layout and installation drawings.

Unless otherwise specified, record drawings shall be full size and maintained in a clean, dry, and legible condition. Record documents shall not be used for construction purposes and shall be available for review by the Construction Manager during normal working hours at the Contractor's field office. Record drawings shall be reviewed at the time of each periodic progress payment submittal, and proper and current upgrading of the drawings shall be one condition of the review and approval process. Incomplete record drawing markup shall be cause for retaining up to 25 percent of the payment due the Contractor. At the completion of the work, prior to final payment, all record drawings shall be submitted to the Construction Manager.

Marking of the drawings shall be kept current and shall be done at the time the material and equipment are installed. Annotations to the record documents shall be made with an erasable colored pencil conforming to the following color code:

Additions - Red Deletions - Green Comments - Blue Dimensions - Graphite*

*Legibly mark to record actual depths, horizontal and vertical location of underground raceways, cables, and appurtenances referenced to permanent surface improvements.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 01730

OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION 1.0 SCOPE

Operation and maintenance (O&M) instructions shall be provided in accordance with this section and as required in the technical sections of this project manual. O&M information shall be provided for each maintainable piece of equipment, equipment assembly or subassembly, and material provided or modified under this contract.

O&M instructions must be submitted and accepted before on-site training may start. 2.0 TYPES OF INFORMATION REQUIRED

A. GENERAL:

O&M information shall contain the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of the manufacturer, the nearest representative of the manufacturer, and the nearest supplier of the manufacturer's equipment and parts. In addition, one or more of the following items of information shall be provided as applicable.

B. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS:

Specific instructions, procedures, and illustrations shall be provided for the following phases of operations: 1. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS: List personnel hazards for equipment and list safety precautions for all operating conditions. 2. OPERATOR PRESTART: Provide requirements to set up and prepare each system for use. 3. START-UP, SHUTDOWN, AND POSTSHUTDOWN PROCEDURES: Provide a control sequence for each of these operations. 4. NORMAL OPERATIONS: Provide control diagrams with data to explain operation and control of systems and specific equipment. 5. EMERGENCY OPERATIONS: Provide emergency procedures for equipment malfunctions to permit a short period of continued operation or to shut down the equipment to prevent further damage to systems and equipment. Include emergency shutdown instructions for fire, explosion, spills, or other foreseeable contingencies. Provide guidance on emergency operations of all utility systems including valve locations and portions of systems controlled.


6. OPERATOR SERVICE REQUIREMENTS: Provide instructions for services to be performed by the operator such as lubrication, adjustments, and inspection. 7. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: Provide a list of environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and other relevant data) which are best suited for each product or piece of equipment and describe conditions under which equipment should not be allowed to run.

C. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE:

The following information shall be provided for preventive and scheduled maintenance to minimize corrective maintenance and repair: 1. LUBRICATION DATA: Provide lubrication data, other than instructions for lubrication in accordance with paragraph 2.0-B6. a. A table showing recommended lubricants for specific temperature

ranges and applications; b. Charts with a schematic diagram of the equipment showing

lubrication points, recommended types and grades of lubricants, and capacities; and

c. A lubrication schedule showing service interval frequency. 2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE PLAN AND SCHEDULE: Provide manufacturer's schedule for routine preventive maintenance, inspections, tests, and adjustments required to ensure proper and economical operation and to minimize corrective maintenance and repair. Provide manufacturer’s projection of preventive maintenance man-hours on a daily, weekly, monthly, and annual basis including craft requirements by type of craft.

D. CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE:

Manufacturer's recommendations shall be provided on procedures and instructions for correcting problems and making repairs. 1. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDES AND DIAGNOSTIC TECHNIQUES: Provide step-by-step procedures to promptly isolate the cause of typical malfunctions. Describe clearly why the checkout is performed and what conditions are to be sought. Identify tests or inspections and test equipment required to determine whether parts and equipment may be reused or require replacement. 2. WIRING DIAGRAMS AND CONTROL DIAGRAMS: Wiring diagrams and control diagrams shall be point-to-point drawings of wiring and control circuits including factory-field interfaces. Provide a complete and accurate depiction of the actual job-specific wiring and control work. On diagrams, number electrical and electronic wiring and pneumatic control tubing and the terminals for each type identically to actual installation numbering.


3. MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR PROCEDURES: Provide instructions and list tools required to restore product or equipment to proper condition or operating standards. 4. REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT INSTRUCTIONS: Provide step-by-step procedures and list required tools and supplies for removal, replacement, disassembly, and assembly of components, assemblies, subassemblies, accessories, and attachments. Provide tolerances, dimensions, settings, and adjustments required. Instructions shall include a combination of test and illustrations. 5. SPARE PARTS AND SUPPLY LISTS: Provide lists of spare parts and supplies required for maintenance and repair to ensure continued service or operation without unreasonably delays. Special consideration is required for facilities at remote locations. List spare parts and supplies that have a long lead time to obtain. 6. CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE MANHOURS: Provide manufacturer’ projection of corrective maintenance man-hours including craft requirements by type of craft. Corrective maintenance that requires participation of the equipment manufacturer shall be identified and tabulated separately.

E. APPENDICES:

The following information shall be provided; include information not specified in the preceding paragraphs but pertinent to the maintenance or operation of the product or equipment. 1. PARTS IDENTIFICATION: Provide identification and coverage for all parts of each component, assembly, subassembly, and accessory of the end items subject to replacement. Include special hardware requirements, such as requirement to use high-strength bolts and nuts. Identify parts by make, model, serial number, and source of supply to allow reordering without further identification. Provide clear and legible illustrations, drawings, and exploded views to enable easy identification of the items. When illustrations omit the part numbers and description, both the illustrations and separate listing shall show the index, reference, or key number which will cross-reference the illustrated part to the listed part. Parts shown in the listings shall be grouped by components, assemblies, and subassemblies. 2. WARRANTY INFORMATION: List and explain the various warranties and include the servicing and technical precautions prescribed by the manufacturers or contract documents to keep warranties in force. 3. PERSONNEL TRAINING REQUIREMENTS: Provide information available from the manufacturers to use in training designated personnel to operate and maintain the equipment and systems properly. 4. TESTING EQUIPMENT AND SPECIAL TOOL INFORMATION: Provide information on test equipment required to perform specified tests and on special tools needed for the operation, maintenance, and repair of components.


3.0 TRANSMITTAL PROCEDURE

Unless otherwise specified, O&M manuals, information, and data shall be transmitted in accordance with Section 01300 accompanied by Transmittal Form 01730-A and Equipment Record Forms 01730-B and/or 01730-C, as appropriate, all as specified in Section 01999. The transmittal form shall be used as a checklist to ensure the manual is complete. Only complete sets of O&M instructions will be reviewed for acceptance.

Six copies of the specified O&M information shall be provided. For ease of identification, each manufacturer's brochure and manual shall be appropriately labeled with the equipment name and equipment number as it appears in the project manual. The information shall be organized in the binders in numerical order by the equipment numbers assigned in the project manual. The binders shall be provided with a table of contents and tab sheets to permit easy location of desired information.

If manufacturers’ standard brochures and manuals are used to describe O&M procedures, such brochures and manuals shall be modified to reflect only the model or series of equipment used on this project. Extraneous material shall be crossed out neatly or otherwise annotated or eliminated. 4.0 PAYMENT

Acceptable O&M information for the project must be delivered to the Construction Manager prior to the project being 65 percent complete. Progress payments for work in excess of 65 percent completion will not be made until the specified acceptable O&M information has been delivered to the Construction Manager. 5.0 FIELD CHANGES

Following the acceptable installation and operation of an equipment item, the item’s instructions and procedures shall be modified and supplemented by the Contractor to reflect any field changes or information requiring field data.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 01800

ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

This section describes the environmental conditions which have been observed at the site of the work and which may reasonably be anticipated throughout the life of the project.

The site of the work in the vicinity of the chlorine contact basin is at an elevation of 2,865 feet above mean sea level. Climate conditions are described as follows:

Description Range of Conditions

Winter Rain or snow, with frequent cold

Summer Typically dry and hot

Relative humidity, percent

Indoors 20 to 95

Average outdoors 10 to 100

Air temperature, degrees F

Outdoors -10 to 115

Indoors 45 to 90

Additional conditions which may be applicable are specified in other sections.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 01900

SEISMIC ANCHORAGE AND BRACING REQUIREMENTS PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. GENERAL:

This section establishes the minimum seismic anchorage and bracing requirements for

architectural, mechanical, and electrical components, as well as non-building structures. All components and non-building structures shall be permanently attached to supporting structures with sufficient strength and ductility to resist the forces described in this Section. Gravity supports and anchorages are specified on the drawings and in subsequent Sections of the Project Manual.

B. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES:

Design, provide and install all supports, restraints, and anchorages as required herein. Engineering design is not required where such supports are specifically detailed on the drawings or specified. Engineering design is not required where tabularized system selection guides are specified using listed References. Ensure that all manufacturers, material suppliers, and subcontractors understand and conform to requirements of this Section. Coordinate and verify the location of anchor bolts prior to the placing of concrete. See paragraph 3.01. Coordinate and assist Special Inspections as specified in Section 01400. Component testing and certifications described in IBC 1707.7.2 and 1707.7.3 are not required except for anchors, structural connectors, proprietary structural components or systems or as indicated on the Drawings.

C. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS:

SDS ..............................................................................................0.57g SD1 ..............................................................................................0.25g

Site Class: .................................................................................D Seismic Design Category ..........................................................D Importance Factor, I ..................................................................1.00 Element & Non-structural Importance, Ip ................................1.50


1.02 REFERENCES This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization, or if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued, or replaced.

Reference Title


ASCE 7 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures

ASTM C 635 Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings

ASTM C 636 Standard Practice for Installation for Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings

API STD 650 Welded Steel Tanks for Oil Storage

AWWA D100 Welded Steel Tanks for Water Storage

ASME A 17.1 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators

ASME B 31 Code for Pressure Piping

ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code

SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual

NFPA Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems

Rack Manufacturers Institute Specification for the Design, Testing and Utilization of Industrial Steel Storage Racks


1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be provided for each piece of equipment, system, or anchorage, in

accordance with Section 01300 and shall include the following information:

1. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. A check mark (√) shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the Contractor, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. The Construction Manager shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications. Failure to include a copy of the marked up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.

2. Certificate of Compliance for each Contractor Designed bracing system,

signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the state of the project. Certification shall state that the component’s support and anchorage systems are designed to withstand the required seismic forces and displacements in accordance with this Section. This Certificate may be included in required submittals for Contractor Designed Structural Systems in Section 01400.

3. Installation drawings for each component of sufficient detail to represent the

installed conditions. Provide component information including weight, location, bracing and anchor types, material, size, embedment, number and locations. If Contractor Designed, comply with Submittal item #2 above and Section 01400 requirements.

PART 2--PRODUCTS Materials and products associated with the requirements of this Section are specified in their respective Division 2 through 17 Sections or noted on the drawings.


PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Design and construct component bracing and anchorage to resist the seismic forces specified above. These forces shall be considered acting at the center of gravity of the piece under consideration. No equipment shall be anchored to vertical structural elements without written approval of the Construction Manager. All anchorage of equipment is specified to be made by cast-in anchor bolts in concrete elements unless specifically noted otherwise on the drawings or other specification Sections. Contractor shall be responsible for any remedial work or strengthening of concrete elements because of superimposed seismic loading if anchor bolts are improperly installed or omitted due to lack of submittal review or improper placement for any reason, at no additional cost to the Owner. The exceptions to bracing and anchorage requirements in Section 9.6.1 of ASCE-7 do not apply to process equipment and associated piping, power supply, instrumentation and control features required for the normal or emergency operation of the facility. 3.02 ARCHITECTURAL COMPONENTS:

Not Used. 3.03 MECHANICAL COMPONENTS: Mechanical components include, but are not necessarily limited to HVAC ducts and mechanical units in total, boilers and furnaces, plumbing to include non-buried pipes and all fixtures, fire protection systems, power generation equipment, manufacturing and process mechanical equipment units and piping, storage tanks and bins, conveying systems, elevators and escalators. Vibration isolated equipment shall be provided with snubbers capable of retaining the equipment in its designated location without any material failure or deformation of the snubbers when exposed to a vertical or horizontal force at the contact surface equal to 100 percent of the operating weight of the equipment. Air gaps between retainer and equipment base shall not exceed 1/4-inch. Piping with flexible connections and/or expansion joints shall be anchored such that the intended uses of these joints are maintained in the piping system.

Ducts and pipes shall be braced according to SMACNA for the Seismic Hazard Level (SHL) in the facility at the point of anchorage as described in the Project Manual. Associated equipment units whose weight falls within the SMACNA tables may also be braced using this method. Larger units shall be braced with Contractor Designed systems.


3.04 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS: Electrical components include, but are not necessarily limited to power distribution systems and associated equipment, control and instrumentation systems and associated equipment, and lighting systems. Conduits shall be braced according to SMACNA for the Seismic Hazard Level (SHL) in the facility at the point of anchorage as described in the Project Manual. Cable trays and grouped duct runs whose weight falls within the SMACNA tables may also be braced using this method. Heavier components shall be braced with Contractor Designed systems.

***END OF SECTION***


SECTION 01999

REFERENCE FORMS

The forms listed below and included in this section are referenced from other sections of the project manual:

Form No. Title

01300-A Submittal Transmittal Form

01660-A Equipment Test Report Form

01730-A Operation and Maintenance Transmittal Form 01730-B Equipment Record Form 01730-C Equipment Record Form

11000-A Manufacturer's Installation Certification Form 11000-B Manufacturer's Instruction Certification Form 11000-C Unit Responsibility Certification Form 16000-A Wire and Cable Resistance Test Data Form 16000-B Installed Motor Test Data Form

17000-A Loop Wiring and Insulation Resistance Test Data Form 17000-D Panel Indicator Calibration Test Data Form 17000-F Signal Trip Calibration Test Data Form 17000-G Field Switch Calibration Test Data Form 17000-H Transmitter Calibration Test Data Form 17000-I Miscellaneous Instrument Calibration Test Data Form


01300-A. SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL FORM: SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL Submittal Description: Submittal No:1

Spec Section:

Routing Sent Received

OWNER: Contractor/CM

PROJECT: CM/Engineer

Engineer/CM

CONTRACTOR:

CM/Contractor

We are sending you Attached Under separate cover via ________________ Submittals for review and comment Product data for information only Remarks:

Item Copies Date Section

No. Description Review actiona

Reviewer initials

Review comments attached

aNote: NET = No exceptions taken; MCN = Make corrections noted; A&R = Amend and resubmit; R = Rejected Attach additional sheets if necessary.

Contractor

Certify either A or B:

A. We have verified that the material or equipment contained in this submittal meets all the requirements, including coordination with all related work, specified (no exceptions).

B. We have verified that the material or equipment contained in this submittal meets all the requirements specified except for the attached deviations.

No. Deviation

Certified by:

Contractor's Signature

1See paragraph 01300-4.0 A, Transmittal Procedure.

Page 1 of 3


01660-A. EQUIPMENT TEST REPORT FORM:

NOTE: This example equipment test report is provided for the benefit of the Contractor and is not specific to any piece of equipment to be installed as a part of this project. The example is furnished as a means of illustrating the level of detail required for the preparation of equipment test report forms for this project.

CITY OF SAMPLE

EXAMPLE WATER TREATMENT PLANT STAGE IV EXPANSION PROJECT

ABC Construction Company, Inc., General Contractor

XYZ Engineering, Inc., Construction Manager

EQUIPMENT TEST REPORT Equipment Name: Sludge Pump 2 Equipment Number: P25202 Specification Ref: 11390 Location: East Sedimentation Basin Gallery

Contractor Construction Manager Verified Date Verified Date

PREOPERATIONAL CHECKLIST

Mechanical

Lubrication Alignment Anchor bolts Seal water system operational Equipment rotates freely Safety guards Valves operational Hopper purge systems operational Sedimentation tank/hopper clean O&M manual information complete Manufacturer's installation certificate complete

Electrical (circuit ring-out and high-pot tests)

Circuits: Power to MCC 5 Control to HOA

Page 2 of 3


Contractor Construction Manager Verified Date Verified Date

Indicators at MCC: Red (running) Green (power) Amber (auto)

Indicators at local control panel Wiring labels complete Nameplates:

MCC Control station Control panel

Equipment bumped for rotation

Piping Systems

Cleaned and flushed: Suction Discharge

Pressure tests Temporary piping screens in place

Instrumentation and Controls

Flowmeter FE2502F calibration Calibration Report No.

Flow recorder FR2502G calibrated against transmitter

VFD speed indicator calibrated against independent reference

Discharge overpressure shutdown switch calibration Simulate discharge overpressure Shutdown

FUNCTIONAL TESTS

Mechanical

Motor operation temperature satisfactory Pump operating temperature satisfactory Unusual noise, etc? Pump operation: 75 gpm/50 psig

Measurement: Flow Pressure: Test gage number:

Alignment hot Dowelled in

Remarks:

Page 3 of 3


Contractor Construction Manager

Verified Date Verified Date

Electrical

Local switch function: Runs in HAND No control power in OFF Timer control in AUTO

Overpressure protection switch PS2502C functional in both HAND and AUTO

Overpressure protection switch PS2502C set at 75 psig

PLC 2500 set at 24-hour cycle, 25 min ON

OPERATIONAL TEST

48-hour continuous test. Pump cycles as specified, indicators functional, controls functional, pump maintains capacity, overpressure protection remains functional, hour meter functional

RECOMMENDED FOR BENEFICIAL OCCUPANCY Construction Manager Date ACCEPTED FOR BENEFICIAL OCCUPANCY Owner's Representative Date


01730-A. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TRANSMITTAL FORM: Date: Submittal No:2

To: Contract No:

Spec. Section:

Submittal Description:

From:

Attention:

Contractor Construction manager

Checklist Satisfactory N/A Accept Deficient

1. Table of contents

2. Equipment record forms

3. Manufacturer information

4. Vendor information

5. Safety precautions

6. Operator prestart

7. Start-up, shutdown, and post shutdown procedures

8. Normal operations

9. Emergency operations

10. Operator service requirements

11. Environmental conditions

12. Lubrication data

13. Preventive maintenance plan and schedule

14. Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques

15. Wiring diagrams and control diagrams

16. Maintenance and repair procedures

17. Removal and replacement instructions

18. Spare parts and supply list

19. Corrective maintenance man-hours

20. Parts identification

21. Warranty information

22. Personnel training requirements

23. Testing equipment and special tool information

Remarks:

Contractor's Signature

2See paragraph 01300-4.0 A, Transmittal Procedure.


01730-B. EQUIPMENT RECORD FORM:

EQUIP DESCRIP EQUIP LOC

EQUIP NO. SHOP DWG NO. DATE INST COST

MFGR MFGR CONTACT

MFGR ADDRESS PHONE

VENDOR VENDOR CONTACT

VENDOR ADDRESS PHONE

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS D W M Q S A Hours

LUBRICANTS: RECOMMENDED:

ALTERNATIVE:

MISC. NOTES:

RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS ELECTRICAL NAMEPLATE DATA

PART NO QUAN PART NAME COST EQUIP

MAKE

SERIAL NO. ID NO.

MODEL NO. FRAME NO.

HP V AMP HZ

PH RPM SF DUTY

CODE INSL. CL DES TYPE

NEMA DES C AMB TEMP RISE RATING

MISC.

MECHANICAL NAMEPLATE DATA

EQUIP

MAKE

SERIAL NO. ID NO.

MODEL NO. FRAME NO.

HP RPM CAP SIZE

TDH IMP SZ BELT NO. CFM

PSI ASSY NO. CASE NO.

MISC


01730-C. EQUIPMENT RECORD FORM:

EQUIP DESCRIP EQUIP LOC

EQUIP NO. SHOP DWG NO. DATE INST COST

MFGR MFGR CONTACT

MFGR ADDRESS PHONE

VENDOR VENDOR CONTACT

VENDOR ADDRESS PHONE

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS D W M Q S A Hours


02761-A TV INSPECTION FORM


11000-A. MANUFACTURER'S INSTALLATION CERTIFICATION FORM: Contract No: Specification section:

Equipment name:

Contractor:

Manufacturer of equipment item:

The undersigned manufacturer of the equipment item described above hereby certifies that

he has checked the installation of the equipment and that the equipment, as specified in the project manual, has been provided in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and that the trial operation of the equipment item has been satisfactory. Comments:

Date Manufacturer

Signature of Authorized Representative Date Contractor

Signature of Authorized Representative


11000-B. MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTION CERTIFICATION FORM: Contract No: Specification section: __________________

Equipment name:

Contractor:

Manufacturer of equipment item:

The undersigned manufacturer certifies that a service engineer has instructed the wastewater

treatment plant operating personnel in the proper maintenance and operation of the equipment designated herein.

Operations Check List (check appropriate spaces)

Start-up procedure reviewed

Shutdown procedure reviewed

Normal operation procedure reviewed

Others:

Maintenance Check List (check appropriate spaces)

Described normal oil changes (frequency)

Described special tools required

Described normal items to be reviewed for wear

Described preventive maintenance instructions

Described greasing frequency

Others:

Date Manufacturer

Signature of Authorized Representative Date Signature of Owner’s Representative Date Signature of Contractor’s Representative


11000-C. UNIT RESPONSIBILITY CERTIFICATION FORM

(Job Title)

CERTIFICATE OF UNIT RESPONSIBILITY for Specification Section

(Section title)

In accordance with paragraph 11000-1.02 C of the contract documents, the undersigned manufacturer accepts unit responsibilit y for all components of equipment furnished under specification Section______ , and for related equipment manufactured under Sections___ ____, ______, and ______ . We have reviewed the requirements for Sections 11000 (and 11050 where applicable) and all sections referencing this (these) section(s), including but not limited to drivers, supports for driving and driven equipment and all other specified appurtenances to be furnished by the driven equipment manufacturer. And, we have further reviewed, and modified as necessary, the requirements for associated variable speed drives and motor control centers. We hereby certify that all specified components are compatible and comprise a functional unit suitable for the specified performance and design requirements whether or not the equipment was provided by us. We will make no claim nor establish any condition that problems in operation for the product provided under this specification Section ______ are due to incompatibility of any components covered by this certificate of unit responsibility. Nor will we condition or void any warranty for the performance of the product of this specification Section ______ due to incompatibility of any components covered under this certificate of unit responsibility.

Notary Public Name of Corporation Commission expiration date Address Seal: By:

Duly Authorized Official

Legal Title of Official

Date:


11002-A. RIGID EQUIPMENT MOUNT INSTALLATION CHECKLIST

(CLIENT, PROJECT NAME)

Equipment Tag No.: Date: Grout Product Name and Type: ___________________________________________________ Grouting System Manufacturer: ___________________________________________________ Grouting Application Contractor: __________________________________________________ General Contractor: _____________________________________________________________ Step 1: Verify Equipment Anchor Installation Conformance to Equipment Pad

Details Name: Date___/___/___ Contractor Rep. Name: Name: Construction Manager Millwright Step 2: Completion of Cleaning and Concrete Substrate Preparation Prior to

Grouting Name: Date___/___/___ Contractor Rep. Name: Name: Construction Manager Grouting Contractor Rep. Name: Grout Manufacturer’s Technical Rep. Step 3: Equipment Leveling. Name: Date___/___/___ Contractor Rep. Name: Name: Construction Manager Millwright


Step 4: Installation of Protection of Adjacent Surfaces or Structures NOT TO BE GROUTED Name: Date___/___/___ Contractor Rep. Name: Name: Construction Manager Grouting Contractor Rep. Name: Grout Manufacturer’s Technical Rep. Step 5: Preparation and Construction of Forms and Epoxy Grout Filling

Standpipes Name: Date___/___/___ Contractor Rep. Name: Name: Construction Manager Grouting Contractor Rep. Name: Grout Manufacturer’s Technical Rep. Step 6: Completion of Ambient Condition Control in Structure or Building Area

and Acceptance of Ambient Conditions as They Apply to Application and Curing Requirements for the Grouting System

Name: Date___/___/___ Contractor Rep. Name: Date___/___/___ Grouting Contractor Rep. Name: Date___/___/___ Grout Manufacturer’s Technical Rep. Name: Date___/___/___ Construction Manager


Step 7: Epoxy Grout Installation Name: Date___/___/___ Contractor Rep. Name: Name: Construction Manager Grouting Contractor Rep. Name: Grout Manufacturer’s Technical Rep. Step 8: Completion of Full and Proper Cure of Epoxy Grout Name: Date___/___/___ Contractor Rep. Name: Date___/___/___ Grouting Contractor Rep. Name: Date___/___/___ Grout Manufacturer’s Technical Rep. Name: Date___/___/___ Construction Manager Step 9: Completion of Localized Repair of Grout Voids Name: Date___/___/___ Contractor Rep. Name: Date___/___/___ Grouting Contractor Rep. Name: Date___/___/___ Grout Manufacturer’s Technical Rep. Name: Date___/___/___ Construction Manager


Step 10: Final Acceptance of Grouting System Installation Including Final Clean-Up of the Work Site Complying with All Specification Requirements and the GSM's Quality Requirements

Name: Date___/___/___ Contractor Rep. Name: Date___/___/___ Grouting Contractor Rep. Name: Date___/___/___ Grout Manufacturer’s Technical Rep. Name: Date___/___/___ Construction Manager


11060-A. MOTOR DATA FORM: Equipment Name Equipment No(s) Project Site Location Nameplate Markings

Mfr: Mfr Model: Frame: Horsepower:

Volts: Phase: RPM: Service Factor:

FLA: LRA: Frequency: Amb Temp Rating: ºC

Time rating: Design Letter: (NEMA MG1-10.35) (NEMA MG-1.16)

KVA Code Letter: Insulation Class:

The following information is required for explosion-proof motors only:

A. Approved by UL for installation in Class _____, Div _____, Group _____ B. UL frame temperature code ____ (NEC Tables 500-8B)

The following information is required for all motors 1/2 horsepower and larger:

A. Guaranteed minimum efficiency (Paragraph 11060-2.04 G)

B. Nameplate or nominal efficiency Data Not Necessarily Marked on Nameplate

Type of Enclosure: Enclosure Material:

Temp Rise: ºC (NEMA MG1-12.41,42)

Space Heater included? Yes No If Yes: Watts Volts

Type of motor winding over-temperature protection, if specified:

Provide information on other motor features specified:


16000-A. WIRE AND CABLE RESISTANCE TEST DATA FORM: Wire or Cable No.: Temperature, oF

Location of Test Insulation resistance,

megohms

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7

. CERTIFIED Date

Contractor's Representative WITNESSED Date

Owner's Representative


16000-B. INSTALLED MOTOR TEST FORM: Motor Equipment Number Date of test Equipment Driven MCC Location Ambient temp oF

Resistance:

Insulation resistance phase-to-ground megohms:

Phase A Phase B Phase C

Current at Full Load:

Phase Current, amps

Phase Current, amps

Phase Current, amps

Thermal Overload Device: Manufacturer/catalog # Amperes

Circuit breaker (MCP) setting:

Motor Nameplate Markings:

Mfr Mfr Model Frame HP

Volts Phase RPM Service factor**

Amps Freq Ambient temp rating ºC

Time rating Design letter** (NEMA 1-10.35) (NEMA MG-1.16)

Code letter Insulation class

**Required for 3-phase squirrel cage induction motors only.

CERTIFIED Date Contractor's Representative

WITNESSED Date



17000-A. LOOP WIRING AND INSULATION RESISTANCE TEST DATA FORM: Loop No.: List all wiring associated with a loop in table below. Make applicable measurements as indicated after disconnecting wiring.

Continuity Resistance a Insulation Resistanceb

Wire No. Panel Tie Field TB Cond./ Cond.

Cond./ Shield

Shield/ Gnd.

Shield/ Cond.

Cond./ Gnd.

Shield/ Shield

A -- (A/SH)

B (A/B) --

C (A/C) --

D (A/D) --

etc.

NOTES: a. Continuity Test. Connect ohmmeter leads between wires A and B and jumper opposite ends together. Record

resistance in table. Repeat procedure between A and C, A and D, etc. Any deviation of +2 ohms between any reading and the average of a particular run indicates a poor conductor, and corrective action shall be taken before continuing with the loop test.

b. Insulation Test. Connect one end of a 500 volt megger to the panel ground bus and the other sequentially to

each completely disconnected wire and shield. Test the insulation resistance and record each reading.

CERTIFIED Date




17000-D. PANEL INDICATOR CALIBRATION TEST DATA FORM: Tag No. and Description: Make & Model No.: Serial No.: Input: Scale: Range: PV Scale Calibration

% of Range Input Expected Reading Actual Reading % Deviation

0

50

100

% Deviation Allowed:

CERTIFIED Date




17000-F. SIGNAL TRIP CALIBRATION TEST DATA FORM: Tag No. and Description: Make & Model No.: Serial No.: Input: Scale: Range: Set Point(s): After setting set point(s), run signal input through entire range and calculate deadband.

Incr. Input Decr. Input Calc. Required Set Point Trip Point Trip Point Deadband Deadband

CERTIFIED Date




17000-G. FIELD SWITCH CALIBRATION TEST DATA FORM: Tag No. and Description: Make & Model No.: Serial No: Input: Range: Set Point(s): Simulate process variable (flow, pressure, temperature, etc.) and set desired set point(s). Run through entire range of switch and calculate deadband.

Incr. Input Decr. Input Calc. Required Set Point Trip Point Trip Point Deadband Deadband

CERTIFIED Date




17000-H. TRANSMITTER CALIBRATION TEST DATA FORM: Tag No. and Description: Make & Model No.: Serial No.: Input: Output: Range: Scale: Simulate process variable (flow, pressure, temperature, etc.) and measure output with appropriate meter.

% of Range Input Expected Reading Actual Reading % Deviation

0

50

100

% Deviation Allowed:

CERTIFIED Date




17000-I. MISCELLANEOUS INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION TEST DATA FORM: (For instruments not covered by any of the preceding test forms, the Contractor shall create a form containing all necessary information and calibration procedures.) CERTIFIED Date




SECTION 02100

SITE PREPARATION

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. SCOPE: This section specifies site preparation which consists of clearing, grubbing and demolition. B. EXISTING CONDITIONS: The Contractor shall determine the actual condition of the site as it affects this portion of work. C. PROTECTION: Site preparation shall not damage structures, landscaping or vegetation adjacent to the site. The Contractor shall repair, or replace any damaged property. All trees not identified to be removed shall be protected. PART 2--PRODUCTS No products are included in this section. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 CLEARING AND GRUBBING Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall remove obstructions such as brush, trees, logs, stumps, roots, heavy sod, vegetation, rock, stones larger than 6 inches in any dimension, broken or old concrete and pavement, debris, and structures where the completion of the work require their removal. No trees shall be cut without prior approval of the Construction Manager. Earthen material that is removed and is not to be incorporated in the work shall be disposed of off the site or, if meeting Type C specifications in Section 02200, at the primary staging area shown on Drawing 000-G-02. All other construction debris shall be disposed of off-site.


3.02 DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL A. STRUCTURES: Demolition and removal of structures consist of removal of abandoned superstructures, foundation walls, footings, slabs and any other structures. Excavations caused by existing foundations shall be cleared of waste, debris and loose soil, and refilled as specified. B. PAVEMENT: When portions of asphalt pavements and concrete pads are to be removed and later construction is to be connected, edges shall be saw cut, on a neat line at right angles to the curb face. Removed asphalt pavement shall be disposed of off site. C. SALVAGE: The Owner has the right to salvage any items scheduled for removal. The Contractor shall notify the Construction Manager 5 days prior to any salvage or demolition work to determine the disposition of items to be removed. The Construction Manager will mark items to be salvaged. Such items shall be properly disconnected, removed from their foundations, cleaned, and stored at a location, within the primary staging area, to be identified by the Construction Manager. All other items not marked for salvage become the property of the Contractor and shall be properly removed and disposed of. 3.03 UTILITY INTERFERENCE Where existing utilities interfere with the prosecution of the work, the Contractor shall relocate them in accordance with paragraph 00710-3.03 C. 3.04 TOPSOIL STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING

In areas outside of roadways, such as open fields, lawns, and unpaved rights-of-way, remove and stockpile existing topsoil from areas to be excavated or filled. Care shall be taken to prevent mixing stockpiled topsoil with subsoil. The top 12 inches of topsoil shall be removed in a uniform depth and stored in such a manner that it will not become mixed with subsoil that would be unacceptable topsoil. If less than 12 inches of acceptable topsoil, the Contractor will remove only the acceptable topsoil.

The Contractor is advised of topsoil requirements under Section 02920.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 02200

EARTHWORK

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies earthwork which consists of excavation, filling, grading, and disposal of excess material. B. DEFINITIONS: 1. COMPACTION: The degree of compaction is specified as percent compaction. Maximum or relative densities refer to dry soil densities obtainable at optimum moisture content. 2. EXCAVATION SLOPE: Excavation slope shall be defined as an inclined surface formed by removing material from below existing grade. 3. EMBANKMENT SLOPE: Embankment slope shall be defined as an inclined surface formed by placement of material above existing grade. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. REFERENCES: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, whether or not the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.


Reference Title

APWA American Public Works Association Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction

ASTM C109 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars

ASTM C136 Standard Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates

ASTM D698 Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lb/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3))

ASTM D1556 Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method

ASTM D2419 Standard Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate

ASTM D2922 Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods

ASTM D3017 Test Method for Moisture Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)

ODOT Oregon Standard Specifications for Construction 2002 B. TESTS: The Contractor will take samples and perform moisture content, gradation, and moisture-density tests before earthwork begins, and perform compaction tests during placement of backfill materials to check compliance with these specifications. All testing and test reports shall be completed by a certified inspection and testing laboratory, accepted by the Construction Manager. Reports on each material shall be submitted to the Construction Manager at least 5 days before intended use to permit review and acceptance of the material. No material shall be used unless it has been accepted by the Construction Manager. If the source or quality of any material changes during the course of construction, the Contractor shall furnish additional test reports to the Construction Manager, for his review and acceptance prior to the use of the different material.

Testing of trench backfill density shall be provided at maximum 300 linear feet intervals. The Contractor shall remove surface material at locations designated by the Construction Manager and provide sampling and testing. The Construction Manager may direct the Contractor to construct inspection trenches in compacted or consolidated backfill to determine that the Contractor has complied with these specifications. Payment for inspection trenches shall be as specified in paragraph 00710-4.06.


Tests will be made by the Contractor in accordance with the following:

Test Standard Procedure

Moisture content ASTM D3017

Gradation ASTM C136

Density in-place ASTM D2922

Moisture-density relationships ASTM D698 1.03 SUBMITTALS

The following information shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300:

1. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks () shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the Contractor, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. The Construction Manager shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.

2. Samples of fill materials to be used shall be submitted 2 weeks in advance of

use. Samples shall consist of 0.5 cubic feet of each type of material. 3. Laboratory test results for each material used.


PART 2--MATERIALS 2.01 FILL MATERIALS A. TYPE A: Type A material shall be a crushed rock with fracture, durability, and sand equivalent conforming to ODOT 3630.11, size 3/4"-0, and to the following gradation:

U.S. standard sieve size Percent by weight passing

1 inch 100

3/4 inch 80-98

1/2 inch 60-85

3/8 inch 30-65

No. 10 5-20

No. 40 0-6

No. 100 0-3

B. TYPE B: Type B material shall be a select granular material free from organic matter and of such size and gradation that the specified compaction can be readily attained. Material shall have a sand equivalent value determined in accordance with ASTM D2419 of not less than 20 and shall conform to the following gradation:


3 inch 100

No. 4 35-100

No. 30 20-100

The coefficient of uniformity shall be 3 or greater. The material may be an imported quarry waste, clean natural sand or gravel, select trench excavation or a mixture thereof. C. TYPE C: Type C material shall be unclassified material which is free from peat, wood, roots, bark, debris, garbage, rubbish or other extraneous material. The maximum size of stone shall not exceed 6 inches. If the material excavated from the site meets these requirements, it may be classified as Type C.


D. TYPE D: Type D material, commonly known as pea gravel, shall be smooth natural aggregate conforming to ODOT 02690.20, size 3/8 inch - No. 8, and shall conform to the following gradation:


1/2 inch 100

3/8 inch 85-100

No. 8 0-10

E. TYPE E: Type E material, commonly known as drain rock, shall be crushed rock conforming to ODOT 02690.20, size 1 inch - No. 4, and to the following gradation:


1-1/2 inch 100

1 inch 95-100

1/2 inch 25-60

1/4 inch 0-10

No. 8 0-5

Type E material shall be composed of hard, durable, sound pieces having a specific gravity of not less than 2.65 F. TYPE F: Type F material shall be crushed rock conforming to ODOT 02630.10, size 1 1/2 inch - 0, and to the following gradation:


2 inch 100

1-1/2 inch 95-100

3/4 inch 55-75

1/4 inch 35-50

No. 10 16-30

No. 100 0-3

Type F material shall be composed of hard, durable, sound pieces having a specific gravity of not less than 2.65.


G. TYPE G: Type G material shall be a coarse sand/fine aggregate material conforming to ODOT 02690.30, and to the following gradation:


3/8 inch 100

No. 4 90-100

No. 8 70-100

No. 16 50-85

No. 30 25-60

No. 50 5-30

No. 100 0-10

No. 200 0-4

H. TYPE H: Type H material, 6-inch riprap, shall conform to ODOT 00390.10, English Class 50, and be graded rock having a range of individual rock weights as follows:

Weight of stone Percent by weight

50-30 pounds 20

30-15 pounds 30

15-2 pounds 40

2-0 pound 10

Specific gravity shall be between 2.5 and 2.82. I. TYPE I: Type I material, 12-inch riprap, shall conform to ODTO 00390.10, English Class 200, and be graded rock having a range of individual rock weights as follows:

Weight of stone Percent smaller by weight

200-140 pounds 20

140-80 pounds 30

80-8 pounds 40

8-0 pounds 10


Specific gravity shall be between 2.5 and 2.82. J. TYPE J: Type J material shall be unclassified material and may be obtained from excavation on site. The material may contain extraneous material such as demolition waste, unsuitable material excavated from beneath structures, and clearing and grubbing debris up to 50 percent by volume. Extraneous material shall be thoroughly mixed and the maximum size of organic particles shall be 6 inches. K. TYPE K: Type K material shall be hard, sound, durable crushed stone conforming to ODOT 00360.11 and to the following gradation:


6 inch 100

4 inch 90-100

2 inch 50-85

1 inch 20-65

1/4 inch 0-30

No. 10 0-10

No. 100 0-5 L. TYPE L: Type L shall be Controlled Density Fill (CDF). CDF shall be a low strength, highly flowable mixture of Portland cement, Pozzolan (fly ash), fine aggregates, water and admixtures, if necessary, which results in a hardened, dense, non-settling, hand-excavatable fill. Portland cement, Pozzolan, fine aggregates, water, and admixtures for CDF shall conform to Section 212 of APWA, except that Portland cement shall be type I-II or II. The contractor shall furnish a mix design for approval. The mixture shall be designed to ensure that the material placed has a 7-day compressive strength of between 50 psi and 150 psi. The compressive strength shall be tested using 4-inch mortar cubes per ASTM C 109. Within 24 hours the material shall be capable of supporting vehicular traffic without rutting.

M. TYPE M: Type M material shall be naturally occurring or blended low permeability material such as silty clay, free or organic material, which has 30 to 80 percent by weight passing the No. 200 standard sieve. The material shall yield a permeability of not more than 5 x 10 cm/sec when tested by the falling head method and at a compacted density of 90 percent of maximum dry density.


N. Type N:

Type N material shall be Class E concrete as described in Section 03300. All requirements of Section 03300 shall be met in regard to use of Type N material. 2.02 DRAINAGE GEOTEXTILE

Drainage geotextile fabric shall be used in conjunction with footing drains and under drain systems as specified in the drawings. The filter fabric shall be nonwoven geotextile. Installation and material shall conform to ODOT Sections 00350 and 02320.

The Owner and Engineer believe the following candidate manufacturer is capable of producing equipment and/or products that will satisfy the requirements of this Section. This statement, however, shall not be construed as an endorsement of a particular manufacturer’s product, nor shall it be construed that a named manufacturer’s standard product will comply with the requirements of this Section. Candidate manufacturers include Mirafi 140N, Amoco 4545, or equal. 2.03 SUBGRADE GEOTEXTILE

Subgrade geotextile fabric shall be used in conjunction with roadways, structural fill, overexcavation, foundation stabilization, and in pipe trenches under pavement and structures when conditions warrant the use of Class A1 or F1 fill. It shall be installed over the prepared subgrade prior to placing rock for road construction and structural fill, and installed when conditions warrant overexcavation (see Section 02200 paragraph 3.01.B). In addition, it shall be required to separate sandy soils from Class A1 or F1 fill in pipe trenches under pavement and structures. The filter fabric shall be a woven geotextile. Installation and material shall conform to ODOT Sections 00350 and 02320.

The Owner and Engineer believe the following candidate manufacturer is capable of producing equipment and/or products that will satisfy the requirements of this Section. This statement, however, shall not be construed as an endorsement of a particular manufacturer’s product, nor shall it be construed that a named manufacturer’s standard product will comply with the requirements of this Section. Candidate manufacturers include Amoco 2002, Mirafi 500X, or equal. 2.04 PE LINER

The PE liner shall consist of polyethylene sheeting that is formulated from virgin polyethylene or ethylene copolymers. The resin shall be pigmented with carbon black, evenly dispersed to produce an opaque sheeting of uniform color. The PE liner shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D4397 and shall be 6 mils thick, unless otherwise specified.


PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. CONTROL OF WATER: The Contractor shall keep excavations reasonably free from water during construction. The bottom of the excavation is defined as the bottom of the pipe bedding (for trench excavation) and as the bottom of the structure fill under footings and slabs. The static water level shall be drawn down a minimum of 1 foot below the bottom of excavations to maintain the undisturbed state of natural soils and allow the placement of any fill to the specified density. Disposal of water shall not damage property or create a public nuisance. The Contractor shall have on hand pumping equipment and machinery in good working condition for emergencies and shall have workmen available for its operation. Dewatering systems shall operate continuously until backfill has been completed to 1 foot above the normal static groundwater level. Groundwater shall be controlled to prevent softening of the bottom of excavations, or formation of "quick" conditions. Dewatering systems shall not remove natural soils. The Contractor shall control surface runoff to prevent entry or collection of water in excavations. Release of groundwater to its static level shall be controlled to prevent disturbance of the natural foundation soils or compacted fill and to prevent flotation or movement of structures or pipelines. B. OVEREXCAVATION AND FOUNDATION STABILIZATION:

Where the Contractor has achieved control of water as specified in paragraph 3.01 A, and the Construction Manager determines that the undisturbed condition of natural soils is inadequate for support of the planned construction, the Construction Manager will authorize the Contractor to overexcavate to adequate supporting soils. The excavated space shall be filled to the bottom of excavation, as defined in paragraph 3.01 A, with Class K1 fill to achieve foundation stabilization. The Class K1 fill shall be enveloped with subgrade geotextile material. The overexcavated space under footings may be filled with concrete. When the Engineer authorizes overexcavation and foundation stabilization, the work will be paid for at the unit price in Section 00310 Bid Schedule for Overexcavation and Foundation Stabilization. The payment quantity will be calculated based on the maximum trench width shown in Detail A/000-C-01, and the authorized thickness of overexcavation. Where the Contractor has not achieved control of water as specified in paragraph 3.01 A, and the Engineer determines that the undisturbed condition of the natural soils is inadequate for support of the planned construction, the Contractor may choose to overexcavate and fill the overexcavated space to the bottom of excavation, as defined in paragraph 3.01 A, with Class K1 fill to achieve foundation stabilization. When the Contractor chooses overexcavation and foundation stabilization, the work will be considered incidental to the earthwork and dewatering work.


C. SURPLUS MATERIAL: Unless otherwise specified, surplus excavated material not conforming to Type C material shall be disposed of off site in accordance with applicable ordinances and environmental requirements. If a stockpile are for surplus material is shown on the drawings, surplus excavated material conforming to Type C material shall be deposited at the stockpile area. If a stockpile area is not shown on the drawings, all surplus excavated materials shall be disposed of off site in accordance with applicable ordnances and environmental requirements. If the quantity of surplus material is specified, the quantity specified is approximate. The Contractor shall satisfy himself that there is sufficient material available for the completion of the embankments before disposing of any material inside or outside the site. Shortage of material, caused by premature disposal of any material by the Contractor, shall be replaced by the Contractor. Excess material not needed shall become the property of the Contractor and disposed of off site at no expense to the Owner. Material shall not be stockpiled to a depth greater than 5 feet above finished grade within 25 feet of any excavation or structure except for those areas designated to be preconsolidated. For these areas, the depth of stockpiled material shall be as specified. The Contractor shall maintain stability of the soil adjacent to any excavation. D. BORROW MATERIAL: The Owner will make available for the Contractor’s used up to 4,000 cubic yards of Class C material stockpiled in the primary staging area shown on the drawings. If the quantity of acceptable material from excavation and from the Owner supplied borrow stockpile is not sufficient to construct the fills required by the work, the quantity of material needed to complete the fills shall consist of imported borrow conforming to specified requirements. E. HAULING: When hauling is done over highways or city streets, the loads shall be trimmed and the vehicle shelf areas shall be cleaned after each loading. The loads shall be watered after trimming to eliminate dust. F. HAUL ROADS: The Contractor shall construct haul roads required to transport materials on site. Alignment of haul roads shall be selected to avoid interference with utility operations and adjacent property owners. Haul roads shall be removed after completion of construction. Trafficability of the silty areas of the site will be difficult during or after extended wet periods. When wet, the silty surficial soils are easily disturbed and will not provide adequate support for construction equipment. Proofrolling of the subgrade shall not be performed during wet weather or if wet ground conditions exist. Soils that have been disturbed during site preparation


activities, or soft or loose zones identified during probing, should be removed and replaced with Class F2 backfill. Haul roads subject to repeated construction traffic require a minimum of 18 inches of Class F2 backfill. Twelve inches of Class F2 backfill is required for light staging areas. Provide subgrade geotextile under all such backfill. G. FINISH GRADING: Finished surfaces shall be smooth, compacted and free from irregularities. The degree of finish shall be that normally obtainable with a blade-grader. Finished grade shall be as specified by the contours plus or minus 0.10 foot except where a local change in elevation is required to match sidewalks, curbs, manholes and catch basins, or to ensure proper drainage. Allowance for topsoil and grass cover, and subbase and pavement thickness shall be made so that the specified thickness of topsoil can be applied to attain the finished grade. When the work is an intermediate stage of completion, the lines and grades shall be as specified plus or minus 0.5 foot to provide adequate drainage. If the soil is to be cultivated or straw is to be incorporated into the surface, rocks larger than 2-1/2 inches in maximum dimension, roots and other debris on the surface of the slope shall be removed and disposed of prior to cultivation or placement of straw. H. CONTROL OF EROSION: The Contractor shall maintain earthwork surfaces true and smooth and protected from erosion as specified in Section 02270. Where erosion occurs, the Contractor shall provide fill or shall excavate as necessary to return earthwork surfaces to the grade and finish specified. I. ROCK EXCAVATION:

1. DEFINITION: Unless otherwise defined in the Specification, the term "rock" shall be understood to mean:

a. Removal of all material which by actual demonstration cannot, in Owner’s judgment, be reasonably removed with equipment comparable to Caterpillar 225 trackhoe or Caterpillar D-8 tractor which are equipped with rippers, rock teeth, and standard-sized buckets, and in fact must be broken by power tools design for rock excavation.

b. In trenches, boulders or pieces of concrete below existing grade

larger than 1/3 cubic yard will be classified as rock if power tools designed for rock excavation are required for removal.


c. "Rock Excavation" shall be understood to indicate a method of removal and not a geological formation.

2. FIELD MEASUREMENTS: Volume of rock excavation will be

determined by the Owner’s survey before and after excavation as follows:

a. During unclassified excavation, expose rock to fullest extent possible.

b. Before starting and after completing rock excavation, request

Owner’s Authorized Representative to provide Owner’s survey of rock before starting the next construction activity.

3. MECHANICAL REMOVAL: The Contractor shall use equipment suitable

for mechanical removal of rock actually encountered and of type to create minimum disturbance to Owner’s adjacent structures and normal operations. Equipment shall be as selected by Contractor, and subject to Owner’s review and acceptance. Mechanical means such as drilling, splitting, sawing, and chipping are allowed. 4. BLASTING: Controlled blasting will not be allowed as the first choice by the Contractor. Only upon demonstration by the Contractor that mechanical means of rock removal are ineffective and incapable of removing the rock, and only upon demonstration by the Contractor that controlled blasting can be performed safely and without damage to nearby facilities will blasting be considered for approval. Blasting will not be allowed in close proximity to the existing 24" W steel Main Feeder pipeline, or any other facilities that may be affected by the blast shock.

If blasting is approved by the Construction Manager, the Contractor shall provide all necessary approved types of tools and devices required for blasting operations. Blasting operations shall conform with ODOT 00335. In the handling, storage, and use of explosives, the Contractor must comply with all federal, state, and local laws. The Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits for blasting operations. In the use and storage of explosives, the Contractor shall use every precaution to prevent injury to persons and damage to property. Secure storage places shall be provided and all such places shall be clearly marked with warning signs. Only persons experienced in the handling of explosives shall be allowed to use them on the work, and no shot shall be set off until warning has been sounded and all persons within the radius of danger removed. When explosives are used, particularly in proximity to buildings or other structures, care shall be taken to protect the surroundings from injury by the explosion, the resultant concussion or by flying rocks or debris. The quantities of explosives and the manner of their use shall be such that adjacent property will not be damaged. In case the vicinity of the work is accessible to the general public, the Contractor shall, before any shots are fired, post workers about the work area in various directions to warn all persons of the danger existing and to prevent them approaching closer than safety will permit.


3.02 CLASSIFICATION OF FILL Fill material shall be placed in horizontal layers and compacted with power-operated tampers, rollers, idlers, or vibratory equipment. Material type, maximum layer depth, relative compaction, and general application are specified in Table A. Unless otherwise specified, fill classes shall be used where specified in Table A under general application.

Table A, Fill Classifications

Fill class

Material

type

Maximum uncompressed layer

depth, inches

Minimum relative compaction,

percent

General application

A1 A 6 95 Bedding for pipe; slabs on grade (other than specified for Class E1); roadway surface aggregate

A2 A 12 95 Initial pipeline backfill; subsequent pipeline backfill (improved areas)

B1 B 8 95 Structure backfill; bedding and initial pipeline backfill for ductile iron pipe subsequent pipeline backfill

B2 B 12 90 Site fill

C1 C 8 90 Subsequent pipeline backfill (unimproved areas)

C2 C 12 90 Site fill, embankments and dikes

D1 D - 95 Bedding for in-ground tanks, initial and subsequent tank backfill; pipe embedment for groundwater drainage pipe

E1a E 8 - Fill under structure and tank slabs with pressure relief valves

F1b F 12 95 Fill under foundations; structure backfill; initial pipeline backfill; subsequent pipeline backfill (improved areas)

F2 F 6 95 Roadway aggregate base; pipeline bedding

G1 G 6 95 Bedding and initial pipeline backfill for plastic pipe

G2 G 2 95 Fine grading layer under slabs

H1c H - - Embankment slope face, channel slope face

I1c I - - Embankment slope face, channel slope face

J1 J 12 90 Excess fill

K1 K 12 - Foundation stabilization

L1 L - - Advanced pipe bedding; subsequent pipeline backfill under paved roadways where shown


Fill class

Material

type

Maximum uncompressed layer

depth, inches

Minimum relative compaction,

percent

General application

M1 M 8 90 Inboard slope of ponds

N1 N - - Advanced pipe bedding;

NOTES: a Compaction of layers shall be accomplished in two passes of equipment with complete coverage across the width of the field. b Material shall not be used for bedding or initial backfill for plastic pipe. c Where specified, material shall be grouted as specified in 02200-3.08.

3.03 EARTHWORK FOR STRUCTURES A. STRUCTURE EXCAVATION: The bottom shall not be more than 0.15 foot above or below the lines and grades specified. If the elevation of structure excavation is not specified, the excavation shall be not more than 0.15 foot above or below the elevation specified for fill material below the structure. Slopes shall vary no more than 0.5 foot from specified grade unless the excavation is in rock where the maximum variation shall be 2 feet. Should the excavation be carried below the lines and grades specified on the drawings or should the bottom of the excavation be disturbed because of the Contractor's operations and require overexcavation and backfill, the Contractor shall refill such excavated space to the proper elevation in accordance with the procedure specified for backfill. The cost of such work shall be borne by the Contractor. Unless otherwise specified, excavations shall extend a sufficient distance from walls and footings to allow for placing and removal of forms, installation of services, and for inspection, except where concrete is specified to be placed directly against excavated surfaces. B. FOUNDATION TREATMENT: Remove the surficial organic layer, minimum of 6 inches thick, and perform required excavation. Subgrade material shall be scarified 12 inches deep, moisture conditioned, and compacted to a minimum of 95 percent prior to placement of structural fill material. Upon approval of the subgrade by the Construction Manager, the Contractor shall proceed with placement of the specified structural fill compacted as set forth in Table A. If material under footings and below structural fill indicated on drawings is such that it would mix into the concrete during footing placement or would not support the weight of the fluid concrete, the Contractor shall replace the material with suitable Class F1 material placed on woven filter fabric (geotextile), install soffit forms or otherwise provide a suitable platform on which to cast the footing as directed by the Construction Manager.


Whenever any structure excavation is substantially completed to grade, the Contractor shall notify the Construction Manager, who will make an inspection of the foundation. No concrete or masonry shall be placed until the Construction Manager has inspected the foundation. The Contractor shall, if directed by the Engineer, dig test pits and make test borings and foundation bearing tests. C. STRUCTURAL FILL AND STRUCTURE BACKFILL: Structural fill shall be Class F1 only. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, structure backfill may be either Class B1 or, if approved by the Construction Manager, Classes C1 or F1. Structural fill shall be placed after the Construction Manager has approved the foundation treatment. Thickness shall conform to that shown on the drawings or as required to fill from final subgrade elevation to the bottom of the structure above, but in no case less than 8 inches. After completion of construction below the elevation of final grade, and prior to backfilling, forms shall be removed and the excavation shall be cleaned of debris. Structure backfill or concrete shall not be placed until the Construction manager has inspected the subgrade portions of the structure. No backfill material shall be deposited against concrete structures until the concrete has developed a strength of not less than 2500 pound per square inch in compression, or until the concrete has been in place for 28 days, whichever occurs first. Compaction of structure backfill shall be accomplished by using power-operated tampers, rollers, or vibratory equipment. Compaction within two feet of walls shall be performed with hand-operated vibratory compactors. Backfill material shall be placed in uniform layers and shall be brought up uniformaly on all sides of the structure. Unless otherwise specified, backfill around and above pipelines within the excavation line of any structure shall be the same as that specified for structures. 3.04 EARTHWORK FOR PIPELINES AND CONDUITS A. GENERAL: Earthwork for pipelines and conduits is specified in paragraph 02200-3.02, Table A; in the standard details; and in the following paragraphs. B. PIPELINE EXCAVATION: The bottom of the trench shall be carried to the specified lines and grades with proper allowance for pipe thickness and for bedding as specified.


C. PIPELINE BACKFILL: 1. BEDDING: The Contractor shall not proceed with backfill placement in excavated areas until the subgrade has been inspected by the Construction Manager. All pipe shall have a minimum thickness of bedding material below the barrel of the pipe as specified. Bedding material shall be placed in the bottom of the trench, leveled and compacted. Bell holes shall be excavated at each pipe joint to permit proper inspection and uniform bearing of pipe on bedding material. After the pipe has been laid to alignment and grade, unless otherwise specified, additional bedding material shall be placed in layers the full width of the trench and compacted up to the specified level. Bedding shall be placed simultaneously on both sides of the pipe, keeping the level of backfill the same on each side. The material shall be carefully placed and compacted around the pipe to ensure that the pipe barrel is completely supported and that no voids or uncompacted areas are left beneath the pipe. Contractor shall use particular care in placing material on the underside of the pipe to prevent lateral movement during backfilling. 2. INITIAL BACKFILL: After pipe has been properly bedded, Contractor shall place and compact initial backfill as specified. Initial backfill, where specified below the springline of the pipe, shall be placed and compacted in accordance with paragraph 02200-3.04 C.1 for additional bedding material. 3. SUBSEQUENT BACKFILL: a. GENERAL: Backfill material, placement and compaction above the pipe zone shall be as specified. Backfill above the pipe zone shall not commence until pipe zone backfill has been inspected and accepted by the Construction Manager. b. IMPROVED AREAS: Unless otherwise specified, select granular backfill (Class A1) shall be used under and within 5 feet of all paved and unpaved roadways, paved and unpaved roadway shoulders, and roadway embankments in all public right-of-ways and easements. The trench shall be backfilled to an elevation which will permit the placement of the specified surface or paving. Paving shall be as specified in Section 02500. Other surfaces shall be restored, including compaction, to the condition existing prior to construction including restoration of yard areas. c. UNIMPROVED AREAS: Class C1 backfill shall be used for all trenches in pastureland, cultivated land, undeveloped land, and for other unimproved areas where specified. Class C1 backfill shall be used in public right-of-way at locations greater than 5 feet from roadway. Trench excavation which meets the requirements of Type C material may be used. The Contractor shall maximize the use of fine-grained materials (e.g., sand, silty sand, sandy silt) as Class C1 backfill. For Class C1 backfill, the trench above the pipe zone shall be backfilled to within 12 inches of original ground surface. The top 12 inches of soil shall be removed and stored in such a manner that it will not become mixed with unsatisfactory soils. After the trench has been backfilled, the


stored topsoil shall be replaced at a uniform depth in its original area compacted to its original condition. The Contractor shall leave the backfilled trench neatly mounded not more than 6 inches above existing grade for the full width of the Class C1 backfill area. 3.05 EARTHWORK FOR EMBANKMENTS A. FOUNDATION PREPARATION: The surface of the foundation shall not contain standing water and shall be free of loose material, foreign objects and rocks greater than 6 inches in maximum dimension. Immediately prior to placement of embankment fill material, the foundation surface shall be thoroughly moistened, scarified to a depth of 6 inches, moisture conditioned again as necessary and recompacted to 95 percent relative compaction. After the preparation has been completed, the Contractor shall promptly place and compact the first lift of embankment on the foundation to prevent damage to the surface. If the foundation surface is damaged, the Contractor shall repair the surface to the specified condition. In any areas where materials become soft or yielding, such materials shall be removed, disposed of, and replaced with specified material. The surface of the embankment shall be maintained to permit travel of construction equipment. Ruts in the surface of any layer shall be filled and leveled before compacting. B. EMBANKMENT FILL: Rocks, broken concrete, or other solid materials, which are larger than 4 inches in greatest dimension, shall not be placed in embankment areas where piles are to be placed or driven. Fill material having a sand equivalent value less than 10 shall be placed in the lower portions of embankments and shall not be placed within 2.5 feet of finished grade. When the embankment material consists of large, rocky material, or hard lumps, such as hardpan or cemented gravel which cannot be broken readily, such material shall be well distributed throughout the embankment. Sufficient earth or other fine material shall be placed around the larger material as it is deposited so as to fill the interstices and produce a dense, compact embankment. Unless otherwise specified, the embankment shall be raised to form an approximately horizontal plane extending transversely to the final slopes. The embankment shall be crowned at all times during construction so that water will drain readily off the embankment. The temporary differential elevation between any two adjoining zones of the embankment due to construction operations shall not exceed 24 inches. If the compacted surface of any layer of material is too smooth to bond properly with the succeeding layer, the surface shall be scarified. If required, the surface shall be sprinkled or otherwise moisture conditioned before the succeeding lift is placed. Any surface crust formed on a layer of fill material that has been dumped and spread shall be broken up by harrowing and, if required, the full depth of the affected layer shall be moisture conditioned immediately prior to rolling.


C. KEY CONSTRUCTION: Where specified, a key shall be excavated along the length of the toe of fill slopes. The exposed soils along the key and under fill areas shall be disced and/or scarified to a depth of at least 12 inches, moisture conditioned to within 3 percent of optimum moisture content, and compacted to at least 90 percent of maximum dry density. D. EMBANKMENT TOLERANCES: 1. GENERAL: Embankment slopes within 4 feet of shoulder grade shall vary less than 0.5 foot from the designated slope. Slopes beyond 4 feet from shoulder grade shall vary less than 1 foot from the designated slope. Measurements for variance shall be made perpendicular to the slope. Slopes which are 6 to 1 or flatter shall vary less than 0.2 foot from the designated slope. If embankments are constructed of rock greater than 12 inches in diameter, the slopes more than 4 feet below shoulder grade may vary up to 2 feet from the designated slope. 2. ROADWAY EMBANKMENT TOLERANCES: The excavated surface shall be less than 0.08 foot above or below the grades specified after deducting for the roadway pavement thickness. Vertical alignment tolerances permitted on the roadway surface shall not exceed plus or minus 0.30 feet from the vertical alignment specified, with the provision that within the tolerance range local surface irregularities shall not exceed 0.15 feet as measured by the gap between the roadway surface and a 10-foot straightedge placed on any flat graded surface. On vertical curves, the same standards will apply except that an additional gap allowance will be made for the road surface curvature over the 10-foot length of the straightedge. Horizontal alignment tolerances permitted shall not exceed plus or minus 1 foot providing the departure is relatively uniform over any specific length of the roadway. Roadway median strips shall be graded to drain and shall not vary more than 0.1 foot from the specified grade. 3.06 SUBGRADE FOR PAVEMENT The prepared subgrade shall be scarified to a depth of at least 12 inches and recompacted to at least 95 percent of the maximum density. 3.07 SITE FILL Unless otherwise specified, site fill shall be Class C2 fill. If the existing slope in an area to be filled is greater than 5:1, the Contractor shall bench the area prior to filling.


3.08 GROUTED RIPRAP After riprap is properly positioned, stones shall be flushed with water to remove fines, and cement grout as specified in Section 03600 shall be applied. Stones shall be wet prior to and during grout application. Grout shall be applied in two courses using baffles and diverting equipment. The first course shall completely penetrate the stone voids and shall be applied with the aid of poles or rods to loosen the tight pockets of stone. The second course shall be applied as soon as the first course has jelled. The second course shall be broomed uphill during application, and the entire surface shall be rebroomed to eliminate runs and fill voids. After grouting is complete, no load shall be permitted on the grouted surface for 24 hours. The grouted surface shall be protected from damage until curing is complete. The grout shall be cured as specified in paragraphs 03300-3.05 and 3.06.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 02270

EROSION, SEDIMENTATION, AND DUST CONTROL

PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. SCOPE: This section specifies measures as required by local regulations and by the Construction

Manager, as specified herein, and as shown on the Drawings to control erosion, sedimentation, and dust. Additional requirements are specified in Sections 01016 and 01560.

B. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS:

Establish a plan for, construct, and maintain erosion, sedimentation and dust control

measures. Install erosion and sedimentation control structures in the appropriate locations before construction begins and maintain these structures until permanent ground cover is established to stop all sediment and erosion. These control measures shall be extended to off-site work areas for activities such as borrow pit operations, haul roads, equipment storage sites, or staging areas.

Acquire land disturbance permits from the local authority prior to commencing work. The Contractor shall be responsible for submitting to the local authority sufficient documents such that the local authority can acquire approval from the soils and water conservation authority.

Install erosion and sedimentation control structures that will ensure that the storm water and drainage from job site areas meet regulatory water quality requirements. Provide erosion control measures for all areas that will be stripped of existing protective cover. Conduct operations in a manner that minimizes sediment transport from surfaces disturbed by construction. Stabilize all surfaces disturbed by construction of this project as soon as practicable. All drainage from the project site shall pass through some type of filter system before being discharged to the storm water drainage system. Keep all job site areas sufficiently moist to control dust.

1.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS:

Conform to all laws, ordinances and resolutions regarding pollution prevention and natural resource preservation that applies to this project including:

1. Federal Clean Water Act 2. ORS 468-740 and OAR 340-41-455 (3) 3. City of Ashland erosion control standards


The Contractor will be responsible for fines imposed for failing to meet applicable regulations. PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

Materials specified are considered the minimum acceptable for the purposes of durability and performance. The Contractor may propose alternative materials conforming to ODOT Section 00280 for the purpose of providing greater performance. However, alternative materials must provide at least the same qualities as those specified for the purpose. 2.02 AGGREAGATE SURFACING

Aggregate surfacing shall be as specified in 02200-3.02 for roadway surfacing. 2.03 PLASTIC SHEET COVERING

Plastic sheet covering shall be 6-mil polyethylene, as specified in 02200-2.04, cut from large rolls to minimize seams. 2.04 SILT FENCE

Silt fence fabric shall conform to ODOT Section 002320, and shall be nylon reinforced polyester netting with fabric weight in excess of 4.0 ounces per yard and having a built-in cord running throughout the top edge of the fabric. Silt fence fabric shall be equal to Mirafi 100X, inert to chemicals commonly found in soil, and resistant to mildew, rot, insects, and rodent attack. Posts shall be either steel or 2-inch square pressure treated fir, southern pine or hemlock and shall be spaced not more than 6 feet on center. 2.05 COMPOST BERM

Compost shall be derived from a wide variety of organic sources, have no objectionable odors, and contain less than 1% man-made foreign matter. Particle size should vary within a maximum length of 3 inches. Moisture content shall be 33% to 55%, and pH shall be 5.5 to 8.0. Compost shall be well finished and contain no substance toxic to plants. 2.06 BIOFILTER BAGS

Provide bags conforming to ODOT 00280.10(a), filled with bark or other bio-material.


2.07 STRAW BALES

Straw bales shall consist of clean, undecayed, firmly packed straw of approximate nominal size 14 inches by 18 inches by 36 inches and firmly bound by at least two separate circuits of rope or band material that will withstand weathering for a minimum of three months. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL

All erosion, sedimentation and dust control products and materials will be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, generally conforming to ODOT Section 00280, and according to the approved erosion prevention plan. All sediment barriers shall remain in place until contract completion. Contractor may propose and Construction Manager may consider additional measures conforming to ODOT Section 00280. 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. EROSION CONTROL: The Contractor shall implement erosion control measures around all areas to be disturbed prior to disturbing ground in the area, to the satisfaction of the Construction Manager.

1. SURFACE WATER CONTROL: Whenever steeper slopes or abrupt changes in grade are required, a diversion or berm ditch shall be constructed at the top of the slope to cause the surface water to flow along the diversion to a controlled down slope. The diversion shall be protected against erosion with hay bales, and paved inverts where needed.

2. AGGREGATE SURFACING: Special precautions shall be taken in the use of construction equipment to conduct operations in a manner that reduces erosion and compaction of the soil. Aggregate surfacing shall be provided in all areas of vehicular and frequent foot traffic. Subgrade geotextile fabric as specified in 02200-2.03 shall underlay the aggregate to prevent migration of soil into the aggregate and to aid in complete removal of aggregate from the site during final site cleanup. Temporary construction exits shall be maintained in a condition that will prevent tracking or flow of mud out of the work area or onto public roads.

3. PLASTIC SHEET COVER: Except for areas covered by aggregate surfacing or the facility under construction, cover all areas of exposed soil with plastic sheet until permanent ground cover is established. Grade the soil surface under the sheet to channel the water that falls on the sheet to storm water collection and sedimentation control facilities prior to discharge to the storm water drainage system.


B. SEDIMENTATION CONTROL:

The Contractor shall take sufficient precautions during construction to eliminate run-off of polluting substances such as silt, clay, wastes, fuels, oils, and bitumen into water supplies and surface waters. Disposal of drainage from the site shall be at a location approved by the Construction Manager. Drainage shall not be disposed of until silt and other sedimentary materials have been removed. Particular care shall be taken to prevent the discharge of unsuitable drainage to a water supply or surface water body.

As a minimum, approved silt barrier shall be provided at points where drainage from the work site leaves the site, to reduce the sediment content of the water. Sufficient silt barrier shall be provided such that all flow from the site will filter through the silt barrier. Other methods, conforming to ODOT Section 00280 and which reduce the sediment content to an equal or greater degree, may be used as approved by the Construction Manager. Drainage leaving the site shall flow to water courses in a manner that minimizes erosion.

Silt barriers shall be installed at all locations immediately down-slope from the project site and around all inlets to the storm water system. Silt barriers shall be installed prior to clearing and earthwork operations, and shall be maintained in good repair throughout construction. Selection of the type of silt barrier will depend on the surface conditions and situation at the location needed, on the control plan requirements, and on performance acceptable to the Construction Manager.

1. SILT FENCE: Silt fences shall be installed by securely fastening silt fence fabric using wire ties. The silt fence fabric panels shall be installed loosely with adjacent panels overlapped a minimum of 12 inches. Silt fence material shall be embedded at least six inches beneath ground surface and shall extend upward at least 1.5 feet above the disturbed area ground surface. The top edge of the fabric shall be reinforced or shall have a one-inch tuck.

2. COMPOST BERM: The erosion control berm shall be placed, uncompacted, in a windrow at locations shown on the plan. Construct berm as detailed on plan.

3. BIOFILTER BAGS: Biofilter bags shall be used on pavement at storm water inlets, and shall be placed in a row with ends tightly abutting.

4. STRAW BALES: Straw bales shall be installed in a row with ends tightly abutting. Each bale shall be embedded in the soil a minimum of four inches and placed so that the bale bindings are oriented horizontally. Bales shall be securely anchored in place by wood stakes, steel fence pickets, or rebar driven through the bale. Stakes shall be driven flush with the bale and shall extend at least 18 inches beneath the bale into the underlying soil.


C. DUST CONTROL The Contractor shall exercise precautionary measures to minimize dust emissions, which

will include, but shall not be limited to, periodic sprinkling or wetting of the site. In areas of future permanent paving, the Contractor may use a dust stabilizer or tackifier conforming to ODOT 00280.10(f). The Contractor must comply with all local requirements related to application of chemicals for dust control. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. INSPECTION BY CONTRACTOR

Contractor shall inspect erosion and sedimentation control facilities immediately after each rainfall and at least daily during prolonged rainfall.

B. INSPECTION BY OWNER

The Construction Manager will periodically inspect erosion control structures to confirm that the Contractor is maintaining these features. 3.04 MAINTENANCE

Maintain erosion, sedimentation and dust control facilities to the installed condition as specified. Remove sediment and debris accumulated behind silt barriers when sediment and debris reduces the water holding capacity by one-half. Remove accumulated sediment and debris from behind the face of the silt barrier as needed to provide proper silt barrier operation. Sediment deposits should be removed after each storm event. They must be removed when deposits reach approximately one-third the height of the barrier. All required necessary repairs shall be made immediately.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 02350

SHEETING, SHORING, AND BRACING PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies requirements for sheeting, shoring, and bracing of trenches and excavations greater than 5 feet in depth. Where sheet piling, shoring, sheeting, bracing, or other supports are necessary, they shall be placed, maintained and, except as shown or otherwise specified, removed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall have sole responsibility to determine the construction means and methods required to satisfy the requirements of this section. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. REFERENCES This section references the latest revision of the following document. It is a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed document, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

Oregon OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration B. DESIGN The design, planning, installation, and removal, if required, of all sheeting, shoring, sheet piling, lagging and bracing shall be accomplished in a such a manner that maintains the required excavation or trench section and maintains the undisturbed state of the soils below and adjacent to the excavation.


Sheeting, shoring, and bracing shall be designed by a professional engineer with a current Oregon registration in accordance with Oregon OSHA. Horizontal strutting below the barrel of the pipe and the use of the pipe as support are not acceptable. PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCT DATA The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300: 1. The Contractor's design for sheeting, shoring, and bracing as specified in

paragraph 1.02 B. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL The construction of sheeting, shoring, and bracing shall not disturb the state of soil adjacent to the excavation or trench and below the excavation bottom. Sheeting, shoring, and bracing shall be removed after placement and compaction of initial backfill except as otherwise specified. 3.02 SHORING AND BRACING AT STRUCTURES Sheeting and shoring shall be constructed in all excavations adjacent to existing structures to support the undisturbed soils during construction. The sheeting, shoring, and bracing shall be adequate to prevent any movement of the existing structure during work adjacent to the structure. 3.03 SEQUENCE Trench excavation shall not be started until the design for trench support has been accepted by the Construction Manager.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 02360

AUGERCAST PILES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

This section specifies concrete-augercast piling. The Contractor shall base bid on concrete augercast piles. Alternate systems may be substituted as described herein. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. REFERENCES: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Bid Submittal. If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, whether or not the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

ASTM C 33 Concrete Aggregates

ASTM C 150 Portland Cement


B. INSPECTION, GENERAL: The Geotechnical Engineer shall be present during pile installation operations. The Contractor shall notify the Construction Manager at least 7 days prior to starting pile operations. The Geotechnical Engineer shall verify that approved procedures are used uniformly on production piles. The Geotechnical Engineer will keep a record for each pile placed, monitoring the installation of each pile and alert the Contractor when adequate penetration has been achieved. The record will give the pay length, location, type, calculated safe load and results of any test. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Geotechnical Engineer to facilitate the keeping of these records.


Special Inspection shall be performed according to Section 01400 and 01410. 1.03 BASIS OF DESIGN - ALTERNATES

1. Contractor shall employ the services of an experienced Geotechnical Engineer and Professional Engineer, licensed in the State of Oregon, to review soils information at the site(s) where piling is indicated and prepare a design. Based on the soil investigation and report, the design professionals under the employ of the Contractor shall complete a design of the alternate piling system with capacity as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.

2. Vertical load capacity and free or fixed head lateral capacity shall meet or exceed the values indicated on the GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES on the design drawings. Combined long and short term vertical settlement due to full vertical allowable loading shall be less than 3/8 inch. Lateral deflection shall be limited to the lesser of limits as described in NAVFAC DM-7.2 or 1/4 inch.

3. Piling shall be designed and constructed to resist the effects of corrosion, moisture and other detrimental environmental effects at the site and remain serviceable for 50 years, minimum.

4. Design shall include all pile cap and connection details.

5. Submittal and review shall conform to Sections 01300 and 01400.

6. Use of piles other than as shown on the drawings shall not give rise to claims for additional payments based on that use of a different system or delays in construction unless the Geotechnical Investigation indicates the presence of on-site soil conditions which render the use of augercast piling technically infeasible and require the use of an alternate system.

1.04 BASIS OF PAYMENT

A. See specification section 01202, 1.0, B., Item 10.

1.05 PROFESSIONAL RESPONSIBILITY

Professionals employed by Contractor in any and all phases of design and inspection, as required herein, shall evidence the following:

1. Professional Liability Insurance, $1 million single event.

2. General Liability Insurance, $2 million single event (umbrella acceptable).

3. Contract clauses with Contractor which specifically allow 3rd party claims by Owner without hold-harmless, limitation of liability, or other such indemnity clauses. The intent of this requirement is that the design professional be directly liable and responsible to the Owner as if directly


engaged by Owner. Design professionals may not limit their professional liability to less than the required single event policy limit plus applicable deductible.

4. Each professional or firm employed by Contractor for the work in this specification section shall comply with the requirements herein, and as a professional or firm not relying on the Contractor for any part of its coverage.

1.06 SUBMITTALS



2. Submit evidence that the pile contractor has been engaged in the successful installation of the piles selected for the project for at least five years and that his crane operators or “keymen” who give directions to the crane operators have at least two years of experience in the successful installation of such piles.

3. Evidence of insurance and contractual responsibility clauses as specified in paragraph 1.05.

4. For augercast piles, submit the following:

a. Mix design in conformance to Section 03300 requirements. Mix design properties shall be as specified in Section 02360-2.01.

b. Shop drawings indicating methods of augering and placing of concrete and reinforcing steel, predicted 7 and 28 day compressive


strength of concrete, size, number, and the installation sequence for each for the scheduled piles.

c. Reinforcing in accordance with Section 03200.

d. Equipment review and working drawings including a complete list of the equipment proposed for use, including the manufacturer’s description of the characteristics of each piece of equipment and accessories showing compatibility with the size, configuration, handling, and requirements of the type of pile indicated.

PART 2 MATERIALS

2.01 CONCRETE AUGERCAST PILES

A. PILE TYPE:

Piling shall be 24-inch diameter, concrete augercast piles.

B. CONCRETE:

Concrete shall be a mixture of Portland cement, a Pozzolanic material when approved, fluidifier, retarder when approved, sand and water proportioned per Section 03300 and mixed to produce a concrete capable of being pumped and having a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 pounds per square inch (psi) at 28 days. Other admixtures shall not be used.

C. REINFORCEMENT:

Materials, assembly and placement of reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of Section 3200.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 CONCRETE AUGERCAST PILES

A. GENERAL

Required tip elevations are shown on the drawings. All piles should be augered and/or excavated continuously to their design tip. It is expected that Contractor will need to sleeve the excavation except in competent rock. Provide piling of the length and configuration necessary to:

1. Achieve the required penetration specified. 2. Extend into the pile cap the indicated elevation. 3. Attain the indicated bearing and lateral capacity.


Completely fill the augered hole and sleeve with concrete to cutoff elevation. The excavation of the pile and cap shall be inspected and approved by the Geotechnical Engineer.

Drill each pile hole and fill with concrete in an uninterrupted operation. Provide concrete injection equipment with concrete pressure gauges which are readable by the crane operator at his normal workstation and the inspecting Special Inspector.

B. AUGER OPERATION:

If the auger jumps upward more than six inches but less than 12 inches during withdrawal, reinsert auger to at least 3 feet past the questionable area and regrout the pile. If the auger jumps upward more than 12 inches during withdrawal, or the pile is not installed in general accordance with accepted procedures, reinsert auger to the point that the auger jumped or the base of the questionable areas and regrout the pile to the grout surface. This pile will be considered a rejected pile and an additional pile shall be installed adjacent thereto as directed by Special Inspector.

C. AUGERCAST PILE REINFORCEMENT

The reinforcement cage is to extend full depth. The cage shall have suitable “chairs” attached to the vertical bars to assure centering of the cage in the pile and the cage may be placed immediately after concreting the pile, but prior to removing the sleeve.

After installation of the piles, the pile cap base shall be cleaned until reasonably free of cuttings. Dispose of material excavated by augering outside the limits of building area unless otherwise directed. Do not leave partially completed piles overnight, but completely concrete and protect at the termination of each day’s operation.

D. EXCAVATED SOIL AND ROCK:

Scrape from the auger or drill during its removal in such a way as to avoid accidental deposition in the freshly poured pile.

E. PILE PROTECTION:

Provide a sequence of pile installation such that adjacent piles and structures are not disturbed. Keep the equipment far enough away from the pile being augered to avoid compressing or shearing of the soil which may in turn displace or squeeze off the grout column. Do not place piles within 3 feet of adjacent structures.

3.02 ALTERNATE PILING SYSTEMS

Alternate piling systems, if accepted, shall be installed using “best practices” for the system utilized. Best practices are those generally in use within a 200 mile radius of the job, which result in the highest performance reliability and which allow complete access to the work for inspection. Failure to follow best practices shall be suitable cause for rejection of the work, unless Contractor demonstrates piling capacity through proof load testing.


3.03 COMPLETION

Upon completion of pile installation, all equipment, excess materials and all miscellaneous materials not incorporated in the work shall be removed so as to leave the site clean and free of debris.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 02951

TREE PROTECTION


A. SCOPE:

This section specifies measures as required by local regulations, by the Construction Manager, as specified herein, and as shown on the Drawings, to protect, repair, and replace trees on the project site that are impacted by construction activity.

B. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS: Unless otherwise shown, specified or approved by the Construction Manager in the Tree Preservation and Removal Plan submitted by the Contractor, all trees on the project site, including staging areas, shall remain and shall be protected for the duration of the work. Trees that may be removed from the project site by the Contractor to allow for construction activity of this project are identified on the drawings or may be marked in the field by the Construction Manager. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. QUALIFICATIONS:

The Contractor shall provide the services of an Oregon-certified arborist to perform the work specified under this section. The arborist shall be regularly engaged in care and cultivation of the species affected on the project site, be a current member of the American Society of Consulting Arborists, and a specialist having sufficient horticultural training and technical competence, skill, resources and ability to complete, with the requisite degree of quality and in a timely manner, the work specified under this section.

B. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: Conform to all laws, ordinances and resolutions regarding tree preservation, repair,

replacement and care that apply to this project. The Contractor will be responsible for fines imposed for failing to meet applicable regulations.


1.03 SUBMITTALS

The following information shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300:

1. A Tree Preservation and Removal Plan, prepared by a qualified arborist and provided by the Contractor, for construction activity under the drip line of the existing trees and for other trees that will be or become impacted in any way.

PART 2—NOT USED PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL

All trees within the work area which are to remain shall be protected by placing protective tree fencing around the tree at the drip line and as specifically defined in the Tree Preservation and Removal Plan and details. 3.02 EXAMINATION

Inspect all trees and existing conditions prior to construction. Document with written memorandum and photographs all unusual existing conditions. Submit copies with the Tree Preservation and Removal Plan prior to beginning work. 3.03 PERFORMANCE

A. CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY NEAR PROTECTED TREES

1. GENERAL: Work within the drip line of protected trees shall be eliminated to prevent spillage of fuel, oil, or other chemicals, prevent compaction of the soil, and prevent physical damage to the tree. Do not allow fires on the project site. Protect root systems from smothering and compaction. Do not store construction materials or permit vehicles to drive or part within the drip line area of any tree to remain. Protect all plant growth, including root systems of trees, from the dumping of refuse or chemically injurious material or liquids, and continual puddling of running water. Provide temporary fencing, barricades, and guards as necessary or required to protect trees that are to remain from damage above and below grade. Erect as directed by the Construction Manager.

2. PROTECTION: Protect root systems of trees to remain from damage due to noxious materials in solution caused by runoff or spillage during mixing and placement of construction materials. Protect root systems of trees to remain from flooding, erosion, or


excessive wetting resulting from dewatering operations and compaction. Protect all existing trees to remain against unauthorized cutting, breaking, or skinning of roots and branches, and bruising of bark.

3. PRUNING: Do not prune without explicit direction of the arborist. Where pruning is necessary to provide clearance for construction and avoid damage to the existing trees, review conditions with the arborist who will develop a plan. Obtain approval from the Construction Manager before proceeding. Where tree limbs are damaged due to the Contractor's operation, pruning of the crown by the arborist is required. All tree pruning shall be performed with sharp pruning instruments; do not break or chop.

B. EXCAVATION NEAR PROTECTED TREES

1. GENERAL: Excavation within the drip line of trees is allowed only where indicted on drawings, where directed by the arborist, or where provided in the approved Tree Preservation and Removal Plan.

2. PROTECTION: Where excavation is required within the drip line of existing trees to install pipelines, tunnel under or around roots by hand digging or boring. Do not cut main lateral roots or tap roots. Do not allow exposed roots to dry out before permanent backfill is placed; provide temporary earth cover. Water and maintain in moist condition and temporarily support and protect from damage until permanently relocated and covered with backfill.

3. ROOT REMOVAL: Do not cut tree roots without explicit direction of the arborist. Where root cutting or removal is necessary to provide clearance for construction and avoid damage to the existing trees, review conditions with the arborist who will develop a plan. Obtain approval from the Construction Manager before proceeding. Where tree roots are damaged due to the Contractor's operation, root removal by the arborist is required. All root cutting shall be performed with sharp saws and pruning instruments; do not break or chop.

C. GRADING AND FILLING NEAR PROTECTED TREES

Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawing or directed by the Construction Manager, maintain existing grade within drip line of trees.

D. REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT OF IMPACTED TREES

Contractor shall engage a qualified arborist to prune limbs and/or roots and to repair trees damaged by construction operations. Contractor shall obtain approval from Construction Manager prior to proceeding with pruning and/or repairs. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of repair made necessary by Contractor's and subcontractor's actions.


Remove and replace damaged trees that were identified as protected but are determined by the arborist to be incapable of restoration to normal growth pattern. Provide new trees of same size (if possible) and species as those removed. Plant and maintain as directed by the arborist. If replacement trees are not of the same species and size, compensate the Owner for the lost value of the removed tree base on evaluations by the arborist and the Construction Manager. Contractor is responsible for costs of removing damaged trees and planting new specimens. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. INSPECTION BY CONTRACTOR Contractor shall cause the arborist to inspect tree condition immediately after each

instance of damage to an existing tree in order that timely action can be determined and taken by the arborist.

B. INSPECTION BY OWNER

The Construction Manager will periodically inspect tree condition to confirm that the Contractor is performing as specified.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 03200

CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section specifies reinforcing steel for use in reinforced concrete. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. INSPECTION AND TESTING:

Conform to Sections 01400 and 01410. B. REFERENCES: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

ACI 315 Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement

ASTM A82 Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement

ASTM A185 Steel Welded Wire, Fabric, Plain for Concrete Reinforcement

ASTM A615/A615M REV B

Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

ASTM A616/A616M Rail-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement


Reference Title

ASTM A617/A617M Axle-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement


Low-Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement

ASTM A775/A775M Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars

ASTM E329 Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction

AWS D1.4 Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel

CRSI-PRB Placing Reinforcing Bars

CRSI-MSP 1 Manual of Standard Practice

FEDSPEC QQ-W-461H Wire, Steel, Carbon (Round, Bare, and Coated)

IBC 2003 International Building Code, locally amended 1.03 PLACING DRAWINGS The Contractor shall prepare reinforcement placing drawings conforming to the requirements of ACI 315. Placing drawings shall include bar lists, schedules, bending details, placing details, and placing plans and elevations as required to fully delineate this portion of the work. 1.04 SUBMITTALS The following submittals shall be provided as specified in Section 01300:

1. Reinforcement placing drawings conforming to the requirements of paragraph 03200-1.03. Review shall be for general conformance with the contract documents regarding bar grade, size, spacing, and configuration. Bar dimensions and quantities will not be reviewed.

2. Splicing systems including ICBO Certification report or other supporting test report prepared by a generally recognized entity experienced in such testing and reporting. Such non-ICBO test data shall be acceptable to the Engineer in their sole discretion.


PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 BAR REINFORCEMENT Reinforcing bars shall be deformed billet steel in conformance with ASTM A615, including supplementary requirements, Grade 60. Bars to be welded shall be Grade 60 conforming to ASTM A706. ASTM A616 or ASTM A617 steel shall not be used. 2.02 WIRE FABRIC Wire fabric shall be welded steel mesh conforming to ASTM A185. 2.03 WIRE AND PLAIN BARS Wire used as reinforcement and bars used as spiral reinforcement in structures shall be cold drawn steel conforming to ASTM A82. 2.04 TIE WIRE The wire shall be minimum 16 gage annealed steel conforming to FEDSPEC QQ-W-461H. 2.05 BAR SUPPORTS Bar supports coming into contact with forms shall be CRSI Class 1 plastic protected or Class 2 stainless steel protected and shall be located in accordance with CRSI MSP-1 and placed in accordance with CRSI PRB. Concrete block supports shall be provided for footing and slabs on grade. Stainless steel or plastic protected plain steel supports shall be provided for other work. 2.06 SPLICING SYSTEMS

A. TWO-PART SPLICER SYSTEMS: Two part (dowel bar) splicer systems shall include a splicer piece and dowel-in piece of

equivalent strength to the reinforcing steel required at the section spliced. System shall develop at least 125 percent of the yield strength of the reinforcing spliced with documented test results such as ICBO Evaluation Report or other. Splicing system shall be epoxy coated if so noted on the drawings. Acceptable products include: DB-SAE or MRC150 systems by Dayton/Richmond; DYWIDAG Threadbar system with appropriate couplers by Dywidag Systems International; C2T coupler and threaded rebar by Williams Form Engineering, Co.; or equal.

B. MECHANICAL BAR SPLICES:

Mechanical bar splices are intended to connect reinforcing steel in both tension and

compression. Systems shall develop at least 125 percent of the yield strength of the reinforcing spliced with documented test results such as ICBO Evaluation Report or other. Acceptable products


include: Lenton Tapered Thread Coupler or Cadweld by Erico; Zap Screwlock or Bar-Grip Couplers by Barsplice Products, Inc.; or equal.

2.07 PRODUCT DATA The following information shall be provided prior to installation in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Certified mill test reports 2. Welder qualification certificate in accordance with AWS D1.4. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION Reinforcing steel shall not be bent or straightened in a manner which will injure the material. Bars with kinks or with bends not shown shall not be used. Heating or welding bars shall be performed in accordance with AWS D1.4 and shall only be permitted where specified or approved by the Construction Manager. Bars shall not be welded at the bend. 3.02 PLACEMENT Reinforcing steel shall be placed in accordance with CRSI PRB and CRSI MSP-1. Reinforcing steel shall be positioned accurately and secured against displacement by using annealed iron wire at intersections and shall be supported by concrete or metal chairs, spacers or metal hangers. Tack welding of cross bars is not acceptable. Bars shown on the drawings shall not be repositioned (buried) to act as support bars. Additional bars shall be provided as required for supports. Steel rods and pegs may be used to support reinforcing steel on rock foundations. Reinforcing steel shall be placed in such a manner as to not damage waterproofing membrane or plastic lining which has been previously applied or constructed. Reinforcing steel shall be shop-bent or slightly relocated where necessary to clear waterstop. Reinforcing steel shall not be placed on fresh concrete or forced into fresh concrete. Supports for embedded items shall not be welded to the reinforcement. Additional reinforcement may be provided for this purpose. 3.03 SPLICING Reinforcing steel shall be spliced as shown. Additional splices may be provided where approved by the Construction Manager.


In slabs, beams, girders and walls, reinforcing steel shall not be spliced in areas of maximum stress. Splices of adjacent bars shall be staggered at least one splice length, unless otherwise specified. Splices in welded wire fabric shall be at least 1 1/2 meshes wide. 3.04 CLEANING Reinforcing steel shall be cleaned of mill rust scale, dried concrete, or other coatings that may reduce bond. Reinforcement reduced in section is not acceptable. When concrete placement is delayed, reinforcement shall be cleaned by sandblasting if directed by the Construction Manager. **END OF SECTION**


SECTION 03300

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section specifies cast-in-place concrete for footings, slabs, floors, walls, sidewalks, curbs, pipe bedding encasement, electrical conduit encasement, and miscellaneous uses. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. QUALITY CONTROL AND INSPECTIONS: Conform to Sections 01400 and 01410. B. REFERENCES: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

ACI 211.1 Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal and Heavy Weight Concrete

ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings

ACI 304 Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete

ACI 305R Hot Weather Concreting

ACI 306R Cold Weather Concreting

ACI 347 Concrete Formwork


Reference Title

ASTM C31 Standard Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field

ASTM C33 Concrete Aggregates

ASTM C39 Standard Test for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens

ASTM C42 Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete

ASTM C94 Ready-Mixed Concrete

ASTM C136 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates

ASTM C143 Standard Test for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete

ASTM C150 Portland Cement

ASTM C172 Sampling Fresh Concrete

ASTM C260 Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete

ASTM C309 Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete

ASTM C494 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete

ASTM E329 Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction

CRD-C572 Corps of Engineers Specifications for Polyvinylchloride Waterstop

OSSC 2004 Oregon Structural Specialty Code 1.03 SUBMITTALS The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300:

1. Each proposed mix design showing (a) the expected strength, (b) corresponding slump before and after the introduction of mid- or high-range water-reducing admixtures, (c) weights and test results of the ingredients, and (d) other physical properties necessary to review each mix design for conformance with these specifications.

2. Product literature and technical data for aggregates.

3. Product literature, technical data and dosage of all proposed admixtures including,

but not limited to, air entraining, water reducing and/or retarding admixtures.


4. Anticipated average delivery time from batch plant to site. If this time exceeds one hour include proposed method to extend set time without deleterious effects on final product. Engineer reserves the right, in their sole discretion, to accept or reject such proposed methods.

5. Curing program description in sufficient detail to demonstrate acceptable strength,

finish and crack control as specified.

6. Product literature and technical data for curing compounds, bonding compounds, and surface sealers.

PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. CEMENT: Portland cement shall be ASTM C150, Type I or Type I/II. B. AGGREGATES: 1. GENERAL: Fine and coarse aggregates shall conform to ASTM C33. Fine and coarse aggregates shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C136. Aggregates shall be nonreactive and shall be washed before use. When sources of aggregates are changed, test reports shall be provided for the new material. The tests specified shall be performed prior to commencing concrete work. 2. FINE AGGREGATE: Fine aggregate shall be hard, dense, durable particles of either sand or crushed stone regularly graded from coarse to fine. Gradation shall conform to ASTM C33. 3. COARSE AGGREGATE: Coarse aggregate shall be hard, dense and durable gravel or crushed rock free from injurious amounts of soft and friable particles, alkali, organic matter and other deleterious substances. Gradation of each coarse aggregate size specified in paragraph 03300-2.02 A shall conform to ASTM C33-Table 2. C. ADMIXTURES: 1. GENERAL: Admixtures shall be compatible with the concrete. Calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride are not acceptable. Admixtures shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and shall be added separately to the concrete mix.


2. WATER REDUCING RETARDER: Water reducing retarder shall be ASTM C494, Type D, and shall be Master Builders, Pozzolith 300-R; Sika Chemical Corp., Plastiment; or equal. 3. AIR ENTRAINING AGENT: Air entraining agent shall be Master Builders, MB-AE10; W. R. Grace and Co., DaraVair; or equal. The air entraining agent added shall produce, in accordance with ASTM C260, an entrained air content specified in paragraph 03300-2.02 A for each class of concrete. D. WATER: Water for washing aggregate, for mixing and for curing shall be free from oil and deleterious amounts of acids, alkalies, and organic materials. 2.02 CONCRETE CHARACTERISTICS A. MIX PROPORTIONING: Concrete shall be normal weight concrete composed of specified cement, admixtures, aggregates and water proportioned and mixed to produce a workable, strong, dense, and impermeable concrete. Concrete shall be provided in accordance with the following:

Concrete class

ASTM coarse aggregate size

Min. cement content,

sacks/cu yd concrete

Maximum water/ cement ratio by

weight

Minimum percent air

content

Maximum slump in inches

Minimuma 28-day

compressive strength, psi

C 67 5.25 0.42 5%c 4-1/2 4000

Eb 467 3.25 - - 6 2000 aCompressive strength shall be determined at the end of 28 days based on test cylinders made and tested in accordance with ASTM C39.

bConcrete encasement for electrical conduit shall contain 3 pounds of red oxide per sack of cement. c +1.0%, -0.5%.

B. USE: Concrete shall be provided by class for the corresponding use listed as follows:

Type of use Class of concrete

Structural Concrete C

Pipe bedding and encasement, electrical conduit encasement (duct banks) and concrete fill

E


C. CONTROL: Before beginning concrete work, the Contractor shall determine the proper proportions of materials for class of concrete B and C. Methods for selecting and adjusting proportions of the ingredients shall be in accordance with ACI 211.1. Reports from the concrete supplier of each mix design shall conform to submittal requirements. 2.03 SEALANTS AND JOINT FILLERS Sealants and preformed joint fillers shall be as specified in Sections 07900 and 07905. 2.04 BONDING COMPOUNDS

Epoxy resin bonding compounds to be used for wet areas shall conform to ASTM C881 Types IV or V, Class A, B, or C depending on temperature at use, and Grade to suit geometry and installation circumstances. Acceptable products include: Degussa Building Systems, Concresive Paste SPL or 1490 as applicable; Sika Chemical Corporation Sikadur 35 or Sikadur 32, as applicable; or equal. Nonepoxy bonding compounds may be used in dry areas for non-structural bonding or as specifically noted on the drawings only and shall conform to ASTM C1059 Type II. Acceptable products include: Burke by Edoco, Acrylic Bondcrete; ChemMasters, Cretelox; or equal. Bonding compounds shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. 2.05 RETARDANT Retardant for exposing aggregates for nonformed surfaces in construction joints shall be Sika Rugasol-S, Horn Aggretex-H, Burke Company True Etch Surface Retarder, or equal. Retardant shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions sufficient to assure a minimum penetration of 1/8 inch. 2.06 CURING AND SEALING COMPOUNDS Curing and sealing compound shall be Master Builders, Masterseal; A. C. Horn Inc., Horn Clearseal EM180; Burke Company Spartan-Cote WB Cure Seal Hardner; or equal; conforming to ASTM C309. Curing compounds shall be clear and shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, except as otherwise specified. 2.07 PRODUCT DATA The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300.


A. MANUFACTURER'S DATA: Copies of manufacturer's data shall be provided for the following: 1. Retardants 2. Admixtures B. READY-MIXED CONCRETE TRUCK DELIVERY TICKETS: Each load of ready-mixed concrete delivered to the job site shall be accompanied by a delivery ticket showing the information listed in ASTM C94, Section 16. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL Construction of cast-in-place concrete shall be in accordance with the pertinent recommendations contained in ACI Manual of Concrete Practice and ACI 318. 3.02 CONCRETE Concrete shall be truck-mixed, ready-mixed concrete conforming to the applicable portions of ASTM C94. Materials shall be proportioned by weighing. The Contractor shall be responsible for producing concrete of the specified characteristics. Concrete shall be delivered to the site of work, and discharge shall be completed within 1-1/2 hours after introduction of the water to the mixture. 3.03 CONVEYING AND PLACING CONCRETE A. CONVEYING CONCRETE: Concrete shall be conveyed from the mixer to the forms in accordance with ACI 301, Chapter 8. Concrete which has segregated in conveying shall be removed from the site of the work. B. PLACING CONCRETE: 1. GENERAL: Concrete shall be placed in accordance with ACI 301, Chapter 8, and ACI 304, Chapter 6. Pumped concrete shall be the class and consistency specified in paragraph 03300-2.02. 2. PLACING CONCRETE IN HOT WEATHER: In hot weather (above 85 degrees F), concrete shall be placed in accordance with ACI 305R.


3. PLACING CONCRETE IN COLD WEATHER: In cold weather (below 45 degrees F), concrete shall be placed in accordance with ACI 306R. 3.04 CONCRETE FORMWORK Formwork shall be installed in accordance with ACI 347. 3.05 CURING AND SEALING A. GENERAL: Concrete curing shall be completed by water curing or by using a clear membrane curing compound or by a combination of both methods. Repairs or treatment of concrete surfaces shall be coordinated so that interruption of the curing will not be necessary. Concrete surface temperature shall be maintained between 50 degrees F and 80 degrees F for at least 5 days. Curing concrete in hot weather (above 85 degrees F) shall be in accordance with ACI 305 R. Curing concrete in cold weather (below 45 degrees F) shall be in accordance with ACI 306 F. B. WATER CURING: When water curing is used, concrete shall be kept wet continuously for a minimum of 10 days after placement. Absorptive mats or fabric may be used to retain moisture during the curing period. C. CURING COMPOUND: When curing compound is used, it shall be applied as soon as the concrete has set sufficiently so as not to be marred by the application or immediately following form removal for vertical and other formed surfaces. Preparation of surfaces, quantities used, application procedures, and installation precautions shall be followed in strict compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. Curing compound shall not be used on concrete surfaces to be coated, waterproofed, or moistureproofed. 3.06 PROTECTION Concrete shall be protected from injurious action by sun, rain, flowing water, frost and mechanical injury. 3.07 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS Construction joints shall be located and formed as specified. A rough surface of exposed concrete aggregates shall be produced using a surface retardant at construction joints. The limit of


the treated surfaces shall be 1 inch away from the joint edges. Within 24 hours after placing, retarded surface mortar shall be removed either by high pressure water jetting or stiff brushing or combination of both so as to expose coarse aggregates. A rough surface of exposed aggregate may also be produced by sandblasting followed by high pressure water jetting. Sandblasting, if used, shall remove 1/8 inch of laitance film and shall expose coarse aggregate to insure adequate bond. Reinforcing steel and welded wire fabric shall be continued across construction joints. Waterstops shall be provided in construction joints at locations as specified. 3.08 INSERTS AND EMBEDMENTS A. INSERTS: Where pipes, castings or conduits are to pass through structures, the Contractor shall place such pipes or castings in the forms before placing the concrete, or he may provide openings in the concrete for subsequent insertion of such pipes, castings or conduits. Such openings shall be provided with waterstops and V-shaped construction joint as shown and shall have a slight flare to facilitate grouting and permit the escape of entrained air during grouting. Additional reinforcement shall be provided around large openings as shown. The grout shall be nonshrink grout as specified in Section 03600. B. EMBEDMENTS: Gate frames, gate thimbles, special castings, channels or other miscellaneous metal parts that are to be embedded in the concrete shall be set and secured in the forms prior to concrete place-ment. Unless otherwise specified, anchor bolts and inserts shall be embedded in concrete as shown. The Contractor shall provide inserts, anchors or other bolts necessary for the attachment of piping, valves, metal parts and equipment. Operators or sleeves for gate or valve stems shall be positioned to clear reinforcing steel, conduit and other embedments, and to align accurately with equipment. 3.09 EXPANSION JOINTS Expansion joints shall be as specified. Reinforcement or other embedded metal items bonded to the concrete shall not extend through expansion joints unless detailed otherwise. 3.10 MODIFICATION OF EXISTING CONCRETE Existing concrete shall be removed and the remaining surfaces resurfaced as specified. The remaining concrete shall be protected from damage. Clean lines shall be made by sawing through the existing concrete. The concrete may be broken out after initial saw cuts in the event thickness prevents cutting through. Where it is not possible to use a saw, the initial cuts shall be made with chipping hammers. These cuts shall be sufficient to prevent damage to the remaining concrete. In general, an opening in existing concrete shall be oversized 1 inch on all sides and built back to the correct dimension with an epoxy grout. Where oversized openings cannot be made, the concrete shall be cut to the correct dimension, with the exposed reinforcing cut back an additional 1 inch and


the resulting hole filled with epoxy grout. Cut or broken concrete surfaces shall be resurfaced with an epoxy grout. Concrete surfaces to be coated shall be dry. Where new concrete adjoins existing concrete surfaces or surfaces which have been cut, such surfaces shall be cleaned by sandblasting to remove laitance, loose coatings and foreign materials, and coated with the bonding compound just prior to the placement of the new concrete. Bonding compounds shall be as specified in paragraph 03300-2.05. Unless otherwise specified, continuity of reinforcing steel shall be obtained across the joint either by exposing existing bars to provide sufficient laps with new bars or by welding existing bars with new bars. Dowels shall be drilled and set with epoxy grout into existing concrete. 3.11 FORMED SURFACE FINISHES A. REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS: Surface defects, including tie holes, minor honeycombing or otherwise defective concrete shall be repaired in accordance with ACI 301, Chapter 9. Areas to be patched shall be cleaned. Patches on exposed surfaces shall be finished to match the adjoining surfaces after they have set. Patches shall be cured as specified for the concrete. B. FINISHING: 1. FINISH A: Finish A shall be a grout clean finish in accordance with ACI 301, Section 10.3.2. Surfaces shall be lightly sandblasted prior to sacking. For interior areas not exposed to moisture or weather, water used in the mortar shall be mixed with a PVA bonding compound as recommended by the manufacturer. Unless otherwise specified, Finish A shall be provided for all surfaces exposed to view, both painted and unpainted. 2. FINISH B: Finish B shall be the same as Finish A, except that the final burlap rubbing may be omitted, providing the steel trowel scraping removes the loose buildup from the surface. Finish B shall be provided for waterproof and moistureproof coated surfaces. 3. FINISH C: Finish C shall be a finish which has surface imperfections less than 3/8 inch in any dimension. Surface imperfections greater than 3/8 inch shall be repaired or removed and the affected areas neatly patched. Finish C or smoother shall be provided for otherwise unfinished surfaces. 4. FINISH D: Unless otherwise specified, Finish D shall be the finish for surfaces not exposed to view in the finish work or by other construction, which may be left as they come from the forms, except that tie holes shall be plugged and defects greater than 1/2 inch in any dimension shall be repaired.


3.12 SLAB FINISHES A. GENERAL: Where finish is not specified, floor slabs shall receive steel troweling. Dry cement shall not be used on new concrete surfaces to absorb excess moisture. Edges shall be rounded to a radius of 1/2 inch. Joints shall be grooved to a radius and depth of 1/4 inch each. B. FLOAT FINISH: Float finish shall conform to ACI 301, Section 11.7.2. Floating shall be performed with a hand or power-driven float. Floating of any one area shall be the minimum necessary to produce the finish specified. Floating shall compact and smooth the surface and close any cracks and checking of surfaces. Float finish shall be applied to surfaces of channel and tank bottom slabs and to footings. C. STEEL TROWEL FINISH: Steel trowel finish shall conform to ACI 301, Section 11.7.3. Immediately after final troweling, the surface shall be cured and protected as specified in paragraphs 03300-3.05 and 03300-3.06. Steel trowel finish shall be provided on floors unless specified otherwise. D. BROOMED FINISH: Broomed finish shall conform to ACI 301, Section 11.7.4. Broomed finish shall be provided for walks, tops of walls, slabs on grade exposed to atmosphere, and where otherwise specified. 3.13 FIELD SAMPLING AND TESTING OF CONCRETE Conform to Sections 01400 and 01410. 3.14 CLEANUP Upon completion of the work and prior to final inspection, the Contractor shall clean all concrete surfaces, except outside sidewalks or paved areas and those having curing and sealing compound. **END OF SECTION**


SECTION 03600

GROUT

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section specifies grout for column and other structural support bases, equipment bases, crack repair, surface repair and uses other than masonry. Grout for masonry is specified in Section 04200. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. QUALITY CONTROL BY CONTRACTOR: INSPECTION AND TESTING Conform to Sections 0400 and 01410. B. REFERENCES: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

ASTM C33 Concrete Aggregates

ASTM C40 Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete

ASTM C88 Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate

ASTM C117 Material Finer Than 75 µm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing

ASTM C136 REV A Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates


Reference Title


ASTM C289 Potential Reactivity of Aggregates (Chemical Method)

ASTM C881 Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete

ASTM C1107 Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink)

ASTM D2419 Standard Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate

1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Complete product literature and installation instructions for epoxy grout (all uses) and cementitious non-shrink grout.

2. Current ICBO Evaluation Report, or equivalent in other jurisdictions, for

epoxy grout and adhesives used for dowel and anchor setting. 3. Polymer concrete.

PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. GENERAL: Cementitious materials including cement, aggregates, water and admixtures shall conform to Section 03300. B. LUBRICANT FOR CEMENT PRESSURE GROUTING: Lubricant additive for cement pressure grouting shall be Intrusion Prepakt Intrusion Aid, Sika Intraplast N, or equal. 2.02 GROUT A. DRYPACK GROUT: Drypack grout shall be a mixture of approximately one part cement, 1-1/2 to 2 parts fine aggregate, water reducing retarder, and sufficient water to make a stiff workable mix.


B. CEMENTITIOUS NONSHRINK GROUT: Cementitious nonshrink grout is available with both metallic and nonmetallic aggregate. Metallic aggregate grout shall be Master Builders Embeco 636, Burke Company Metallic Spec Grout, Sonnoborn Ferrolith G Redimix, or equal. Nonmetallic aggregate grout shall be Five Star Products, Inc. Five Star Grout, Master Builders Masterflow 713, Burke Company Non-Ferrous, Non-Shrink Grout, Hi-Flow Grout by Euclid Chemical Company, or equal. C. EPOXY GROUT FOR DOWEL ANCHORAGE:

Except as noted below, epoxy grout shall be a high modulus, two-component, moisture insensitive, 100 percent solids, thermosetting modified polyamid epoxy compound. The consistency shall be a paste form capable of not sagging in horizontal or overhead anchoring configurations. Material shall conform to ASTM C881, Type IV, Grade 3, and shall have a heat deflection temperature in excess of 130 degrees F. Candidate manufacturers include Master Builders Concresive Standard Paste or SPL, and Sika Corporation Sikadur Hi-Mod Series, or equal.

D. EPOXY GROUT FOR CRACK REPAIR:

Epoxy for pressure grouting/crack injection shall be a two-component, moisture insensitive, high modulus, injection grade, 100 percent solids, blend of epoxy-resin compounds. The consis-tency shall be as required to achieve complete penetration in hairline cracks and larger. Material shall conform to ASTM C881, Type 1, Grade 1. Candidate manufacturers include Sika Corporation Sikadur 52, Master Builders SCB Concresive 1300 series, and Adhesive Technology Corporation SLV 300 series, or equal.

E. POLYMER CONCRETE (PROFILING MORTAR):

Polymer concrete (profiling mortar) for resurfacing or patching shall consist of a liquid binder and dry aggregate mixed together to make a mortar or grout of a consistency as required for the application. The liquid binder shall be a chemical and oil resistant, stress relieved, low modulus, moisture insensitive, two-component epoxy-resin compound. The consistency shall be similar to lightweight oil for proper mixing with aggregate. Material shall conform to ASTM C881, Type 3, Grade 1. Candidate manufacturers include Sika Corporation Sikadur Lo-Mod series, Master Builders Concresive 1490, and Adhesive Technology Corporation 400 series, or equal. Alternatively, polymer concrete may be a one-component, shrinkage compensated, polymer-modified cement based mortar, with or without fiber reinforcement. Candidate manufacturers include Master Builders R300 series, or equal.

The aggregate shall be oven dry in sealed packages until time of mixing, and shall be of size and consistency compatible with recommendations of manufacturer of liquid binder for intended application.


F. ADHESIVE FOR DOWEL AND ANCHOR SETTING: Adhesive for setting dowels and anchoring connection/baseplate bolts may either be tube applied or capsule style. Adhesive shall evidence approval for the use intended by ICBO certification report or other recognized and Code compliant agency.

Tube-applied adhesive shall be a modified epoxy formulation. Acceptable products include HY150 by Hilti, SET Adhesive by Simpson Strong-Tie Company, or equal. Adhesive resin capsules shall consist of sealed glass or foil capsules containing premeasured amounts of a polyester or vinylester resin, quartz sand aggregate and a hardener contained in a separate vial within the capsule. Acceptable adhesive capsule products include HVU by Hilti, Needle Capsule or Chem-Stud by Powers-Rawl, or equal. Capsule adhesives shall utilize the same manufacturer’s insert stud with chisel point, or Contractor shall demonstrate through submittal to the Engineer that the substitute proposed substantially meets or exceeds the geometric and material properties of same.

2.03 PRESSURE GROUTING EQUIPMENT Pressure grouting equipment shall include a mixer and holdover agitator tanks and shall be designed to place grout at pressures up to 50 psi. Gages shall be provided to indicate pressure used. The mixer shall be provided with a meter capable of indicating to one-tenth of a cubic foot the volume of grout used. 2.04 PRODUCT DATA The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300. A. MANUFACTURER'S DATA: Manufacturer's data shall be provided for the following: 1. Pressure grout 2. Pressure grout equipment B. LABORATORY TEST REPORTS: Test reports on previously tested materials shall be accompanied by the manufacturer's statement that the previously tested material is the same type, quality, manufacture, and make as that proposed for use in this project. Test reports are required for the following: 1. Cement 2. Aggregates 3. Retardants 4. Bonding compounds 5. Epoxy resin


PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL Bonding compound for use with grout is specified in Section 03300. Primer, if required for polymer concrete, shall be provided per manufacturer's recommendation. 3.02 DRYPACK GROUT Drypack grout shall be used for small or shallow built-up surfaces and minor repairs. Surfaces required to be built up with drypack grout shall be roughened by brushing, cleaned, and coated with the bonding compound specified in paragraph 03300-2.05 before the application of the grout. The drypack grout shall be applied immediately following the application of the bonding compound in bands or strips to form a covering of the required thickness. The covering shall be smooth. Construction joints in the grout shall be sloped and shall be cleaned and wetted before application is resumed. Drypack grout shall be cured in accordance with Section 03300. Grout shall not be placed during freezing weather unless adequate protection is provided. 3.03 CEMENTITIOUS NONSHRINK GROUT Nonshrink, cementitious, nonmetallic aggregate grout shall be used for column base plates, structural bearing plates, and all locations where the general term “non-shrink grout” is indicated on the drawings. Use of this grout to support the bearing surfaces of machinery shall be as specified in Section 11002 or as detailed on the Drawings for specific locations or pieces of equipment. If guidance in not provided in locations noted above, use of non-shrink grout for equipment mounting shall be limited to equipment less than 20 horsepower or 1,000 pounds. Grout shall be placed and cured in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.04 EPOXY GROUT FOR CRACK REPAIR AND DOWEL ANCHORAGE Epoxy grout shall be used for repairing cracks by pressure grouting or gravity flow, repairing structural concrete, and may be used for setting reinforcing dowels or anchor bolts into holes for grouting. Concrete shall be primed in accordance with the grout manufacturer's instructions. Use of epoxy grout and adhesives for anchorage of bolts or reinforcing dowels shall be subject to the following conditions:

1. Use shall be limited to locations where exposure, on an intermittent or continuous basis, to acid concentrations higher than 10 percent, to chlorine gas, or to machine or diesel oils, is extremely unlikely.


2. Use shall be limited to applications where exposure to fire or exposure to concrete or rod temperature above the product's heat deflection temperature or 120 degrees F (whichever is less) is extremely unlikely. Overhead applications (such as pipe supports) because of the above concerns, shall be disallowed.

3. Approval from Construction Manager for specific application and from

supplier of equipment to be anchored, if applicable. 4. Anchor diameter and grade of steel shall be per contract documents or per

equipment supplier specifications. Anchor shall be threaded or deformed full length of embedment and shall be free of rust, scale, grease, and oils.

5. Embedment depth and hole diameter shall be as specified. 6. Holes shall have rough surfaces, such as can be achieved using a rotary

percussion drill. 7. Holes shall be blown clean with compressed air and be free of dust or

standing water prior to application of grout. 8. Anchor shall be left undisturbed and unloaded for full curing period. 9. Anchors shall not be placed in concrete below 25 degrees F.

3.05 ADHESIVE CAPSULES Adhesive resin capsules may be used for setting and anchoring reinforcing dowels or anchor bolts into predrilled holes in concrete. Use of the adhesive resin capsules for anchorage of reinforcing dowels or bolts shall be as specified in paragraph 05501-3.03. 3.06 PRESSURE GROUTING Prior to grouting, systems and holes to be grouted shall be washed clean. Washing is not required for grouting soil voids outside pipe cylinders or casing pipes. Grouting, once commenced, shall be completed without stoppage. In case of breakdown of equipment, the Contractor shall wash out the grouting system sufficiently to ensure fresh grout and adequate bond and penetration will occur upon restarting the grouting operation. Grout pressure shall be maintained until grout has set.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 04200

UNIT MASONRY PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies masonry work consisting of concrete masonry units, general unreinforced and reinforced masonry construction. B. TYPE: Masonry work shall be constructed from units of concrete in combination with reinforcing, mortar, and grout as specified. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. REFERENCES: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, whether or not the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

ASTM A82 Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement

ASTM A90 Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles

ASTM A153 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware

ASTM C90 Hollow Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units

ASTM C91 Masonry Cement

ASTM C129 Non-Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units


Reference Title

ASTM C144 Aggregate for Masonry Mortar

ASTM C145 Solid Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units


ASTM C207 Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes

ASTM C270 Mortar for Unit Masonry

ASTM C404 Aggregates for Masonry Grout

ASTM C476 Grout for Masonry

ASTM C666 Resistance of Concrete to Rapid Freezing and Thawing

ASTM E514 Water Penetration and Leakage Through Masonry

OSSC 2004 Oregon Structural Specialty Code B. APPEARANCE: Source or supply of materials shall not be changed after the work has started if the appearance of the finished work would be affected. C. STRENGTH OF MASONRY ASSEMBLAGE: Specified strength of completed concrete masonry wall assemblage is f’m = 1,500 psi. Contractor may elect to certify masonry assemblage strength by either method 1 or 2 specified in this section:

1. Submit masonry manufacturer’s certification of unit strength and Contractor’s certification of conformance to OSSC Table 21-D to Construction Manager for review; or

2. Provide prism tests in accordance with Section 2405 (C) of the OSSC.

Seven-day test results of field samples shall be reported within 2 days of test. Conform to Sections 01400 and 01410. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300:

1. A copy of this specification section with addenda updates, and all referenced sections with addenda updates, with each paragraph check marked to show specification compliance or marked to show deviations.

2. Shop drawings showing details of bond beams and lintels.


3. Three representative full-size sample masonry units showing full range of color, texture, finish, and dimensions.

4. Grout mix design(s).

5. Confirmation testing for f’m.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: Cementitious materials shall be delivered to the site in unbroken containers, plainly marked and labeled with manufacturers' names and brands, stored in dry, weathertight enclosures to prevent entry of foreign materials and damage by water or dampness. Masonry units shall be stored off the ground and handled with care to avoid chipping and breakage. Materials shall be protected from damage and, except for sand, kept dry until used. Sand shall be covered to prevent intrusion of water and foreign materials and to prevent drying. Materials containing frost or ice shall not be used. 1.05 QUALITY CONTROL Conform to Sections 01400 and 01410. PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 MASONRY UNITS A. CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS: 1. GENERAL: Concrete masonry units shall be of modular dimensions and air, water, or steam cured. Unless otherwise specified, exposed surfaces of units shall be comparatively smooth and of uniform texture. Masonry units shall be colored standard concrete grey color. 2. HOLLOW LOAD-BEARING UNITS: Hollow load-bearing units shall conform to ASTM C90, Grade N, Type I, made with lightweight or normal weight aggregate. Load-bearing units shall be provided, unless otherwise specified. 3. SPECIAL SHAPES: Special shapes such as closures, header units, and jamb units shall be provided as necessary to complete the work. Special shapes shall conform to the requirements for the units with which they are used.


B. PRECAST CONCRETE LINTELS: Precast concrete lintels shall be of the same materials and surface texture as adjacent masonry units, with a 28-day compressive strength of not less than 1,500 psi. Reinforcing shall be provided as specified. Lintels shall be of sizes specified, straight and true, with at least 8 inches of bearing at each end. 2.02 MORTAR A. CEMENT: Cement shall be Portland cement conforming to ASTM C150, Type II, low alkali containing less than 0.60 percent alkalis. B. HYDRATED LIME: Hydrated lime shall conform to ASTM C207, Type S. C. SAND: Aggregate for mortar shall be sand conforming to ASTM C144. D. WATER: Water shall be clean, potable, and free from substances which could adversely affect the mortar. E. WATERPROOFING COMPOUND: Mortar shall contain an admixture of Master Builders Rheomix 235, Sonneborn Hydrocide Powder, or equal. F. MORTAR TYPES: Unless otherwise specified, mortar shall be ASTM C270, Type M. Waterproofing compound shall be added in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Air content shall not be less than 11 percent. G. PREMIXED MORTAR: Premixed mortar shall be ASTM C270, Type M for use as specified in paragraph 04200-2.02 G. Water proofing compound shall be added in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. Air content shall not be less than 11 percent.


H. ADMIXTURES: Admixtures may be used in mortar to retard curing and provide up to 36 hours of work-ability, provided that the admixture does not adversely affect bonding or compressive strength. 2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT:

Horizontal joint reinforcement shall be fabricated from cold drawn steel wire, ASTM A82. Wire shall be hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A153. Reinforcement shall be truss type with two or more longitudinal wires welded to a continuous diagonal cross wire, or ladder type with perpendicular cross wires not more than 16 inches o.c. Reinforcement shall be provided in flat sections 10 feet long, and preformed corners and tees approximately 30 inches long. Overall width shall be approximately 2-inches less than nominal thickness of wall. Provide only where noted on the drawings.

B. REINFORCING BARS: Reinforcing steel shall be as specified in Section 03200. 2.04 GROUT

A. GENERAL:

Grout shall comply with ASTM C476, shall use Type I cement, and shall be proportioned by volume to achieve the 28-day compressive strength of specified f’m. Grout shall have sufficient water added to produce a consistency for pouring without segregation. B. AGGREGATE: Aggregate shall comply with ASTM C404. C. FINE GROUT: Fine grout shall utilize sand, cement, water and admixtures. D. COARSE GROUT: Coarse grout shall utilize 3/8” pea gravel, sand, cement, water and admixtures.


2.05 PRODUCT DATA The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300. Informa-tion shall be received by the Construction Manager at least 14 days prior to the beginning of masonry work.

1. Reinforcing certificates showing compliance to the specifications shall be submitted for reinforcing steel, including reinforcing steel wire and joint reinforcing, as specified herein and in Section 03200.

2. Shop drawings showing details of anchors, adjustable wall ties, positioning

devices, and other accessories. 3. Manufacturer's data and descriptive literature for each type of masonry

accessory, premixed mortar, masonry cement, grout admixtures, and flashing. Clearly mark the data to indicate which type, size, or item the Contractor intends to provide. Data shall show conformance to specified requirements and Contractor's proposed usage details.

PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. GENERAL: Foundations for masonry work shall be straight, on-line, and level. All surfaces to be bonded with masonry shall be clean and free from laitance or foreign materials. Reinforcing dowels shall be in the correct location as specified. The placement and location of anchor ties, inserts, and other embedded items in concrete or other adjoining work shall be coordinated by the Contractor to suit the masonry work. B. PROTECTION:

1. Exposed surfaces shall be protected from mortar and other stains. When mortar joints are tooled, remove mortar from exposed surfaces with fiber brushes and wooden paddles. Base of walls shall be protected from splash stains by covering adjacent ground with sand, sawdust, or polyethylene.

2. Uniform loads shall not be applied for at least 12 hours or concentrated loads

for at least 72 hours after masonry is constructed. 3. Temporary bracing shall be provided as required to prevent damage during

construction. 4. Protective boards for polyester film shall be provided during job installation

to ensure no damage from building debris.


3.02 WORKMANSHIP Masonry shall be level and plumb. Story poles or gage rods shall be used throughout the work. Changes in coursing or bonding after the work is started will not be permitted; neither will carrying one section of the walls up in advance of the others be permitted. Unfinished work shall be stepped back for joining with new work; toothing will not be permitted. Heights of masonry at each floor and at sills and heads of openings shall be checked with an instrument to maintain the level of the walls. Door and window frames, louvered openings, anchors, pipes, ducts, and conduits shall be built in as the masonry work progresses. Spaces around metal door frames shall be filled solidly with mortar. Drilling, cutting, fitting, and patching to accommodate the work of others shall be performed by masonry mechanics. Masonry shall be cut with masonry saws for exposed work. Structural steelwork, bolts, anchors, inserts, plugs, ties, lintels, and miscellaneous metalwork shall be placed in position as the work progresses. Chases of approved dimensions for pipes and other purposes shall be provided where specified and necessary. Tops of exposed walls and partitions not being worked on shall be covered with a waterproof membrane secured in place and extended down at least 2 feet on both sides. 3.03 MORTAR MIXING Mortar materials shall be measured in 1 cubic foot containers to maintain control and accuracy of proportions; measuring materials with shovels is not permitted. Mortar shall be mixed in a mechanical batch mixer for not less than 3 nor more than 5 minutes after all ingredients are in so as to produce a uniform mixture. Water shall be added gradually as required to produce a workable consistency. Mortar not formulated to include retarding admixtures, which has not been placed in final position within 2-1/2 hours after the initial mixing, shall not be retempered and used. Use of antifreeze compounds, salts, or other substances to lower the freezing point of mortar is prohibited. Mortar shall be mixed in accordance with ASTM C270 to obtain type mortar required. Where colored mortars are required, pigments may be added at the site or provided as part of prepackaged mortar mix. When masonry cement is used, mixing shall conform to printed instructions of the masonry cement manufacturer. 3.04 MORTAR JOINTS Mortar joints shall be a uniform thickness of 3/8-inch unless otherwise specified. Exposed joints shall be tooled slightly concave with a round or other suitable jointer when the mortar is thumbprint hard except where otherwise required to match existing construction. For horizontal joints, jointers shall be at least 12 inches long for brickwork and 16 inches long for concrete masonry. Jointers shall be slightly larger than the width of the joint so that complete contact is made along the edges of the units, compressing and sealing the surface of the joint. Joints that will not be exposed shall be struck flush. Vertical joints shall be tooled first. Horizontal joints shall be level; vertical joints shall be plumb and in alignment from top to bottom of wall within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/2 inch in 40 feet.


3.05 TOLERANCES Masonry work shall be within the following limits:

1. Pilasters and Columns: 1/4 inch from true line.

2. Face of Brick: 1/32 inch from face of adjacent brick.

3. Face of Concrete Masonry Unit: 1/16 inch from face of adjacent unit.

4. Variation from True Plane: 1/4 inch in 10 feet and 1/2 inch maximum in 20 feet or more.

5. Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch in each story, noncumulative and 1/2 inch maximum in two stories or more.

6. Variation from Level: 1/8 inch in 3 feet, 1/4 inch in 10 feet, and 1/2 inch maximum.

7. Variation in Wall Thickness: Plus or minus 1/4 inch. 3.06 CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT WORK A. GENERAL: The first course shall be laid in a full bed of mortar for the full width of the unit. Succeeding courses shall be laid in running bond unless otherwise specified. Bed-joints shall be formed by applying the mortar to the entire top surfaces of the inner and outer face shells and to head joints by applying the mortar for a width of about 1 inch to the ends of the adjoining units. The mortar shall be of such thickness that it will be forced out of the joints as the units are placed in position. Where anchors, bolts, and ties occur within the cells of the units, metal lath shall be placed in the joint at the bottom of such cells and the cells filled with mortar or grout as the work progresses. Concrete masonry units shall not be dampened before or during laying. B. REINFORCED CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT WALLS: Where vertical reinforcement occurs, cores shall be filled solid with grout, and units laid in such a manner as to preserve the unobstructed vertical continuity of cores to be filled. Adjacent webs shall be embedded in mortar to prevent leakage of grout, and mortar fins protruding from joints removed before grout is placed. Minimum clear dimensions of vertical cores shall be 2 by 3 inches. Reinforcing shall be positioned and held accurately before placing grout by tying or by using bar positioners at maximum 8-foot intervals. Vibrator shall be used to consolidate the grout. Minimum clear distance between masonry and vertical reinforcement shall be 1/2 inch. Unless otherwise specified, splices shall be formed by lapping bars not less than 40 bar diameters.


3.07 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT If noted on the drawings, reinforcement shall be provided at 16-inch spacing in all masonry walls. Reinforcement shall be continuous except at control joints and expansion joints. Rein-forcement above and below openings shall extend not less than 24 inches beyond each side of openings. Reinforcement shall be provided in the longest available lengths, utilizing the minimum number of splices. Welded L-shaped assemblies and welded T-shaped assemblies to match the straight reinforcement shall be provided at corners and intersections of walls and partitions.

3.08 CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT LINTELS AND BOND BEAMS Special units, lintels, and bond beams shall have cells filled solidly with grout or concrete, and provided with not less than two No. 5 reinforcing bars, unless otherwise specified. Reinforcing shall overlap a minimum of 40 bar diameters at splices. Bond beams and reinforcing shall terminate on each side of expansion joints. Concrete masonry units used for lintels and bond beams shall have exposed surfaces of the same material and texture as the adjoining masonry units. Bond beam units shall be produced from standard vertically-voided units with precut knock-out cross walls. Lintels shall be straight and true and shall have at least 8 inches of bearing at each end. Lintels shall set at least 6 days before shoring is removed. 3.09 GROUT A. GENERAL: Fine grout shall be provided in grout spaces which are less than 2 inches in any horizontal dimension after deducting the thickness of horizontal reinforcing or in which clearance between reinforcing and masonry is less than 3/4 inch. Coarse grout shall be provided in grout spaces which are 2 inches or greater in all horizontal dimensions after deducting the thickness of horizontal reinforcing provided the clearance between reinforcing and masonry is not less than 3/4 inch. For a coarse grout pour over 6 feet high, increase grout space minimum horizontal dimension to 3 inches. B. PLACEMENT: Grout shall be placed from the interior side of walls, except as approved otherwise. Sills, ledges, offsets, and other surfaces shall be protected from grout droppings. Prior to grouting, the grout space shall be clean so that all spaces to be filled with grout do not contain mortar projections greater than 1/2 inch, mortar droppings, or other foreign material. Grout shall be well mixed to prevent segregation, shall be sufficiently fluid to flow into joints and around reinforcing without leaving voids, and shall be placed by pumping or pouring from buckets equipped with spouts. Grout shall be placed in a continuous pour in grout lifts not exceeding 6 feet. At grout pours exceeding 6 feet, cleanouts shall be provided in the bottom course at every vertical bar but shall not be spaced more than 32 inches on center for solidly grouted masonry. Pours shall be 1-1/2 inches below the top of masonry units in top course, except at the finish course. Grout shall be agitated thoroughly to eliminate voids. Masonry displaced by grouting operation shall be removed and relaid in alignment with fresh mortar.


3.10 FORMS AND SHORING Contractor shall construct forms to the shape, lines, and dimensions of members indicated and make sufficiently rigid to prevent deflections which may result in cracking or other damage to supported masonry. Forms shall not be removed until members have cured. 3.11 CLEANING Contractor shall protect work which may be damaged, stained, or discolored during cleaning operations. Exposed masonry surfaces shall be cleaned with clear water and stiff fiber brushes and rinsed with clear water. Where stains, mortar, or other soil remain, scrubbing shall continue with warm water and detergent. Immediately after cleaning, each area shall be rinsed thoroughly with clear water. Damaged, stained, and discolored work shall be restored to original condition or replaced with new work.

3.12 COLD WEATHER CONDITIONS A. CONSTRUCTION: During cold weather, that is, when the air temperature is below 40 degrees F and falling, or when it appears that the air temperature will drop to 40 degrees F or below within 24 hours, Contractor shall not lay masonry unless the work is protected from freezing as specified below. Surfaces receiving mortar shall be free of ice and frost. The following requirements shall be adhered to:

1. Air Temperature 40 to 32 Degrees F: Heat sand or mixing water to produce mortar temperature between 40 and 120 degrees F.

2. Air Temperature 32 to 25 Degrees F: Heat sand and mixing water to

produce mortar temperature between 40 and 120 degrees F. 3. Air Temperature 25 to 20 Degrees F: Heat sand and mixing water to

produce mortar temperature between 40 and 120 degrees F. Use other heat sources on both sides of walls under construction. Use windbreaks when wind is in excess of 15 mph.

4. Air Temperature 20 Degrees F and Below: Heat sand and mixing water to

produce mortar temperature between 40 and 120 degrees F. Provide enclosures and auxiliary heat to maintain air temperature above 32 degrees F on both sides of walls under construction. Ascertain that temperatures of masonry units are not less than 20 degrees F when units are laid.


B. PROTECTION: Newly laid masonry shall be protected as specified below for the respective mean daily air temperature (MDAT), that is, the average of the daytime high temperature and the forecasted nighttime low temperature.

1. MDAT 40 to 32 degrees F: Protect masonry from rain and snow by covering the top 4 feet with weather-resistive membrane for 24 hours after laying.

2. MDAT 32 to 25 degrees F: Completely cover newly-laid masonry with

weather-resistive membrane for 24 hours. 3. MDAT 25 to 20 degrees F: Completely cover newly-laid masonry with

insulating blankets and weather-resistive membrane for 24 hours. 4. MDAT 20 degrees F and Below: Maintain temperature of masonry above

32 degrees F for 24 hours by providing enclosures and supplementary heat or other approved means.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 05501 ANCHOR BOLTS PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section specifies anchor bolts complete with washers and nuts. Unless otherwise specified, anchor bolts shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 1.02 REFERENCES This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

ASCE 7-02 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures

ASTM A36/A36M Structural Steel

ASTM A307 Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength

ASTM A320/A320M Alloy-Steel Bolting Materials for Low Temperature Service

OSSC 2004 Oregon Structural Specialty Code, based on the 2003 IBC

1.03 INSPECTION AND TESTING: Conform to Sections 01400 and 01410 and ICBO Evaluation Report requirements.


1.04 SUBMITTALS: The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300:


2. Adhesive, capsule and mechanical anchors for use in hardened concrete

including: load capacities, chemical resistance, temperature limitations, and installation instructions.

3. Information on the installation and product data for equipment anchor sleeves

4. Coordinate with Section 01900 and all equipment submittals.

PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL Anchor bolt holes in equipment support frames shall not exceed the bolt diameters by more than 25 percent, up to a limiting maximum oversizing of 1/4 inch. Unless otherwise specified, minimum anchor bolt diameter shall be 1/2 inch. Anchor bolts for equipment mounting and vibration isolation systems shall be provided as specified in Sections 11002 and 11021, respectively. Tapered washers shall be provided where mating surface is not square with the nut. Expansion, wedge, or adhesive anchors set in holes drilled in the concrete after the concrete is placed will not be permitted in substitution for anchor bolts except where otherwise specified. Upset threads shall not be acceptable.


2.02 MATERIALS Anchor bolt materials shall be as specified below:

Material Specification

Steel bolts ASTM A307, Grade A

Fabricated steel bolts and anchor rods

ASTM A36 or FI554 where noted

Stainless steel bolts, nuts, washers ASTM A320, Type 316a

Expansion anchors HILTI-BOLT, McCulloch Industries, or equal

Wedge anchors ITT, Phillips Drill Co., or equal.

Adhesive anchors HILTI-HVA, PARABOND Capsule, or equal a Use Type 304 where specified. 2.03 DESIGN Anchor bolts for equipment frames and foundations shall be designed to also meet the requirements of Section 01900. 2.04 PRODUCT DATA The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300 for all bolt systems not cast-in-place:

1. Evaluation report for expansion and wedge type anchors as specified in paragraph 05501-3.04.

2. Mill certifications for high-strength anchor rods

PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL Fieldwork, including cutting and threading, shall not be permitted on galvanized items. Dissimilar metals shall be protected from galvanic corrosion by means of pressure tapes, coatings or isolators. Grouting of anchor bolts with non-shrink or epoxy grouts, where specified, shall be in accordance with Section 03600.


3.02 CAST-IN-PLACE ANCHOR BOLTS Anchor bolts to be embedded in concrete shall be placed accurately and held in correct position while the concrete is placed or, if specified, recesses or blockouts shall be formed in the concrete and the metalwork shall be grouted in place in accordance with Section 03300. The surfaces of metalwork in contact with concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned. After anchor bolts have been embedded, their threads shall be protected by grease and the nuts run on. 3.03 ADHESIVE ANCHOR BOLTS Use of adhesive or capsule anchors shall be subject to the following conditions:

1. Use shall be limited to locations where exposure, on an intermittent or continuous basis, to acid concentrations higher than 10 percent, to chlorine gas, or to machine or diesel oils, is extremely unlikely.

2. Use shall be limited to applications where exposure to fire or exposure to

concrete or rod temperature above 120 degrees F is extremely unlikely. Overhead applications (such as pipe supports) because of the above concerns, shall be disallowed.

3. Approval from Project Manager for specific application and from supplier of

equipment to be anchored, if applicable. 4. Anchor diameter and grade of steel shall be per contract documents or per

equipment supplier specifications. Anchor shall be threaded or deformed full length of embedment and shall be free of rust, scale, grease, and oils.

5. Embedment depth shall be as specified. Adhesive capsules of different

diameters may be used to obtain proper volume for the embedment, but no more than two capsules per anchor may be used. When installing different diameter capsules in the same hole, the larger diameter capsule shall be installed first. Any extension or protrusion of the capsule from the hole is prohibited.

6. All installation recommendations by the anchor system manufacturer shall

be followed carefully, including maximum hole diameter. 7. Holes shall have rough surfaces, such as can be achieved using a rotary

percussion drill. 8. Holes shall be blown clean with compressed air and be free of dust or

standing water prior to installation.


9. Anchor shall be left undisturbed and unloaded for full adhesive curing period.

10. Concrete temperature (not air temperature) shall be compatible with curing

requirements of adhesives per adhesive manufacturer. Anchors shall not be placed in concrete below 25 degrees F.

3.04 EXPANSION ANCHORS Use of expansion or wedge type anchors shall be subject to conditions 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, and 8 specified in paragraph 05501-3.03. The Contractor shall supply the Project Manager with the current evaluation report from IBCO for the particular brand of expansion anchors to be used.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 05505 MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section specifies miscellaneous metalwork, which consists of custom fabricated steel, alloy steel, and aluminum metalwork other than structural metalwork. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. GENERAL: Shop and field welding shall conform to the requirements of the AISC or Aluminum Association as applicable. The use of salvaged, reprocessed or scrap materials will not be permitted. B. REFERENCES: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

AISC Manual of Steel Construction

American Institute of Steel Construction, Manual of Steel Construction, 13th Edition

ASCE 7-02 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures



Reference Title

ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION

Aluminum Design Manual 2000 by the Aluminum Association, including Specification and Standards.

ASTM A48 Gray-Iron Castings


ASTM A283/A283M Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars

ASTM A276 Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes

ASTM A307 Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners

ASTM A380 Cleaning, Descaling, and Passivation of Stainless Steel Parts, Equipment, and Systems

ASTM A320/ A320M Alloy-Steel Bolting Materials for Low Temperature Service

ASTM A500 Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes

OSSC 2004 Oregon Structural Specialty Code 1.03 SUBMITTALS The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300:

1. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks (3) shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the Contractor, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. The Engineer shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.


2. Shop drawings containing the following information:

a. Erection views, plan and elevation as appropriate, of completed assemblies including connection hardware;

b. Detail drawings of fabricated pieces, including sections, size and thicknesses, material proposed for use, dimensions, camber, and welds (if any).

c. Complete structural properties for similar sections and hardware proposed to substitute for those indicated on the drawings or specified herein.

3. QA/QC plan for welding inspection and acceptance procedures, shop and

field (Required only for items and assemblies which must resist OSSC designated force levels).

4. Mill certificates for all materials and hardware (Required only for items and

assemblies which must resist OSSC designated force levels). PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS Materials for miscellaneous metalwork shall be provided as specified below:

Material Specification

Nonstructural steel bars, angles, clips, and similar items

ASTM A36 or ASTM A283

Iron castings ASTM A48

Hollow structural shapes ASTM A500, Grade B

Steel bolts ASTM A307, Grade A

Stainless steel bolts ASTM A320, Class 1

Stainless steel ASTM A276, Type 316

Aluminum shapes, plates ASTM B308, 6061-T6, or 6063-T6

Headed, welded studs (HWS) and threaded, welded studs

Low Carbon Steel per ASTM A108 Grades 1010-1020

Deformed bar anchors (DBA) Low Carbon Steel per ASTM A496


2.02 FABRICATION A. GENERAL: Conform to AISC or Aluminum Association standards as applicable. Where Code defined loads apply, also conform to OSSC requirements. Holes shall be punched 1/16 inch larger than the nominal size of the bolts, unless otherwise specified. Whenever needed, because of the thickness of the metal, holes shall be subpunched and reamed or shall be drilled. Fabrication including cutting, drilling, punching, threading and tapping required for miscellaneous metal or adjacent work shall be performed prior to hot-dip galvanizing. B. SEAT ANGLES, SUPPORTS AND BRACKETS: Seat angles over slide gate guides shall be welded to the guides. Seat angles for grating, supports for floor plates, and brackets for piping shall match the supported item’s material and if steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. C. POWER DRIVEN PINS: Power driven pins may be used in interior locations of nonprocess areas. Pins shall be heat treated steel alloy in accordance with AISI 1062 or 4063 and shall be zinc-plated. Pins shall have capped or threaded heads capable of transmitting the loads the shanks are required to support. Pins that are connected to steel shall have longitudinal serrations around the circumference of the shank. Complete information describing pin capacities and connections shall be provided to the Construction Manager. Proposed use and locations shall be approved by the Construction Manager prior to their use. D. IRON CASTINGS: Castings shall be as specified on the drawings. Castings weighing less than 100 pounds shall be hot-dip galvanized after machining. Castings weighing greater than 100 pounds shall be galvanized where specified.

E. STUDS AND DEFORMED BAR ANCHORS

Acceptable HWS shall be Nelson (a division of TRW) H4L or S3L based on size and application. Threaded studs shall be Nelson CPL or FFP. Acceptable DBA shall be Nelson D2L. Equivalent products from other manufacturers shall be submitted for review, including sufficient information to determine equivalency.


F. OTHER MISCELLANEOUS STEEL METALWORK: Other miscellaneous steel metalwork including embedded and nonembedded steel metalwork, hangers and inserts shall be as specified on the drawings. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. GENERAL: Fieldwork shall not be permitted on galvanized items. Drifting of bolts or enlargement of holes to correct misalignment will not be allowed. Dissimilar metals shall be protected from galvanic corrosion by means of pressure tapes, coatings or isolators. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry surfaces, contact surface shall be coated with heavy alkali-resistant bituminous paint. Metalwork to be embedded in concrete shall be placed accurately and held in correct position while the concrete is placed or, if specified, recesses or blockouts shall be formed in the concrete. The surfaces of metalwork in contact with or embedded in concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned. If accepted, recesses may be neatly cored in the concrete after it has attained its design strength and the metalwork grouted in place. Embedments shall be as specified in Section 03300. B. SEAT ANGLES, SUPPORTS AND GUIDES: Seat angles for grating and supports for floor plates shall be set so that they are flush with the floor and also maintain the grating and floor plates flush with the floor. C. POWER DRIVEN PINS: Power driven pins shall be set by a craftsman who is certified by the manufacturer. Pins shall be driven in one initial movement by an instantaneous force that has been selected to attain the required penetration. Driven pins shall conform to the following:

Material penetrated

by pin Penetrated material’s minimum thickness

Penetration of pin’s shank in supporting

material

Minimum space from center of pin’s shank to edge of penetrated matl.

Minimum pin spacing

Concrete 16D 6D minimum 14D 20D

Steel 1/4 inch Steel thickness plus 2D 4D 7D Where D = pin shank diameter. When required by the Construction Manager, pullout tests shall be carried out by the Contractor to prove the effectiveness of the anchorage and the capacity of the pin.


3.02 FINISHES:

Fabricated metalwork which is not embedded in concrete shall be finished according to Section 09900. For items not specified in that section conform to the following:

Item/Material Finish

Steel fabrications – Process or wet areas Hot dip galvanized

Steel fabrications – Dry areas Shop prime, field paint (urethane exterior, epoxy interior)

Aluminum fabrications Mill finish, cleaned, clear annodized except grating, beams and columns

Stainless steel fabrications and hardware Mill finish, pickled and passivated per ASTM A380

Steel hardware Hot dip galvanize or mechanical zinc coating depending upon size

3.03 CLEANING: After installation, damaged surfaces of shop primed metals shall be cleaned and touched up with the same material used for the shop coat. Damaged surfaces of galvanized metals shall be repaired as specified in Section 05910. All surfaces shall be properly cleaned or prepared for finishing if specified elsewhere. **END OF SECTION**


SECTION 05530 GRATING PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section specifies steel and aluminum floor grating. FRP grating is specified in Section 06610. 1.02 REFERENCES This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

AISC American Institute of Steel Construction, Manual of Steel Construction, Allowable Stress Design-13th Ed.

ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION

Aluminum Design Manual 2000


ASTM A569/A569M Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot Rolled, Commercial Quality

ASTM B210 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes

ASTM B221 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes and Tubes

CAL/OSHA State of California Construction Safety Orders



PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. ALUMINUM: Aluminum grating bearing bars shall be of alloy 6061-T6 conforming to ASTM B221. Aluminum grating cross bars shall be of an alloy conforming to either ASTM B221 (extrusions) or B210 (drawn). B. STEEL: Steel grating bearing bars and cross bars shall be of welding quality mild carbon steel conforming to ASTM A569. 2.02 FABRICATION A. GENERAL: Rough weld beads and sharp metal edges on gratings and plates shall be ground smooth. Welds exposed to view shall be uniform and neat. Welds to be galvanized shall be sandblasted prior to galvanizing. Holes shall be punched 1/16 inch larger than the nominal size of the bolts, unless otherwise specified. Whenever needed, because of the thickness of the metal, holes shall be subpunched and reamed or shall be drilled. Cutting, drilling, punching, threading and tapping shall be performed prior to hot-dip galvanizing. B. GRATING: 1. GENERAL: Grating shall be of material as specified on the Drawings. Both bearing bars and cross bars shall be continuous. Openings shall be banded with bars having the same dimensions as the bearing bars. Perimeter edges shall be banded with bars flush at the top surface of the grating and 1/4 inch clear of the bottom surface. Bars terminating against edge bars shall be welded to the edge bars when welded construction is used. When crimped or swaged construction is used, bars at edges shall protrude a maximum of 1/16 inch and shall be peened or ground to a smooth surface. No single piece of grating shall weigh more than 80 pounds unless specifically detailed otherwise. FRP grating is specified in Section 06610. 2. ALUMINUM GRATING: Unless otherwise specified, grating shall be fabricated of aluminum. Bearing bars shall be punched to receive the cross bars. After insertion in the bearing bars, cross bars shall be deformed by a hydraulic press or similar means to permanently lock the bars into the bearing bar openings. Fabrication methods employing bending or notching of bearing or cross bars will not be permitted. Aluminum grating shall be Gary Galok, Seidelhuber, or equal.


SECTION 05910

HOT-DIP ZINC COATING PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section specifies hot-dip zinc coating. 1.02 REFERENCES This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

ASTM A123 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

ASTM A143 Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of Hot-Dip Galvanized Structural Steel Products and Procedure for Detecting Embrittlement


ASTM A384 Safeguarding Against Warpage and Distortion During Hot-Dip Galvanizing of Steel Assemblies

ASTM A385 Providing High-Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot-Dip)

ASTM A780 Repair of Damaged Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings

MILSPEC DOD-P-21035

Paint, High Zinc Dust Content, Galvanizing Repair


PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. ZINC COATING: Zinc coating material shall be as specified in ASTM A153. B. ZINC DUST-ZINC OXIDE COATING: Zinc dust-zinc oxide coating shall conform to MILSPEC DOD-P-21035. Coating shall be as manufactured by Z.R.C. Chemical Products Co., Galvicon Co., or equal. 2.02 FABRICATION REQUIREMENTS Fabrication practices for products to be galvanized shall be in accordance with applicable portions of ASTM A143, A384 and A385. 2.03 PRODUCT DATA The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300:

1. Zinc dust-zinc oxide coating manufacturer's product data showing conformance to the specified product.

2. Manufacturer's recommendation for application of zinc dust-zinc oxide

coating. 3. Coating applicator's Certificate of Compliance that the hot-dip galvanized

coating meets or exceeds the specified requirements of ASTM A123 or A153, as applicable.

PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION Steel members, fabrications and assemblies shall be galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123. Unless otherwise specified, steel items weighing 100 pounds or less shall be hot-dip zinc coated. Anchor bolts and nuts 5/8 inch and larger shall be hot-dip zinc coated in accordance with ASTM A153. Anchor bolts and nuts smaller than 5/8 inch and all other bolts, screws, nuts, washers and other minor steel fasteners shall be mechanically zinc coated as specified in Section 05911.


3.02 COATING REQUIREMENTS Coating weight shall conform with paragraph 5.1 of ASTM A123 or Table 1 of ASTM A153, as appropriate. 3.03 REPAIR OF DEFECTIVE GALVANIZED COATING Where zinc coating has been damaged after installation, substrate surface shall be first cleaned and then repaired with zinc dust-zinc oxide coating in accordance with ASTM A780. Application shall be as recommended by the zinc dust-zinc oxide coating manufacturer. Coating shall consist of multiple coats to dry film thickness of 8 mils. Items not physically damaged, but which have insufficient or deteriorating zinc coatings, and items damaged in shipment or prior to installation, shall be removed from the project site for repair by the hot-dip zinc coating method.

**END OF SECTION**


3. STEEL GRATING: Steel grating shall be used only where specified. Steel grating shall be welded, hot-dip galvanized. Notching, slotting, or cutting the top or bottom edges of bearing bars to receive cross bars will not be permitted unless each intersection of bars is fully welded to restore each bearing bar to its full cross-sectional strength. Steel grating shall be Irving Type IWA, Gary Type GW, or equal. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. GENERAL: Fieldwork shall not be permitted on galvanized items. Drifting of bolts or enlargement of holes to correct misalignment will not be allowed. Dissimilar metals shall be protected from galvanic corrosion by means of pressure tapes, coatings or isolators. Aluminum in contact with concrete or masonry shall be protected by a heavy coat of bituminous paint. Metalwork to be embedded in concrete shall be placed accurately and held in correct position while the concrete is placed or, if specified, recesses or blockouts shall be formed in the concrete after it has attained its design strength and the metalwork grouted in place as specified in Section 03300. The surfaces of metalwork in contact with or embedded in concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned. If accepted, recesses may be neatly cored in the concrete. B. GRATING: Grating shall be field measured for proper cutouts and proper sizes. Field welding of aluminum grating and cover plates, where specified, shall be in accordance with ASCE Vol. 88-ST6. 3.02 CLEANING After installation, surfaces of galvanized metals shall be repaired as specified in Section 05910. Clean all items and, if a finish coating is specified in Section 09900, prepare for that work. **END OF SECTION**


SECTION 05911

MECHANICAL ZINC COATING PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section specifies mechanically applied zinc coating. This coating shall be used on steel fasteners including bolts, screws, nuts and washers. Anchor bolts are coated as specified in Section 05910. Electroplated corrosion protection is not an acceptable substitute for mechanical zinc coating. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ZINC COATING THICKNESS: Coating thickness shall be Class 50 as specified in ASTM B695. B. REFERENCES: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title


ASTM B695 Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel


PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS The coating material shall be as specified in ASTM A153. 2.02 PRODUCT DATA In accordance with Section 01300, information shall be provided that describes materials and method of coating used. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 FIELD REPAIR Damaged surfaces of zinc coated metals shall be repaired as specified in Section 05910.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 09900

COATING SYSTEMS

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies coating systems, surface preparations, and application requirements. B. DEFINITIONS: Specific coating terminology used in this section is in accordance with definitions contained in ASTM D16, ASTM D3960, and the following definitions: 1. Dry Film Thickness (DFT): The thickness of one fully cured continuous

application of coating. 2. Field Coat: The application or the completion of application of the coating

system after installation of the surface at the site of the work. 3. Shop Coat: One or more coats applied in a shop or plant prior to shipment to

the site of erection or fabrication, where the field or finishing coat is applied. 4. Tie Coat: An intermediate coat used to bond different types of paint coats.

Coatings used to improve the adhesion of a succeeding coat. 5. Photochemically Reactive Organic Material: Any organic material that will

react with oxygen, excited oxygen, ozone or other free radicals generated by the action of sunlight on components in the atmosphere giving rise to secondary contaminants and reaction intermediates in the atmosphere which can have detrimental effects.

6. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: The portion of the coating that

is a compound of carbon, is photochemically reactive, and evaporates during drying or curing, expressed in grams per liter or pounds per gallon.

7. Touch-Up Painting: The application of paint on areas of painted surfaces to

repair marks, scratches, and areas where the coating has deteriorated to restore the coating film to an unbroken condition.


1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. REFERENCES: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

ASTM D16 Standard Terminology Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products

ASTM D2200 (SSPC-Vis1)

Pictorial Surface Preparation Standards for Painting Steel Surfaces

ASTM D3359 A Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test

ASTM D3960 Practice for Determining Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content of Paints and Related Coatings

ASTM D4417 Field Measurement of Surface Profile of Blast Cleaned Steel

F 595 B Federal Standard Colors

SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council Specifications, Vol. 2

ANSI/NSF 61 Drinking Water System Components Health Effects B. STANDARDIZATION: Materials and supplies provided shall be the standard products of manufacturers. Materials in each coating system shall be the products of a single manufacturer.


The standard products of manufacturers other than those specified will be accepted when it is demonstrated to the Construction Manager that they are equal in composition, durability, usefulness, and convenience for the purpose intended. Requests for substitutions will be considered, provided the following minimum conditions are met: 1. The proposed coating system shall use an equal or greater number of

separate coats to achieve the required dry film thickness. 2. The proposed coating system shall use coatings of the same generic type as

that specified. 3. Requests for substitution shall have directions for application and descriptive

literature which includes generic type, percent solids by volume, volatile organic content (grams per liter), and information confirming that the substitution is equal to the specified coating system.

4. The Contractor shall provide a list of references where paint of the same

generic type has been applied. The reference list shall give the project name, city, state, owner, phone number of owner, coating system reference and number, and year paint was applied.

1.03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE Materials shall be delivered to the job site in their original, unopened containers. Each container shall bear the manufacturer's name, coating type, batch number, date of manufacture, storage life, and special directions. Materials shall be stored in enclosed structures and shall be protected from weather and excessive heat or cold. Flammable materials shall be stored in accordance with state and local codes. Materials exceeding storage life recommended by the manufacturer shall be removed from the site. PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS The following list specifies the material requirements for coating systems. Coating systems are categorized by generic name followed by an identifying abbreviation. If an abbreviation has a suffix number, it is for the purpose of identifying subgroups within the coating system.

Coating System Manufacturer Primer Coat(s) Finish Coat(s)

Polyamine Epoxy Tnemec Tnemec-Glaze Series 280 Tnemec-Glaze Series 280


2.02 PRODUCT DATA Before materials are delivered to the job site, the Contractor shall provide the following information in accordance with Section 01300: 1. For each primer and finish coating, the Contractor shall furnish a Material

Safety Data Sheet (MSDS). 2. For each primer and finish coating, the Contractor shall provide the

manufacturer's application instructions which shall include the following: a. Surface preparation recommendations.

b. Primer type, where required.

c. Maximum dry and wet mil thickness per coat.

d. Minimum and maximum curing time between coats, including atmospheric conditions for each.

e. Curing time before submergence in liquid.

f. Thinner to be used with each paint.

g. Ventilation requirements.

h. Minimum atmospheric conditions during which the paint shall be applied.

i. Allowable application methods.

j. Maximum allowable moisture content.

k. Maximum storage life. 3. List of materials proposed to be used under this section and manufacturer's

data for each material. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 COATINGS A. GENERAL: Coating products shall not be used until the Construction Manager has inspected the materials and the coating manufacturer's technical representative has instructed the Contractor and Construction Manager in the surface preparation, mixing and application of each coating.


B. COATING SYSTEMS: 1. SHOP APPLIED PRIME COAT: Except as otherwise specified, prime coats may be shop- or field-applied. Shop-applied primer shall be compatible with the specified coating system and shall be applied at the minimum dry film thickness recommended by the manufacturer. Product data sheets identifying the shop primer used shall be provided to the on-site finish coat applicator. Adhesion tests shall be performed on the shop primer as specified in paragraph 09900-3.02 A. Damaged, deteriorated and poorly applied shop coatings that do not meet the requirements of this section shall be removed and the surfaces recoated. If the shop primer coat meets the requirements of this section, the field coating may consist of touching up the shop prime coat and then applying the finish coats to achieve the specified film thickness and continuity. 2. FIELD COATS: Field coats shall consist of one or more prime coats and one or more finish coats to build up the coating to the specified dry film thickness. Unless otherwise specified, finish coats shall not be applied until other work in the area is complete and until all previous coats have been inspected. C. COATING REQUIREMENTS: 1. EQUIPMENT, NONIMMERSED: All items of equipment, or parts of equipment which are not immersed in service, shall be shop primed and then finish coated in the field after installation with the specified or approved color. The methods, materials, application equipment and all other details of shop painting shall comply with these specifications. If the shop primer requires topcoating within a specified period of time, the equipment shall be finish coated in the shop and then touch-up painted after installation. 2. EQUIPMENT, IMMERSED: All items of equipment, or parts and surfaces of equipment which are immersed when in service, with the exception of pumps and valves shall have all surface preparation and coating work performed in the field. 3.02 PREPARATION A. GENERAL: Surfaces to be coated shall be clean and dry. Before applying coating or surface treatments, oil, grease, dirt, rust, loose mill scale, old weathered coatings, and other foreign substances shall be removed except as specified. Oil and grease shall be removed before mechanical cleaning is started. Where mechanical cleaning is accomplished by blast cleaning, the abrasive used shall be washed, graded and free of contaminants which might interfere with the adhesion of the coatings. The air used for blast cleaning shall be sufficiently free of oil and moisture to not cause detrimental contamination of the surfaces to be coated. The Contractor shall examine all surfaces to be coated and shall correct all surface defects before application of any coating. Clean cloths and clean fluids shall be used in solvent cleaning. Cleaning and painting shall be scheduled so that dust and spray from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. Hardware, hardware accessories, nameplates, data tags, machined surfaces, sprinkler


heads, electrical fixtures, and similar uncoated items which are in contact with coated surfaces shall be removed or masked prior to surface preparation and painting operations. Following completion of coating, removed items shall be reinstalled. Equipment adjacent to walls shall be disconnected and moved to permit cleaning and painting of equipment and walls and, following painting, shall be replaced and reconnected. The Contractor shall perform an adhesion test after proper cure in accordance with ASTM D3359 to demonstrate that (1) the shop coat adheres to the substrate, and (2) the specified field coatings adhere to the shop coat. Test results showing an adhesion rating of 5A on immersed surfaces and 4A or better on all other surfaces shall be considered acceptable. Where unacceptable test results are obtained, the Contractor shall be responsible for removing and reapplying the specified coatings at no expense to the Owner. B. METALLIC SURFACES: Metallic surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with applicable portions of surface preparation specifications of the Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) specified in each coating system. The profile depth of the surface to be coated shall be 20 to 25 percent of the coating dry film thickness as measured by Method C of ASTM D4417. Blast particle size shall be selected by the contractor to produce the specified surface profile. The solvent in solvent cleaning operations shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. Preparation of metallic surfaces shall be based upon comparison with SSPC-VIS1-89 (ASTM D2200), and as described herein. To facilitate inspection, the Contractor shall, on the first day of blasting operations, abrasive blast metal panels to the standards specified. Plates shall measure a minimum of 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches. Panels meeting the requirements of the specifications shall be initialed by the Contractor and the Construction Manager and coated with a clear nonyellowing finish. One of these panels shall be prepared for each type of abrasive blasting and shall be used as the comparison standard throughout the project. C. SOLVENT CLEANING: Any solvent wash, solvent wipe, or cleaner used, including but not limited to those used for surface preparation in accordance with referenced Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) specifications, shall be of the emulsifying type which emits no more than 2.8 lb/gal (340 gms/l) VOCs, contains no phosphates, is biodegradable, removes no zinc, and is compatible with the specified primer. D. DETAILED SURFACE PREPARATION: Surface preparations for each type of surface shall be in accordance with the specific requirements of each coating specification sheet (COATSPEC).


3.03 APPLICATION A. WORKMANSHIP: Coated surfaces shall be free from runs, drops, ridges, waves, laps, and brush marks. Coats shall be applied so as to produce an even film of uniform thickness completely coating corners and crevices. Painting shall be done in accordance with the requirements of SSPC Paint Application Specification No. 1. The Contractor's equipment shall be designed for application of the materials specified. Compressors shall have suitable traps and filters to remove water and oils from the air. A paper blotter test shall be performed by the Contractor when requested by the Construction Manager to determine if the air is sufficiently free of oil and moisture to not produce deteriorating effects on the coating system. The amount of oil and moisture in spray air shall be less than the amount recommended by the coating manufacturer. Spray equipment shall be equipped with mechanical agitators, pressure gages, and pressure regulators, and spray nozzles of the proper sizes. Each coat of paint shall be applied evenly and sharply cut to line. Care shall be exercised to avoid overspraying or spattering paint on surfaces not to be coated. Glass, hardware, floors, roofs, and other adjacent areas and installations shall be protected by taping, drop cloths, or other suitable measures. B. PAINT PROPERTIES, MIXING AND THINNING: Paint, when applied, shall provide a satisfactory film and smooth even surface, and glossy undercoats shall be lightly sanded to provide a surface suitable for the proper application and adhesion of subsequent coats. Paints shall be thoroughly stirred, strained, and kept at a uniform consistency during application. Coatings consisting of two or more components shall be mixed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Where necessary to suit the conditions of the surface, temperature, weather and method of application, the paint may be thinned immediately prior to use. The volatile organic content (VOC) of the coating as applied shall comply with prevailing air pollution control regulations. Unless otherwise specified, paint shall not be reduced more than necessary to obtain the proper application characteristics. Thinner shall be as recommended by the coating manufacturer. C. ATMOSPHERIC CONDITIONS: Paints shall be applied only to surfaces that are dry, and only under conditions of evaporation rather than condensation. Paint shall not be applied during rainy, misty weather, or to surfaces upon which there is frost or moisture condensation. During damp weather, when the temperature of the surface to be coated is within 10 degrees F of the dew point, the surfaces shall be heated to prevent moisture condensation thereon. Bare metal surfaces, except those which may be warped by heat, may be dehydrated by flame-heating devices immediately prior to paint application. During painting, and for a period of at least 8 hours after the paint has been applied, the temperature of the surfaces to be painted, the painted surfaces, and the atmosphere in contact shall be maintained


at or above 40 degrees F and 10 degrees F above the dew point. Paint, when applied, shall be approximately the same temperature as that of the surface on which it is applied. Fans or heaters shall be used inside enclosed areas where conditions causing condensation are severe. D. PROTECTION OF COATED SURFACES: Items which have been coated shall not be handled, worked on, or otherwise disturbed, until the paint is completely dry and hard. After delivery at the site of permanent erection or installation, shop-coated metalwork shall be repainted or retouched with specified paint when it is necessary to maintain the integrity of the film. E. METHOD OF PAINT APPLICATION: Where two or more coats are required, alternate coats shall contain sufficient compatible color additive to act as indicator of coverage, or the alternate coats shall be of contrasting colors. Color additives shall not contain lead, or any lead compound which may be destroyed or affected by hydrogen sulfide or any other corrosive gas. Mechanical equipment, on which the manufacturer's coating is acceptable, shall be touch-up primed and painted with two coats of the specified coating system to match the color scheduled. Electrical and instrumentation equipment specified in Divisions 16 and 17 shall be painted as specified in paragraph 09900-3.03 H. Paint shall not be applied to a surface until it has been prepared as specified. The primer or first coat shall be applied by brush to ferrous surfaces which are not blast-cleaned. All coats for blast-cleaned ferrous surfaces and subsequent coats for nonblast-cleaned ferrous surfaces may be either brush or spray applied. After the prime coat is dry, pinholes and holidays shall be marked, repaired in accordance with coating manufacturer's recommendations and retested before succeeding coats are applied. Unless otherwise specified, coats for concrete and masonry shall be brushed or rolled. F. FILM THICKNESS AND CONTINUITY: Coating system thickness is the total thickness of primer and finish coats. The surface area covered per gallon of paint for various types of surfaces shall not exceed those recommended by the manufacturer. The first coat, herein referred to as the prime coat, on metal surfaces refers to the first full paint coat and not to any solvent wash, grease emulsifiers or other pretreatment applications. Coatings shall be applied to the thickness specified, and in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. The minimum thickness at any point shall not deviate more than 25 percent from the required average. Unless otherwise specified, no less than two coats shall be applied. In testing for continuity of coating about welds, projections (such as bolts and nuts), and crevices, the Construction Manager will determine the minimum conductivity for smooth areas of like coating where the dry mil thickness has been accepted. This conductivity shall then be taken as


the minimum required for these rough or irregular areas. Pinholes and holidays shall be repainted to the required coverage. G. SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS: Before erection, Contractor shall apply all but the final finish coat to interior surfaces of roof plates, roof rafters and supports, pipe hangers, piping in contact with hangers, and all contact surfaces which are inaccessible after assembly. The final coat shall be applied after erection. Structural friction connections and high tensile bolts and nuts shall be painted after erection. Areas damaged during erection shall be hand-cleaned or power-tool cleaned and recoated with primer coat prior to the application of subsequent coats. Touch-up of all surfaces shall be performed after installation. All surfaces to be coated shall be clean and dry at the time of application. Except for those to be filled with grout, the underside of ungalvanized equipment bases and supports shall be coated with at least two coats of primer specified for system E-2 prior to setting the equipment in place. Where specified, ferrous metal shall receive an inorganic zinc-rich coating containing 84 percent metallic zinc by weight in the applied dry film. H. SAFETY AND VENTILATION REQUIREMENTS: Requirements for safety and ventilation shall be in accordance with SSPC Paint Application Guide No. 3. 3.04 CLEANUP Upon completion of coating, the Contractor shall remove surplus materials, protective coverings, and accumulated rubbish, and thoroughly clean all surfaces and repair any overspray or other paint-related damage. 3.05 COATING SYSTEMS SCHEDULE (FINISH SCHEDULE) Specific coating systems, colors, and finishes for rooms, galleries, piping, equipment, and other items which are painted or have other architectural finishes are specified in the following coating system schedule. Unless otherwise specified in the coating system schedule, the word "interior" shall mean the inside of a building or structure, and the word "exterior" shall mean outside exposure to weather elements.

Location/description Surface Coating system identification Color

Interior walls in Containment area

CMU Polyamine Epoxy White

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 11324

SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. SCOPE:

This section specifies submersible pumps complete with motor, level indicators, wiring, power cables, lifting chains, control panel, guide rails and discharge connection for the primary gallery, trickling filter biofilter, and primary sedimentation biofilter.

B. RELATED SECTIONS: The work of the following Sections is related to the work of this Section. Other Sections,

not referenced below, may also be related to the proper performance of this work. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to perform all the work required by the Contract Documents.

Section 01999: Standard Forms. Section 01730: Operations and Maintenance Information. Section 11020: Vibration and Critical Speed Limitations. Section 11060: Electric Motors.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. REFERENCED STANDARDS:

This Section incorporates by reference the latest revision of the following document. It is a part of this Section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this Section and that of the listed document, the requirements of this Section shall prevail.

Reference Title

ASTM A48 Specification for Gray Iron Castings.

ASTM A276 Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.

NEMA MG1 Motors and Generators

NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 volts maximum)


1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Procedures: Section 01300.

B. Manufacturer’s data including materials of construction, installation instructions, and equipment weight.

C. Predicted performance curves plotting head/capacity/efficiency and horsepower for the selected impeller diameter. Sphere size for solids capacity, suction, and discharge size, flange or compression gland connection.

D. Motor data Form 11060-A with motor data showing rated hp, service factor, voltage, full load amperage and enclosure rating. Power cable rating and listing (UL approved, or ETL, CSA) for this service.

E. Shop drawings including dimensions and section views showing installation dimensions and minimum sump dimensions.

F. Bearing service life calculations.

G. Operating and maintenance information per Section 01730.

H. Installation certification on Form 11000-A.

1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. GENERAL: Each pump shall be a heavy duty, submersible, vertical shaft, centrifugal, non-clog type,

suitable for pumping fluids containing sewage solids. B. EQUIPMENT LIST:

Item Equipment No.

Sump Pump 1 PS2

Sump Pump 2 PS1 Design for continuous operation under submerged, partially submersed, or totally dry

condition without damage to the pump or motor.


C. OPERATING REQUIREMENTS:

Equipment Number

Rated Capacity (gpm)1

Rated Head (ft)1

Solids Size

(inches)

Discharge Size

(inches)

Max. RPM

Max. Motor

HP Volts Phase

P7398 75 32 3 4 1800 3.0 460 3

P7399 75 32 3 4 1800 3.0 460 3 1 Because the pumps are to operate at constant speed, the pump shall be selected so that the rated

condition lies within 5 percent (based upon capacity) of the best efficiency point on the pump’s head-capacity curve.

Minimum flow and head intended to be non-overloading for the motor horsepower

shown. Higher performances are acceptable as long as the motor is not overloaded at any point on the curve 1.05 LABELING

Electrical materials, devices, appliances, and equipment used shall be indicated as acceptable by the established standards of the Underwriters Laboratories Inc. or other electrical product testing laboratory which is accredited by the State of Washington Department of Labor and Industries. Indication shall be by a valid label affixed to the item.

Panels, which consist of multiple components, shall be listed and labeled as a unit in

addition to any other state requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER

Trickling Filter Biofilter and Primary Gallery Biofilter Sump Pump (PS1, PS2) shall be Flygt N Series. 2.02 MATERIALS

Materials employed for the fabrication of the pumps shall be as follows:

Material Component P 4829, P4830 P4648, P4648 P7398,7399

Pump volute, impeller, discharge elbow

Cast Iron, ASTM A48, Class 30.

Stainless steel, ASTM A276, Type 316.


Motor casing Cast Iron, ASTM A48, Class 30.




Material Component P 4829, P4830 P4648, P4648 P7398,7399

Motor and pump shaft Stainless steel, ASTM A276, Series 400.



Wear rings Nitrile or stainless steel, ASTM A276, Series 400 heat treated.

316 stainless steel, ASTM A276, Series 400 heat treated.

316 stainless steel, ASTM A276, Series 400 heat treated.

External bolts and nuts




Guide bar brackets, guide rails, and lifting chain

Stainless steel, ASTM A276, Type 304 or Type 316.



Mechanical seal Double, carbon/ tungsten-carbide faces with multiple spring system.

Double, carbon/ tungsten-carbide faces with multiple spring system.

Double, carbon/ tungsten-carbide faces with multiple spring system.

2.03 EQUIPMENT FEATURES

A. GENERAL: Pump volute shall be fit with a flange or compression gland connection for the discharge

piping.

B. IMPELLERS AND WEAR RINGS:

1. Impellers shall be single or two port, non-clog for sewage application. 2. Impeller and casing shall be fitted with replaceable wear rings.

C. PUMP SHAFT:

Pump/motor shaft shall be one piece, stainless steel of sufficient size, machined, and

ground to industry standards for bearing clearance with radius shoulders as needed to eliminate stresses.

Shaft shall not extend or overhang more than 2-1/2 times its diameter beyond the bottom

support bearing.

D. BEARINGS: Heavy duty, rolling element, grease lubricated, permanently lubricated and sealed with a

five year service life.


E. MECHANICAL SEAL: Tandem double mechanical seal running in an oil reservoir, with leak sensor.

Carbon/ceramic seal faces and a single coil spring system are not acceptable.

F. CABLE SEAL:

1. Cable entry: comprised of a single cylinder elastomer grommet to seal against the outside of the cable.

2. Cable strain relief: separate from the cable sealing function.

G. MOTOR:

1. Squirrel-cage induction, shell type design, housed in an air filled water tight chamber. Oil filled motors are not acceptable.

2. Insulation: Class F with Class B temperature rise, or better.

3. Motor mechanical seal: provide with a leak detector.

4. Motor windings: provide high temperature trip or resistance temperature detectors.

5. NEMA MG-1: for applicability, fabrication, labeling, and installation.

H. LIFTING SYSTEM:

1. Discharge pipe: one piece up through the surface plate and terminate with a Victaulic or approved equal ring groove.

2. Stainless steel lifting chain connected to the top of the motor with a hook

at the top of the sump under the cover with sufficient chain to reach above the cover for connection to the lifting hoist.

2.04 CONTROLS

A. GENERAL:

1. Control panels:

a. NEMA 250 using NEMA 4x enclosures. b. Assembled package UL approved and listed. c. Each panel shall contain intrinsically safe relays for float switch

systems and standard relays as needed for bubbler level control panels.


2. Circuit breakers, contractors, overload relays, HAND/OFF/AUTO selector switches, manual alternator switch, high level alarm dry contact and panel lights for leak sensor, motor over temperature, and high level alarm.

3. Internal space heater with thermostat.

4. Terminal strip for connection of external devices.

5. Panel face labels: phenolic, white letters on black background, pinned to the panel face. Adhesive is not acceptable. Letters shall be minimum 1/4 inch.

6. Panel identification label, pump identification over H/O/A switches, high level alarm, motor over temperature, and leak sensor light.

B. FLOAT SWITCH LEVEL CONTROL:

1. Installations using float switches for pilot control shall use mercury type floats, tilt switch encapsulated in a non-corrosive polypropylene housing, or other outer jacket resistant to low concentrations of sewage and oil.

2. Power cable: 16-AWG wire type SJTO cable with PVC jacket. 3. Switch: rated two amps at 120 VAC. 4. Acceptable manufacturer for floats:

a. Warrick Series F b. Flygt c. Approved equal for intrinsically safe operation

C. BUBBLER LEVEL CONTROL:

NOT USED

D. OTHER ITEMS:

1. Suitable cable holder to support pump power and liquid level sensor cables or bubbler tube.

2. Cable holder: plastic coated or painted and designed to permit easy

individual adjustment of level sensor cables.


PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. GENERAL:

Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as shown on the Drawings

B. TESTING: After completion of installation, field test for functional operation and demonstrate

compliance with the performance requirements. Certify the installation as operational on Form 11000-A.

**END OF SECTION**

City of Ashland 11382 A-1 August 2007 Water Treatment Plant Process Improvements

SECTION 11382-A

PERISTALTIC CHEMICAL METERING PUMPS PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies chemical metering pumps and appurtenances for feeding liquid solutions of sodium hypochlorite. The manufacturer shall furnish a complete metering pump system to operate as intended by these specifications. The pump system shall include a leak detection tube failure system, controls for communicating a 4-20 mA signal from an external source, and spare tubing. B. TYPE: The metering pumps shall be of the positive displacement, peristaltic type utilizing a flexible tube and spring loaded roller or track. The pump shall be suitable for metering service for injection of 12.5 percent sodium hypochlorite solution, with an electronic variable speed drive to control the dosage within a turndown speed control range from 0.1 to 220 rpm in 0.1 rpm increments. Pumps shall be configured to conform to space constraints shown. C. EQUIPMENT LIST:

Item Equipment No.

Sodium Hypochlorite Metering Pump 1 PCL01




D. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS:

Pump (Each)

Discharge capacity-ave, gph 8

Discharge capacity-peak, gph 20

Discharge pressure, psi <60

Turndown ratio** 2200:1

Tubing inner diameter, mm 3.2 & 6.4

Tubing wall thickness, mm 2.4 * MFR to recommend ** May require change in tubing size

Motor

Speed, rpm (maximum) 220

Maximum drive power consumption

135 VA

Enclosure NEMA 4X

Voltage 120 VAC, 1-Ph.

E. SERVICE CONDITIONS: Chemicals to be pumped by the equipment under this section shall have the characteristics as noted:

Sodium hypochorite

Solution concentration, percent 12.5

Specific gravity 1.05

Liquid temperature, degrees F 55 to 75 F. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS: The pumping units specified in this section shall be designed for indoor operation in a corrosive environment located at a water treatment plant in Ashland, Oregon.


1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. GENERAL: The metering pumps and appurtenances manufacturer shall be regularly engaged in the business of designing, building and repairing pumps of the type specified in this section. All pumps and appurtenances furnished for this contract shall be supplied by the same manufacturer. The supplier shall take responsibility for ensuring the proper components are incorporated in the package.

B. REFERENCES: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, whether or not the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued, or replaced.

Reference Title

AISI Steel Products Manual

ASTM A48 Gray Iron Castings

ASTM A276 Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes

ASTM A536 Ductile Iron Castings

HI Centrifugal, Rotary and Reciprocating Pumps

ISO 9001-2000 Quality Management Systems

NEMA National Electric Manufacturers Association


C. SUBMITTALS: Data giving a full description of all new metering pump equipment and accessories shall be submitted. The following information shall also be submitted to the Engineer:

1. Wiring and connection diagrams indicating all electrical connections and alarms.

2. Piping/tubing connections, locations, sizes, and details for all fittings. 3. P/10 ratio calculation for the pumps supplied. 4. Recommended on-site installation, testing, and start-up procedures. 5. Catalog information and pump materials list for each pump. 6. Motor data as specified in specification Section 11060. 7. Net positive suction head requirement for each pump. 8. Manufacturer’s equipment data and catalog information on calibration

chambers. 9. Operation and maintenance information. 10. Suggested spare parts with pricing information. 11. List of all special tools required to operate or maintain the pumps. 12. Manufacturer’s recommendations for installation.

PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL The manufacturer shall furnish all metering pump system equipment to complete a properly functioning, integrated package as intended by these specifications. The system shall be factory-assembled to the maximum extent practical. Factory assembly shall include pump, motor, base, and appurtenant valves and fittings. Any component parts not pre-assembled due to packaging and shipping concerns shall be identified and clearly labeled. No field welding will be allowed. Pumps shall be manufactured under ISO 9001-2000 standards. All materials used for the metering pump and accessories shall be designed by the manufacturer to have the necessary strength, stability and stiffness for the intended service. Equipment and piping shall be rigidly and accurately anchored into the proper position. All


connections, foundation bolts, plates, nuts, washers and clamps shall be corrosion resistant to the conditions of use. This shall include support shelving mounted on the wall in the location shown on the plans. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS

The OWNER and ENGINEER believe the following manufacturer is capable of producing equipment and products, which will satisfy the requirements of this section, and that the listed model meets the deign criteria set out herein

. 1. Watson-Marlow Model 520DuS. 2. No other manufacturers will be considered.

Any submitted pump shall be modified as needed to meet the requirements of this specification. 2.03 METERING PUMP

Pump shall be of the positive displacement, self-priming, variable speed peristaltic type complete with retractable roller pumphead, self contained variable speed drive and a flexible extruded tube. The tubing shall be in contact with the inside diameter of the track (housing) . Tube clamps requiring tools are not acceptable. Suction and discharge shall be on the some side of the pump head. The tubing shall be replaceable with no disassembly of the pump head and without the use of tools. Each pump shall consist of track/pump head cover, spring loaded retainer mechanism, and roller rotor assembly with integral variable speed drive. The pump head shall be easily secured to the drive and be self-locating. Peristaltic pumping action is created by compression of the flexible tube between the pumphead rollers and track, inducing forward fluid flow within the tube by rotation of the pump rotor, and consequent vacuum-creating restitution of the tube.

Pumps shall be capable of producing continuous pressure of 60 psi. Each pump shall be capable of self-priming when completely dry with a suction lift capability of up to 30 feet of water. The pump shall be capable of running dry without damaging effects to the pump or hose. The pump shall require no check valves or diaphragms and shall not require any dynamic seals in contact with the pumpage. The process fluid shall only be in contact with the inside of the pump tubing. Pump shall be supplied with a Load Sure tubing element with molded fittings, which shall be self-locating when fitted into the pumphead. Tube element shall be in contact with the inside diameter of the track (housing) through an angle of 180 degrees and be held in place on the suction and discharge by the element fittings. The tubing shall be replaceable without the use of tools and with no disassembly of the pumphead. To achieve maximum service life, pump heads with a track angle of less then 180 degrees and/or without tube elements are not acceptable. Load Sure Element shall be constructed with either Marprene or Sta-Pure tubing with male PVDF Quick Release Connectors.


Supply One (1) meter of reinforced transparent PVC flexible hose for connection of pump to suction and discharge process lines. Flexible hose shall have a PVDF female Quick Release fitting for connection to the Loadsure Element and male Quick Release fitting for connection to barbed adaptor with built in shut off valve for ease of maintenance and connection to process lines. The manufacturer shall furnish the appropriate tubing material for the chemicals to be pumped. The tubing shall be of 64 shore A durometer. Four (4) tube elements shall be provided per pump. The track shall be polyphenylene sulfide (PPS).

Drive shall be rated for continuous 24-hour operation. Pumps shall have non-maintained maximum speed switches for purpose of priming. Pump drives shall be close-coupled and self aligning, requiring no flexible couplings. With drive speeds ranging between 0.1 to 220 rpm, the pump must accept tubing with a wall thickness of 2.4 mm and an inside diameter with tube elements of 3.2 mm and 6.4 mm. Manufacturer shall recommend the optimum tubing size for this project from among these sizes.

To maximize pump efficiency and minimize tube fatigue that will impact life,

performance, and accuracy, pumps must be designed not to exceed the specified P/10 ratio for each diameter (Theoretical maximum number of occlusions per 10 gallons pumped). Pumps exceeding the specified P/10 ratios will not be considered suitable for the duty condition. The following criteria shall be used to maintain the P/10 ratio for the tube sizes specified for this application:

1. Maximum two compressing rollers for two compressions per revolution.

2. Tube wall thickness of 2.4 mm and material specified

3. Large diameter spring-loaded roller set for 2.4 mm wall thickness tubing

4. Max base drive speed of 220 RPM for 2.4 mm wall thickness tubing.

5. Track geometry of no less than 180 degrees and rotor geometry with roller 180 degrees apart.

P/10 ratio shall not exceed the following per tube size:

Tube Size P/10 ratio

3.2mm x 2.4mm 45,456 6.4mm x 2.4mm 11,570

The drive enclosure shall be NEMA 4X rated and be cast aluminum coated with trimite

polyester powder, electrostatically applied and baked for the top and bottom casing; and coated with trimite polyurethane, spray applied and baked for the front and rear panels.

The rotor assembly shall be equipped with two 316SS Compressing Rollers with low

friction stainless steel bearings and PTFE seals, minimum diameter of 18mm. Provide non-compressing guide rollers constructed of corrosion resistant Nylatron. Compression rollers shall


be symmetrical about the rotor for compression of the hose against the track. One roller shall at all times be fully engaged with the tubing providing complete compression to prevent back flow or siphoning. The pumping action is created by the occlusion of the pump hose and its subsequent restitution causing a vacuum effect to draw the fluid into the suction side of the hose. Hose occlusion shall be adjustable with of a lead screw, which limits the travel of the spring, loaded roller. Drive speed, pumping direction and on/off shall be controlled via a liquid tight control panel with membrane key pad.

The pump shall have menu-driven Manual/Auto/Calibration/Setup functions. Manual

control shall include stop/start, speed, direction and priming via the keypad. The pump shall also provide status information, including running/stopped and direction to external controls via a control signal output. The pump face shall provide backlit graphical LCD capable of up to four lines of text with up to 16 characters per line to display flow-rate or pump speed, and have “Auto restart” and “Keypad lock” functions. The controller shall be programmable and menu-driven. Auto restart shall restart the pump after a power disruption. Keypad lock shall allow operator lockout of all functions except start/stop.

Supply auto control features to meet the following minimum functionality requirements

for use with the SCADA system. Pumps not meeting this minimum functionality will not be accepted. Remote Control Inputs: Speed Control - Primary Analog 4-20mA or 0-10VDC speed input, with input signal trimmable and speed scaleable over any part of the drive speed range. Secondary Analog 4-20mA or 0-10VDC scaling input, with input signal trimmable and programmable scaling factor. Provisions for alternative remote accessory potentiometer (if supplied by others) for primary speed control or secondary speed scaling. Start/Stop Control - via 120 VAC input- Configurable command sense allowing open to equal run or open to equal stopped. Configurable to be a keypad start/stop override in Manual mode. Forward/Reverse Control - via 120 VAC input. Auto/Man Mode Control - via 120 VAC input. Leak Detector Run/Stop Control. Status Outputs: Four relay contacts rated for a max. current of 2A at 120V, NO or NC software configurable to indicate the following - Running/Stopped status, Forward/Reverse status, Auto/Manual status, General Alarm status, Leak Detected status. Speed output – Analog 4-20mA or 0-10 VDC, Accepts RS485 data protocol, Termination: supply screw down terminals suitable for up to18 AWG field wire and accessible through four glanded cable entry points on the pump.

The pump shall include a tube failure monitor that interfaces with the pump in the event

of a tube failure. Manual or analog mode selectable via selector switch located on front panel. Drive shall be capable of accepting analog signals ranging between 4 to 20 mA. Signal response may be scaled over any part of the drive speed range. Other analog features shall be on/off via dry contact closure, use of remote potentiometer to control speed, tachometer output shall be selectable as either 0 to 5 V or 5 V square wave frequency output. On/off contact shall be functional in either manual or analog mode. Voltage shall be selectable between 100 to 120 V 50/60 Hz and 220 to 240 V 50/60 Hz, I-phase via 2 position slide type switch which shall be recessed to protect from incidental contact. Power cord shall be standard 120 V or 230 V type with 3 prong plug and six feet in length routed through liquid tight cord clamp. Drive circuitry shall be microprocessor controlled PWM type with temperature and load compensation and


protection, and closed loop speed control. Drive motor shall be permanent magnet DC with integral gearbox. 2.04 PUMP MOTORS The chemical feed pumps shall be provided with inside NEMA 4X washdown-proof case drive, single phase, 120 VAC. 2.05 ACCESSORIES The following accessories shall be provided by the manufacturer. A. CALIBRATION CHAMBER: The calibration chamber shall be of clear PVC construction, graduated in milliliters. Chambers shall be sized to allow the pump to withdraw the total contents in the column in approximately 2 minutes. B. SUPPORT: The pump will be pedestal mounted as shown. 2.06 SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS Spare parts and special tools required for disassembly shall be provided. One complete set of necessary spare parts to include one additional pump head is required. Spare tools include any tools required for maintenance that would not be a part of a typical plant maintenance technician’s tool inventory. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 SHIPPING, DELIVERY, AND STORAGE Factory tests shall be performed by the manufacturer prior to delivery in order to verify accuracy and performance of the systems as specified. Factory tests need not be witnessed by the Engineer. However, factory tests and their results shall be performed by the manufacturer. The manufacturer shall certify and provide copies of the tests and guarantee the equipment’s performance specified in this section. All certifications of factory tests shall be submitted and approved by the Engineer before shipping equipment.

Units shall be packaged in reinforced containers so as to prevent rust or damage during delivery. All piping connections shall be capped for shipping and while in storage. Each system and all components and mounting hardware shall be delivered at the same time. 3.02 INSTALLATION


Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. The manufacturer’s local representative shall visit the site after installation to review and approve the completed system. 3.03 TRAINING The Contractor shall provide the services of a factory-trained manufacturer’s representative to provide not less than 4 hours of training on the pumps and chemical feed systems provided. Training shall be certified on Form 11000-B specified in Section 01999. 3.04 OPERATIONS AND TRAINING (O&M) MANUALS Provide O&M manuals in accordance with Section 01300.

**END OF SECTION**

City of Ashland 11382 B-1 August 2007 Water Treatment Plant Process Improvements

SECTION 11382-B

PERISTALTIC HOSE TYPE SODA ASH METERING PUMPS

PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This Section specifies chemical metering pumps and appurtenances for feeding liquid solutions of Soda Ash. The manufacturer shall furnish a complete metering pump system to operate as intended by these specifications.

B. TYPE:

The pumps shall have the following operational parameters

1. Pumps shall be positive displacement peristaltic type complete with retractable roller pumphead, self-contained variable speed drive, and flexible extruded tube as specified.

2. Peristaltic pumping action is created by the compression of the flexible tube between the pumphead rollers and track, induced forward fluid displacement within the tube by the rotation of the pump rotor, and subsequent vacuum-creating restitution of the tube.

3. Pumps shall be dry self-priming, capable of being run dry without damaging effects to pump or tube, and shall have a maximum suction lift capability of up to 30' vertical water column. Maximum pressure rating: 60 psi.

4. Pump shall not use check valves or diaphragms and shall not require dynamic seals in contact with the pumped fluid. Process fluid shall be contained within pump tubing and shall not directly contact any rotary or metallic components.

5. Flow shall be in the direction of the rotor rotation, which can be reversed and shall be proportional to rotor speed.

C. EQUIPMENT LIST:

Item Equipment No.

Soda Ash Metering Pump 1 SAL01

Soda Ash Metering Pump 2 SAL02


Soda Ash Metering Pump 3 SAL03 PART 2 – PUMP DESIGN 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Watson-Marlow, Inc. B. OR Equal

2.02 PUMP PROCESS SCHEDULE

Quantity 3 (three)

Tag Number(s) SAL 01 to 03

Fluid

Temperature, degrees F

Density

Viscosity, centipoises

Soda Ash Slurry – 2-5%

40 to 75

Varies - 8.63 @ 3.5 % solution

Approximately 1.56

Tubing Material Marprene II

Max – Min Capacity (GPH) 1.8-150

Max Pump RPM for Application 165

Tubing ID 17mm

Displacement /Revolution (Gallons) 0.01558

Displacement /Revolution (Liters) 0.059

P10 Ratio (Theoretical Maximum Number of Occlusions/10 Gallons Pumped)

1,284

Min Flow Rate (GPM) 0.0016

Max Flow Rate (GPM) 4.13

Min Flow Rate (LPM) 0.0059

Max Flow Rate (LPM) 15.64

Max Discharge Pressure (PSI) 60

Suction Head 5 feet

Power (VAC, Frequency, Phase) 115VAC, 60 Hz, 1 Phase


1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. GENERAL The metering pumps and appurtenances manufacturer shall be regularly engaged in the business of designing, building and repairing pumps of the type specified in this section. All pumps and appurtenances furnished for this contract shall be supplied by the same manufacturer. The supplier shall take responsibility for ensuring the proper components are incorporated in the package.

B. This specification is the basis for design of peristaltic metering pumps. All pumps, whether named as an acceptable supplier or submitted, as an equal must, at a minimum, meet the following critical design requirements.

C. To maximize pump efficiency and minimize tube fatigue that will impact life,

performance, and accuracy, pumps must be designed not to exceed a P/10 ratio (Theoretical maximum number of occlusions per 10 gallons pumped). Pumps exceeding the specified P/10 ratio will not be considered suitable for the duty condition. The following criteria is set to maintain the P/10 of ratio for the tube size specified for this application:

1. Maximum two compressing rollers for two compressions per revolution.

2. Tube wall thickness of 4.0 mm and material specified

3. Large diameter spring-loaded roller set for 4.0 mm wall thickness tubing

4. Max base drive speed of 265 RPM for 4.0 mm wall thickness tubing.

5. Track geometry of no less than 180 degrees and rotor geometry with roller 180 degrees apart.

D. P/10 ratio shall not exceed the following per tube size:

Tube Size P/10 ratio 17.0mm x 4.0mm 1,284


E. For quality assurance, all pump tubing must be manufactured by the pump manufacturer in accordance with their specifications. Tubing not manufactured by the pump manufacturer will not be acceptable.

F. For chemical compatibility with a broad spectrum of chemicals, the pump housing

shall have powder coating per 2.03.C.5. G. Pumps to be manufacturer's standard product. Manufacturer of tubing pumps

must have at least 20 operating installations in domestic water or wastewater treatment plants located in the United States over a period of at least five years in the same service and size as specified.

H. Drive and pump heads shall be 24 hr continuous duty rated and have a three-year

manufacturer's warranty from date of shipment. I. Pumps must be manufactured under ISO 9001-2000. J. Pumps shall be meet all applicable CE and C ETL US standards per UL610101A

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. SUBMIT THE FOLLOWING:

1. Certified shop drawings.

2. Wiring and connection diagrams indicating all electrical connections and alarms.

3. Piping/tubing connections, locations, sizes, and details for all fittings

4. Characteristic performance curve showing flow rate as a function of RPM and pressure.

5. Dimensional drawings.

6. Operating, maintenance, programming, and wiring instructions

7. P/10 ratio calculation.

8. Manufacturers recommendation for installation

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING A. SHIPPING


1. Ship pump and drive assembled complete. Ship tubing separately for field installation and process line connection by contractor.

2. Pack all additional spare parts in containers bearing labels clearly

designating contents and pieces of equipment for which intended. 3. Deliver spare parts at the same time as pertaining equipment. Deliver to

Owner after completion of work.

B. RECEIVING

1. Contractor to inspect and inventory items upon delivery to site.

2. Contractor to store and safeguard equipment, material, instructions, and spare parts in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

2.03 PUMP CONSTRUCTION

A. PUMPHEAD

1. Pumphead shall consist of a fixed track with tool lockable hinged guard door and magnetic safety interlock, which shall render the drive inoperable when the pump door is open. For operator safety, pumps without lockable guard, safety interlock, and/or flip-top design pump heads are not acceptable.

2. Pumphead door shall have two clear windows for viewing of rotation

direction. When closed, pump door shall seal against the pump track for leak containment and controlled waste through the pumphead waste port in the event of a tube failure. For operator and environmental safety, pumps without clear viewing windows and/or waste port are not acceptable.

3. Rotor assembly shall be equipped with two compression rollers, which

shall be retractable for tube loading, SIP, or CIP flushing cycles. Compression rollers shall be located 180 degrees apart for compression of the tube against the track twice per rotor revolution. One roller shall at all times be fully engaged with the tubing providing complete compression to prevent backflow or siphoning. Occlusion gap shall come factory set to accommodate 4.0 mm wall thickness tube. To maximize pump efficiency, pumps without retractable rollers and/or more then 2 compressing rollers are not acceptable.

4. The rotor assembly shall be close coupled to the output shaft of the drive

gearmotor by a 19 mm keyed shaft and shall be axially secured to the shaft by a through center retaining screw. Pumphead track shall be secured to the drive via two slotted screws and shall be self-locating.


5. Material of Construction

a. Track: Aluminum, Trimite polyester powder coat, electrostatically applied and baked.

b. Door:

1. Inner Shell: Grilamid TR55 2. Outer Shell: shock resistant Polyurethane 3. Door Seal: Silicone 4. Drain Port Adapter: Acetyl

c. Rotor:

1. Hub & Roller Arms: Fortron 1140L4 (PPS) 2. Hub Cover: Dupont Hytrel G5544 3. Main Rollers: 304SS 4. Main Roller Bearings: Carbon Steel (sealed) 5. Guide Rollers: Nylatron 6. Hardware & leaf springs: 304SS

B. TUBING

1. Pump shall be supplied with a LoadSure tubing element with molded fittings, which shall be self-locating when fitted into the pumphead. Tube element shall be in contact with the inside diameter of the track (housing) through an angle of 180 degrees and be held in place on the suction and discharge by the element fittings. The tubing shall be replaceable without the use of tools and with no disassembly of the pumphead. To achieve maximum service life, pump heads with a track angle of less then 180 degrees and/or without tube elements are not acceptable. See 1.02.

2. Pump tubing shall be constructed of Marprene II, a thermoplastic elastomer with a 64/73 Shore A durometer and 4.0mm wall thickness. Pump manufacturer must manufacture Marprene tubing in-house. Pump manufacturers who purchase third party tubing are not acceptable.

3. Pump shall readily accept tubing elements with ID's of 12.0mm and 17.0mm without pump adjustment or replacement. Tubing with a wall thickness less then 4.0mm is not acceptable. See 1.02.

4. Molded Fittings: Polypropylene, 3/4" Male Cam & Groove

5. Supply Four (4) tube elements of the specified size per pump.


6. Supply Three (3) meters of reinforced transparent PVC flexible hose for connection of pump to suction and discharge process lines. Flexible hose shall have a Polypropylene female cam & groove fitting for mounting to pump and ¾” male cam and groove fitting for mounting to process piping.

C. DRIVE

1. Rating: Continuous 24 hour operation, 40o C ambient.

2. Supply: 110-120V 50/60 Hz and 220-240V 50/60 Hz, 1-Phase field switchable. Supply nine-foot length mains power cord with standard 115V three-prong plug.

3. Max drive power consumption: 250VA.

4. Enclosure: NEMA 4X

5. Housing: Pressure cast aluminum with Alocrom pre-treatment and exterior grade corrosion resistant polyester powder coat. By nature of the environmental conditions, unpainted housings, including 316SS, are not acceptable.

6. Pumps must meet the following minimum requirements for operator interface functionality. Pumps not meeting this minimum functionality will not be accepted.

a. Backlit graphical LCD capable of up to four lines of text with up to 16 characters per line to display pump speed, running status, flow rate, and programming instructions

b. Keypad for start, stop, speed increment, speed decrement, forward/reverse direction, rapid prime, and programming.

c. Menu driven on screen programming of manual control, flow, and general programming.

d. Programmable “Auto Restart” feature to resume pump status in the event of power outage interruption.

e. Programmable “Keypad Lock” to allow operator lockout of all keys except emergency start/stop.

f. Programmable “Maximum Speed” to allow operator to set the maximum speed of the pump within 0.1-265 rpm.


7. Supply auto control features to meet the following minimum functionality requirements. Pumps not meeting this minimum functionality will not be accepted.

a. Remote Control Inputs

1) Speed Control:

a) Analog 4-20mA or 0-10VDC, with input signal trimmable and speed scaleable over any part of the drive speed range.

b) Provisions for alternative remote accessory potentiometer (if supplied by others)

2) Start/Stop Control: via 5V TTL, 24V industrial logic, or dry contact- Configurable command sense allowing open to equal run or open to equal stopped.

3) Forward/Reverse Control: via 5V TTL, 24V industrial logic, or dry contact

4) Auto/Man Mode Control: via 5V TTL, 24V industrial logic, or dry contact

5) Leak Detector Run/Stop Control

b. Status Outputs

1) Four relay contacts rated for 30 VDC with maximum load of 30W, NO or NC software configurable to indicate the following:

a) Running/Stopped status

b) Forward/Reverse status

c) Auto/Manual status

d) General Alarm status

e) Leak Detected status


2) Speed output – Analog 0-10 VDC or 5V Square Wave Frequency output

c. Termination: supply screw down terminals suitable for up to18 AWG field wire and accessible through four glanded cable entry points on the pump

8. Drive motor- brushless DC motor with integral gearbox and tachometer feedback.

a. Speed Control Range of 2650:1 from 0.1 to 265 rpm +/- 0.1 rpm throughout the range.

b. Closed loop microprocessor controlled drive with pulse width modulation at speeds above 35 rpm and synchronous mode with magnetic field rotation control below 35 rpm

c. Circuitry complete with temperature and load compensation and protection.

9. Leak Detector: Pump manufacturer shall supply float-type leak sensor mounted to the drain port of the pump head for leak detection and pump shut down in the event of a tubing failure

10. Mounting: Drive shall be self-supporting and shall not require anchoring.

D. SPARES

1. Supply four spare tube elements of the specified size per pump.

2. Supply one spare pumphead assembly and rotor.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION (BY CONTRACTOR)

A. Contractor shall install items in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and as indicated and specified.

B. Contractor to supply fittings for connection of pump to process.

3.02 TRAINING The Contractor shall provide the services of a factory-trained manufacturer’s representative to provide not less than 4 hours of training on the pumps and chemical feed systems provided. Training shall be certified on Form 11000-B specified in Section 01999.


3.03 OPERATIONS AND TRAINING (O&M) MANUALS Provide O&M manuals in accordance with Section 01300.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 11733

TEMPORARY SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE FEED SYSTEM

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies the requirements of the Contractor supplied Temporary Sodium Hypochlorite Feed Systems. Not all items incidental to the System are specified; the intent of these specifications is for the Contractor to provide all equipment necessary for complete and functional temporary sodium hypochlorite feed system capable of providing adequate disinfection as determined by the plant staff and all federal and state regulations pertaining to the treatment of potable water. The system shall be capable of accepting and storing 12.5 percent sodium hypochlorite solution delivered from bulk tank trucks and metering and measuring the solution for accurate flow-paced injection into the effluent stream. The Contractor shall provide installation, interconnecting piping, power and connections to the plant’s SCADA system. B. OPERATING REQUIREMENTS:

1. GENERAL: The System shall be designed to operate with potable city water of the following characteristics:

Temperature range: 33 to 70 degrees Fahrenheit Available pressure: 120 psi Hardness: up to 35 mg/L as CaCO3

2. BULK STORAGE CAPACITY: 3000 Gallons of 12.5% hypochlorite Solution. 3. LOCATION OF FACILITIES: Contractor required to locate facilities in a location that will not interfere with day to day operation of the water treatment plant.

4. SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE INJECTION POINTS: The System shall be

capable of delivering hypochlorite to the following feed points:

a. Existing rapid mix. b. Existing clearwell injection point


5. FEED CAPACITY: The system shall be capable of a feeding between 3 and 100 gallons per day of 12.5 % sodium hypochlorite to each feed point simultaneously.

6. CONTROLS: The contractor shall install the temporary system so that the

plant staff has complete control over the system. 7. CLIMATE CONDITIONS: The contractor shall be prepared to have the

system be capable of operating in a temperature range from 20-100 degrees Fahrenheit. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. UNIT RESPONSIBILITY: The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the function of the Temporary Sodium Hypochlorite Storage System and associated appurtenances. Failure of the Temporary hypochlorite system is unacceptable. Failure of the system to meet the performance requirements shall result in liquidated damages in the of $5,000 a day, for every day there is any failure of the system. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300 and shall include the following items:


2. Certificate of Unit Responsibility attesting that the Contractor has

accepted unit responsibility in accordance with the requirements of this Section and paragraph 11000-1.02 C. No other submittal material will be


reviewed until the certificate has been received and found to be in conformance with these requirements.

3. Shop drawings.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 13236

FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) GRATING PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section provides specifications for FRP grating, including Contractor and Equipment Supplier provided. B: TYPE: Grating furnished under this section shall be fabricated as a composite of fiberglass reinforcements (fibers and mat) and a thermosetting resin system, produced by the pultrusion process. Grating manufactured by any other method will not be acceptable. All FRP grating shall have a non-skid surface. 1.02 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. DESIGN: FRP grating shall be designed in accordance with the following:

1. A minimum structural safety factor of 2.

2. Typical uniform load of 150 psf.

3. Maximum deflection shall be the quotient of the grating span divided by 180 or 1/4 inch, whichever is less.

The FRP grating shall use an “I” or “T” shaped bearing bar with equally spaced cross rods providing lateral stability to bearing bars. The maximum bearing bar depth shall be 2” and the minimum open area shall be 33 percent. Grating sheet sizes shall be compatible with the spans shown on the drawings and shall require a minimum of field cutting. B. COLOR: FRP grating shall be manufacturer’s standard gray.


PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS Resins used in FRP manufacturing shall be highly resistant to corrosion from typical wastewater environments. 2.02 FABRICATION FRP grating shall be pultruded. The bearing bars shall use both longitudinal and multidirectional glass reinforcements. The surface shall be entirely coated with pure resin.

FRP grating shall have an anti-skid grit surface for use in continuously wet environments and sloping surfaces. 2.03 MANUFACTURER

The Construction Manager and Engineer believe the following candidate manufacturers are capable of producing equipment and/or products that will satisfy the requirements of this section. This statement, however, shall not be construed as an endorsement of a particular manufacturer’s products, nor shall it be construed that named manufacturers’ standard equipment or products will comply with the requirements of this section. Candidate manufacturers include Strongwell; American Grating, LLC; or equal.

PART 3--EXECUTION FRP grating shall be installed where shown on the drawings and shall be furnished with hold-down attachments, end panel attachments, and appurtenances to make the work complete and operable. All grating shown on the Mechanical drawings is provided and installed by the Contractor. Adequate quantities of resin sealing kits comprised of pre-measured quantities of thixotropic resin and catalyst, mixing containers, chip brushes, and stirring sticks shall be provided by the fabricator. Installation of FRP grating shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 15050

PIPING SYSTEMS PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies systems of process piping and general requirements for piping systems. Detailed specifications for the components listed on the Piping System Specification Sheets are found in other sections of Division 15. This section shall be used in conjunction with those sections. Piping for horizontal directional drilling is specified elsewhere. B. DEFINITIONS: Pressure terms used in Section 15050 and elsewhere in Division 15 are defined as follows: 1. Maximum: The greatest continuous pressure at which the piping system

operates. 2. Test: The hydrostatic pressure used to determine system acceptance. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. REFERENCES: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Reference Title AASHTO M36/M36M-87 Metallic (Zinc or Aluminum) Coated Corrugated Steel

Culverts and Under drains ANSI A13.1-81 Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems ANSI B1.20.1-83 Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch) ANSI B16.1-89 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Class 25,

125, 250, and 800


Reference Title ANSI B16.3-85 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Class 150 and 300 ANSI B16.5-88 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings ANSI B16.9-86 Factory-Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings ANSI B16.11-80 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket Welding and Threaded ANSI B16.12-83 Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings ANSI B31.1-89 Power Piping ANSI B31.3-90 Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping ASME SECTION IX-89 Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; Welding and Brazing

Qualifications ASTM A47-84 Malleable Iron Castings ASTM A53-90 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded

and Seamless ASTM A105/A105M-87a Forgings, Carbon Steel, for Piping Components ASTM A106-90 Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature

Service ASTM A126-84 Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for

Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings ASTM A197-87 Cupola Malleable Iron ASTM A234/A234M-89 Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel

for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures ASTM A312/A312M-89 Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe ASTM A403/A403M-90 Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings ASTM A536-84 Ductile Iron Castings ASTM A570/A570M-90 Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheet and Strip, Structural

Quality


Reference Title

ASTM D1248-84 Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion Materials ASTM D1784-90 Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and

Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds ASTM D2241-89 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR) ASTM D2513-90 Thermoplastic Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings ASTM D2665-89a Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and

Vent Pipe and Fittings AWWA C105-88 Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Piping for

Water and Other Liquids AWWA C110-87 Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3 Inch Through 48

Inch, for Water and Other Liquids AWWA C111-85 Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron

Pressure Pipe and Fittings AWWA C115-88 Flanged Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Pipe with Threaded

Flanges AWWA C151-86 Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or

Sand-Lined Molds, for Water or Other Liquids AWWA C206-88 Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe AWWA C207-86 Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Services--Sizes 4 In.

through 144 In. AWWA C600-87 Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their

Appurtenances AWWA C900-89 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 Inches

Through 12 Inches, for Water AWWA M11-89 Steel Pipe--A Guide for Design and Installation FEDSPEC L-C- Coating, Pipe, Thermoplastic Resin or 530B(1)-72 Thermosetting Epoxy


Reference Title MIL-H-13528B-87 Hydrochloric Acid, Inhibited, Rust Removing MIL-STD-810C (1975) Environmental Test Methods UPC (1988) Uniform Plumbing Code B. FITTINGS AND COUPLING COMPATIBILITY: To assure uniformity and compatibility of piping components, fittings and couplings for grooved end piping systems shall be furnished by the same manufacturers.

PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING MATERIALS Unless otherwise specified, piping materials, including pipe, gaskets, fittings, connection and joint assemblies, linings and coatings, shall be selected from those listed on the piping system specification sheets. Piping materials shall conform to detailed specifications for each type of pipe and piping appurtenance specified in other sections of Division 15. 2.02 PIPING IDENTIFICATION A. PLASTIC CODING MARKERS: Plastic markers for coding pipe shall conform to ANSI A13.1 and shall be as manufactured by W. H. Brady Company, Seton Name Plate Corporation, Marking Services Inc., or equal. Markers shall be the mechanically attached type that are easily removable; they shall not be the adhesive applied type. Markers shall consist of pressure sensitive legends applied to plastic backing which is strapped or otherwise mechanically attached to the pipe. Legend and backing shall be resistant to petroleum based oils and grease and shall meet criteria for humidity, solar radiation, rain, salt, fog and leakage fungus, as specified by MIL-STD-810C. Markers shall withstand a continuous operating temperature range of -40 degrees F to 180 degrees F. Plastic coding markers shall not be the individual letter type but shall be manufactured and applied in one continuous length of plastic. Markers bearing the legends on the background colors specified in the PIPESPEC shall be provided in the following letter heights:

Outside pipe diameter,a Letter height, inches inches Less than 1-1/2 1/2 1-1/2 through 3 1-1/8 Greater than 3 2-1/4

a Outside pipe diameter shall include insulation and jacketing.


In addition, pipe markers shall include uni- and bi-directional arrows in the same sizes as the legend. Legends and arrows shall be white on blue or red backgrounds and black on other specified backgrounds. B. MAGNETIC TRACER TAPE: Polyethylene magnetic tracer tape shall be as manufactured by Allen Systems, W. H. Brady Co., Seton Name Plate Corporation, Marking Services, Inc., or equal. Tape shall be acid and alkali resistant, 3 inches wide, 0.005 inch thick, and have 1500 psi strength and 140 percent elongation value. The tape shall be colored the same as the background colors as specified in Table A, paragraph 15050-3.07, and shall be inscribed with the words “CAUTION—PIPE BURIED BELOW” and the name of the piping system. 2.03 VALVES Valves of the same size and service shall be provided by a single valve manufacturer. Packing shall be nonasbestos material. Actual length of valves shall be within 1/16 inch (plus or minus) of the manufacturer's specified length. Flanges shall meet the requirement of ANSI B16.5. Push-on and mechanical joints shall meet the requirements of AWWA C111. Valve operators are specified in Sections 15184. 2.04 PRODUCT DATA Product data on piping materials shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300 where specified. Piping layout drawings shall be transmitted to the Construction Manager a minimum of 2 weeks prior to construction. Drawings shall be original layouts by the Contractor; photocopies of contract drawings are not acceptable.

PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. LOCATION: Piping shall be provided as specified except for adjustments to avoid architectural and structural features and shall be coordinated with electrical construction. B. PIPING SIZES: Where the size of piping is not specified, the Contractor shall provide piping of the sizes required by UPC. Unless specified otherwise, small piping (less than 1 inch in diameter) required for services not described by UPC shall be 1/2 inch.


C. PIPE SUPPORT, SEISMIC BRACING AND EXPANSION CONTROL: Piping shall be supported by anchor brackets, guides, saddles or hangers. Acceptable types of supports, guides, saddles, expansion joints, flexible couplings, hangers and structure attachments for general pipe support, as well as anchorage details, are referenced on the drawings. Where a specific type of support or anchorage is indicated on the drawings, then only that type shall be used at that location. Piping shall be vertically supported by anchor brackets, guides, saddles or hangers and shall be seismically braced as required to resist seismic loads. Supports shall be provided on each run at each change of direction. Pipe supports manufactured of iron or steel shall be hot-dip or mechanically galvanized. Unless otherwise specified, existing pipes and supports shall not be used to support new piping. D. ANCHORAGE FOR BURIED PIPING: All plugs, caps, tees and bends in buried pressure piping systems shall be anchored by means of restrained joints as specified. E. BEDDING AND BACKFILL: Bedding and backfill for buried piping shall be as specified. 3.02 PIPING IDENTIFICATION A. PIPE CODING: After application of the specified coating and insulation systems, exposed piping, interior and exterior, and piping in ceiling spaces, pipe trenches, pipe chases and valve boxes shall be identified with plastic markers as specified in paragraph 15050-2.02 A. Legend markers and directional arrows shall be located at each side of walls, floors and ceilings, at one side of each piece of equipment, at piping intersections, and at approximately 50-foot centers. B. MAGNETIC TRACER TAPE: Polyethylene magnetic tracer tape shall be buried 12 to 18 inches below ground and shall be above and parallel to all buried pipe. For pipelines buried 8 feet or greater below finished grade, Contractor shall provide a second line of tape 2.5 feet above and parallel to the buried pipe. 3.03 VALVE IDENTIFICATION Stainless steel tags bearing the specified valve number stamped in ¼-inch high letters shall be installed on valve flanges in a position visible from floor level. Flangeless valves 8 inches in diameter and larger shall have tags attached to the valve body by self-tapping corrosion resistant metal screws. Flangeless valves 6 inches in diameter and smaller shall have tags attached to the valve stem by stainless steel wire. Wire shall be 0.063 inch minimum.


3.04 INSPECTION Not Used 3.05 TESTING A. GENERAL: Upon completion of piping, but prior to application of insulation on exposed piping, the Contractor shall test the piping systems. Pressures, media and test durations shall be as specified in the PIPESPEC. Equipment which may be damaged by the specified test conditions shall be isolated. Testing shall be performed using calibrated test gages and calibrated volumetric measuring equipment to determine leakage rates. Each test gage shall be selected so that the specified test pressure falls within the upper half of the gage's range. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall notify the Construction Manager 24 hours prior to each test. Unless otherwise specified, testing, as specified herein, shall include existing piping systems which connect with new pipe systems. Existing pipe shall be tested to the nearest existing valve. Any piping which fails the test shall be repaired. Repair of existing piping will be considered and paid for as extra work. B. LIQUID SYSTEMS: Leakage shall be zero at the specified test pressure throughout the specified duration for the following systems: exposed piping, buried insulated piping, and buried or exposed piping carrying liquid chemicals. Unless otherwise specified, leakage from other buried liquid piping systems shall not exceed the rate given in the following formula: L = SD (P) ½ 133,200 L = Allowable leakage in gallons per hour S = Length of pipe tested in feet D = Nominal inside diameter of pipe in inches P = Test pressure during test in psig Visible leaks shall be repaired. If the rate of loss is greater than that stated above, the Contractor shall locate and repair all leaks. The procedure shall be repeated until the pipe tests to the specifications. C. NOT USED D. DRAINS: Drain systems, other than pumped drain systems, shall be tested in accordance with UPC.


3.06 CLEANING AND FLUSHING A. GENERAL: Piping systems shall be cleaned following completion of testing and prior to connection to operating, control, regulating or instrumentation equipment. The Contractor may, at his option, clean and test sections of buried or exposed piping systems. Use of this procedure, however, will not waive the requirement for a full pressure test of the completed system. Unless specified otherwise, piping 24 inches in diameter and smaller shall first be cleaned by pulling a tightly fitting cleaning ball or swab through the system. Piping larger than 24 inches in diameter may be cleaned manually or with a cleaning ball or swab. B. TEMPORARY SCREENS: Upon completion of the cleaning, the Contractor shall connect the piping systems to related process equipment. Temporary screens, provided with locator tabs which remain visible from the outside when the screens are in place, shall be inserted in pipelines at the suction of pumps and compressors in accordance with the following table: Equipment suction or Maximum screen piping size, inches opening, inches

0 – 1 1/16 1-1/4 - 3 1/4 3-1/2 – 6 1/2 Over 6 1 The Contractor shall maintain the screens during testing, initial start-up, and initial operating phases of the commissioning process. In special cases, screens may be removed as required for performance tests. The Contractor shall remove the temporary screens and make the final piping connections after the screens have remained clean for at least 24 consecutive hours of operation. Systems handling solids are exempted. C. LIQUID SYSTEMS: After completion of cleaning, liquid systems, unless otherwise specified, shall be flushed with clean water. With temporary screens in place, the liquid shall be circulated through the piping system using connected equipment for a minimum period of 15 minutes and until no debris is collected on the screens. D. NOT USED E. POTABLE WATER SYSTEMS: Potable water piping systems shall be flushed and disinfected in accordance with AWWA C651.


3.07 PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEETS (PIPESPEC) Piping and valves for groupings of similar plant processes or types of service lines are specified on individual piping specification sheets (PIPESPECS). Piping services are grouped according to the chemical and physical properties of the fluid conveyed and/or by the temperature or pressure requirements. Each grouping of services (PIPESPEC) is identified by a piping system number. Piping services specified in the PIPESPECS and on the drawings are alphabetically arranged by designated service symbols as shown in Table A. Table A also indicates the system number, fluid category, and pipe marker background color of each service.

Table A, Piping Services

Fluid Pipe marker Symbol Service System category background color HPC Sodium Hypochlorite 19 Chemical Yellow NPW Non-Potable Water 11 Effluent Blue PW Plant Water 11 Effluent Blue SBS Sodium Bisulfite Solution 19 Chemical Yellow SE Secondary Effluent 11 Effluent Blue


3.07 PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEETS--PIPESPEC Piping Symbol/Service: NPW Non-Potable Water System 11 PW Plant Water SE Secondary Effluent Test Requirements: Medium: Water; ref. spec paragraph 15050 3.04 C. Pressure: 50 psig Duration: 120 minutes Gasket Requirements: Flange: Compressed gasketing consisting of organic fibers (Kevlar) and neoprene binder Push on/Mech Cpl: Nitrile or Neoprene Exposed Pipe and Valves: (See drawings for pipe size and valve type) (2" and smaller) Pipe: Steel; ASTM A53, galvanized. Ref. spec Section 15061. Conn; taper threaded, ANSI B1.20.1. Ftgs; malleable iron, ASTM A197, ANSI B16.3, Class 150,

galvanized. Valves: Ball; Jamesbury Fig. 351, Nibco T-580, or equal. Globe; Crane 7TF or 17TF, Lunkenheimer 123 or 214, or

equal. Swing check; Crane 137, Lunkenheimer 230, or equal. (2 1/2" thru 10") Pipe: Ductile Iron; ASTM C151, Ref. spec Section 15062, lining

and coating to match pipe Valves: Butterfly; spec Section 15103 (2 1/2" thru 10") Valves: Butterfly; ref. spec Section 15103. Swing check; spring loaded per spec Section 15118.

3.07 PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEETS--PIPESPEC Piping System: 11 (continued)


Buried and Encased Pipe and Valves: (See drawings for pipe size and valve type. Omit coating on encased pipe.) (3" and smaller) Pipe: Steel; same as exposed with polyethylene tape coating.

Field application of coating to all couplings. Conn; taper threaded, ANSI B1.20.1 with coating. Flanged

adapters for 2-1/2-inch, 3-inch valves. Ftgs; malleable iron, ASTM A197, ANSI B16.3, Class 150,

galvanized with coating. Valves: Gate; ref. spec Section 15101, with extension stem and

valve box. Coating M 1 per spec Section 09900. (4" thru 12") Pipe: Ductile iron; AWWA C151. Ref. spec Section 15062. Conn; mechanical joint or restrained push on rubber gasket

joint. Flanged adapters for valves. Ftgs; ductile iron per spec Section 15062; lining and ends to

match pipe. Valves: Butterfly; same as exposed with extension stem and valve

box. Coating M-1 per spec Section 09900. Remarks: 1. Manual air vents shall be provided at the high points and drains provided at the

low points of each reach of pipeline as specified in paragraph 15095 3.03.


3.07 PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEET--PIPESPEC Piping Symbol/Service: SBS—Sodium Bisulfite Solution System—19 HPC—Sodium Hypochlorite Solution Test Requirements: Medium: Water; ref. spec paragraph 15050-3.05 B. Pressure: 50 psig Duration: 120 minutes Gasket Requirements: Flange: TFE bonded EPDM, full-face gaskets, ANSI B16.1, Garlock

Gylon 3504, or equal Push-on/Mech Cpl: N/A Exposed Pipe and Valves: (See drawings for pipe size and valve type) (All sizes) Pipe: Tubing: Marprene II tubing in PVC casing PVC; ASTM D1784, Class 12454-B, NSF certified, ASTM

D1785, Sch. 80. Pipe and fittings exposed to sunlight shall be painted.

Conn; plain end, solvent weld, flanged for valves 3 inch and larger.

Ftgs; PVC, Sch. 80, solvent weld. (all welds for sodium hypochlorite shall use solvent cement approved for this chemical by the manufacturer)

(2” and less) Valves: Ball; PVC Chemtrol TFU Bloc TU Series, Asahi/America

Duo Bloc TU Series, GSR TU Series, or equal, with Teflon seats and EPDM 0-rings.

Ball check; PVC body, Chemtrol Series BC, Asahi/America, or equal with Teflon seats/seals.

Diaphragm; PVC body, Chemtrol Series PD, Posacon 677, Asahi/America, or equal with Teflon diaphragm.

3.07 PIPING SPECIFICATION SHEETS--PIPESPEC Piping System: 19 (continued)


Buried and Encased Pipe and Valves: (See drawings for pipe size and valve type) (All sizes) Pipe: PVC; same as exposed. Conn; same as exposed. Ftgs; same as exposed. Piping System: 19 (continued) (2” and less) Valves: Ball; same as exposed with extension stem and valve box. Diaphragm; same as exposed with extension stem and valve

box. Remarks: 1. Solvent welding of connections shall be done in strict conformance with ASTM

D2855 (Standard Practice for Making Solvent Cement Joints with PVC Pipe and Fittings).

2. Bisulfate shall be conveyed in Marprene II tubing inside of PVC casing pipe.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 15061

STEEL PIPE

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section specifies steel pipe and fittings. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. REFERENCES: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

ANSI B16.3 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Class 150 and 300

ANSI B16.9 Factory-Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings

ANSI B16.11 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded


ASTM A47 Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings

ASTM A53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless

ASTM A105/A105M Forgings, Carbon Steel, for Piping Components

ASTM A106 REV A Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service

ASTM A197 Cupola Malleable Iron


Reference Title

ASTM A234/A234M Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures

ASTM A283/A283M REV A

Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars


ASTM A570/A570M Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheet and Strip, Structural Quality


High Strength Low Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steels of Structural Quality

AWWA C200 Steel Water Pipe 6 Inches and Larger

AWWA C205 Cement-Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Water Pipe--4 In. and Larger-- Shop Applied

AWWA C206 Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe

AWWA C207 Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Services--Sizes 4 In. Through 144 In.

AWWA C208 Dimensions for Fabricated Steel Water Pipe Fittings

AWWA C209 Cold-Applied Tape Coating for Special Sections, Connections, and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines

AWWA C210 Liquid Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipe

AWWA C214 Tape Coating Systems for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines

AWWA C600 Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances

AWWA M11 Steel Pipe--A Guide for Design and Installation

SSPC-SP10 Near-White Blast Cleaning B. TESTING: Factory testing shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A53, ASTM A106, or AWWA C200 as applicable.


PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE MATERIALS Steel pipe and fittings shall be provided in accordance with ASTM A53, ASTM A106, or AWWA C200 as specified in Section 15050, Piping Systems. Steel for pipe fabricated to meet requirements of AWWA C200 shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A36, ASTM A572, Grade 42, ASTM A570, Grades 33 and 36, or ASTM A283, Grade D. Steel for ASTM A53 and ASTM A106 pipe shall be Grade B. 2.02 PIPE MANUFACTURE Unless otherwise specified, ASTM A53 pipe shall be Type E, electric resistance welded or Type S, seamless pipe as specified in Section 15050. The minimum wall thickness for ASTM A53 or ASTM A106 pipe shall be Schedule 40 for pipe 10 inch diameter and less and 3/8 inch for pipe 12 inch through 24 inch diameter. Increased shell thickness shall be provided where specified. AWWA C200 pipe shall be straight or spiral seam. The minimum wall thickness shall be 7 gage for pipe 6 inch through 24 inch diameter and 1/4 inch for pipe 26 inch diameter and larger. Increased shell thickness shall be provided where specified. 2.03 CONNECTIONS Connections shall be as specified in Section 15050 and shall conform to Section 15085. Coating for buried connections shall be as specified in paragraph 15085-2.06. 2.04 FITTINGS AND APPURTENANCES Malleable iron threaded fittings and appurtenances shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A47 or ASTM A197, ANSI B16.3. Unless otherwise specified, steel fittings and appurtenances shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A234, ASTM A105, or ANSI B16.11; and fabricated steel fittings and appurtenances shall conform to AWWA C208. Fittings for grooved end piping systems shall be full flow cast fittings, steel fittings, or segmentally welded fittings with grooves or shoulders designed to accept grooved end couplings. Cast fittings shall be cast of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536 or malleable iron conforming to ASTM A47. Standard steel fittings, including large size elbows, shall be forged steel conforming to ASTM A106. Standard segmentally welded fittings shall be fabricated of Schedule 40 carbon steel pipe. Unless otherwise specified, all fittings shall be rated for pressure and loadings equal to the pipe.


2.05 PIPE LINING A. EPOXY: Unless otherwise specified, pipe and fittings shall be lined with a liquid epoxy as specified in AWWA C210 with the following exceptions: 1. No coal tar products shall be incorporated in the liquid epoxy. 2. The curing agent may be an amidoamine as well as the other curing agents

listed in AWWA C210. The lining shall be applied to a minimum thickness of 16 mils in not less than two coats. B. CEMENT MORTAR: Where specified, pipe and fittings shall be lined with cement mortar as specified in AWWA C205. Fittings and specials larger than 24 inches, not fabricated from centrifugally lined straight sections, shall require 2-inch by 4-inch by 13-gage self-furring wire mesh reinforcement for hand-applied lining. C. HIGH TEMPERATURE SERVICE EPOXY: Where specified, steel pipe and fittings shall be epoxy lined with not less than 10 mils of epoxy suitable for temperatures of 225 degrees F. Epoxy lining shall be 3M Scotchkote 306, Porter MCR 65 High Solids Epoxy, or equal. Surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with SSPC-SP 10 Near White Blast Cleaning, and the lining applied as recommended by the manufacturer. D. GLASS LINING: Where specified, pipe and fittings shall be glass lined with a dual layer coating system of vitreous material to a minimum thickness of 10 mils. Glass lining shall provide continuous coverage as tested by a low voltage holiday detector with only isolated voids permitted due to casting anomalies. Voids, other than isolated pinholes, shall be cause for rejection. Pipe and fittings shall have all internal welds ground smooth and any voids or slag holes ground out, rewelded and ground smooth. Glass lining shall be Ferrock MEH-32, Vitco SG-14, or equal.


2.06 PIPE COATING A. EPOXY: Unless otherwise specified, pipe and fittings shall be coated with a liquid epoxy as specified in AWWA C210 with the following exceptions: 1. No coal tar products shall be incorporated in the liquid epoxy. 2. The curing agent may be an amidoamine as well as the other curing agents

listed in AWWA C210. The coating shall be applied to a minimum thickness of 16 mils in not less than two coats. B. POLYETHYLENE TAPE: Where specified, pipe and fittings shall be coated and wrapped with prefabricated multilayer cold applied polyethylene tape coating in accordance with AWWA C214. The coating application shall be a continuous step operation in conformance with AWWA C214, Section 3. The total coating thickness shall be not less than 50 mils for pipe 24 inches and smaller and not less than 80 mils for pipe 26 inches and larger. 2.07 FUSION EPOXY COATING AND LINING Where specified, steel pipe and fittings shall be fusion epoxy coated and lined. The fusion epoxy coating shall be 3M Scotchkote 203, or equal. Surface preparation shall be in accordance with SSPC-SP 10 Near White Blast Cleaning. The application method shall be by the fluidized bed method and shall attain 12 mils minimum dry film thickness. Field welds, connections and otherwise damaged areas shall be coated and patched according to the manufacturer's instructions with 3M Scotchkote 306. 2.08 JOINT GASKETS Joint gaskets shall be as specified in Section 15075. 2.09 PRODUCT DATA The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Affidavits of Compliance with AWWA C200, ASTM A53, or ASTM A106

as applicable. 2. Contractor's layout drawings as specified in paragraph 15050-2.04.


PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. GENERAL: Pipe shall be installed in accordance with AWWA M11, Chapter 16. Welded joints shall be in accordance with AWWA C206 and Section 15085. Sleeve-type mechanical pipe couplings shall be provided in accordance with AWWA M11 and paragraph 15085-2.02 A. Pipe lining and coatings at field joints shall be applied as specified in paragraphs 15061-2.05 and 2.06. Unless otherwise specified, buried mechanical couplings and valves shall be field coated as specified in paragraph 15085-2.06. B. ANCHORAGE: Anchorage shall be provided as specified. Calculations and drawings for proposed alternative anchorage shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01300. 3.02 TESTING Hydrostatic testing shall be in accordance with Section 4 of AWWA C600 except that test pressures and allowable leakage shall be as listed in Section 15050.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 15064

PLASTIC PIPE

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies polyvinylchloride, chlorinated polyvinylchloride, polyethylene, and polypropylene pipe and fittings. This section applies to minor plant piping and is not to be used for outfall or diffuser construction. B. PIPE DESIGNATIONS: For use in the Piping System Specification Sheets (PIPESPEC) in Section 15050 and in this section, the following plastic pipe designations are defined:

Designation Definition

PVC Polyvinyl chloride

CPVC Chlorinated polyvinylchloride

PE Polyethylene

PP Polypropylene 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. REFERENCES: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.


Reference Title

ASTM D1248 Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion Materials

ASTM D1784 Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds

ASTM D1785 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120

ASTM D2241 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR)

ASTM D2464 Threaded Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80

ASTM D2466 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40

ASTM D2467 Socket-Type Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80

ASTM D2564 Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings

ASTM D2657 Heat-Joining Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings

ASTM D2665 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings

ASTM D2855 Standard Practice for Making Solvent Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings

ASTM D3034 Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings

ASTM D4101 Propylene Plastic Injection and Extrusion Materials

ASTM F402 Safe Handling of Solvent Cements and Primers Used for Joining Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings

ASTM F437 Threaded Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80

ASTM F438 Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40

ASTM F439 Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80

ASTM F441 Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80

ASTM F477 Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe

ASTM F493 Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings


PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 PVC PIPE A. PRESSURE PIPE: PVC material for pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM D1784, Class 12454-B. Pipe and fittings shall either be in accordance with ASTM D1785 or shall conform to ASTM D2241 for standard dimension ratios: 160 psi pipe--SDR 26; 200 psi pipe--SDR 21; 250 psi--SDR 17. Pressure rating for pipe shall be in excess of test pressure specified in Section 15050. Neoprene gaskets with push-on joints shall conform to ASTM F477. Schedule 80 PVC socket type fittings shall conform to ASTM D2467. Schedule 40 PVC fittings shall conform to ASTM D2466. Unless otherwise specified, PVC solvent weld cement for socket connections shall meet the requirements of ASTM D2564. Schedule 80 PVC threaded fittings shall conform to ASTM D2464. Fittings for gasketed pipe shall be ductile iron or steel push-on IPS-sized pressure fittings rated for use with the specified class of PVC pipe. Unless otherwise specified, fittings shall be lined and coated in accordance with Section 15061 or Section 15062 as applicable. B. NONPRESSURE PIPE: 1. GRAVITY SEWER PIPE: PVC material for sewer pipe and fittings shall conform to Class 12454-B, as defined in ASTM D1784. Pipe and fittings shall meet the require-ments of ASTM D3034 for SDR 35. Neoprene gaskets with push-on joints shall conform to ASTM F477. 2. DRAIN, WASTE AND VENT PIPE: PVC material for drain waste and vent (DWV) pipe and fittings shall conform to Class 12454-B, ASTM D1784. Pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM D2665. Unless otherwise specified, connections shall be solvent weld. Connections to traps, closet flanges, and nonplastic pipe shall be with approved adapter type fittings designed for intended use. Solvent weld cement for socket connections shall meet requirements of ASTM D2564. 2.02 CPVC PIPE CPVC material for pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM D1784, Class 23447-B. Pipe and fittings shall be in accordance with ASTM F441. Neoprene gaskets with push-on joints shall conform to ASTM F477. Schedule 80 CPVC socket type fittings shall conform to ASTM F439. Schedule 40 CPVC socket type fittings shall conform to ASTM F438. CPVC solvent weld cement for socket connec-tions shall meet the requirements of ASTM F493. Schedule 80 CPVC threaded type fittings shall conform to ASTM F437.


Pipe for sodium hypochlorite service shall be Schedule 80 CPVC with solvent-welded socket connections. Solvent shall be Weld-On 724 by IPS Corporation, or equal, designed for sodium hypochlorite service. 2.03 PE PIPE PE pipe shall meet the requirements of ASTM D1248, Type III, Grade P 34, Class C, 100 psi or as specified in Section 15050, whichever is higher. Fittings shall be of the same material, molded socket fusion for sizes 4 inch diameter and smaller and molded or fabricated butt fusion for sizes 6 inch and larger. Fittings shall be 125 psi or as specified in Section 15050, whichever is higher. Heat fusion welding shall be in conformance with ASTM D2657. 2.04 PP PIPE A. PRESSURE PIPE: PP pipe and fittings shall be formulated of polypropylene conforming to ASTM D4101, SDR 11, butt fusion type. Pipe shall be 150 psi rated in all sizes. Heat fusion welding shall be in conformance with manufacturer's recommendation. B. DRAIN, WASTE AND VENT PIPE: PP drain, waste and vent (DWV) pipe and fittings shall be made from flame retardant, Schedule 40, polypropylene (PPFR) plastic as defined in ASTM D4101. Pipe and fittings used for buried piping and in concealed locations shall be joined by electrical fusion coils energized by a variable low-voltage power supply to completely fuse the interface between the pipe and socket and form a completely homogenous structure. Unless otherwise specified, mechanical joint fittings may be used under bench or in exposed locations where future disassembly is desired. The mechanical method shall be in conformance with the manufacturer's recommendation. 2.05 PRODUCT DATA The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer’s certificates of compliance with the specified standards and

Contractor’s layout drawings. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION PVC pipe 3 inches in diameter and smaller shall be joined by means of socket fittings and solvent welding in conformance with ASTM F402. Solvent-cemented joints shall be made in strict compliance with the manufacturer’s/supplier's instructions and recommended procedures and ASTM D2855. Unless otherwise specified, PVC pipe 4 inches in diameter and greater shall be


joined by means of gasketed push-on joints and steel or ductile iron push-on or mechanical joint fittings. Fittings shall be lined and coated as specified in Section 15061 or 15062. Unless otherwise specified, PVC and CPVC piping exposed to sunlight shall be painted with coating system L-2 as specified in Section 09900.

Connections to different types of pipe shall be by means of flanges, specified adapters or transition fittings. Where sleeve type couplings are used, both shall be uniformly torqued in accordance with pipe manufacturer’s recommendation. Foreign material shall be removed from the pipe interior prior to assembly. Unless otherwise specified, PE pipe and fittings 4 inch diameter and smaller shall be joined by means of thermal socket fusion and pipe 6 inch and larger by thermal butt fusion. Butt-fusion joining of the pipes and fittings shall be performed with special joining equipment in accordance with procedures recommended by pipe manufacturer. Tensile strength at yield of butt-fusion joints shall not be less than pipe. Flanged adapters shall be provided for connection to valves and where specified. 3.02 TESTING Testing of plastic piping shall be as specified in Section 15050.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 15067

STAINLESS STEEL PIPING PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies stainless steel pipe and fittings. B. TYPES OF SERVICE: High temperature stainless steel piping for engine exhaust is specified in PIPESPEC System 31 in Section 15050. Stainless steel piping specified in this section shall be used for waste ping and possible overflow piping 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. REFERENCES: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

ANSI B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Classes 25, 125, 250, and 800

ANSI B16.11.80 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket Welding and Threaded.

ANSI B31.1 Power Piping

ANSI B36.19M Stainless Steel Pipe


Reference Title

ASME Section IX (1989) Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; Welding and Brazing Qualifications

ASTM A182/A182M Forged or Rolled Alloy-Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High-Temperature Service

ASTM A193/A193M Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service

ASTM A194/A194M Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure and High-Temperature Service

ASTM A240 Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels

ASTM A276 Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes

ASTM A312/A312M Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes

ASTM A320/A320M Alloy Steel Bolting Materials for Low-Temperature Service

ASTM A403/A403M Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings

ASTM A409/A409M Welded Large Diameter Austenitic Steel Pipe for Corrosive or High Temperature Service

ASTM A480/A480M General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip

ASTM A774/A774M As-Welded Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Fittings for General Corrosive Service at Low and Moderate Temperatures

ASTM A778 Welded, Unannealed Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubular Products

B. QUALIFICATIONS: All shop fabricated stainless steel pipe and fittings shall be furnished by a single manufac-turer who is experienced and qualified in the manufacture and fabrication of the items to be furnished. The pipe and fittings shall be shop-fabricated and field-installed in accordance with common industry wide practices and methods and shall comply with these specifications. Only weld procedures which have been qualified under ASME Section IX and only welders who have successfully completed performance qualification tests per ASME Section IX on these qualified procedures shall be utilized.


C. TESTING: Factory testing shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A312, ASTM A409 HT-0, or ASTM A778, depending on the size and type of stainless steel pipe provided. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300:

1. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. A check mark shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the Contractor, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. The Construction Manager shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration .

2. Shop fabrication drawings showing details of materials, piping, fittings,

couplings, dielectric connections, joint locations and details, types and locations of supports.

3. Other data necessary to show conformance of the complete piping system to

these specifications. PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE Unless otherwise specified, stainless steel piping 3 inches and larger shall be manufactured from ASTM A240 annealed and pickled sheets and plates, Type 304 L, in accordance with ASTM A778 or ASTM A409 HT-0. Only extra-low carbon (ELC) materials with 0.030 percent maximum carbon shall be used. Pipe shall be manufactured to nominal pipe sizes as listed in ANSI B36.19 and shall have the following nominal wall thickness:


Nominal pipe size, inches

Schedule gage/plate

Wall thickness, inches

10-12 12-gage sheet 0.105

14-18 11-gage sheet 0.120

20 10-gage sheet 0.135

24-36 3/16-inch plate 0.188 2.02 FITTINGS Unless otherwise specified, stainless steel fittings, 3-inch and larger, shall be butt-weld type manufactured in accordance with ASTM A774 of the same material and in the same thicknesses as the pipe. Long radius elbows up to 24 inches in diameter shall be smooth flow. All short radius, special radius, and reducing elbows and long radius elbows greater than 24 inches in diameter shall be of mitered construction. Reducers shall be straight tapered, cone type. Tees, crosses, laterals, and wyes shall be shop-fabricated from pipe. 2.03 JOINTS Stainless steel pipe fabricated into spool pieces shall have shop-welded circumferential butt-weld joints or flanges. Unless otherwise specified, flanged joints shall be Van Stone joints made up of stainless steel slip-on type rolled-angle face rings and ductile iron backup flanges drilled to ANSI B16.1, Class 125 standard. The angle face ring thickness shall be equal to or greater than the wall of the pipe or fitting to which it is welded, and it shall be continuously welded on both sides to the pipe or fitting. The angle leg shall not interfere with the flange bolt holes. For submerged joints, backup flanges shall be stainless steel plate flanges. The backup flanges shall be supplied with the following nominal thicknesses.

Nominal pipe size, inches

Flange thickness, inches

6-10 5/8

18-20 7/8

24-30 1 2.04 COUPLINGS A. GENERAL: Fabricated stainless steel piping shall be shop-prepared for pipe couplings where specified. Unless otherwise specified, couplings shall be arched-band or grooved type.


B. SLEEVE TYPE: Sleeve type couplings, where specified, shall be of standard steel construction as specified in paragraph 15085-2.02 A. Pipe shall be plain-end with external weld beads ground smooth to ensure proper gasket seating. For pressure pipe lines, sleeve coupling joints shall be restrained by the use of harness rods connecting across the joint to flange lugs on adjacent flange joints. Where no adjacent flange joints exist, stainless steel harness lugs shall be welded to the pipe to receive the harness rods. C. ARCHED-BAND TYPE: Arched-band type couplings shall be stainless steel of the same material and wall thickness as the pipe and shall be Depend-O-Lok type as manufactured by Brico or equal. Couplings shall be Fixed--FxF, Expansion--ExE, or Fixed by Expansion--FxE as specified or as required. The pipe shall be plain-end with external weld beads ground smooth and with S.S. restraining rings shop-welded to the piping for fixed type couplings. D. GROOVED-END TYPE: Grooved-end or split type couplings shall be malleable iron or ductile iron as specified in paragraph 15085-2.02 C except that submerged couplings shall be the same material as the pipe. The pipe ends shall be roll-grooved to the coupling manufacturer's specifications. Where roll grooving is impractical, the pipe shall have heavy-wall machine-grooved pipe nipples or machined ring collars fully welded to the pipe or fitting. Nipples shall be taper-bored to the I.D. of the adjoining pipe to allow full-weld penetration. Collars shall be welded on both sides to the piping. Nipples and collars shall be of the same alloy as the piping. E. EXPANSION TYPE: Unless otherwise specified, expansion couplings shall be the flanged rubber arch type as specified in Section 15090. Pipe flanges shall be provided for these couplings. 2.05 THREADED CONNECTIONS Threaded pipe, gage, or instrument connections shall be made using stainless steel, 150-pound, threaded half-couplings conforming to ASTM A182 or ASTM A276, shop welded to the pipe at the locations specified. 2.06 GASKETS Unless otherwise specified, gaskets shall be as specified in the PIPESPECS and in paragraph 15085-2.03. For air lines, gaskets shall be neoprene or EPDM suitable for use at temperatures to 240 degrees F.


2.07 BOLTS Bolts, nuts, and washers for stainless steel flange assemblies and stainless steel couplings shall be the same material, conforming to ASTM A320 for low-temperature service and ASTM A193 and ASTM A194 for high-temperature service. Bolts, nuts and washers for other couplings shall be as specified in referenced paragraphs for the couplings. 2.08 PIPE SUPPORT SYSTEMS Unless otherwise specified, all hangers, rods, structural attachments, and other components of support systems for stainless steel pipe shall be of the same materials as the pipe and conform to Section 15096. 2.09 FINISH After all shop operations have been completed, pipe and fittings shall be pickled and passivated in manufacturer's plant, and scrubbed and washed until discoloration and possible iron picked up from manufacturing process are removed. The standard finish for 16-gage through 8-gage material shall be No. 1 or 2B per ASTM A480; 3/16-inch and heavier plate material shall be No. 1 mill finish or better per ASTM A480. 2.10 PRODUCT DATA The following information and data shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Certifications specified in the following documents: ASTM A403, paragraph 14.1 ASTM A774, paragraph 14.1 ASTM A778, paragraph 14.1 ASTM A409, paragraph 17.1 2. Test results specified in paragraph 15067-1.02 C. 3. Names and qualification records of proposed welders. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 PIPE CUTTING, THREADING, AND JOINTING Pipe cutting, threading, and jointing shall conform to the requirements of ANSI B31.1. All pipe threads shall be lubricated with Teflon tape.


3.02 WELDING A. GENERAL: Piping with wall thickness up to 11 gage (0.120 inch) shall be welded with the TIG (GTAW) process. Unless otherwise specified, heavier walls shall be properly beveled and have a root pass with the TIG (GTAW) process followed by subsequent passes with the TIG (GTAW), MIG (GMAW), or Metallic Arc (SMAW) process. Filler wire of ELC grades only shall be added to all welds to provide a cross section at the weld equal to or greater than the parent metal. Weld deposit shall be smooth and evenly distributed and have a crown of no more than 1/16 inch on the I.D. and 3/32 inch on the O.D. of the piping. Concavity, undercut, cracks, or crevices shall not be allowed. Butt welds shall have full penetration to the interior surface, and inert gas shielding shall be provided to the interior and exterior of the joint. Excessive weld deposits, slag, spatter, and projections shall be removed by grinding. Welds on gasket surfaces shall be ground smooth. B. FIELD WELDING: Field welding shall be minimized to the greatest extent possible by use of couplings and prefabrication of pipe systems at the factory. Pipe butt welds may be performed at the job site, providing the but welds are performed only with an inert gas shielded process and that other applicable specified welding requirements are rigidly adhered to. All residue, oxide, and heat stain is to be removed from any type of field weld and the affected areas adjacent by the use of stainless steel wire brushes, followed by cleaning with an agent such as Eutectic Company's "Eucleen," or equal, followed by complete removal of the agent. C. PREPARATION OF SURFACES TO BE WELDED: Surfaces of joints to be welded shall be free from mill scale, slag, grease, oil, paint, rust, and other foreign material. Joints to be welded shall be wire-brushed with stainless steel wire brushes and precisely fitted before welding. D. WEATHER CONDITIONS: Welding shall be done only when the surfaces are completely free of any moisture. Welding of the pipe shall not be done during periods of high winds or rain unless the areas being welded are properly shielded. E. TACK WELDS, CLIPS, AND OTHER ATTACHMENTS: Nicks, gouges, notches, and depressions in the base metal in the area of the joint shall be repaired before the joint weld is made. Tack welds, clips, and other attachments shall be removed and defects repaired, except where the tack welds occur within the weld area and these tack welds do not exceed the size of the completed weld. Cracked tack welds shall be removed. Areas to be repaired shall be ground to clean metal and then repaired by building up with weld metal. The repaired areas shall be ground smooth to form a plane surface with the base metal.


F. DEFECTS AND REPAIRS: Welds with cracks, slag inclusions, porosity, undercutting, incomplete penetration, or which are otherwise deficient in quality or made contrary to any provisions of these specifications shall be removed by chipping or grinding throughout their depth to clean base metal. Calking or peening of welds to correct defects shall not be done. Welds found deficient in dimension but not in quality shall be enlarged by additional welding after thoroughly cleaning the surface of previously deposited metal and the adjoining plate. Weld deposits, slag, weld spatter, and projections into the interior of the pipe shall be removed by grinding. 3.03 MARKING, SHIPPING, AND STORAGE All pipe, fittings, and fabrications shall be properly marked with type, gage, and heat number. All fabricated piping shall have openings plugged and flanges secured for storage and/or transport after fabrication. All fabricated piping shall be piece-marked with identifying numbers or codes which correspond to the Contractor's layout and installation drawings. The marks will be located on the spools at opposite ends and 180 degrees apart. Pipe spools shall be loaded and blocked and lagged as necessary to ensure protection from damage during shipping. Stainless steel pipe and fittings shall be stored per manufacturer's recommendation. Dents, gouges, and scratches in stainless steel pipe and fittings are not acceptable and are reason for rejecting pipe and fittings. 3.04 FABRICATION/INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS The piping supplier during manufacturing, fabricating and handling stages, and the Contractor during handling and installation stages, shall use extreme care to avoid the contact of any ferrous materials with the stainless steel piping. All saws, drills, files, wire brushes, etc. shall be used for stainless steel piping only. Pipe storage and fabrication racks shall be nonferrous or stainless steel or rubber-lined. Nylon slings or straps shall be used for handling stainless steel piping. Contact with ferrous items may cause rusting of iron particles embedded in the piping walls. After installation, the Contractor shall wash and rinse all foreign matter from the piping surface. All welded joints shall be treated with a pickling solution, brushed with stainless steel wire brushes and rinsed clean. If rusting of embedded iron occurs, the Contractor shall pickle the affected surface with Oakite Deoxidizer SS, or equal, scrub with stainless steel brushes, and rinse clean. 3.05 COATINGS After installation, the Contractor shall paint all steel or iron flanges, couplings, and appurtenances in accordance with Section 09900. Painting of the stainless steel pipe is not required. However, the Contractor shall be responsible for supplying and installing the stainless steel piping with a consistently clean surface. Identifying spool piece marks shall be removed with paint thinner or solvents and the entire stainless steel surface shall be washed with detergent and hot water and rinsed clean.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 15095

PIPING APPURTENANCES PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies pressure gauges and sensors. PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 PRESSURE DEVICES A. PRESSURE GAUGES: Unless otherwise specified, pressure gauge scales shall be selected so that the normal operating pressure falls between 50 and 80 percent of full scale, shall be 4 1/2-inch, 270-degree movement, 1/2-percent accuracy, full-scale, and suitable for bottom stem mounting. Gauges shall have a 316-SS bourdon tube. All gauges shall have a 300 series stainless steel case, shatterproof glass, and a 1/2-inch NPT bottom connection. Pressure gauges for air, gas, and low pressure services (0-10 feet) shall be premium grade, heavy-duty bourdon-tube units (bellow type for vacuum) with Delrin bushings and pinion, and stainless steel sector. Gauges on liquid service shall be as noted above, except they shall be provided with an internal pulsation dampening system consisting of either a glycerin fill or a silicone fluid fill. Snubbers or orifices shall not be utilized. Gauges shall be Ashcroft Duragauge Fig. 1279, Ametek 1981L, or equal. B. PRESSURE SENSORS Unless otherwise specified, pressure sensors (tubular chemical seals) shall be the in-line full stream captive sensing liquid type. Wetted parts shall be 316 stainless steel. Flexible cylinder shall be Buna-N unless otherwise specified. Seals shall be rated for 200 psi with 5-inch SC hysteresis. Seals shall be Ronningen-Petter, Red Valve, or equal. Fill fluid shall be rated for a temperature range of -20 degrees F to 200 degrees F. Capillary tubing shall be armored stainless steel. Fittings shall be provided for vacuum filling of system. Systems that are not factory filled shall be vacuum filled in the field. Filling connections shall be soldered shut after vacuum evacuation and filling.


C. DIAPHRAGM SEALS: Unless otherwise specified, seals shall be diaphragm type with 1/4-inch flushing connection, Type 316 stainless steel body and Type 316L diaphragm. Fill fluid shall be Silicone DC200 unless otherwise specified. Seal shall be Mansfield and Green Type SG, Ashcroft Type 101, or equal.

2.02 PRODUCT DATA Manufacturer’s product data shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 GAUGE TAPS Gauge taps shall be provided on the suction and discharge of pumps, fans, compressors, vacuum pumps and blowers. Gauge taps shall consist of a 1/4-inch gauge cock attached by a threaded nipple to the pipeline, duct or equipment.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 15096

PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies hangers and supports for all piping systems specified in Section 15050. This section does not include pipe supports for fire sprinkler systems, pipe anchors, guides or seismic restraints. B. OPERATING CONDITIONS: The hangers and supports specified in this section are provided to resist pipe loads occurring primarily in the downward (gravity) direction. For the purpose of pipe hanger and support selection, this section establishes pipe support classifications based on the operating temperatures of the piping contents. Pipe support classifications are as follows: 1. Hot Systems A - 1. 120 degrees F to 450 degrees F A - 2. 451 degrees F to 750 degrees F A - 3. Over 750 degrees F 2. Ambient Systems B. 60 degrees F to 119 degrees F 3. Cold Systems C - 1. 33 degrees F to 59 degrees F C - 2. -20 degrees F to 32 degrees F C. HANGER AND SUPPORT SELECTION: The Contractor shall cause the pipe hangers and supports to be designed by the design professional retained under the provisions of paragraph 15050-1.02 B. This provision, however, shall not be construed to relieve the Contractor of overall responsibility for this portion of the work. The Contractor shall select pipe hangers and supports as specified in this section and elsewhere in the project manual. Selections shall be based upon the pipe support classifications specified in MSS-SP69, the piping insulation thickness specified in Section 15250, and any special requirements which may be specified in the project manual. The Contractor shall review the piping


layout in relation to the surrounding structure and adjacent piping and equipment before selecting the type of support to be used at each hanger point. The pipe hanger and support system shall be coordinated with the seismic restraint specified under Section 15097 and the expansion control system specified under the provisions of Section 15098. Hangers and supports shall withstand all static and specified dynamic conditions of loading to which the piping and associated equipment may be subjected. As a minimum, consideration shall be given to the following conditions:

1. Weights of pipe, valves, fittings, insulating materials, suspended hanger components, and normal fluid contents.

2. Weight of hydrostatic test fluid or cleaning fluid if normal operating fluid

contents are lighter. 3. Reaction forces due to the operation of safety or relief valves.

4. Wind, snow or ice loadings on outdoor piping. 5. Supports shall be designed to prevent transfer of the weight of piping, valves

and piping appurtenances to equipment pipe connections. All supports adjacent at equipment connections to piping systems shall have provisions for vertical or horizontal adjustment. Two flexible piping connections not less than one pipe diameter apart shall be provided between piping supports and any equipment pipe connection.

Hangers and supports shall be sized to fit the outside diameter of pipe, tubing, or, where specified, the outside diameter of insulation. Where negligible movement occurs at hanger locations, rod hangers shall be used for suspended lines, wherever practical. For piping supported from below, bases, brackets or structural cross members shall be used. Hangers for the suspension of size 2 1/2 inches and larger pipe and tubing shall be capable of vertical hanger component adjustment under load. The supporting systems shall provide for and control the free or intended movement of the piping including its movement in relation to that of connected equipment. Where there is horizontal movement at a suspended type hanger location, hanger components shall be selected to allow for swing. The vertical angle of the hanger rod shall not, at any time, exceed 4 degrees. There shall be no contact between a pipe and hanger or support component of dissimilar metals. Prevent contact between dissimilar metals when supporting copper tubing by use of copper-plated, rubber, plastic or vinyl coated, or stainless steel hanger and support components.


Unless otherwise specified, existing pipes and supports shall not be used to support new piping. Unless otherwise specified, pipe support components shall not be attached to pressure vessels. Stock hanger and support components shall be used wherever practical. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. REFERENCES: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

AISC Manual of Steel Construction

American Institute of Steel Construction, Manual of Steel Construction, Allowable Stress Design - 9th Ed.

FEDSPEC WW-H-171e-78 Hangers and Supports, Pipe

MFMA-2-91 Metal Framing Standards Publication

MFMA-101-85 Guidelines for the Use of Metal Framing

MSS SP-58-93 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture

MSS SP-69-91 Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application

MSS SP-89-91 Pipe Hangers and Supports – Fabrication and Installation Practices


B. DESIGN: The Contractor shall cause the design of the pipe hanger and support system to be developed in conjunction with preparation of the design of the seismic restraints and expansion control systems by the design professional selected in accordance with the provisions of paragraph 15050-1.02 B. The pipe system drawings specified in paragraph 15050-2.04 shall show the hanger and support locations as well as the details of the seismic restraints and expansion control systems. The pipe hanger and support design drawings and calculations shall be prepared and signed by the design professional and shall bear the design professional's registration seal and signature. PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS Standard pipe supports and components shall be manufactured by B-Line, Carpenter & Patterson, Kin-Line, Grinnell, Michigan, Pipe Shields Incorporated, Superstrut, Unistrut, or equal. Pipe support components shall conform to the requirements of MSS SP-69 and FEDSPEC WW-H-171e. Pipe support materials shall conform to the requirements of MSS SP-58. Pipe hanger and support fabrication and installation shall conform to the requirements of MSS SP-89. Metal framing system components and application shall conform to the Metal Framing Manufacturers' Association Standard MFMA-2 and MFMA-101. 2.02 MATERIALS A. GENERAL: Unless otherwise specified, pipe hangers and supports, structural attachments, fittings and accessories shall be hot-dip or mechanically galvanized after fabrication. Nuts, bolts and washers may be zinc-plated except for those subject to moisture or corrosive atmosphere, as specified in paragraph 16000-1.05 B, which shall be type 304 stainless steel. B. PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS: 1. TYPE 1 - CLEVIS PIPE HANGER: Clevis hangers shall be carbon steel with configuration and components equivalent to MSS and FEDSPEC Type 1.

a. Steel pipe (insulated) - shall be B-Line B3100, Grinnell Fig. 260, or equal, with insulation shield.

b. Steel pipe (uninsulated) - shall be B-Line B3100, Grinnell Fig. 260,

or equal.

c. Cast and ductile iron pipe - shall be B-Line B3102, Grinnell Fig. 590, or equal.


d. Copper pipe (uninsulated) - shall be B-Line B3104 CT, Grinnell Fig.

CT-65, or equal.

e. Copper pipe (insulated) - shall be B-Line B3100, Grinnell Fig. 260, or equal, with insulation shield.

f. Plastic pipe - shall be B-Line B3100 C, Carpenter & Patterson Fig.

100PVC, or equal. 2. TYPE 2 - "J" PIPE HANGER: Hangers shall be carbon steel with configuration and components equivalent to MSS Type 5.

a. Steel pipe - shall be B-Line B3690, Grinnell Fig. 67, Michigan model 418, or equal.

b. Copper and plastic pipe - shall be Michigan model 419, Unistrut J

1205N series, or equal. 3. TYPE 3 - DOUBLE BOLT PIPE CLAMP: Pipe clamp shall be carbon steel, with configuration and components equivalent to MSS and FEDSPEC Type 3.

a. Steel pipe (insulated) - shall be B-Line B3144, Grinnell Fig. 295, or equal, with insulation shield. Insulation shield is optional for hot and ambient systems.


or equal.

c. Copper pipe (insulated only) - shall be B-Line B3144, Grinnell Fig. 295, or equal, with insulation shield.

4. TYPE 4 - ADJUSTABLE ROLLER HANGER: Rollers shall be cast iron, yoke and cross bolt shall be carbon steel. Configuration and components shall be equivalent to MSS Type 43 and FEDSPEC Type 44.



or equal.


d. Plastic pipe - shall be B-Line B3110, Grinnell Fig. 181, or equal.


5. TYPE 5 - SINGLE PIPE ROLL: Rollers and sockets shall be cast iron, cross rod shall be steel. Configuration and components shall be equivalent to MSS Type 41 and FEDSPEC Type 42.



or equal. c. Plastic pipe - shall be B-Line B3114, Grinnell Fig. 171, or equal. 6. TYPE 6 - FRAMING CHANNEL PIPE CLAMP: Pipe clamps shall be steel with galvanized finish and material thickness as listed below:

a. Steel pipe (uninsulated) - Pipe size 3/8 inch and 1/2 inch shall be 16 gage; 3/4 inch through 1 1/4 inches shall be 14 gage; 1 1/2 inches through 3 inches shall be 12 gage; 3 1/2 inches through 5 inches shall be 11 gage; 6 and 8 inches shall be 10 gage; Michigan model 431, Powerstrut PS 1100, Unistrut P 1109 series, or equal.

b. Steel pipe (insulated) - Pipe clamp shall be as described in paragraph

15096-2.02 B.6.a with insulation shield.

c. Copper (uninsulated) and plastic pipe - Pipe size 3/8 inch and 1 inch shall be 16 gage; 1-1/4 inches and 1-1/2 inches shall be 14 gage; 2 inches through 3 inches shall be 12 gage; 4 inches shall be 11 gage; clamp shall be copper-plated, plastic coated or lined with dielectric material; Michigan model 432, Powerstrut PS 1200, Unistrut P 2024C and P 2024PC series, or equal.

d. Copper pipe (insulated) - Pipe clamp shall be as described in

paragraph 15096-2.02 B.6.a with insulation shield. 7. TYPE 7 - U-BOLT: U-bolts shall be carbon steel with configuration equivalent to MSS and FEDSPEC Type 24.

a. Steel pipe (uninsulated) - shall be Grinnell Fig. 137, B-Line B3188, or equal.

b. Steel pipe (insulated) - shall be Grinnell Fig. 137, B-Line B3188, or

equal, with insulation shield.

c. Cast and ductile iron pipe - shall be Grinnell Fig. 137, B-Line B3188, or equal.


d. Copper pipe (uninsulated) - shall be Carpenter & Patterson Fig. 222

CT, B-Line B3501 CT, Grinnell Fig. 137C, or equal.

e. Copper pipe (insulated) - shall be Grinnell Fig. 137, B-Line B3188, or equal, with insulation shield.

f. Plastic pipe - shall be Grinnell Fig. 137C, Michigan model 151,

B-Line B3188 C, or equal. 8. TYPE 8 - ADJUSTABLE PIPE ROLL SUPPORT: Rollers and sockets shall be cast iron, cross rod and support rods shall be carbon steel.



or equal.


d. Plastic pipe - shall be B-Line B3122, Grinnell Fig. 177, or equal. 9. TYPE 9 - WELDED PIPE STANCHION: Minimum material thickness shall be standard schedule carbon steel pipe, cut to match contour of the pipe elbow. Use of this support shall be limited to ambient systems only. 10. TYPE 10 - PIPE STANCHION SADDLE: Saddles and yokes shall be carbon steel and comply with MSS Type 37 and FEDSPEC Type 38.

a. Steel pipe (insulated) - shall be Carpenter & Patterson Fig. 125, B-Line B3090, or equal, with insulation shield.

b. Steel pipe (uninsulated) - shall be Carpenter & Patterson Fig. 125,

B-Line B3090, or equal.

c. Cast and ductile iron pipe - shall be Carpenter & Patterson Fig. 125, B-Line B3090 NS, or equal.

d. Copper pipe (uninsulated) - shall be Carpenter & Patterson Fig. 125,

B-Line B3090, or equal, with insulation shield or lined with dielectric material.

e. Copper pipe (insulated) - shall be Carpenter & Patterson Fig. 125,

B-Line B3090, or equal, with insulation shield.


f. Plastic pipe - shall be Carpenter & Patterson Fig. 125, B-Line

B3090, or equal. 11. TYPE 11 - OFFSET PIPE CLAMP: Pipe clamp shall be carbon steel with configuration and components as specified and shall be of standard design manufactured by a pipe hanger component manufacturer.



or equal.

c. Cast and ductile iron pipe - shall be B-Line B3148 NS, Grinnell Fig. 103, or equal.

d. Copper pipe (insulated) - shall be B-Line B3148, Grinnell Fig. 103,

or equal, with insulation shield.

e. Copper pipe (uninsulated) - shall be B-Line B3148, Grinnell Fig. 103, or equal, lined with dielectric material.

f. Plastic pipe - shall be B-Line B3148, Grinnell Fig. 103, or equal. Vertical pipe support applications shall be as specified above except that insulation shields shall not be used for insulated pipe. 12. TYPE 12 - RISER CLAMP: Riser clamp shall be carbon steel with configuration and components equivalent to MSS and FEDSPEC Type 8.

a. Steel pipe (insulated) - shall be B-Line B3373, Grinnell Fig. 261, or equal.


or equal.

c. Cast and ductile iron pipe - shall be B-Line B3373, Grinnell Fig. 261, or equal.

d. Copper pipe (insulated) - shall be B-Line B3373 CT, Grinnell Fig.

CT-121, Michigan model 511, or equal.

e. Copper pipe (uninsulated) - shall be B-Line B3373 CT, Grinnell Fig. CT-121, Michigan model 511, or equal.


f. Plastic pipe - shall be B-Line B3373, Grinnell Fig. 261c, or equal. 13. TYPE 13 - FRAMING CHANNEL PIPE STRAP: Pipe strap shall be carbon steel, with configuration equivalent to MSS Type 26.

a. Steel pipe (uninsulated) - shall be Superstrut No. C-708-U, Powerstrut PS 3126, Kin-Line No. 477, or equal.

b. Steel pipe (insulated) - shall be Superstrut No. C-708-U, Powerstrut

PS 3126, Kin-Line No. 477, or equal, with insulation shield.

c. Copper pipe (uninsulated) - shall be Superstrut No. C-708-U, Powerstrut PS 3126, Kin-Line No. 477, or equal, with insulation shield or lined with dielectric material.

d. Copper pipe (insulated) - shall be Superstrut No. C-708-U,

Powerstrut PS 3126, Kin-Line No. 477, or equal, with insulation shield.

e. Plastic pipe - shall be Superstrut No. C-708-U, Powerstrut PS 3126,

Kin-Line No. 477, or equal. C. RACK AND TRAPEZE SUPPORTS: 1. GENERAL: Unless otherwise specified, trapeze and pipe rack components shall have a minimum steel thickness of 12 gage, with a maximum deflection 1/240 of the span. 2. TYPE 20 - TRAPEZE PIPE SUPPORT: Trapeze pipe support cross members shall be framing channel as specified in paragraph 15096-2.02 E.5. Flat plate fittings shall be 1 5/8-inch square carbon steel of standard design manufactured by framing channel manufacturer, Unistrut P2471, B-Line B202-2, or equal. 3. TYPE 21 - PIPE RACK SUPPORT: Post and cross members shall be framing channel as specified in paragraph 15096-2.02 E.5. Pipe rack fittings shall be carbon steel, of standard design manufactured by framing channel manufacturer. 90-degree fittings shall be gusseted Unistrut P2484, B-Line B844, or equal. Post base fittings shall be as specified in paragraph 15096-2.02 D.5. D. STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENTS: 1. TYPE A - MALLEABLE IRON CONCRETE INSERT: Concrete inserts shall be malleable iron and comply with MSS and FEDSPEC Type 18. Grinnell Fig. 282, Carpenter & Patterson Fig. 108, or equal. 2. TYPE B - SIDE BEAM BRACKET: Bracket shall be malleable iron and comply with MSS Type 34 and FEDSPEC Type 35. Grinnell Fig. 202, B-Line B3062, or equal.


3. TYPE C - MALLEABLE BEAM CLAMP WITH EXTENSION PIECE: Clamp and extension piece shall be malleable iron, tie rod shall be steel. Beam clamp shall comply with MSS and FEDSPEC Type 30. Grinnell Fig. 218 with Fig. 157 extension piece, B-Line B3054, or equal. 4. TYPE D - STEEL BEAM CLAMP WITH EYE NUT: Beam clamp and eye nut shall be forged steel. Configuration and components shall comply with MSS and FEDSPEC Type 28. Grinnell Fig. 292, Carpenter & Patterson Fig. 297, or equal. 5. TYPE E - FRAMING CHANNEL POST BASE: Post bases shall be carbon steel, of standard design manufactured by framing channel manufacturer. Single channel: Unistrut P2072A, B-Line B280, or equal. Double channel: Unistrut P2073A, B-Line B281, or equal. 6. TYPE F - WELDED BEAM ATTACHMENT: Beam attachment shall be carbon steel and comply with MSS and FEDSPEC Type 22. B-Line B3083, Grinnell Fig. 66, or equal. 7. TYPE G - WELDED STEEL BRACKET: Bracket shall be carbon steel and comply with MSS Type 32 and FEDSPEC Type 33 for medium welded bracket. Heavy welded bracket shall comply with MSS Type 33 and FEDSPEC Type 34. 8. TYPE H - CAST IRON BRACKET: Bracket shall be cast iron, Carpenter & Patterson Fig. 340, or equal. 9. TYPE J - ADJUSTABLE BEAM ATTACHMENT: Beam attachment shall be carbon steel, Carpenter & Patterson Fig. 151, B-Line B3082, or equal. 10. TYPE K - DOUBLE CHANNEL BRACKET: Wall channel shall be single channel framing channel as specified in paragraph 15096-2.02 E.5. Cantilever bracket shall be a carbon steel double framing channel assembly, Unistrut P2542 through P2546, B-Line B297-12 through B297-36, or equal. 11. TYPE L - SINGLE CHANNEL BRACKET: Wall channel shall be single channel framing channel as specified in paragraph 15096-2.02 E.5. Cantilever bracket shall be a carbon steel single framing channel assembly, Unistrut P2231 through P2234, B-Line B198-6, B198-12, B196-18 and B196-24, or equal. 12. TYPE M - WALL MOUNTED CHANNEL: Wall channel shall be single channel framing channel as specified in paragraph 15096-2.02 E.5. 13. TYPE N - PIPE STANCHION FLOOR ATTACHMENT: Baseplate shall be carbon steel with 1/2 inch minimum thickness. Anchor bolt holes shall be 1/16 inch larger than the anchor bolt diameter. The space between the baseplate and the floor shall be filled with non-shrink grout.


E. ACCESSORIES: 1. HANGER RODS: Rods shall be carbon steel, threaded on both ends or continuous threaded and sized as specified. 2. WELDLESS EYE NUT: Eye nut shall be forged steel and shall comply with MSS and FEDSPEC Type 17. Eye nut shall be Grinnell Fig. 290, B-Line B3200, or equal. 3. WELDED EYE ROD: Eye rod shall be carbon steel with eye welded closed. Inside diameter of eye shall accommodate a bolt diameter 1/8 inch larger than the rod diameter. Eye rod shall be Grinnell Fig. 278, B-Line B3211, or equal. 4. TURNBUCKLE: Turnbuckle shall be forged steel and shall comply with MSS and FEDSPEC Type 13. Turnbuckle shall be Grinnell Fig. 230, B-Line B3202, or equal. 5. FRAMING CHANNEL: Framing channel shall be 1 5/8 inches square, roll formed, 12-gage carbon steel. Channel shall have a continuous slot along one side with in-turned clamping ridges. Single channel: Unistrut P1000, B-Line B22, or equal. Double channel: Unistrut P1001, B-Line B22A, or equal. Triple channel: Unistrut P1004A, B-Line B22X, or equal. 2.03 THERMAL PIPE HANGER SHIELD Thermal shields shall be provided at hanger, support and guide locations on pipe requiring insulation. The shield shall consist of an insulation layer encircling the entire circumference of the pipe and a steel jacket encircling the insulation layer. The thermal shield shall be the same thickness as the piping system insulation specified in Section 15250. The standard shield shall be used for hot systems and the vapor barrier shield shall be used for cold systems. Stainless steel band clamps shall be used where specified to ensure against slippage between the pipe wall and the thermal shield. A. STANDARD SHIELD: 1. INSULATION: a. Hydrous calcium silicate, high density, waterproof b. Compressive strength: 100 psi average c. Flexural strength: 75 psi average d. K factor: 0.38 at 100 degrees F mean e. Temperature range: 20 degrees F to 500 degrees F 2. STEEL JACKET: Galvanized steel. Gage shall be the manufacturer's standard supplied for the given pipe size. 3. CONNECTION: Shield shall have butt connection to pipe insulation. Steel jacket and insulation shall be flush with end.


B. VAPOR BARRIER SHIELD: 1. INSULATION: a. Hydrous calcium silicate, high density, waterproof b. Compressive strength: 100 psi average c. Flexural strength: 75 psi average d. K factor: 0.38 at 100 degrees F mean e. Temperature range: 20 degrees F to 500 degrees F 2. STEEL JACKET: Galvanized steel. Gage shall be the manufacturer's standard supplied for the given pipe size. 3. CONNECTION: Shield shall have butt connection to pipe insulation. Insulation shall extend 1 inch each side of steel jacket for vaportight connection to pipe insulation vapor barrier. 2.04 PRODUCT DATA Hanger and support locations and components shall be indicated on the piping layout drawings required by paragraph 15050-2.04. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 HANGER AND SUPPORT LOCATIONS The Contractor shall locate hangers and supports as near as possible to concentrated loads such as valves, flanges, etc. Locate hangers, supports and accessories within the maximum span lengths specified in the project manual to support continuous pipeline runs unaffected by concentrated loads. At least one hanger or support shall be located within 2 feet from a pipe change in direction. The Contractor shall locate hangers and supports to ensure that connections to equipment, tanks, etc., are substantially free from loads transmitted by the piping. Where piping is connected to equipment, a valve, piping assembly, etc., that will require removal for maintenance, the piping shall be supported in such a manner that temporary supports shall not be necessary for this procedure. Pipe shall not have pockets formed in the span due to sagging of the pipe between supports caused by the weight of the pipe, medium in the pipe, insulation, valves and fittings.


3.02 INSTALLATION Welded and bolted attachments to the building structural steel shall be in accordance with the requirements of the AISC Manual of Steel Construction. Unless otherwise specified, there shall be no drilling or burning of holes in the building structural steel. Hanger components shall not be used for purposes other than for which they were designed. They shall not be used for rigging and erection purposes. The Contractor shall install items to be embedded before concrete is poured. Fasten embedded items securely to prevent movement when concrete is poured. Embedded anchor bolts shall be used instead of concrete inserts for support installations in areas below water surface or normally subject to submerging. The Contractor shall install thermal pipe hanger shields on insulated piping at required locations during hanger and support installation. Butt joint connections to pipe insulation shall be made at the time of insulation installation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Hanger and support components in contact with plastic pipe shall be free of burrs and sharp edges. Rollers shall roll freely without binding. Finished floor beneath Type N structural attachments and framing channel post bases shall be roughed prior to grouting. Grout between base plate and floor shall be free of voids and foreign material. Baseplates shall be cut and drilled to specified dimensions prior to welding stanchions or other attachments and prior to setting anchor bolts. Plastic or rubber end caps shall be provided at the exposed ends of all framing channels that are located up to 7 feet above the floor. 3.03 ADJUSTMENTS The Contractor shall adjust hangers and supports to obtain required pipe slope and elevation. Shims made of material that is compatible with the piping material may be used. Stanchions shall be adjusted prior to grouting their baseplates. 3.04 INSPECTION AND CERTIFICATION The design professional retained by the Contractor under the provisions of paragraphs 15050-1.02 B. and 15096-1.02 B. shall inspect the pipe hangers and support systems at not more than weekly intervals during construction and furnish the Owner’s Representative with weekly reports. The design professional shall inspect the completed pipe hanger and support system before


the Owner assumes beneficial occupancy and provide written certification that the installation conforms to the design professional’s design. The certification shall bear the design professional’s registration seal and original signature.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 15110

ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section specifies eccentric plug valves. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. REFERENCES: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

ANSI B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Class 25, 125, 250, and 800

ASTM A126 Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings

ASTM A276 Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes

ASTM A436 Austenitic Gray Iron Castings


AWWA C504 Rubber Seated Butterfly Valves


B. PROOF OF DESIGN TESTS: The Contractor shall furnish the Construction Manager three certified copies of a report from an independent testing laboratory certifying successful completion of proof-of-design testing conducted in accordance with AWWA C504, Section 5.2, except that where the word "disc" appears in the standard, it is understood to mean "plug." In lieu of testing the valves at an independent testing laboratory, proof-of-design testing may be performed at the valve manufac-turer's laboratory, but must be witnessed by a representative of a qualified independent testing laboratory, and all test reports must be certified by the laboratory representative. Proof-of-design testing shall have been performed on not less than three 6-inch diameter valves, with all three test units demonstrating full compliance with the test standards. Failure to satisfactorily complete the test shall be deemed sufficient evidence to reject all valves of the proposed make or manufacturer's model number. PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS Materials of construction shall be as follows:

Component Material

Body Cast iron, ASTM A126, Class B

Plug Cast iron, ASTM A126, Class B, or cast iron ASTM A436 (Ni-resist), or ductile iron, ASTM A536

Plug facing Neoprene or Buna-N

Body seats

Less than 3 inches Cast iron, ASTM A126, Class B

3 inches and larger Stainless steel, ASTM A276, Type 304 or nickel

Packing Buna V-flex or TFE Materials specified are considered the minimum acceptable for the purposes of durability, strength, and resistance to erosion and corrosion. The Contractor may propose alternative materials for the purpose of providing greater strength or to meet required stress limitations. However, alternative materials must provide at least the same qualities as those specified for the purpose. 2.02 MANUFACTURE A. GENERAL: Valves shall be straight-flow nonlubricated resilient plug type suitable for driptight, bi-directional shutoff at the specified valve design pressure. Port areas for the valve shall be at least


80 percent of the adjacent full pipe area and shall be capable of passing solids 2/3 of pipe size. Valve body seats consisting of nickel for valves 3 inches and larger shall be constructed of a welded-in overlay of not less than 90 percent pure nickel. Upper and lower journal bearings shall be replaceable, sleeve-type, corrosion resistant, and permanently lubricated. Packing shall be self-adjusting chevron type replaceable without disassembling the valve. Unless otherwise specified, valves shall, as a minimum, conform to the following pressure ratings:

Size, inches Design pressure, psig

12 and smaller 175

14 through 36 150

42 through 54 125 B. END CONNECTIONS: Valves 3 inches and smaller shall have threaded ends. Valve flange drilling for valves larger than 3 inches shall be per ANSI B16.1, Class 125. Grooved-end valves may be provided with grooved-end piping systems. C. MANUAL OPERATORS: Unless otherwise specified, valves 4 inches and smaller shall be provided with a lever type manual operator. Valves larger than 4 inches shall be provided with totally enclosed worm gear operators. Where specified, manual operators shall have an adjustable stop. All operator components shall be sized for the valve design pressure in accordance with AWWA C504, Section 4.5. Operators shall comply with applicable portions of Section 15184. 2.03 PRODUCT DATA The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer's product data. 2. Proof-of-design test reports specified in paragraph 15110-1.02 B. PART 3--EXECUTION Unless otherwise specified, valves shall be provided with the seat downstream away from flow. Valves at tank connections shall be installed with seat away from tank. Valves on pump discharge lines shall be installed with seat adjacent to the pump.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 15250

INSULATION FOR EXPOSED PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies insulation for exposed piping and related equipment and appurtenant surfaces. B. TEMPERATURE CLASSES: Insulation for exposed piping and equipment is classified for the following temperature ranges: low, medium, high, and very high. Low temperature class insulation shall be suitable for an operating temperature range of minus 100 to plus 100 degrees F. Medium temperature class insulation shall be suitable for an operating temperature range of 100 to 800 degrees F. High temperature class insulation shall be suitable for an operating temperature range of 800 to 1,200 degrees F. Very high temperature class insulation shall be suitable for an operating temperature range of 1200 to 1800 degrees F. 1.02 REFERENCES This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the


following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

ASTM B209 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

ASTM C533 Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation

ASTM C534 Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form

ASTM C552 Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation

ASTM E96 Water Vapor Transmission of Materials

FEDSPEC L-P-535E Plastic Sheet (Sheeting) “Plastic Strip” Poly (Vinyl Chloride) and Poly (Vinyl Chloride-Vinyl Acetate), Rigid

ASTM C547 Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL Piping insulation shall be tubular type or the flexible blanket type. Insulation for valves, strainers, fittings, expansion joints, flanges and other connections shall be segmented sections, molded, or blanket type coverings of the specified type and thickness of pipe insulation, or the flexible blanket type. Equipment insulation shall be flexible blanket type or rigid board type cut to fit the surface. 2.02 INSULATION A. GENERAL: Low temperature class insulation shall be of the unicellular elastomeric thermal, cellular glass, or fiberglass type. Medium temperature class insulation shall be of the cellular glass or fiberglass type. High temperature class and very high temperature class insulation shall be of the calcium silicate type or the flexible blanket type. Piping and equipment subjected to vibration (such as engine exhaust) shall be insulated with flexible blanket type.


B. UNICELLULAR ELASTOMERIC THERMAL TYPE: Unicellular elastomeric thermal type insulation shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C534, Type I. C. CELLULAR GLASS TYPE: Cellular glass type insulation shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C552, Type II. D. FIBERGLASS TYPE: Fiberglass type insulation shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C547, Type I, Grade A. E. CALCIUM SILICATE TYPE: Calcium silicate type insulation shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C533, Type II, Class C. F. FLEXIBLE BLANKET TYPE: 1. HIGH TEMPERATURE CLASS: High temperature insulation shall be removable 1-inch or 2-inch thick blanket-type insulation designed for continuous 1200 degree F service. The blanket shall be a custom sewn, flexible, reusable jacket, custom designed to closely fit the piping or the equipment housing. Blanket shall be custom fitted to not restrict access to any instrumentation or equipment. Insulation shall not compact or shake down in vibrating service. Blanket insulation shall consist of a noncombustible silica cloth jacket and non-asbestos white ceramic fiber insulation. Insulating blanket shall be Hitco AIM, Advanced Thermal Products, SEI Temp-Set 1200, or equal. 2. VERY HIGH TEMPERATURE CLASS: Very high temperature insulation shall be removable 1-inch or 2-inch thick blanket-type insulation designed for continuous 1800 degree F service. The blanket shall be a custom sewn, flexible, reusable jacket, custom designed to closely fit the piping or the equipment housing. Blanket shall be custom-fitted to not restrict access to any instrumentation or equipment. Insulation shall not compact or shake down in vibrating service. Blanket insulation shall consist of a noncombustible silica cloth jacket and high purity alumina and silica non-asbestos white ceramic fiber insulation. Insulating blanket shall be Hitco AIM, Advanced Thermal Products, or equal. 2.03 INSULATION JACKETS A. LAMINATED JACKETS: Laminated jackets shall consist of aluminum and white kraft paper. Jackets shall have a perm rating for water vapor transmission of not more than 0.02 in accordance with procedure A of ASTM E96.


B. ALUMINUM JACKETS: Aluminum jackets shall be constructed of smooth finish aluminum sheet conforming to ASTM B209, alloy 5005, temper H16, with integral vapor barrier. Jackets shall be 0.016 inch thick. Sheet metal screws shall be aluminum or stainless steel. Jackets shall be secured with 0.020 by 3/4 inch type 304 stainless steel expansion bands. 2.04 INSULATION COVERS A. POLYVINYLCHLORIDE (PVC) COVERS: Polyvinylchloride covers shall be one piece, premolded polyvinylchloride conforming to FEDSPEC L-P-535E, Composition A, Type II, Grade E4. B. ALUMINUM COVERS: Aluminum covers shall be constructed of smooth finish aluminum sheet conforming to ASTM B209, alloy 5005, temper H16, with integral vapor barrier. Covers shall be 0.016 inch thick. C. SOFT COVERS: Soft covers shall be of the reusable type with TFE-coated fiberglass covers and liner. 2.05 SHIELDS Unless otherwise specified, thermal pipe hanger shields shall be provided at pipe supports. Thermal hanger shields shall be as specified in Section 15096. 2.06 FLASHING Flashing shall include aluminum caps, sealant and reinforcing. Aluminum caps shall be 20 gage thick and shall be cut to completely cover the insulation. Sealants shall be as recommended by the insulation manufacturer. Reinforcement in flashing heated up to 370 degrees F shall be nylon fabric. Reinforcement in flashing for hotter surfaces shall be wire mesh or as recommended by the insulation manufacturer. 2.07 PRODUCT DATA The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Manufacturer and manufacturer's type designation.


2. Samples, for each insulation material type, of typical jacket and closures for fittings, valves and appurtenances.

3. Descriptive literature and catalog data for materials to be used showing

methods of installation. 4. Certification of ratings for water vapor transmission and puncture and

stiffness as specified in paragraph 15250-2.03 A. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. GENERAL: Insulation shall be applied over clean, dry surfaces. Double layer insulation, where specified or required to achieve the specified surface temperature, shall be provided with staggered section joints. B. PIPE SUPPORTS AND SHIELDS: Unless otherwise specified, thermal pipe hanger shields shall be provided by the Contractor and installed during pipe support installation. Where thermal pipe hanger shields are used, apply the following to all butt joints: 1. On hot pipe systems, the Contractor shall apply 3-inch wide vapor barrier

tape or band over the butt joints. 2. On cold water, chilled water, or refrigerant piping, the Contractor shall apply

a wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement on all butt joints and seal the joints with a minimum 3-inch wide vapor barrier tape or band.

C. PROTECTION: Insulation and jackets shall be protected from crushing, denting, and similar damage during construction. Vapor barriers shall not be penetrated or otherwise damaged. Insulation, jacket, and vapor barriers damaged during construction shall be removed and new material shall be installed. D. PIPING INSULATION: 1. GENERAL: a. PIPE: Piping shall be continuously insulated along its entire length including all in-line devices such as valves, fittings, flanges, couplings, strainers and other piping appurtenances. Unless otherwise specified, piping insulation shall be provided with laminated


jackets specified in paragraph 15250-2.03 A. Insulation shall be butted firmly together and jacket laps and joint strips provided with lap adhesive. Jackets shall be provided with their seams located on the underside of pipe. PVC covers specified in paragraph 15250-2.04 A shall not be used with medium- or high-temperature class insulation. Removable flexible blanket-type insulation need not be jacketed. b. FITTINGS, CONNECTIONS, FLANGES AND VALVES: Fitting, connection, flange and valve insulation shall be provided with covers specified in paragraph 15250-2.04. Insulation shall be secured in place with 20-gage wire and a coat of insulating cement. Covers shall overlap the adjoining pipe insulation and jackets. Covers shall be provided with their seams located on the underside of fittings and valves. 2. LOW TEMPERATURE CLASS: a. PIPE: Insulation shall have ends sealed off with a vapor barrier coating. b. FITTINGS, CONNECTIONS, FLANGES AND VALVES: Except where soft covers are specified, insulation for pipe sizes 2 inches and less, shall be provided with rigid PVC covers specified in paragraph 15250-2.04 A. Covers shall be sealed at edges with vapor barrier adhesive. The ends of covers shall be secured with vinyl tape. The tape shall overlap the jacket and the cover at least 1 inch. Vapor barrier shall not be penetrated. Except where soft covers are specified, insulation for pipes 2 1/2 inches and larger shall be provided with rigid aluminum covers specified in paragraph 15250-2.04 B. Covers shall be mechanically secured by corrosion-resistant tacks pushed into the overlapping throat joint. 3. MEDIUM, HIGH, AND VERY HIGH TEMPERATURE CLASS: a. PIPE: Except for flexible blanket type, insulation shall have ends sealed with end joint strips and held in place by waterproof adhesive. b. FITTINGS, CONNECTIONS, FLANGES AND VALVES: Except where soft covers are specified, rigid insulation shall be provided with rigid aluminum covers specified in paragraph 15250-2.04 B. Covers shall be mechanically secured by corrosion-resistant tacks pushed into the overlapping throat joint. 4. OUTDOOR PIPING: a. PIPE: Rigid insulation shall be provided with aluminum jackets specified in paragraph 15250-2.03 B. Flexible blanket-type insulation shall be designed for outdoor, weather-exposed service.


b. FITTINGS, CONNECTIONS, FLANGES AND VALVES: Rigid insulation shall be provided with rigid aluminum covers specified in paragraph 15250-2.04 B. Flexible blanket type insulation shall be designed for outdoor, weather-exposed service. E. MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT INSULATION: 1. GENERAL: Unless otherwise specified, insulation shall fit the contours of equipment and shall be secured with 1/2 by 0.015 inch galvanized steel bands. Weld pins or stick clips with washers may be used for flat surfaces and spaced a maximum 18 inches apart. Joints shall be staggered and voids filled with insulating cement. Unless otherwise specified, insulation shall be provided with laminated jackets specified in paragraph 15250-2.03 A. Unless specifically specified to be un-insulated, equipment connected to insulated piping shall be insulated. 2. OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT: Insulation shall be provided with a coat of weatherproof mastic and a layer of open-weave glass cloth embedded into a wet tack coat. Seams shall overlap at least 2 inches. A finish coat of weatherproof mastic shall be provided. The total coating thickness shall be a minimum of 1/8 inch. 3. LOW TEMPERATURE CLASS: Insulation shall have joints, breaks, and punctures sealed in facing with fire-retardant vapor barrier adhesive reinforced with 4-inch tape. Insulation shall be provided with a layer of open-weave glass cloth embedded into a wet coat of fire-retardant adhesive. Seams shall overlap at least 2 inches. A finish coat of fire-retardant adhesive shall be provided. 4. MEDIUM TEMPERATURE CLASS: Joints shall be covered and cemented in place with 4-inch-wide strips of the same material as the laminated jackets specified in paragraph 15250-2.03 A. 5. HIGH AND VERY HIGH TEMPERATURE CLASS: High and very high temperature equipment shall be covered with custom-fitted removable blanket-type insulation. Blanket-type insulation shall be secured with stainless steel wire lacing and hooks. Ends of blanket segments shall overlap to prevent gaps and voids when the piping and equipment is heated. Blankets shall be snugly secured under nuts and bolt heads to assure complete coverage during operation and to prevent vibration-induced gaps or voids. Blankets shall be secured in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. F. FLASHING: Flashing shall be provided at jacket penetrations and terminations. Clearance for flashing shall be provided between insulation system and piping supports.


A heavy tack coat of sealant shall be troweled over the insulation, extending over the jacket edge 1 inch and over the pipe or protrusion 2 inches. Reinforcement shall be stretched over the tack coat after clipping to fit over pipe and jacket. Clipped reinforcing shall be strapped with a continuous band of reinforcing to prevent curling. Sealant shall then be troweled over the reinforcement to a minimum thickness of 1/8 inch. Aluminum caps shall be formed to fit over the adjacent jacketing and to completely cover coated insulation. Cap shall be held in place with a jacket strap. 3.02 INSULATION THICKNESS SCHEDULE The insulation dimensional tolerances shall comply with the specified standards. Equipment insulation shall match thickness of attached piping. The minimum insulation thicknesses, exclusive of jacket, shall be as follows:

Insulation thickness in inches for nominal pipe sizes

Piping servicea

Fluid temperature

range, degrees F

Runouts up to 2 inchesb

1 inch and less

1.25 to 2 inches

2.50 to 4 inches

5 and 6 inches

8 inches and larger

Heating:

EEc 600-1500 - - - 4 4 4

EEd 350-500 - - - 2 2 2

BDM, BFM, SCS, STMM, VSM

306-460 251-305

1.5 1.5

2.5 2.0

2.5 2.5

3.0 2.5

3.5 3.0

3.5 3.0

BDL, BFL, STML, VSL

201-250 1.0 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.0 2.0

HRR, HRS, JWR, JWS

105-200 0.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5

CL, CM Any 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.0 2.0

Cooling:

CWR, CWS 40-60 0.5 0.5 0.75 1.0 1.0 1.0

B Below 40 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5

Refrigerantd 25-40 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 - -

Process:

SA, STAf 150-250 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 - -

Plumbing:

PW 55-65 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 - -

HW 100-150 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5

RWP 55-65 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 - -

a See specification Section 15050. b Runouts to individual terminal units (not exceeding 12 feet in length).


c Engine exhaust from the engine to the exhaust heat recovery silencer. Catalytic converters, where used, shall be insulated with very high temperature insulating blankets. Additional insulation blankets shall be provided, if required, to limit the external surface temperature to a maximum of 200 degrees F or to achieve the required minimum thickness.

d Engine exhaust downstream of the exhaust heat recovery silencer. Additional insulation shall be provided, if required, to limit external jacket temperature to a maximum of 200 degrees F. Engine exhaust piping on building roof need not be insulated.

e Refrigerant insulation by air conditioning equipment supplier. f Insulate piping for personnel protection between compressor and after cooler only. Include drip legs.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 15400

PLUMBING

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section specifies drains, piping, appurtenances and general requirements for plumbing systems. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. REFERENCES: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

UPC (1988) Uniform Plumbing Code PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 CLEANOUTS A. GENERAL: Unless otherwise specified, cleanouts shall be the same size as the pipe connected. Cleanouts shall be provided with clamping collars where waterproofing membranes are located in the floor. Cleanouts located inside buildings shall be provided with nickel bronze covers. Bronze


plug with tapered thread shall be provided for cleanouts on pressurized systems. Cleanouts on chemical waste or drain lines shall be of the same material and type of joint as the pipe. B. TYPE I CLEANOUT: Unless otherwise specified, Type I cleanouts shall be Josam series 56010, J. R. Smith series 4020, or equal. C. TYPE II CLEANOUT: Unless otherwise specified, Type II cleanouts shall be Josam series 56010(-12), J. R. Smith series 4140, or equal. D. TYPE III CLEANOUT: Unless otherwise specified, Type III cleanouts shall be Josam series 58500 (-20), J. R. Smith series 4420, or equal, with cast iron frame and cover as specified on the drawing details. E. TYPE IV CLEANOUT: Unless otherwise specified, Type IV cleanouts shall be Josam series 58500(-20), J. R. Smith series 4420, or equal. F. TYPE V CLEANOUT: Unless otherwise specified, Type V cleanouts shall be Josam series 58890, J. R. Smith series 4472, or equal. 2.02 DRAINS A. FLOOR DRAINS: 1. GENERAL: Floor drains shall be provided with clamping collars where waterproofing membranes are located in the floor. 2. TYPE I FLOOR DRAIN: Unless otherwise specified, Type I floor drains shall be Josam series 32130, J. R. Smith series 2225, or equal. 3. TYPE II, III, AND IV FLOOR DRAINS: Unless otherwise specified, Type II, III, and IV floor drains shall be Josam series 32120, J. R. Smith series 2220, or equal. 4. TYPE V FLOOR DRAIN: Unless otherwise specified, Type V floor drains shall be Josam series 30000-A, J. R. Smith series 2010-A, or equal. 5. TYPE VI FLOOR DRAIN: Unless otherwise specified, Type VI floor drains shall be Josam series 49290 (-31), J. R. Smith series 3066, or equal.


B. ROOF DRAINS: Unless otherwise specified, roof drains shall be J. R. Smith series 1330 (-TCRE), Josam series 22040 (-1-2-10T), or equal. 2.03 VALVE ACCESS COVERS Access covers for concealed valves within structure interiors shall be 12 inch by 12 inch minimum, stainless steel, J. R. Smith series 4762 or 4767, Karp 214-M or 214-P, or equal. Two keys or wrenches shall be provided for each type of key-operated valve. 2.04 COUPLINGS, NIPPLES AND UNIONS Couplings and nipples shall be of the same material as the pipe on which they are used. Unions 2 inches and smaller shall be ground joint screwed pattern unions. Unions larger than 2 inches shall be flanged. Unions shall be packed with 1/16-inch thick rubber packing. Dielectric unions shall be as specified in paragraph 15085-2.05. 2.05 NOT USED 2.06 NOT USED 2.07 SLEEVES Sleeves shall be 22-gage sheet metal. 2.08 ESCUTCHEONS Escutcheons shall be chrome-plated cold rolled steel or stainless steel. 2.09 PRODUCT DATA Brochures of plumbing equipment, including catalog data and installation information, shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. GENERAL: Work shall be in accordance with the Uniform Plumbing Code.


Plumbing shall be provided to avoid obstructions, allow 7.5-foot minimum headroom, and keep openings and passageways clear. No holes shall be made in structural members. Torn and pierced waterproofing shall be repaired. Fixtures, fittings, valves, and copper and brass items shall be wrapped with burlap or building paper. Wrapping shall be removed at completion of the work. B. VALVES AND ACCESSORIES: Valves shall be provided upstream of branches, apparatus and fixtures. Valves on branch lines and at distribution points shall be provided with a 2-inch heavy brass disc, stamped and stenciled with 1/4-inch high letters, stating portion of system controlled by valve. Valve locations shall be shown on record drawings. The Contractor shall provide a chart of location and use of main valves. Adjustable shaft valve boxes shall be provided for underground valves. C. DIELECTRIC UNIONS: Dielectric unions shall be provided at connections between pipe or fittings of different material. D. ESCUTCHEONS: Escutcheons shall be provided where pipes penetrate finished walls, ceilings or floors. Escutcheons shall be securely mounted allowing clearance for expansion. E. PIPING: Piping shall be carried in chases or recesses where provided in walls, through floors and partitions, and over ceilings. Unless otherwise specified, piping shall not be run in floor slabs. Pipes shall not be supported by plumbing fixtures or equipment. Changes in pipe size shall be made with reducing fittings. The use of bushings is not acceptable. Where galvanized steel pipe is calked into a cast iron hub, a soil pipe adapter shall be provided on the calked end of the steel pipe. Unless otherwise specified, underground piping outside buildings shall have a minimum cover of 24 inches. Piping under buildings shall have a minimum clearance from structure of 12 inches. Hot and cold water piping shall be separated by at least 6 inches.


3.02 CLEANING AND FLUSHING Piping and equipment shall be cleaned and flushed in accordance with paragraph 15050-3.05.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 16000

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies general requirements for electrical work. Detailed requirements for specific electrical items are specified in other sections but are subject to the general requirements of this section. The electrical drawings and schedules included in this project manual are functional in nature and do not specify exact locations of equipment or equipment terminations. B. DEFINITIONS: 1. ELEMENTARY OR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM: A schematic (elementary) diagram shows, by means of graphic symbols, the electrical connections and functions of a specific circuit arrangement. The schematic diagram facilitates tracing the circuit and its functions without regard to the actual physical size, shape, or location of the component devices or parts. 2. ONE-LINE DIAGRAM: A one-line diagram shows by means of single lines and graphical symbols the course of an electrical circuit or system of circuits and the components, devices or parts used therein. Physical relationships are usually disregarded. 3. BLOCK DIAGRAM: A block diagram is a diagram of a system, instrument, computer, or program in which selected portions are represented by annotated boxes and interconnecting lines. 4. WIRING DIAGRAM OR CONNECTION SYSTEM: A wiring or connection diagram includes all of the devices in a system and shows their physical relationship to each other including terminals and interconnecting wiring in an assembly. This diagram shall be (a) in a form showing interconnecting wiring only by terminal designation (wireless diagram), or (b) a panel layout diagram showing the physical location of devices plus the elementary diagram. 5. INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM: Interconnection diagrams shall show all external connections between terminals of equipment and outside points, such as motors and auxiliary devices. References shall be shown to all connection diagrams which interface to the interconnection diagrams. Interconnection diagrams shall be of the continuous line type. Bundled wires shall be shown as a single line with the direction of entry/exit of the individual wires clearly shown. Wireless diagrams and wire lists are not acceptable.


Each wire identification as actually installed shall be shown. The wire identification for each end of the same wire shall be identical. All devices and equipment shall be identified. Terminal blocks shall be shown as actually installed and identified in the equipment complete with individual terminal identification. All jumpers, shielding and grounding termination details not shown on the equipment connection diagrams shall be shown on the interconnection diagrams. Wires or jumpers shown on the equipment connection diagrams shall not be shown again on the interconnection diagram. Signal and DC circuit polarities and wire pairs shall be shown. Spare wires and cables shall be shown. 6. ARRANGEMENT, LAYOUT, OR OUTLINE DRAWINGS: An arrange-ment, layout, or outline drawing is one which shows the physical space and mounting requirements of a piece of equipment. It may also indicate ventilation requirements and space provided for connections or the location to which connections are to be made. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. REFERENCES: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

NECA-1 National Electrical Contractors Association – Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting

NFPA-70 National Electrical Code (NEC)


B. IDENTIFICATION OF LISTED PRODUCTS: Electrical equipment and materials shall be listed for the purpose for which they are to be used, by an independent testing laboratory. Three such organizations are Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Canadian Standards Association (CSA), and Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL). Independent testing laboratory shall be acceptable to the inspection authority having jurisdiction. When a product is not available with a testing laboratory listing for the purpose for which it is to serve, the product may be required by the inspection authority, to undergo inspection at the manufacturer's place of assembly. All costs and expenses incurred for such inspections shall be included in the original contract price. C. FACTORY TESTS: Where specified in the individual product specification section, factory tests shall be performed at the place of fabrication and performed on completion of manufacture or assembly. The costs of factory tests shall included in the contract price. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The following submittals shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300:

1. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the Contractor, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. The Construction Manager shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.

2. Catalog cuts of equipment, devices, and materials requested by the

individual specification sections. Catalog information shall include technical specifications and application information, including ratings, range, weight, accuracy, etc. Catalog cuts shall be edited to show only the items, model numbers, and information which apply.


Catalog cuts shall be assembled in a folder. Each folder shall contain a cover

sheet, indexed by item, and cross-referenced to the appropriate specification paragraph.

3. Interconnection diagram: The Contractor shall prepare interconnection

diagrams depicting all cable requirements together with their actual terminations as specified in paragraph 16000-1.01 B.

1.04 DRAWINGS Where the Contractor is required to provide information on drawings as part of the specified work, such drawings shall be prepared on 22-inch by 34-inch polyester plastic (Mylar) drafting media complete with borders and title blocks clearly identifying project name, equipment and the scope of the drawing. Drawing quality and size of presentation shall be such as to permit 50 percent reduction of such drawings for insertion in operation and maintenance manuals. 1.05 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. GENERAL: Unless otherwise specified, equipment and materials shall be sized and derated for the ambient conditions specified in Section 01800, but not less than an ambient temperature of 40 degrees C at an elevation ranging from sea level to 3000 feet without exceeding the manufacturer's stated tolerances. B. CORROSIVE AREAS: The following areas are designated as corrosive:

a. Chlorine Building Interior b. Outdoor areas

C. HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) AREAS: None D. SEISMIC: Electrical equipment, supports, and anchorage shall be designed and installed in accordance with the seismic design requirements specified in Section 01900. 1.06 STORAGE OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Materials and equipment shall be stored as specified in paragraph 01605-3.0 E. Equipment and materials to be located indoors shall be stored indoors and sealed with plastic film wrap.


1.07 ELECTRICAL NUMBERING SYSTEMS A. RACEWAY NUMBERS: Raceways shall be tagged at all terminations. Contractor shall assign raceway numbers in accordance with the following system where raceway numbers have not been assigned:

Raceway Prefix Type of Function

C Control - 120V or less

D Data

N Pneumatic tubing

P Power 120V

S Signal - data communication or instrumentation

X Spare Prefixes shall be followed by a 4-digit number. Add a letter suffix to distinguish the raceways where more than one raceway is routed to a particular piece of equipment. Example: Raceway number = P3109A where: P = conduit contains power

3109 = unique 4-digit number A = letter to distinguish raceways to same equipment

B. CONDUCTOR NUMBERS: Conductors shall be identified with numbers at both ends. Conductor tag numbers shall consist of the equipment number followed by a dash followed by the conductor number specified on the control diagram. Example: Equipment Tag number = 1900 - L1 where: 1900 = cable number

L1 = conductor number Conductors in parallel or in series between equipment shall have the same conductor number. Neutral conductors shall have the same conductor number. Wherever possible, the conductor number shall be the same as the equipment terminal to which it connects. Where factory-wired equipment has terminal numbers different than the conductor numbers shown on the control diagrams:

1. Both shall be shown on the interconnection diagram 2. Include a copy of the interconnection diagram inside of the equipment

cabinet.


1.08 INDICATING LAMP COLORS Unless otherwise specified, indicating lights shall be equipped with colored lenses in accordance with the following schedule:

Color Function Example

Red Run, open valve Equipment operating, motor running

Green Ready, closed valve Equipment ready, end of cycle

White or clear Normal condition Control power on, equipment available to operate

Amber (yellow) Abnormal condition Failure of equipment, alarm or fault condition PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. GENERAL: Equipment and materials shall be new and free from defects. All material and equipment of the same or a similar type shall be of the same manufacturer throughout the work. Standard produc-tion materials shall be used wherever possible. B. EQUIPMENT FINISH:

Unless otherwise specified, electrical equipment and materials shall be painted by the manufacturer as specified in paragraph 09900-3.03 H. C. GALVANIZING: Where specified, galvanizing shall be in accordance with Section 05910. 2.02 WIRE MARKERS

Each power and control conductor shall be identified at each terminal to which it is connected. Conductors size No. 10 AWG or smaller shall have identification sleeves. Conductors No. 8 AWG and larger shall use cable markers of the locking tab type. Tabs shall be white plastic with conductor identification number permanently embossed.

Conductors shall be identified in accordance with paragraph 16000-1.07 B. Adhesive strips

are not acceptable. The letters and numbers that identify each wire shall be machine printed on sleeves with

permanent black ink with figures 1/8 inch high. Sleeves shall be yellow or white tubing and sized to fit the conductor insulation. Shrink the sleeves with hot air after installation to fit the conductor.


Conductor and Wire Marker Manufacture:

1. TMS Thermofit Marker System by Raychem Co 2. Sleeve style wire marking system by W. H. Brady Co. 3. or equal.

2.03 RACEWAY MARKERS Raceway markers tags shall be:

1. Solid brass with 0.036-inch minimum thickness. 2. Raceway number stamped in 3/16-inch minimum height characters 3. Attached to the raceway with 316 stainless steel wire.

2.04 NAMEPLATES Nameplates shall be made from laminated phenolic plastic.

1. Nominal size: 3/4 inch high by 2 inches long. 2. Black backgrounds with 3/16-inch white letters. 3. Fastened using self-tapping stainless steel screws.

Abbreviations shall be submitted to the Construction Manager prior to manufacture because

of space limitations. Nameplate adhesives will not be permitted on the outside of enclosures. 2.05 TERMINAL BLOCKS Unless otherwise specified, terminal blocks shall be panhead strap screw type. Terminals shall be provided with integral marking strips that permanently identify with the connecting wire numbers as shown on the drawings:

1. Terminal blocks for P-circuits (power 208-600 volts)

a. Rated not less than the conductor current rating b. Rated less than 600 volts AC.

2. Terminal blocks for C-circuits and S-circuits:

a. Rated not less than 20 amperes b. Rated less than 600 volts AC.

3. Terminals shall be tin-plated. 4. Insulating material shall be nylon.


2.06 PRODUCT DATA The following information and product data specified under individual specification sections shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300.

1. Applicable operation and maintenance information on an item-by-item basis in accordance with Section 01730. Operation and maintenance information shall be provided at the time of equipment, device, or material site delivery, or at a certain stage of project completion as required by Section 01730, whichever is the earlier. Full-size drawings shall be reduced to 11 x 17 inches.

2. Test results for motors and electrical systems on the forms specified in

Section 16030. A file of the original test results shall be maintained by the Contractor. Prior to acceptance of work, the resulting file shall be provided to the Construction Manager.

3. Description of functional checkout procedures specified under paragraph

16000-3.02 C shall be provided 30 days prior to performing functional checkout tests.

4. Record documents specified in Section 01720 and paragraph 16000-3.03.

PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. CONSTRUCTION: The work under Division 16 shall be performed in accordance with these specifications.

Refer to the National Electrical Contractors Association’s (NECA) National Electrical Installation Standards (NEIS) for Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting (NECA-1) as a minimum baseline of quality and workmanship for installing electrical products and systems that defines what is meant by “neat and workmanlike” as required by the National Electrical Code Section 110-12. Specified requirements supersede NECA practices.

Electrical layout drawings are diagrammatic, unless otherwise detailed or dimensioned. The

Contractor shall coordinate the location of electrical material or equipment with the work.

Minor changes in location of electrical material or equipment made prior to installation shall be made at no cost to the Owner.


B. HOUSEKEEPING: Electrical equipment shall be protected from dust, water and damage. Motor control centers, switchgear, and buses shall be wiped free of dust and dirt, kept dry, and shall be vacuumed on the inside within 30 days of acceptance of the work. Before final acceptance, the Contractor shall touch up any scratches on equipment as specified in paragraph 09900-3.03 H. Electrical equipment temporarily exposed to weather, debris, liquids, or damage during construction shall be protected as specified in paragraph 01605-3.0 F. C. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT LABELING Electrical equipment shall have field marked signs and labeling to warn qualified persons of the potential electric arc flash hazards per NEC Article 110.16 Flash Protection. 3.02 TESTING A. GENERAL: Prior to energizing the electrical circuits, insulation resistance measurements tests shall be performed using a 1000-volt megohmmeter to verify the conductor is acceptable for use on the project. The test measurements shall be recorded on the specified forms and provided in accordance with paragraph 16000-1.03. B. INSULATION RESISTANCE MEASUREMENTS: 1. GENERAL: Insulation resistance measurements shall be made on conductors and energized parts of electrical equipment. Minimum acceptable values of insulation resistance shall be in accordance with the applicable ICEA, NEMA or ANSI standards for the equipment or material being tested, unless otherwise specified. The ambient temperature at which insulation resistance is measured shall be recorded on the test form. Insulation resistance measurements shall be recorded in a format similar to Form 16000-A, contained in Section 01999. Insulation with resistance of less than 10 megohms is not acceptable. 2. CONDUCTOR AND CABLE TESTS: The phase-to-ground insulation resistance shall be measured for all circuits rated 120 volts and above except lighting circuits. Measurements may be made with motors and other equipment connected. Solid state equipment shall be disconnected, unless the equipment is normally tested by the manufacturer at voltages in excess of 1000 volts DC. 3. MOTOR TESTS: The Installed Motor Test Form, 16000-B, specified in Section 01999, shall be completed for each motor after installation.


Motors shall have their insulation resistance measured before they are connected. Motors 50 HP and larger shall have their insulation resistance measured at the time of delivery as well as when they are connected. Insulation resistance values less than 10 megohms are not acceptable. C. PRE-FUNCTIONAL TEST CHECKOUT: Functional testing shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of Section 16030. Prior to functional testing, all protective devices shall be adjusted and made operative.

1. Submit a description of the proposed functional test procedures prior to the performance of functional checkout.

2. Prior to energization of equipment, perform a functional checkout of the control

circuit. Checkout:

a. Energizing each control circuit. b. Operating each control device, alarm device, or monitoring device. c. Operate each interlock to verify that the specified action occurs.

Verify motors are connected to rotate in the correct direction. Verification may be accomplished by momentarily energizing the motor, provided the Contractor confirms that neither the motor nor the driven equipment will be damaged by reverse operation or momentary energization. 3.03 RECORD DOCUMENTS Contract documents shall be maintained and annotated by the Contractor during construction, including the record drawings specified in Section 01720.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 16030

ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTING

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section specifies the acceptance testing of electrical materials, power distribution and utilization equipment and circuits. Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, material, power, and other services necessary to provide the specified tests. 1.02 REFERENCES: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

NETA ATS Acceptance Testing Specifications for

Electric Power Distribution Systems

NFPA-70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 1.04 SUBMITTALS Functional testing and checkout procedures and schedule shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300.


PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 TEST EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS Test instruments shall be calibrated to references traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology and shall have a current sticker showing date of calibration, deviation from standard, name of calibration laboratory and technician, and date recalibration is required.

Form No. Title

16000-A Wire and Cable Resistance Test Data Form

16000-B Installed Motor Test Data Form

17000-A Loop Wiring and Insulation Resistance Test Data Form

17000-D Panel Indicator Calibration Test Data Form

17000-F Signal Trip Calibration Test Data Form

17000-G Field Switch Calibration Test Data Form

17000-H Transmitter Calibration Test Data Form

17000-I Miscellaneous Instrument Calibration Test Data Form 2.02 PRODUCT DATA In accordance with Section 01300, the Contractor shall submit the completed test report forms 16000-A and 16000-B as specified in Part 3 herein. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 TESTING A. GENERAL: The following specified tests, including correction of defects where found and the subsequent re-testing, shall be completed prior to energization of the equipment or systems. Submit all completed test report forms in a 3-ring binder type notebook at the project Substantial Completion date.

A megohmmeter shall be used for insulation resistance measurements. B. INSULATION RESISTANCE MEASUREMENTS: 1. GENERAL: Insulation resistance measurements shall be made on conductors and electrical equipment that will carry current. Minimum acceptable values of


insulation resistance shall be in accordance with the applicable NETA-ATS, ICEA, NEMA, or ANSI standards for the equipment or material being tested. The ambient temperature at which insulation resistance is measured shall be recorded on the test form. 2. CONDUCTOR AND CABLE TESTS: The phase-to-ground insulation resistance shall be measured for all circuits 120 volts and above except lighting circuits. Measurements may be made with motors and other load equipment connected. Insulation resistance measurements shall be recorded in a format similar to Form 16000-A contained in Section 01999, and submitted for acceptance. Insulation with resistance of less than 10 megohms is not acceptable. 3. MOTOR TESTS: The Installed Motor Test Form, 16000-B, contained in Section 01999, shall be completed for each motor after installation and submitted for acceptance. All motors shall have their insulation resistance measured before they are connected. Motors 50 HP and larger shall have their insulation resistance measured at the time of delivery and when they are connected. Insulation resistance values less than 10 megohms are not acceptable. Verify that motors are connected to rotate in the correct direction. Verification may be accomplished by momentarily energizing the motor, provided the Contractor confirms that neither the motor nor the driven equipment will be damaged by reverse operation. 4. POWER DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT: Transformers, panelboards, and other power distribution equipment shall have their insulation resistance measured phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground. 5. POWER UTILIZATION EQUIPMENT: Test receptacles and power outlets using a device to verify polarity, grounding, and the correct wiring connections. C. FUNCTIONAL TESTING:

Contractor shall submit a description of proposed functional test and checkout procedures conforming to the following requirements, including a schedule for conducting these procedures, not less than 30 days prior to the performance of functional testing.

Prior to functional testing, all protective devices shall be adjusted and made operative. Prior to energization of associated equipment, perform a functional checkout of all electrical

and instrumentation control circuits as specified in the following and in Division 17. Checkout shall consist of energizing each control circuit and operating each control, alarm, safety device, and each interlock, in turn, to verify that the specified action occurs.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 16110

RACEWAYS, BOXES, AND SUPPORTS PART 1--GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

This section covers the furnishing and installation of electrical conduits, wireways, pull

boxes, manholes, handholes, cable trays, fittings and supports. Raceways shall be provided for lighting, receptacles, power, control, instrumentation, signaling and grounding systems.

1.02 REFERENCES

This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this

section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.

Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect

at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

AASHTO H20 Highway Bridges

ANSI C80.1 Rigid Steel Conduit-Zinc Coated

ANSI C80.3 Electrical Metallic Tubing-Zinc Coated

ASTM A48 REV A Gray Iron Castings

ASTM A193/A193M REV C Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High Temperature Service

ASTM F512 Smooth-Wall Polyvinylchloride Conduit and Fittings for Underground Installation

FEDSPEC WW-C-581E Conduit, Metal, Rigid and Intermediate; and Coupling, Elbow, and Nipple, Electrical Conduit; Zinc Coated


FEDSPEC W-C-1094A Conduit and Conduit Fittings, Plastic, Rigid

JIC EMP-1 Electrical Standards for Mass Production Equipment

NEMA ICS 6 Industrial Control and Systems Enclosures

NEMA TC2 Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC 40 and EPC 80)

NEMA TC6 PVC and ABS Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation

NEMA VE1 Cable Tray Systems

NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volts maximum)

NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC)

NFPA 79 Electrical Standards for Industrial Machinery

UBC Uniform Building Code

UL 1 Flexible Metal Electrical Conduit

UL 6 Rigid Metal Electrical Conduit

UL 360 Liquid Tight Flexible Electrical Conduit

UL 514 Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Device Boxes and Covers

UL 651 Rigid Nonmetal Electrical Conduit

UL 797 Electrical Metallic Tubing

UL 870 Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings

UL 884 Under floor Raceways and Fittings

UL 886 Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations

1.03 SUBMITTALS The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300:

1. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole.

If deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the Contractor, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. The Construction Manager shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the


paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications.

Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.

2. Manufacturer's descriptive literature for materials. 3. Certification that Contractor has been trained to work on PVC-coated

conduit systems.

PART 2--PRODUCTS

2.01 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS

General requirements for raceway materials specified in this section are listed in the

RACESPECS sheets at the end of this section. The type of raceways and raceway fittings to be used for any given area and application shall conform to the requirements in this section.

2.02 BOXES, GUTTERS, TERMINAL CABINETS, MANHOLES, AND HANDHOLES

Provide Type 316L (low carbon), 317, or Type 316 stainless products where specified.

Hinges shall be continuous type and for NEMA-4X cabinets hinges shall be stainless steel. Table A specifies the electrical enclosure material and rating for the location and

application.

Table A

Location Electrical Enclosure Material and NEMA Rating

Indoor: Process Areas NEMA 4X, Type 316L, 317 or 316 Stainless Steel

Indoor: Corrosive Area NEMA 4X, Type 316L, 317 or 316 Stainless Steel

Outdoor Areas: NEMA 4X, Type 316L, 317 or 316 Stainless Steel


A. PULL BOXES AND WIRING GUTTERS: Indoor boxes and enclosures larger than FD boxes shall be constructed of stainless steel.

Outdoor boxes and enclosures shall be provided with neoprene gaskets on the hinged doors or removable covers. Box and gutter sizes, metal thickness, and grounding shall comply with the National Electrical Code. Bolt-on junction box covers 3 feet square or larger, or heavier than 25 pounds, shall have a rigid handle. Covers larger than 3 x 4 feet shall be split.

B. TERMINAL CABINETS: Terminal cabinets shall be provided with adjustable terminal strip mounting, back-panels

for equipment mounting, print pockets in the doors, continuous door hinges, and three-point lockable latches. Terminal cabinets located outdoors and in corrosive areas shall be modified NEMA 4X type 316 stainless steel with stainless steel door hinge, three-point latch, and filtered ventilation, if required. Terminal block shall conform to Section 16000.

C. MANHOLES: NOT USED D. HANDHOLES: NOT USED E. MANHOLE AND HANDHOLE CABLE SUPPORTS:

NOT USED

F. GROUND BUS: Provide a ground bus in electrical pull boxes with dimension of 3-foot width x 3-foot

length x 3-foot depth and larger. Provide a NEMA threaded 4-hole grounding plate for connecting two to four-1-hole ground connectors that enter the enclosure from two to four duct banks. Products: Burndy, T&B, or equal.

2.03 RACEWAY SUPPORTS

A. CONDUIT SUPPORTS: Framing channel with end caps and straps shall be provided to support groups of conduit.

Individual conduit supports shall be one-hole pipe straps used with clamp backs and nesting backs where required. Material as specified herein.

Conduit supports for PVC coated rigid steel and PVC conduit systems shall be one-hole

PVC coated rigid steel clamps or oversized stainless steel clamps.


B. CEILING HANGERS: Ceiling hangers shall be adjustable stainless steel rod hangers and fittings. Provide J-

Type conduit support for single conduit. Straps or hangers of plumber's perforated tape are not acceptable. Unless otherwise shown, hanger rods shall be sized as 3/8-inch up to 2-inch conduit and shall be 1/2 inch all-thread rod over 2-inch conduit. Material as specified herein.

C. SUSPENDED RACEWAY SUPPORTS AND RACKS: Suspended raceway supports shall consist of concrete inserts, steel rod hangers, and jamb

nuts supporting framing channel or lay-in pipe hangers as required. Framing channel shall be a minimum of 12-gauge. Material as specified herein.

Hanger rods shall be 1/2-inch diameter all-thread rod and shall meet ASTM A193.

Suspended raceway supports and racks shall be braced for seismic forces as specified in Section 16000.

D. MATERIALS: Table B specifies the type of raceway supports required for each location and application.

Table B

Location Framing Channel Threaded Rod,

Hardware, & Fittings

Indoor, Process Areas Type 316 Stainless Steel Type 316 Stainless Steel

Indoor, Corrosive Area Type 316 Stainless Steel Type 316 Stainless Steel

Outdoor Area Type 316 Stainless Steel Type 316 Stainless Steel

2.04 CONCRETE ENCASED DUCT BANKS NOT USED

2.05 UNDERGROUND MARKING TAPE NOT USED

2.06 NAMEPLATES Nameplates shall be provided for boxes in accordance with the requirements of Section

16000. Nameplate wording shall be as shown on the drawings. Provide the functional description of the device on the nameplate, where wording is not specified


2.07 FIRESTOPS NOT USED

2.08 RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION Raceway number tags shall conform to the requirements of raceway markers, Section

16000.

2.09 ELECTRICAL SEALANT Electrical sealant putty shall be non-hardening, non-oxidizing, non-corrosive, non-

poisonous, and non-injurious to human skin with service temperature range of 30 to 200 degrees Fahrenheit. Product shall be used to seal against the entrance of water.

2.10 HAZARDOUS AREA AND CORROSIVE AREA CONDUIT SEALS

NOT USED

2.11 PULLING LINE Pulling line shall be polyethylene type, mildew and rot resistant with minimum of 200-

pound tensile strength and minimum 1/4-inch diameter. Install in all “future” raceways. Manufacture: Greenlee, Ideal, or equal.

2.12 CONDUIT THREAD LUBRICANT

Thread lubricant shall be conductive with anti-seize and anti-corrosion properties,

compatible with steel and aluminum conduit materials. Manufacture: T&B CPS KIPR-Shield; Crouse Hinds STL; or equal.

PART 3--EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL Table C specifies the type of raceway required for each location and application by

RACESPEC sheet. Unscheduled conduit shall be galvanized, rigid steel, RACESPEC type GRS.

Table C

Location Application/Condition RACESPEC

Indoor corrosive Exposed PGRS, LFS

Outdoor Exposed PGRS, LFS

Concealed Embedded in concrete structure or beneath slab-on-grade

PGRS, PVC8


3.02 CONDUIT

A. GENERAL: 1. The number of directional changes of a conduit shall be limited to

270 degrees in any run between pull boxes. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, in general, conduit inside structures shall be

exposed. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, the Contractor shall be responsible for

determining conduit stub-up locations from the manufacturer's shop drawings.

4. Conduit runs shall be limited to a maximum of 400 feet, less 100 feet or

fraction thereof, or every 90 degrees of change in direction. 5. Label all conduits boxes and terminal boxes, scheduled or unscheduled in

accordance with this Section and 16000. 6. Seismic Anchorage and Bracing: Sections 01900 and 16000.

B. INDOOR AND OUTDOOR CONDUIT SYSTEMS:

In general, Contractor shall be responsible for determining conduit routing that

conforms to the specified installation requirements:

1. Conduits for lighting and outlets: exposed 2. Conduits for process equipment: exposed 3. Conduit inside structures: exposed

Conduit installation shall conform to the requirements of the RACESPEC sheets

and the following specified installation requirements:

1. Exposed conduit: Install parallel or perpendicular to structural members and surfaces. Install conduit horizontally and allow minimum headroom of 7 feet.

2. Route two or more exposed conduits in the same general routing parallel

with symmetrical bends. 3. Space exposed conduit installed on supports not more than 10 feet apart.

Space multiple conduits in parallel and use framing channel. 4. Comply with the requirements of Section 16000 and herein, where

conduits are suspended from the ceiling.


5. Secure conduit rack supports to concrete walls and ceilings with framing channel concrete inserts.

6. Install conduits at least 6 inches from high temperature piping, ducts, and

flues with temperatures higher than 90 degree C. 7. Install conduits between the reinforcing steel in walls or slabs that have

reinforcing in both faces. 8. Place conduits under the reinforcement in slabs with only a single layer of

reinforcing steel. Separation between conduits, conduits and reinforcement, and conduits and surfaces of concrete shall be maintained in accordance with UBC.

9. Route conduit clear of structural openings and indicated future openings. 10. Provide conduits with flashed and watertight seals routed through roofs or

metal walls. 11. Grout conduits into openings cut into concrete and masonry structures. 12. Cap conduits or plug flush conduits during construction to prevent

entrance of dirt, trash, and water. Cap or plug empty conduits designated as “future”, “spare”, or “empty” and include a pulling line accessible at both ends. Use anti-seize compound on cap and plug threads prior to installation.

13. Determine concealed conduit stub up locations from the manufacturer's

shop drawings. Terminate concealed conduit for future use in specified equipment.

14. Install conduit flush with structural surfaces with couplings and plugs.

Caps and plugs shall match the conduit system. 15. Provide concealed portions of conduits for future equipment where the

drawings indicate future equipment. Match the existing installation for duplicate equipment.

16. Terminate conduits that enter enclosures with fittings that match the

NEMA rating of the enclosure. 17. Underground nonmetallic conduit that turn out of concrete, masonry or

earth: Install a 90-degree elbow of PVC-coated rigid steel conduit before emergence above ground.


18. Provide O-Z Gedney "Type DX" or Crouse-Hinds "Type XD" bonded, weather-tight expansion and deflection fitting for the conduit size where conduit across structural joints that allows structural movement.

C. UNDERGROUND CONDUIT SYSTEM:

NOT USED D. CONDUIT SEAL-OFF FITTINGS: NOT USED

3.03 MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES NOT USED

3.04 CABLE TRAY NOT USED

3.05 RACEWAY NUMBERING Each new and reused conduit shall be provided with a number tag at each end and

in each manhole, handhole, or pull box. Cable trays shall be identified by stencils at intervals not exceeding 50 feet, at intersections, and at each end to identify power cable tray voltage, control cable tray, or instrument cable tray.

3.06 RACEWAY SCHEDULE

A. GENERAL: Raceways are sized on the drawings and shall be as specified herein. B. UNSCHEDULED RACEWAY: Unscheduled lighting and receptacle raceways shall be sized by the Contractor in

accordance with the NEC. Minimum size shall be 3/4 inch for exposed and 1 inch for embedded raceway.

C. SCHEDULED RACEWAY: The size and type of raceway shall be as specified on the one line drawings.


3.07 RACESPEC SHEETS The following RACESPECS are included in this section and begin on the next sheet:


3.07 RACEWAY SPECIFICATION SHEETS (RACESPEC)

Raceway Identification: LFS Description: Liquidtight Flexible Steel Conduit Application: Final connection to equipment subject to vibration or

adjustment. Compliance: UL 360 Construction: Spirally wound galvanized steel strip with successive

convolutions securely interlocked and jacketed with liquidtight plastic cover.

Minimum size: 3/4 inch Fittings: Cadmium-plated malleable iron body and gland nut with

cast-in lug, brass grounding ferrule threaded to engage conduit spiral.

O-ring seals around the conduit and box connection and

insulated throat. Provide forty-five and ninety degree fittings where

applicable. Provide PVC coated flexible conduit and fittings where the

conduit system is PVC coated. Installation: Length of flexible liquidtight conduit shall not exceed 15

times the trade diameter of the conduit and not exceed 36 inches in length. Use conductive thread compound.



Raceway Identification: PGRS Description: Rigid Steel Conduit, Corrosion-Resistant, Polyvinyl

Chloride (PVC) Coated. Provide factory made and coated elbows.

Compliance: ANSI, ETL and UL. The PVC coated rigid galvanized

steel conduit shall be stamped with the ETL Verification Mark “ETL Verified to PVC-001”.

Finish: PGRS shall be hot-dip galvanized rigid steel conduit as

specified in 16110-3.03 GRS, with a PVC Coating. The PVC coating shall be gray, minimum 40 mils thick, bonded to the outside and continuous over the entire length of the conduit except at the threads, and be free of blisters, bubbles, or pinholes. Thread protectors shall be used on the exposed threads of the PVC coated conduit.

A 2-mil coat of urethane enamel coating shall be bonded to

the inside. Coating shall be free of pinholes. Bond strength shall exceed the tensile strength of the PVC coat.

Minimum size: 3/4 inch Fittings: Similarly coated to the same thickness as the conduit and

provided with Type 316 stainless steel hardware. Conduit and fittings shall be manufactured by the same company. Male threads on elbows and nipples, and female threads on fittings or conduit couplings shall be protected by application of urethane coating.

Covers: PVC coated covers shall have V-groove seal and stainless

steel hardware. Hubs: Hubs for connection of conduit to junction, device, or

terminal boxes shall be threaded cast ferrous alloy. Hubs shall have the same PVC coating as the conduit and

insulating grounding bushings. Hubs shall utilize a neoprene "O" ring and shall provide a

watertight connection.



Raceway Identification: PGRS (continued) Boxes: Nonhazardous: NEMA Class 4X stainless steel or nonmetallic. Hazardous: NEMA Class 7 cast ferrous. Manufacturers: PVC coated conduit shall be by Robroy Industries, ,

PermaCote, or equal.

Installation: Plastic coated conduit shall be made up tight, threaded, and installed using tools approved by the PVC-coated conduit manufacturer.

Exposed conduit threads shall be covered by a plastic

overlap coated and sealed per manufacturer’s recommendations.

Pipe wrenches and channel locks shall not be used for

tightening plastic coated conduits. Damaged areas shall be patched, using manufacturer’s recommended material. The area to be patched shall be built up to the full thickness of the coating. Painted fittings are not acceptable.

PVC coated conduit shall be supported away from the

structure using PVC coated conduit wall hangers or PVC coated conduit mounting hardware.

Damaged work shall be replaced Training: Installers shall be trained and certified in the proper

installation techniques provided by the PVC-coated conduit system manufacture. Proof of certification shall be provided under paragraph 16110-1.03.



Raceway Identification: PVC8 Description: Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit Application: Extra heavy wall thickness for locations including direct

bury under roadways where not exposed to traffic damage and surface mounted in corrosive areas.

Compliance: NEMA TC2, UL 651 Construction: Schedule 80, high-impact, polyvinylchloride (PVC) Minimum size: 3/4 inch exposed; 1 inch embedded or encased Fittings: PVC solvent weld type Boxes: Indoor: NEMA Class 4X, nonmetallic Outdoor and corrosive: NEMA Class 4X, nonmetallic Installation: Exposed PVC conduit shall be run on supports spaced:

1. 3 feet apart for conduits up to 1 inch 2. 2. 5 feet apart for conduits 1-1/4 inches to 2 inches. 3. 6 feet apart for conduits 2 1/2 inches and larger. 4. PVC conduit not provided where damaged by heat. 5. Bell ends where terminated at walls and boxes.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 16120

600 VOLT CONDUCTORS, WIRE, AND CABLE PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

This section specifies stranded copper cables, conductors, and wire rated 600 volts insulation used for power; lighting, analog, digital, or pulse signals and control circuits.

This section specifies copper cables and coax cable rated 300 volt insulation used for data

communication and specifies fiber optic data cable used for data communication.

1.02 REFERENCES

This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.

Unless otherwise specified, references to document shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, whether or not the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

ASTM B3 Soft or Annealed Copper Wire

ASTM B8 Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft

ASTM B33 Tinned Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes

ICEA S-68-516 Ethylene-Propylene-Rubber-Insulated Wire

NEMA WC7 Cross-Linked-Thermosetting Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electric Energy

NFPA 70 National Electric Code (NEC)

UL 44 Rubber-Insulated Wires and Cables

UL 83 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables


1.03 SUBMITTALS The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300.

1. Submittals specified in Section 16000. 2. Complete catalog cuts for all conductors, wire, and cable.

PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL

A. UNSCHEDULED CONDUCTORS AND CABLES:

Where not specified on the Drawings, conductors and cables shall be sized in accordance with the National Electrical Code for the particular equipment served with the minimum size as specified herein.

Unscheduled conductor with insulation shall be provided in accordance with the

following:

1. CABLESPEC “XHHW-2” for single conductors

B. CABLE SPECIFICATION SHEETS (CABLESPEC):

General requirements for conductors and cables specified in this Section are listed on

CABLESPEC sheets in paragraph 16120-3.06. 2.02 COLOR CODING

A. CONTROL CONDUCTORS:

Single-conductor control conductors shall have the following colors for the indicated voltage:


Control Conductor 120V

Power (AC) Black

Control (AC) Red

Neutral White

Ground Green

Foreign Voltage (DC) Blue/White

Foreign Voltage (AC) Yellow

Power (DC) Blue

Control (DC) Violet

B. POWER CONDUCTORS:

Power conductors shall have the following colors for the indicated voltage:

Power Conductor 120V

Phase A Black

Phase B Red

Phase C Blue

Ground Green

Neutral White

Cables may be black with colored 3/4-inch vinyl plastic tape applied at each cable termination. Tape shall be wrapped with 25 percent overlay to provide 3 inches minimum coverage.

C. SIGNAL CONDUCTORS:

Signal cable conductors shall be color coded black and white for pairs or black, white, and red for triads. Each conductor and each group of conductors shall be numbered. 2.03 POWER AND CONTROL CONDUCTORS AND CABLE, 600 VOLT A. SINGLE CONDUCTOR:

Provide stranded conductors for all cable or wires. Provide minimum conductor size of 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits and minimum conductor size of 14 AWG for control circuits.


B. MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE: Provide multiconductor power cable and multiconductor control cable where identified

on the drawings. Provide stranded conductors for all cable or wires. 2.04 SIGNAL CABLES

A. GENERAL:

Factory cable between manufactured instrument system components shall be provided in compliance with the instrument manufacturer's recommendations.

Signal cable shall be provided for instrument signal transmission. Single instrument cable (SIC) and multiple-circuit instrument cable (MIC) shall be provided in accordance with the following examples:

CABLESPEC “SIC”: Cable designation: 1PR#16S shielded twisted pair (STP) Cable designation: 1TR#16S triad (STT) CABLESPEC “MIC": Cable designation example: 4PR#16S with individual shields for each of the four pair and an overall shield and jacket for the multiconductor instrument cable.

B. COMMUNICATION, PAGING, AND SECURITY SYSTEM CABLES:

Voice communication, paging, and security system cables shall be specified in their

respective specification sections. 2.05 PORTABLE CORD

Portable cord shall be provided in accordance with CABLESPEC "CORD," unless otherwise specified. Cords shall contain an equipment grounding conductor. 2.06 SPLICING AND TERMINATING MATERIALS

Connectors shall be tool applied compression type of correct size and UL listed for the specific application. Connectors shall be tin-plated high conductivity copper. Wire nuts used for splices are prohibited.

Signal and control conductors shall be connected to terminal blocks and field devices and instruments shall be terminated with conductor terminals as specified in paragraph 16000-2.02.


Connectors for wire sizes No. 8 AWG and larger shall be compression tool installed one-hole lugs up to size No. 3/0 AWG, and two-hole or four-hole lugs for size No. 4/0 and larger. Mechanical clamp, dimple, screw-type connectors are not acceptable. In-line splices and taps shall be used only by written consent of the Construction Manager.

Power conductor splices shall be compression type, made with a compression tool die approved for the purpose, as made by Thomas and Betts Corp., or equal. Splices shall be covered with electrical products designed for the application, insulated, and covered with a heat-shrinkable sleeve or boot, as specified elsewhere.

Motor connection kits shall consist of heat-shrinkable, polymeric insulating material over the connection area and high dielectric strength mastic to seal the ends against ingress of moisture and contamination. Motor connections may use the Tyco Electronics removable boot product line.

Motor connection kits shall accommodate a range of cable sizes for both in-line and stub-type configurations. Connection kits shall be independent of cable manufacturer's tolerances. Refer to the electric motor specification Section 11060. 2.07 CORD GRIPS

Cord grips shall be provided where indicated on the Drawings to attach flexible cord to equipment enclosures. Cord grips shall consist of a threaded aluminum body and compression nut with a neoprene bushing and stainless steel wire mesh for strain relief. Cord grip shall provide a watertight seal at enclosure interface and sized to accommodate the flexible cord. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL

Conductors shall be identified at each connection terminal and at splice points. The identification marking system shall comply with Section 16000.

Pulling wire and cable into conduit or trays shall be completed without damaging or putting undue stress on the insulation or jacket. Manufacture recommended and UL Listed pulling compounds are acceptable lubricants for pulling wire and cable. Grease is not acceptable.

Raceway construction shall be complete, cleaned, and protected from the weather before cable is installed. Where wire or cable exits a raceway, a wire or cable support shall be provided.

Provide tin-plated bus bar. Scratch-brush the contact areas and tin plate the connection where flat bus bar connections are made with un-plated bar. Bolts shall be torqued to the bus manufacturer's recommendations.


3.02 600 VOLT CONDUCTOR AND CABLE

Conductors in panels and electrical equipment shall be bundled and laced at intervals not greater than 6 inches, spread into trees and connected to their respective terminals. Lacing shall be made up with plastic cable ties. Cable ties shall be tensioned and cut off by using a tool specifically designed for the purpose such as a Panduit GS2B. Other methods of cutting cable ties are unacceptable.

Conductors crossing hinges shall be bundled into groups not exceeding 10 to 15 conductors and protected using nylon spiral flexible covers to protect conductors. Provide oversized plastic panel wiring duct within panels and panel boards.

Slack shall be provided in junction and pull boxes, handholes and manholes. Slack shall be sufficient to allow cables or conductors to be routed along the walls. Amount of slack shall be equal to largest dimension of the enclosure. Provide dedicated electrical wireways and insulated cable holders mounted on unistrut in manholes and handholes.

Raceway fill limitations shall be as defined by NEC and the following:

1. Lighting and receptacle circuits may be in the same conduit in accordance with de-rating requirements of the NEC. Lighting and receptacle circuits shall not be in conduits with power or control conductors. Signal conductors shall be in separate conduits from power conductors. Motor feeder circuits shall be in separate conduits including small fan circuit unless combination fan-light fixture.

2. Power conductors derived from uninterruptible power supply systems shall

not be installed in raceways with conductors of other systems. Install in separate raceways.

3. Slices and terminations are subject to inspection by the Construction

Manager prior to and after insulating. 4. Motor terminations at 460-volt motors shall be made by bolt-connecting

the lugged connectors. 5. In-line splices and tees, where approved by the Construction Manager,

shall be made with tubular compression connectors and insulated as specified for motor terminations. Splices and tees in underground handholes or pull boxes shall be insulated using Scotch-cast epoxy resin or Raychem splicing kits.

6. Terminations at solenoid valves, 120 volt motors, and other devices

furnished with pigtail leads shall be made using self-insulating tubular compression connectors within the termination box.


7. Terminations at valve and gate motor actuators shall be made directly into

the actuator where possible. Power termination shall be made in the actuator power disconnect. Control and signal cable may be routed to a termination box near the actuator on 20-ampere rated terminal strips with label identification for the control and signal conductors. Single wire control conductors and analog cable (SIC or MIC) then installed in flexible conduit to the actuator control and signal termination compartments.

3.03 SIGNAL CABLE

Provide terminal blocks at instrument cable junctions within dedicated terminal boxes provided by the installer. Signal circuits shall be run without splices between instruments, terminal boxes, or panels.

Circuits shall not be made using conductors from different pairs or triads. Triads shall be

used wherever 3-wire circuits are required.

Shields are not acceptable as a signal path, except for circuits operating at radio frequencies utilizing coaxial cables. Common ground return conductors for two or more circuits are not acceptable.

Shields shall be bonded to the signal ground bus at the control panel only and isolated from ground at the field instrument or analyzer and at other locations. Shields or drain wires for spare circuits shall not be grounded at either end of the cable run. Terminals shall be provided for running signal leads and shield drain wires through junction boxes.

Spare circuits and the shield drain wire shall be terminated on terminal blocks at both ends of the cable run and be electrically continuous through terminal boxes.

Where instrument cable splicing is required, provide an instrument stand with terminal box mounted approximately 3 feet above grade for instrument cable splices with the circuits and individual conductors provided with label as specified in Section 16000.

Cable for paging, security, voice communication, and telephone systems shall be installed and terminated in compliance with the manufacturers and the Utilities recommendations. 3.04 PORTABLE CORD

Portable power cords feeding permanent equipment, such as pendant cords feeding motors for pumps, cranes, hoists, and portable items shall have a wire mesh cord grip of flexible stainless steel wire to relieve the tension from the cable termination. Connection of portable cords to permanent wiring shall be accomplished with dedicated boxes and terminals blocks.


3.05 TESTING

The Contractor shall test conductors, wire, and cable in accordance with Section 16030. 3.06 CABLE SPECIFICATION SHEETS (CABLESPEC)

A. GENERAL:

Conductor, wire, and cable types for different locations, service conditions and raceway systems are specified on individual cable specification sheets. Scheduled and unscheduled conductors, wires, and cables shall be installed in accordance with the CABLESPEC SHEETS.

B. CABLESPEC SHEETS:

The following CABLESPEC sheets are included in this section:

Type Volt Product Purpose

DC1 300 RS-422: 4-PAIR, 24-AWG UNSHIELDED JACKETED PREMISE WIRE

DATA COMMUNICATION FAST ETHERNET: 100 BASE T

MIC 600 SP-OS: MULTIPLE PAIR PR#18 or 16SH WITH OVERALL SHIELD AND JACKET

CABLE TRAY RATED INSTRUMENT CABLE

SIC 600 P-OS: 1-PR#18 or 16SH or 1-TR#18 or 16SH

CABLE TRAY RATED INSTRUMENT CABLE

XHHW-2 600 XLP INSULATED INDUSTRIAL GRADE CONDUCTOR

POWER, CONTROL, LIGHTING, & RECEPTACLES

CORD 600 HEAVY DUTY CABLE: SJOOW PORTABLE ITEMS

MFR 300/600 POWER, CONTROL OR SIGNAL CABLE SPECIFIED BY OEM FOR USE WITH SUBMITTED EQUIPMENT

PACKAGED EQUIPMENT CIRCUITS

3.06 CABLE SPECIFICATION SHEET--CABLESPEC


Cable System Identification: DC1

Description: Premise Cable: IEC Category 5 UTP; NEMA WC-63.1 Category 5e; Fast Ethernet: 100 Base TX; 4 pair, #24 AWG Cable

Voltage: 300 V RMS -

Conductor Material: Solid Bare copper

Insulation Material: FRPO - Flame Retardant Polyolefin / FEP -Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene; Color Coded conductor insulation

Jacket: LS PVC - Low Smoke Polyvinyl Chloride with ripcord Trade Name Example: Flamarrest Sequential Footage Marking: every two feet Jacket Color: Blue

Manufacturer(s): Cooper Industries – Belden 1585A; or equal.

Execution:

Applications: Gigabit Ethernet Data Communications LAN, CCTV Fixed. Component or Composite Video, Digital Video, RS-422,

Installation: Install in accordance with associated equipment manufacturer’s instruction.

Testing: Test in accordance with paragraph 16120-3.05.



Cable System Identification: MIC

Description: Multiple twisted, shielded pairs, 18 or 16 AWG, with overall shield instrumentation cable; Number of pairs as shown; UL listed, Cable Tray rated.

Voltage: 600 volts

Conductor Material: Bare annealed copper; Class-B stranded per ASTM B-8

Insulation: 15 mil, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) with 4 mil nylon, 90 degree C temperature rated Color Code per ICEA Method-1: Pairs- Black and White with one conductor in each pair printed alpha-numerically for identification

Lay: Twisted on a 2-inch lay

Shield: 100 percent, 1.35 mil aluminum/polyester or Mylar tape with 7-strand tinned copper drain wire

Overall Shield: 2.35 mil aluminum-Mylar tape with 7-strand tinned copper drain wire

Jacket: Flame-retardant, moisture and sunlight resistant 45 mil Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)

Flame Resistance: UL 1277 and UL 1581 vertical tray flame test

Manufacturer(s): Okonite, Okoseal-N type SP-OS (Shielded Pairs with Overall Shield); or Cooper Industries-Belden equal; or General Cable equal

Execution:

Installation: Install in accordance with paragraph 16120-3.03.




Cable System Identification: SIC

Description: Single twisted, shielded pair or triad, 18 or 16 AWG, instrumentation and signal cable; UL listed; Cable Tray rated

Voltage: 600 volts

Conductor Material: Bare annealed copper; stranded per ASTM B8

Insulation: 15 mil, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) with 4 mil nylon, 90 degree C temperature rated Color Code per ICEA Method-1: Pairs- Black and White with one conductor in each pair printed alpha-numerically for identification

Lay: Twisted on a 2-inch lay

Shield: 100 percent, 1.35 mil aluminum-Mylar tape with a 7-strand tinned copper drain wire

Jacket: 45 mil Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)

Flame Resistance: UL 1277

Manufacturer(s): Okonite, Okoseal-N Type P-OS (Pair(s) Overall Shield) and Type TOS (Triad(s) Overall Shield); or Cooper Industries-Belden equal; or General Cable equal

Execution:

Use: Analog signal cable and RTD device Triad extension cable.





Cable System Identification: XHHW-2

Description: Industrial grade single conductor Sizes: 14 AWG through 750 kcmil as shown

Voltage: 600 volts

Conductor Material: Bare annealed copper; stranded per ASTM B8

Insulation: NEC Type XHHW-2; 90 degree C dry and C wet; Cross-Linked Polyethylene (XLP) per ICEA S-66-524 and UL-44; Color in sizes 14, 12 and 10 AWG: Black, Green, Yellow, White, Orange, Brown, Red, Blue

Jacket: None

Flame Resistance: UL 83

Manufacturer(s): Okonite, X-Olene; Cablec, Durasheath XLP; or equal.

Uses Permitted: Power, control, lighting and outlet circuits.

Execution:


Testing: Test in accordance with paragraph 16000-3.02 and Section 16030.



Cable System Identification: CORD

Description: Industrial Grade Flexible Portable Cord: Synthetic Rubber Insulation with Oil-Resistant Thermoset Jacket construction: Type SOOW for 600 Volt circuits; Type SJOOW for 300 Volt circuits

Voltage: 600 V RMS where shown or where unspecified: Type SOOW

Conductor Material: Flexible rope stranded annealed copper per ASTM B189 and B33.

Insulation: Insulation: Ethylene propylene (EPR) per ICEA S-68-516 and rated for continuous operation at 90 degrees C. Green used for ground only Color: 2/C Black and White; 3/C Black, White, and Green; 4/C Black, White, Red and Green; 5/C Black, White, Red, Green, and Orange

Jacket: Heavy-duty Neoprene per ICEA S-68-516. Color: Black

Manufacturer(s): Okonite: Okocord; American Insulated Wire Cord equal; or Engineer accepted equal.

Execution:



**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 16140

WIRING DEVICES PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This Section specifies wiring devices consisting of receptacles, plugs, switches and appurtenances. 1.02 REFERENCES This Section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this Section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this Section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title


NEMA WD-1 General Requirements for Wiring Devices

NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL Wiring devices shall be UL approved for the current and voltage specified and shall comply with NEMA WD-1. Devices shall contain provisions for back wiring and side wiring with captive binding screws.


Provide devices colored to conform to manufacturer’s or industry standard for special use such as orange for isolated ground receptacles, blue for surge suppression receptacles, and red for emergency power receptacles. Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings or Schedules, normal use devices shall be brown, except those located in finished areas shall be ivory. 2.02 RECEPTACLES AND PLUGS A. GENERAL: Receptacles shall be grounding type. B. 120V RECEPTACLES:

1. INDOOR, CLEAN AREAS: Not used. 2. OUTDOOR, PROCESS OR CORROSIVE AREAS: Receptacle shall be duplex, 20 ampere, NEMA 5-20R, and shall accept NEMA 5-15P and 5-20P plugs. Receptacle and plug shall be corrosion resistant, marine duty with yellow polycarbonate weatherproof lift covers.

Manufacturers: Hubbell 53CM62/53CM21, General Electric, or equal. C. 250V RECEPTACLES: Not used. D. PLUG CAPS: Male plug caps for 120 volt receptacles shall be of the cord grip armored type with heavy phenolic housing, of the same manufacture as the receptacle. Plug caps shall be rated 15 amps. One plug cap shall be provided for every four receptacles furnished, with a minimum of two plug caps being provided. Plug caps shall be delivered to the Construction Manager. E. THREE PHASE RECEPTACLES AND PLUGS:

Not used. F. RECEPTACLES FOR HAZARDOUS AREAS:

Not used. 2.03 SWITCHES A. GENERAL PURPOSE (INDOOR, CLEAN AREAS): Not used.


B. SWITCHES FOR HAZARDOUS AREAS:

Not used. C. SWITCHES FOR OUTDOOR AND CORROSIVE AREAS: Switches shall be 20-ampere with weatherproof/ corrosion resistant neoprene plate. Switches shall be mounted in “FS” type copper-free aluminum or PVC mounting boxes.

Manufactures: Hubbell or Arrow-Hart as follows:

Hubbell with 17CM50 plate

Arrow-Hart with 2881 plate

Single pole 1281 2991

Double pole 1282 2992

3-way 1283 2993

4-way 1284 2994 2.04 DEVICE PLATES Device plates in corrosive or outdoor areas shall be corrosion-resistant/marine-duty type. Device plates for explosion-proof equipment shall be factory provided with the equipment. Device plates shall be provided with engraved laminated phenolic nameplates with 1/8-inch white characters on black background. Nameplates for switches shall identify panel and circuit number and area served. Nameplates for receptacles shall identify circuit and voltage if other than 120 volts, single phase. 2.05 PLUG STRIPS

Not used.

2.06 PRODUCT DATA In accordance with Section 01300, the Contractor shall provide catalog cuts for all materials provided under this section.


PART 3--EXECUTION Boxes shall be independently supported by stainless steel brackets, expansion bolts, toggle bolts, or machine or wood screws as appropriate. Wooden plugs inserted in masonry or concrete shall not be used as a base to secure boxes, nor shall welding or brazing be used for attachment. Receptacles and switches installed in sheet steel boxes shall be flush mounted. Flush mounted receptacles shall be located 18 inches above the floor unless otherwise indicated. Switch boxes shall be mounted 48 inches above the floor. Receptacles installed in cast device boxes shall be located 48 inches above the floor. Wiring devices shall be tested for correct connections.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 16155

INDIVIDUAL MOTOR STARTERS

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTIONSUMMARY

A. SUMMARY: This Section specifies motor starters installed in enclosures other than motor control centers. B. RELATED SECTIONS:

Section 16000: General Requirements for Electrical Work Section 01300: Submittals Section 01605 Shipment, Protection and Storage


A. REFERENCED STANDARDS:

This Section incorporates by reference the latest revisions of the following documents. They are a part of this Section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this Section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this Section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this Section shall prevail.

Reference Title

NEMA ICS 1-2000

Industrial Control and Systems: General Requirements

NEMA ICS 2-2000

Industrial Control and Systems: Controls, Contactors, and Overload Relays rated 600V and under

NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000-Volt Maximum)

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide in accordance with Sections 01300 and 16000-1.03. B. Submittal to include the following information:

1. Verification of fault withstand and interrupting ratings.


2. Applicable operating and maintenance material as specified in Section 01730.

3. Manufacturer’s catalog data including overload heater element selection for

all material provided under this Section. The catalog data shall be assembled in a folder with each page clearly marked with the item and reference number to the specification.

4. Units on network control systems shall have shop drawings and network

address submitted for approval. 5. Equipment I.D. label nomenclature. 6. Final Testing Report to include breaker and overload settings.

PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 ENCLOSURE

The door to the motor starter enclosure shall be interlocked with an externally operated disconnect handle. Disconnect handle shall be arranged to indicate disconnect position. The disconnect operator (handle) shall have provisions to accept up to three 3/8-inch shackle padlocks to lock the disconnect in the open position. Enclosure NEMA rating shall be as specified for the Location/Exposure as shown in Section 16000. 2.02 MOTOR BRANCH CIRCUIT PROTECTION

A. GENERAL: Motor branch circuit protection shall be provided by fused disconnect switches or molded

case motor circuit protectors as specified. B. FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCHES:

Fused disconnect switches shall be provided with visible knife blades, shielded line terminals and quick-make, quick-break switch operator. Fuse clips shall be Class R rejection type and sized for UL Class RK, one-time, time-delay fuses. Fuse assembly shall have a minimum short circuit capacity of 50,000A symmetrical.

C. MOLDED CASE MOTOR CIRCUIT PROTECTORS: The molded case circuit breaker shall operate on the magnetic principle with a current

sensing coil in each of the three poles to provide an instantaneous trip for short circuit protection. The trip setting shall be adjustable over a range of 700 to 1300 percent of the full load current of the motor served and shall be adjustable from the front of the breaker. Circuit breaker, when used in


conjunction with the starter, shall be rated to interrupt 42,000A (symmetrical) unless otherwise specified.

2.03 MOTOR STARTERS

A. The basic full voltage, non-reversing starter (FVNR) shall consist of a three-pole, 600VAC contactor, surge suppressor, and three overload relays, NEMA size 1 minimum even if applied to fractional horsepower service. Reversing (FVR) and multispeed starters shall have additional contactors, overload relays and auxiliary relays as required for the specified functions.

B. The contactors shall comply with NEMA ICS and NEMA rated for the horsepower

as specified. C. Overload relays shall be adjustable solid-state with protection for each of the poles.

An overload condition shall cause the overload relay to latch in the open position. Reset shall be accomplished with a reset button located on the unit door exterior. Trip setting shall be adjustable from 85 to 115 percent of rating. Provide 1 Form-C 2-ampere auxiliary contact for remote monitoring of the overload alarm condition.

2.04 SOLID STATE STARTERS

A. The solid state soft-start motor controller shall consist of a self-contained unit for the control of 3-pole electric motors. The controller shall use solid-state components to limit current during motor starting and stopping and include built-in bypass contacts operating closed when the motor is running at speed.

B. Start controls shall permit selection among soft-start with selectable jog, kickstart,

voltage or current limiting with starting parameters field programmable from 0 to 600 percent of full load current as required. When starting pumps a full voltage start with ramp time less than 0.25 second, dual ramp start, or a start profile designed to reduce fluid surges is required. Stop controls shall permit field selection among ramp to stop, coast to stop, or stop profile designed for use with pumps.

C. Unit overload capacity shall be 125% of continuous motor FLA and capable of

withstanding 500% of motor FLA for 60 Seconds. Selectable motor overload protection trip classes of 10, 20 and 30 utilizing three-phase current sensing shall be initially field set at 20 and field adjusted as required for the application by the Factory Engineer.

D. Provide an alphanumeric, display and keypad for operator interface for controller

set-up, diagnostics, status and monitoring. The display shall monitor and display the following functions:

1. Three-phase current 2. Three-phase voltage


3. Power in kW 4. Power usage in kWh 5. Power factor 6. Elapsed time.

E. When fault conditions are detected, the controller shall inhibit starting. Fault

diagnostics shall be indicated in descriptive text on the LCD display. The exclusive use of fault codes is unacceptable. Provide as standard annunciation:

1. Pre-start line fault alarm 2. Running line fault advising power loss 3. Shorted or missing load connection 4. Pre-start power loss with phase indication 5. Over-temperature 6. Fault alarm with phase problem indication.

F. Include the following defeatable protection as standard:

1. Under-load 2. Under-voltage 3. Over-load 4. Over-voltage 5. Voltage Unbalance 6. Excessive Starts Per Hour 7. Phase Reversal 8. Stall 9. Jam.

G. Provide a minimum of four 2-ampere, 240VAC rated auxiliary contacts for customer

use. Configure output contacts for: “Auto-Mode” status, “Ready” status, “Full-speed-Bypass” status, and “Fault” alarm. Provide for remote start and stop command.

H. Acceptable manufacture:

1. Allen-Bradley Bulletin 150 SMC Flex 2. Eaton Cutler Hammer 3. GE 4. Square D 5. Approved equal.

2.05 TERMINAL BLOCKS

A. Terminal blocks shall be provided for all external power and control connections.


B. Terminal blocks shall be heavy duty, rated at 300V for control and 600V for power, and shall contain permanently identified integral marking strips.

2.06 CONTROL DEVICES

Combination starters shall be provided with door-mounted control devices as shown on the diagrams. Control devices shall be as specified in Section 16175. 2.07 SURGE SUPPRESSORS

Surge suppressors shall be provided in each contactor type starter. Suppressors shall be encapsulated, three component, solid state circuit, in a module suitable for mounting directly to the starter coil. Additional space for suppressors shall not be required. Suppressors shall be rated 120VAC/VDC. 2.08 CONTROL CIRCUIT TRANSFORMERS

A. Each combination motor control unit shall be provided with a control circuit transformer rated for 480 x 240-120V, single phase, 60 Hz. Unless otherwise specified, transformers shall have a minimum volt-ampere rating as follows:

Starter Minimum volt-ampere rating

Size 1 100

Size 2 150

Size 3 200

Size 4 300

B. The transformer size shall be increased if the devices applied will cause a control transformer overload or secondary terminal voltage to drop to or below 95 percent of rated secondary control voltage when rated primary voltage is applied. Each control transformer shall be mounted within the enclosure along with its associated circuit breaker and starter.

2.09 CONTROL CIRCUIT FUSING

A. Two primary fuses, rated to interrupt 200,000A at 600V, shall be provided on all motor starters.

B. Each control circuit transformer shall be provided with one control circuit secondary

fuse. Secondary fuses shall be 1/4 x 1-1/4 inches. The secondary fuse shall have an interrupting rating of 10,000A at 250V.


C. The secondary fuse shall be sized at 125 percent of full load current. Fuses shall have time delay characteristics as required to prevent false tripping due to coil in-rush currents.

D. Fuse holders shall be lamp indicating type, for blown fuse indication, and shall

contain neon lamp, clear transparent knob, and solder terminals.

2.10 WIRING

Conductors shall be 90-degree C switchboard type. Conductors shall be identified with tag numbers as specified in Section 16000. 2.11 MANUAL STARTERS

Manual starters shall comprise a horsepower rated quick-make, quick-break, toggle mechanism together with overloads in all phase conductors. Enclosures shall be rated for the Location/Exposure as shown in Section 16000. 2.12 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELING

A. Equipment Identification Label: Per Section 16000. B. Manufacturer’s Nameplate C. Personnel safety labeling.

PART 3 --EXECUTION 3.01 CALIBRATION

A. The Contractor shall size the overload relay heater elements to the actual nameplate full load amperes of the motor connected to the starter.

B. The motor circuit protector shall be adjusted by the Contractor to the lowest setting

not causing false tripping. C. Where required, DeviceNet node addresses for each starter overload and starter

input/output module shall be set by the Contractor. The DeviceNet overload is node commissioned with software configuration tools per the node assigned on the DeviceNet network drawings. The I/O module DeviceNet node is set with dial switches on the module based on the DeviceNet network drawings.


3.02 MOUNTING HEIGHT

Unless otherwise specified on the drawings, mount local motor starters centered at 48 inches above the floor.

3.03 TESTING

Local motor starters shall be tested in accordance with Sections 16000 and 16030.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 16175

MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL DEVICES PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

The vendor, manufacturer, and custom control panels shall provide enclosures, selector switches, pushbuttons, indicators, terminal strips, surge devices, nameplates, testing procedures, wiring method, wiring color coding, wire labeling, separation between power, controls, and instruments, hardwired logic relays or PLC logic products as specified herein and in Section 17310.

A. This section specifies electrical control and monitoring devices:

1. Control Devices:

a. Pushbuttons b. Selector Switches c. Indicating Lights d. Control Station Enclosures

2. Control Relays:

a. Load-Switching b. Logic Level Switching c. Timers and Time Switch d. Alternators

B. This section specifies power devices:

1. Overcurrent Protection:

a. Circuit breakers

C. Request clarification where conflicts occur with this section and other sections in Divisions 11, 15, 16 and 17.

1.02 REFERENCES This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.


Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids. If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title


NEMA ICS-1 General Standards For Industrial Controls and Systems

NEMA ICS-2 Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies

NEMA KS 1 Enclosed Switches 1.03 SUBMITTALS

The following submittals shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300 and Section 16176:

1. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the Contractor, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. The Construction Manager shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.

2. Arrangement drawings of the panel enclosure indicating the front door and panel equipment arrangement and dimensions, and enclosure type.


3. Nameplate legend with engraving and sizes. 4. Internal layout drawings showing all components. 5. List of materials and components with the layout drawings. 6. Elementary / schematic diagrams

7. Internal wiring connection diagrams.

8. External wiring interconnection diagrams including interlocks.

9. Power and control single line diagrams, where motor controllers are

included.

10. Manufacturer's catalog data for all material provided under this section shall be assembled in a folder with each page clearly marked with the item model number and reference number to the specification.

PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 CONTROL DEVICES A. PUSHBUTTONS: Pushbuttons shall be flush head, heavy-duty, with NEMA rating to match enclosure type. Operators shall be green for start function, red for stop functions, and black for all other functions. The escutcheon legend shall be as specified on the drawings.

1. UL Listed. 2. Dielectric Strength: 1300 Volts for one minute for Logic Reed contacts,

2200 Volts for one minute for other contacts. 3. 30.5mm mounting hole. 4. Temperature operating range –10 degree C. to +55 degree C. 5. Momentary contact type 6. When switching circuits are monitored by programmable controllers or other

solid state circuits, furnish hermetically-sealed, logic-reed type contacts rated not less than 0.15 amperes at 150 Vac and 0.06 amperes at 30 Vdc.


7. When switching circuits are not monitored by programmable controllers or other solid state circuits, furnish contacts with NEMA Utilization Category rating A600 rated not less than 10 amperes continuous and 6 amperes break at 120 Vac.

Manufacturer: Allen-Bradley 800T/800H series or equal.

B. SELECTOR SWITCHES:

Selector switches shall be heavy-duty with NEMA rating to match enclosure type. Selector switches shall have maintained position contacts. Switches shall be provided with contact blocks and number of positions as required performing the specified or indicated operations.

The escutcheon legend shall be as specified on the drawings. Provide:

1. UL Listed. 2. Dielectric Strength: 1300 Volts for one minute for Logic Reed contacts,

2200 Volts for one minute for other contacts. 3. 30.5mm mounting hole. 4. Temperature operating range –10 degree C. to +55 degree C. 5. Standard knob operator (not lever type nor wing lever type) 6. Number of positions and contact configuration as shown on Drawings. 7. When switching circuits are monitored by programmable controllers or other

solid state circuits, furnish hermetically-sealed, logic-reed type contacts rated not less than 0.15 amperes at 150 Vac and 0.06 amperes at 30 Vdc.

8. When switching circuits are not monitored by programmable controllers or

other solid state circuits, furnish contacts with NEMA Utilization Category rating A600 rated not less than 10 amperes continuous and 6 amperes break at 120 Vac.

9. Manufacturer: Allen-Bradley 800T/800H series or equal.

C. INDICATING LIGHTS: Red, amber, green, and blue indicating lights shall be heavy-duty full voltage 120Vac or 24Vdc push-to-test LED type with NEMA rating to match enclosure type for installation in a 30.5mm hole. Furnish with 28 chip high visibility LED. The escutcheon and lens color shall be as shown on Drawings or scheduled.


White indicating lights shall be as above, incandescent type lamp.

Manufacturer:

1. Allen-Bradley 800H-QRTH10 series or equal for 120Vac applications with colors other than white.

2. Allen-Bradley 800HQRTH24 series or equal for 24Vdc applications with

colors other than white. 3. Allen-Bradley 800H-QRT10 series or equal for 120Vac applications with

white. 4. Allen-Bradley 800H-QRT24 series or equal for 24Vdc applications with

white. Indicating Light Lens Color:

Lens Color Typical Function Example

Red Danger, running Equipment operating, motor running, valve open, power voltage applied, cycle in automatic

Amber Fault condition, attention

Equipment failure, status abnormal

Green Ready condition End of cycle; unit or head returned; motors stopped; motion stopped; contactors open, valve closed

White or Clear

Normal condition

Normal pressure of air, water, lubrication, control power on, status okay

Blue Advisory Control mode not in automatic

D. CONTROL STATION ENCLOSURES:

1. Enclosures locations and ratings:

a. Outdoors and Corrosive areas: NEMA 4X Type 316 stainless steel

E. CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMERS:

1. Not used.


2.02 CONTROL RELAYS A. LOAD-SWITCHING CONTROL RELAYS: Control relays used for switching loads such as solenoids, actuators, contactors, motor starter coils, remote interlocking, etc. shall be heavy-duty machine tool type. Contacts shall be 4-pole and be field interchangeable to either normally-open or normally- closed. Relay shall be capable of accepting a 4-pole adder.

AC relays shall have NEMA A600 contact ratings and electrical clearances for 600 volts. DC relays shall have NEMA P300 contact ratings and electrical clearances for 250 volts.

Manufacturer: Allen Bradley Bulletin-700, Square D Class 8501, or equal.

B. LOGIC LEVEL SWITCHING CONTROL RELAYS: Control relays for signal circuits shall have a minimum of three SPDT, gold-flashed, fine silver contacts rated 3-ampere resistive at 120V AC or 28Vdc.

Control relays shall be plug-in type with heavy-duty, barrier-protected screw terminal sockets and clear polycarbonate dust cover with clip fastener.

AC models shall have neon lamp indicator wired in parallel with coil. DC models shall

have LED lamp indicator wired in parallel with coil. Manufacturer: Potter Blumfield series KUP; Schrack Series RA; or equal

C. TIMERS:

1. Multi-function, micro-controller based, socket mounted timing relay.

2. Single functions:

a. Delay on Make b. Delay on Break c. Recycle (on time first, equal recycle delays) d. Single shot e. Interval f. Trailing edge single shot g. Inverted single shot h. Inverted delay on break i. Accumulative delay on make j. Re-triggerable single shot


3. Dual functions:

a. Delay on make/delay on break b. Delay on make/recycle (on time first, equal recycle delays.) c. Delay on make/interval d. Delay on make/single shot e. Interval/recycle (on time first, equal recycle delays) f. Delay on break/recycle (on time first, equal recycle delays) g. Single shot/recycle (on time first, equal recycle delays) h. Recycle – both times adjustable (on time first) i. Recycle – both times adjustable (off time first) j. Interval/delay on make k. Accumulative delay on make/interval

4. Time delay range, switch selectable:

a. Single function 0.1 second to 1,705 hours in 8 ranges. b. Dual function 0.1 second to 3,100 minutes in 8 ranges. c. Setting accuracy +/- 1 percent or 50 milliseconds, whichever is

greater. d. Repeat accuracy +/- 0.1 percent or 16 milliseconds, whichever is

greater.

5. Output:

a. Two Form-C electromechanical isolated contacts rated 10-amperes resistive at 240Vac

b. Rated 1/3-horsepower at 120 or 240Vac c. Double-pole double-throw: DPDT. d. Mechanical life: 10,000,000 operations e. Electrical life: 1,000,000 operations at full load.

6. Mounting: Magnal Plug 11-pin socket 7. Environment: -20 to +65 degree C. 8. Manufacture:

a. ABB / SSAC’s multifunction type TRDU time delay relay with dip-switch function setting with 12Vdc, 24Vac, 120Vac, 240Vac inputs as required or indicated or equal.

D. TIME SWITCH

Not used.


E. ALTERNATING RELAY

Not used.

F. MOTOR DRIVEN TIMERS- ON DELAY AND OFF-DELAY

1. Time Delay Relay - Upon Energization (TDE) or Upon De-Energization (TDDE): TDE driven by a 120 Vac synchronous motor that starts timing when initiated by an external signal via closing a dry contact. Turn a knob on the front of the dial for time settings. TDE device will reset upon power failure. TDDE device will not reset upon power failure. Special configuration where specified: will not reset upon power failure.

2. Provide a pilot light visible from the front of the timer to indicate when the

timer motor is energized. Provide visual indication by a cycle progress pointer that advances to zero from the setting then back to zero as time progresses.

3. Provide two of “instantaneous” NEMA Form-C output contacts that actuate

when the timing is initiated. Provide two "delayed" NEMA Form-C contacts that actuate when the unit has timed out or de-energized. The timer auto-matically resets, when the timing cycle is completed. Contact ratings: 10-ampere at 120 Vac and 5-ampere at 240 Vac.

4. Permanently mount and setup the timer with the initial settings shown or

specified. Timer range with 16 configurations from 5-seconds to 60-hours. Range and timer set points shown on drawings.

5. Timer Manufacturer: Eagle Cycl-Flex Automatic or Manual Reset Timer: HP5 series or HP5E series; Automatic Timing Controls, Series 305D Motor Driven Analog Reset; or equal.

2.03 MAGNETIC CONTACTORS A. LIGHTING CONTACTOR: Not used. B. MOTOR CONTACTORS:

Not used.

2.04 PANEL SAFETY DISCONNECT SWITCHES Safety disconnect switches shall be heavy-duty, 30-400-ampere ratings as indicated, fused or non-fused as indicated, stainless steel operator, safety type rated 600 volts AC.


Provide fusible disconnect switches with ratings as indicated with built-in fuse pullers.

Provide LPS, LPN, or LPJ 200KAIC current limiting fuses as appropriate for the circuit type and the circuit voltage.

Enclosure locations and ratings:

1. Outdoor or corrosive areas: NEMA 4X Type 316 stainless steel

The operating handle shall be capable of being padlocked in the "off" position. The operator shall be a positive, quick-make, quick-break mechanism. Provide bolt-on hubs. Provide door lock. Provide nameplates with the equipment tag number, equipment description, and power source as indicated on the drawings. Submit nameplate list. Switches shall be horsepower rated for motors and shall comply with NEMA KS-1. Switches shall be provided with defeatable door interlocks that prevent the door from opening when the operating handle is in the "on" position. Switches shall have line terminal shields.

Manufacturer: Allen Bradley, Cutler-Hammer, General Electric, Square-D, or equal. 2.05 OVERCURRENT PROTECTION A. CIRCUIT BREAKERS: Circuit breakers shall be thermal magnetic, molded case type with the ampere rating as specified. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, circuit breaker interrupting rating shall be 22,000 amperes symmetrical. 2.06 ELAPSED TIME INDICATORS Not used. 2.07 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS AND TRANSDUCERS

Not used. 2.08 TERMINAL STRIPS, BLOCKS, AND DEVICES A. Power Wiring: Provide back plate mounted terminal strips rated at 600 Vac. B. Control Wiring: Provide a DIN rail with spring powered contact rated at 300 Vac 24 ampere with pluggable terminals. C. Terminal identification standard to the product provided.


D. Manufacturer:

1. Standard: Allen Bradley or equal. 2. Standard: DIN rail: Phoenix Contact or Weidmuller Z-Series.

2.09 INTRUSION DEVICES

Not used.

2.10 THERMOSTATS Not used. 2.11 NAMEPLATES Nameplates for all control stations, relays, timers, motor contactors and disconnect switches shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of Section 16000-2.02G. 2.12 PRODUCT DATA Operation and maintenance data as specified in Section 01730 including approved submittal manufacturer’s catalog data, as-built drawings, and instructions for all configurable or programmable components. PART 3--EXECUTION Control stations, contactors and safety disconnect switches shall be mounted 48 inches above the floor, ground, or slab to center of device.

Miscellaneous electrical devices shall be tested in accordance with Section 16000 and Section 16030.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 16855

ELECTRIC HEAT TRACER TAPE

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section specifies electric heat tracer tape and control for protection of exterior piping against freezing. See also Section 15265. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. REFERENCES: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

NEMA ICS 1 Industrial Control and Systems

IEEE-515 Recommended Practice for Electrical Resistance Heating

1.03 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish and install a complete UL listed heat tracing system to maintain pipe temperature, including heaters, components, controls, and accessories.

1.04 DESIGN

A. System heat loss shall be determined using IEEE-515 guidelines.


B. Heater selection shall be based on maintaining 55°F pipe temperature at 0°F minimum ambient temperature, 20 MPH wind and 10% heat loss safety factor.

C. Pipes and vessels shall be insulated with 2” fiberglass insulation or equivalent.

D. Circuit breaker sizing shall be based on a start up at 20°F pipe temperature.

E. Heaters shall operate at 120 volts.

1.05 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. National Electrical Code (NEC)

B. Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL)

C. IEEE-515: “Recommended Practice for Electrical Resistance Heat Tracing”

D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

1.06 SUBMITTALS

The following information shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Certification that tracer tape can withstand temperature specified in

paragraph 15265-2.01. 2. Manufacturer’s product literature including installation procedures and

Catalog 3. Heat loss and design data confirming heater selection 4. General Wiring Schematics 5. Installation and maintenance check list 6. Operation and Maintenance Manuals

PART 2--PRODUCT

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Nelson Limitrace or approved equal.


2.02 HEATER CABLE

A. Heater cable parallel self regulating with radiation cross-linked heating core extruded continuously over two parallel bus wires. The heating cable shall vary power output inversely with temperature such that power output decreases as pipe temperature increases.

B. Heater construction shall included a radiation cross linked inner jacket thermally bonded to the heating core, a polyolefin dielectric jacket, tinned copper braid and modified polyolefin outer jacket.

C. Heat tracing cable manufacturer shall manufacture their own heat trace cables.

D. Heaters and components shall be selected in compliance with area electrical classification.

E. Heater and component selection shall be consistent with manufacturer’s published recommendations.

2.03 CONTROLS AND MONITORING

A. Controls shall energize the system when pipe temperature drops below 55°F.

B. Control shall be with an electronic thermostat with built in ground fault interruption.

C. The control system shall provide the following monitoring and alarm functions.

1. Loss of voltage 2. Low current 3. Low temperature 4. High temperature 5. Sensor failure

D. Electronic thermostat shall be Nextron TM-SP approved equal.

PART 3--EXECUTION

3.01 Heater cable installation shall conform to manufacturer’s published guidelines including allowances for valves, supports and other heat sinks.

3.02 Heater circuits shall have 30mA ground fault protection.

3.03 Installation shall be consistent with area electrical classification.

3.04 Electric heat trace signs shall be installed at intervals of 15 feet after installation of any required insulation and overwrap .


3.05 The heater shall be meggered at 500-2,500 VDC (1) before and after installation of thermal insulation. Minimum insulation resistance is 20 megohms regardless of heater length.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 17000

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies general requirements which are applicable to providing a complete, functional process control and instrumentation systems for the Ashland WTP Process Improvements Project. The requirements of this section are applicable to all work specified in Division 17 of these specifications.

Electrical requirements applicable to this work include those specified in Section 16000 for general electrical requirements and Section 16175 for electrical devices. B. DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

1. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM: The work consists of new local process control panel and field instrumentation in the Chlorine building monitoring Chemical storage tank levels, leakage in containment areas and providing speed reference signals for the new chemical feed pumping system.

2. PROGRAMMING: PLC process application and SCADA HMI graphics

programming shall be provided by the Contractor in accordance with the requirements of Sections 17310, 17315 and 17900. C. DEFINITIONS:

1. GENERAL: Definitions of terminology related to Instrumentation and Industrial Electronic Systems used in the specifications shall be as defined in IEEE 100, ISA S51.1, and NEMA ICS 1.

2. TWO-WIRE TRANSMITTER: A transducer which derives operating

power supply from the signal transmission circuit and requires no separate power supply connections. A two-wire transmitter produces a 4 to 20 milliampere current regulated signal in a series circuit with a 24 volt direct current driving potential and a maximum circuit resistance of 600 ohms.


3. FOUR-WIRE TRANSMITTER: A transducer which derives operating power from separate power supply connections. A four-wire transmitter produces a 4 to 20 milliampere current regulated signal in a series circuit with a maximum circuit resistance of 600 ohms. Four-wire transmitters typically require 120Vac or 24Vdc input power supply.

4. GALVANIC ISOLATION: Electrical node having no direct current path

to another electrical node. Galvanic isolation refers to a device with electrical inputs and/or outputs which are isolated from ground, the device case, the process fluid, and separate power supply terminals. Inputs and/or outputs may be externally grounded without affecting the characteristics of the devices or providing path for circulation of ground currents.

5. PANEL: An instrument support system which may be a flat surface, a

partial enclosure, or a complete enclosure for instruments and other devices used in process control systems including consoles, cabinets and racks. Panels provide mechanical protection, electrical isolation, and protection from dust, dirt, moisture, and chemical contaminants which may be present in the atmosphere.

6. DATA SHEETS: Data sheets shall refer to ISA S20 or ISA TR20.00.01. 7. SIGNAL TYPES: Used in systems specified in Division 17:

a. LOW-LEVEL ANALOG: Signal with full output level of 100

millivolts or less including thermocouples and resistance temperature detectors. b. HIGH-LEVEL ANALOG: Signals with full output level greater

than 100 millivolts but less than 30 volts, including 4 20 mA transmission. c. DIGITAL CODE: Coded information from the output of an

analog to digital converter or digital transmission terminal. d. PULSE FREQUENCY: Counting pulses emitted from speed or

flow transmitters. e. MODULATED SIGNALS: Signals from modems or low level

audio signals. Normal signal level: plus 4 dBm to minus 22 dBm. Frequency range is 300 to 10,000 Hertz.

f. DISCRETE CONTROL OR EVENTS: Dry contact closures and

signals monitored by solid state equipment, relays, or control circuits. g. LOW VOLTAGE DISCRETE CONTROL OR EVENTS: Dry

contact closures and signals monitored by solid state equipment, relays, or control circuits operating at less than 30 volts and 250 milliamperes.

h. HIGH-LEVEL AUDIO SIGNALS: Audio signals exceeding plus

4 dBm, including loudspeaker circuits.


i. RADIO FREQUENCY SIGNALS: Continuous wave alternating

current signals with fundamental frequency greater than 10 kilohertz.

8. SYSTEMS INTEGRATOR: A firm engaged in the business of detailed control system design and engineering, instrumentation component purchase, system and panel assembly, programming, and implementing the specified process control and industrial automation systems. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. REFERENCES: This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

IEEE 100 Standard Dictionary of Electrical and Electronics Terms

ISA S5.4 Instrument Loop Diagrams

ISA S20 Specification Forms For Process Measurement and Control Instrumentation, Primary Elements, and Control Valves

ISA S51.1 Process Instrumentation Terminology

ISA TR20.00.01 Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control Instruments Part 1: General Considerations

NEMA ICS 1 General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems


B. SYSTEMS INTEGRATOR RESPONSIBILITY:

1. GENERAL

a. The specified control system and instrumentation integration including panel building, instrument calibration, testing, start-up, operational testing, and training shall be performed by a Systems Integrator staffed with qualified personnel, possessing necessary equipment and experience in performing similar installations.

b. The control system components shall, as far as practical, be of one

manufacturer. c. The components, modules, devices, and control system equipment

shall be recognized industrial quality products. Recognized commercial or office grade products are prohibited.

d. The overall system performance shall be demonstrated to and

accepted by Owner. e. The application software packages shall be latest versions

available, or compatible with existing software currently in use. 2. ONE OF FOLLOWING PRE-APPROVED SYSTEM INTEGRATORS

SHALL BE USED:

a. Larry Helaniusm SCADA Integrator Industrial Systms, LLC 4110 NE 122nd Suite 220 Portland, OR 97230 [email protected]

(503) 245 0517 (541) 452 0988 (fax) (503) 706 7336 (Cell) b. Brian Paul, System Integrator Quality System Integrators (QSI) 1307 Queen Anne

Medford, OR, 97504 [email protected]

(541) 840-3715 (503) 687-9153 (fax)

mailto:[email protected]



c. Jeff Bruce, SCADA Integrator Portland Engineers Portland Engineers 543 NE E ST no. 201

Grants Pass, OR 97526 [email protected] (541) 840-7748 (541) 840-4778 (cell)

C. PROCESS EQUIPMENT COORDINATION

1. Division 17 specified equipment shall be coordinated for proper operation with equipment related process equipment specified in other Divisions.

2. Equipment shall be integrated, furnished, and installed in conformance

with the drawings, specifications, and the recommendations of the equipment manufacturer and the related processes equipment manufacturers.

3. Systems Integrator shall obtain manufacturer’s technical information for

items of equipment not provided with, but directly connected to, the control system. Provide the necessary coordination and components for correct signal interfaces between specified equipment and the control system.

4. Systems Integrator shall coordinate with project subcontractors and

equipment suppliers. 5. Systems Integrator shall provide installation supervision for the duration

of the project. 6. Conflicts between the plans, specifications, manufacturer/vendor drawings

and installation instructions, etc., shall be presented to the Construction Manager for resolution before proceeding.

1.03 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. GENERAL: Specified data communication and process control equipment shall suitable for operation in indoor locations and in outdoor locations. Ambient conditions are specified in Section 01800. B. CORROSIVE LOCATIONS: Corrosive locations shall be as specified in Division 16.



C. HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) AREAS:

Not applicable.

D. SEISMIC: Equipment and supports shall be braced per Section 01900. 1.04 FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. GENERAL: The instrumentation and control system functions are shown on the drawings and specified in subsequent sections of Division 17. The Systems Integrator drawings and integration practices shall be as defined in IEEE 100, ISA S51.1, and NEMA ICS 1. B. SUBMITTAL DRAWINGS:

1. GENERAL: The drawings included in the project manual are functional in nature and do not show exact locations of equipment or interconnections between equipment. The Contractor’s Systems Integrator shall prepare detailed installation drawings as specified below.

Drawings prepared in AutoCAD version 2005 with borders and title blocks identifying the project, system, revisions to the drawing, and type of drawing. Each revision of a drawing shall include the date and description of the revisions. Drawing prints shall be 11” x 17” with a minimum lettering size of 1/8”. Drawings shall be generated using Owner furnished drawing borders and title blocks, and in adherence to Owner’s drawing standards.

Diagrams shall carry a uniform and coordinated set of wire numbers and terminal block numbers in compliance with panel wiring, Section 16176 and Section 17110, to permit cross-referencing between contract documents and the drawings prepared by the Contractor.

2. CONNECTION DIAGRAMS: Show components of a control panel in an arrangement similar to the actual layout of the panel including internal wiring between devices within the panel. Show terminal blocks used for internal wiring or field wiring, identified as such. Indicate insulation color code, signal polarities, and wire numbers and terminal block numbers.

3. INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAMS: Show panels, panel devices, and

field devices with wire numbers, cable numbers, raceway numbers, terminal box numbers, terminal block numbers, panel numbers, and field device tag numbers.


4. ELEMENTARY OR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM: Shows, by means of graphic symbols, the electrical connections and functions of a specific circuit arrangement. Provide schematics for internal panel power distribution, lighting, and any panel HVAC.

5. ARRANGEMENT, LAYOUT, OR OUTLINE DRAWINGS: Show the

dimensioned external and interior control panel views with components and Bill of Material. Provide panel heat load calculations, and indicate cooling or ventilation provisions as required. 1.05 SUBMITTALS The following information shall be provided in accordance with and Section 01300:

1. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. A check mark shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole.

If deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the Contractor, each requested deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation.

The Construction Manager shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications.

Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification for requested deviations from the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.

2. Detailed product literature, showing product specifications and model

number breakdown. Mark to denote features and options included. Include only the applicable pages.

3. Manufacturer’s installation manual excerpts, as to be used for this project:

a. Installation details/drawings. b. Electrical connection diagrams c. Calibration procedures.

4. Drawings and diagrams specified in paragraph 17000-1.04 B.


5. Nameplate list with material, tag number and description as specified herein.

6. Systems Integrator Evidence of Experience per paragraph 17000-1.02 B 3. 7. Data Sheets in accordance with ISA 20 for each instrument. Identical

instruments may be submitted with one common ISA Data Sheet and accompanying tag list.

Review the submittal requirements specified in other Division 17 Sections. PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND QUALITY Equipment material shall be new, free from defects, and industrial-grade, as specified. Each type of instrument, instrument accessory, and device used throughout the work shall be manufactured by one firm, where possible. Electronic equipment shall be of solid-state construction with printed or etched circuit boards of glass epoxy of sufficient thickness to prevent warping.

Printed circuit boards in field mounted equipment shall be coated with 2 mils of conformal coating in compliance with MILSPEC MIL-I-46058C. 2.02 NAMEPLATES

Nameplates shall be provided for all field mounted instrument, analyzer, or equipment

specified in Division 17. Nameplate lettering shall include the equipment or instrument loop title and the instrument or equipment tag number, where nameplate engraving is not specified or shown. Nameplates shall be machine engraved black phenolic with white 5/32-inch high lettering, as minimum, unless otherwise specified or shown. Nameplate wording may be changed without additional cost or time, if changes are made prior to commencement of engraving.

Nameplates shall be attached to support hardware with a minimum of two self-tapping type

316 stainless steel screws in a readily visible location so the nameplate will remain to identify the service when the device is removed. Field instrument nameplates shall be attached with braided stainless steel straps where not stand mounted. 2.03 PRODUCT DATA The following Product Data shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300.


1. Record drawings specified by paragraph 17000-1.04 B and the schedules included in Division 17 shall be provided in accordance with Section 01720 in the AutoCAD format and PDF format on CD.

Provide record drawing prints of all drawings following project start-up,

but prior to acceptance of the work showing the final constructed state of the instrumentation and control systems.

2. Operating and maintenance information shall be provided in accordance

with Section 01730. Include the following in each Operation and Maintenance manual:

a. Final reviewed Submittals, including revised as-built record

drawings. b. Manufacturer’s operation and maintenance instructions, edited for

this project. c. Written record of menu configuration, jumpers, switch settings,

and other configurable parameters for each instrument. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. GENERAL: Equipment shall be installed in locations that are accessible for operation and maintenance services. Equipment not accessible shall be reinstalled at no cost to the Owner.

Installation, calibration, settings, and testing procedures are specified in Section 17000, Section 17200 – Instrument Index Part 3 Execution, and subsequent sections of Division 17. B. FIELD EQUIPMENT:

Equipment shall be provided with ports and adjustable items accessible for in-place testing and calibration. Install equipment between 48 inches and 60 inches above the floor or permanent work platform. Equipment shall be mounted to avoid shock or vibration that may impair operation. Equipment shall be mounted for unobstructed access and walkways. Equipment support systems shall not be attached to handrails, process piping or mechanical equipment.

Instruments and cabinets supported by concrete walls shall be spaced 5/8 inch by framing

channel between instrument or cabinet and wall. Block wall shall have additional installation


supports, as required, to avoid damage to the wall. Equipment supports shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication or shall be 316L stainless steel, as shown or specified.

Support systems including panels shall be designed in accordance with Section 01900 to

prevent deformation greater than 1/8 inch in any direction under the attached equipment load and under an external load of 200 pounds.

In wet or outdoor areas, conduit penetrations into instrument housing shall be made

through the bottom (preferred) or side of enclosures to minimize water entry from around or from inside of conduits. Provide conduit hubs for connections and waterproof mastic for moisture sealant.

Nameplates shall be provided for all field mounted equipment. Nameplates shall be attached to support hardware with a minimum of two self-tapping Type 316 stainless steel screws in a readily visible location, but such that if the field device is changed out, the nameplate will remain to identify the service.

C. ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTIONS: Equipment electric power wiring shall comply with Division 16. Power disconnect switches shall be provided within sight of equipment and labeled to indicate the specific equipment served and the power source location. "Within sight of" is defined as having an unobstructed view from the equipment served and within 50 feet of the equipment served.

Equipment power disconnect switches shall be mounted between 36 inches and 72 inches above the floor or permanent work platform. Where equipment location requirements cannot be met by a single disconnect switch, provide two disconnect switches: one at the equipment and one at the work platform.

Provide a surge arrestor on each 120 volt AC disconnect switch serving equipment

located outdoors. Surge arrestor shall be Telematic, LP Series or equal. D. SIGNAL CONNECTIONS:

Equipment electric signal connections shall be made on terminal blocks or by locking plug and receptacle assemblies. Flexible cable, receptacle and plug assemblies shall be used where shown or specified.

Jacketed flexible conduit shall be used between equipment and rigid raceway systems.

Flexible cable assemblies may be used where plug and receptacle assemblies are provided and the installation is not subject to mechanical damage in normal use. The length of flexible conduit or cord assemblies shall not exceed 2 feet except where sufficient length is required to allow withdrawal of instruments for maintenance or calibration without disconnection of conduit or cord assemblies.

3.02 FIELD TESTS AND INSPECTIONS


A. DELIVERY INSPECTION:

The Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative upon arrival of any material or

equipment to be incorporated into the work. The Contractor shall remove protective covers or otherwise provide access in order that the Owner's Representative may inspect such items.

B. INSPECTION AND INSTALLED TESTS: Refer to Section 17030 – Process Instrumentation and Control System Testing.

3.03 TRAINING

On-site training shall be provided for the Owner’s personnel on the operation of the PLC

system and graphics interface, (HMI), process application programs. This training session shall not include hardware or software familiarization training as specified in Section 17310. Training shall be conducted by a certified instructor in the direct employ of the Systems Integrator.

The training shall be structured as a lecture/lab course with hands-on lab exercises

utilizing PLC system hardware similar to the hardware installed as work of this contract. Hardware simulators and programming terminals, to accommodate a class size of 10

students (maximum), shall be furnished by the PLC supplier. A minimum of six hours of formal PLC application program training shall be presented

in two three-hour sessions. A minimum of six hours of formal graphics interface, (HMI), application program

training shall be presented in two three-hour sessions.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 17030

PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM TESTING

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section specifies Contractor and Systems Integrator performance in testing and documentation of process instrumentation and control system materials and equipment (PICS). The term instrumentation covers field and panel instruments, analyzers, primary sensing elements, transmitters, power supplies, and monitoring devices. Provide the labor, tools, material, power, and services necessary to provide the process instrumentation and control system inspection and testing specified herein. Coordinate all testing with Section 01660: A. Pre-Operational Performance Testing Sequence:

1. Wiring Testing 2. Installation Inspection 3. Instrumentation Calibration

B. Functional Testing Sequence:

1. Process Control Strategy Testing 2. Functional Checkout

C. Operational Testing:

1. System Acceptance Testing (SAT)

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. PICS TESTING MANAGER: The Contractor or Systems Integrator shall appoint a startup engineer or qualified specialist as PICS Testing Manager to manage, coordinate, and supervise the testing work.

The PICS Testing Manager shall have at least 5 years of total experience, or experience on at least five separate projects, in managing the testing and startup of similar electrical and instrumentation control systems. The quality assurance program shall include:


1. Definition of process areas and systems, with testing executed on an area by area basis, based on the P&ID drawings.

2. Testing for each process area executed in sequential tasks. 3. Regularly updated testing status tracking by process area, system, and task. 4. Regularly updated separate testing documentation for each process system.

B. REFERENCES: This section contains references to the following documents with additional references listed in Section 17000. All references shall be to the current edition of the document unless specifically stated otherwise. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. In case of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, reference to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, reference to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, whether or not the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

ISA RP7.1


D. PROJECT LABELING The items specifying project labeling herein shall include the following as a minimum: Owner’s name, facility name, project name, and project number.


1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittal material, to be submitted in accordance with Section 01300, shall consist of the following:

A. QUALIFICATION SUBMITTAL:

Provide the following submittal in accordance with Section 01300-Submittals: 1. PICS Testing Manager Qualifications and resume per paragraph 17030-

1.02A. 2. Example test forms per paragraph 17030-3.01 D, revised to show Project

Labeling per paragraph 17030-1.02 D.

B. DEFINITION SUBMITTAL:

Provide the following submittal after review of the Qualification Submittal: 1. Proposed test forms per PART 3 of this Section 17030, detailed for each test

for this project. 2. Certified Factory Calibration Reports. 3. Provide a copy of this specification and the referenced and applicable sections with addenda updates included with each paragraph check-

marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements.

4. Provide a copy of Section 17200 Instrument Index with Addenda updates

included, marked to indicate requested deviations from specified requirements.

5. Provide a copy of all referenced and applicable Instrumentation Drawings

with addenda updates included, marked to indicate requested deviations from specified requirements.

6. Provide a copy of all referenced and applicable Electrical Drawing’s Control

Diagrams with addenda updates included, marked to indicate requested deviations from specified requirements.

7. Failure to include a copy of the specifications and drawings with the

submittal shall be cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.


PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL The PICS Testing Manager shall provide test forms, documentation, and records as specified in the following paragraphs. 2.02 INSTRUMENT INDEX Provide a detailed Instrument Index. The Instrument Index from Section 17200 may be used as a basis. Provide as constructed details on calibration ranges, setpoints, and deadbands. 2.03 PRODUCT DATA Provide the following product data submittal after completion of testing. The following information shall be provided in accordance with specification Section 01300:

1. Completed test forms per PART 3. 2. List of factory calibrated items and calibration certificates. 3. Final Test Report assembled in a three-ring binder and submitted at the

completion of the inspection and testing activities for a project. The binder cover and spine shall be labeled to identify the project name

and process description. Test report shall include the applicable test procedures for the processes and the completed inspection and test report forms associated with the equipment and systems of that area.

Test results shall be organized by equipment item or system with

individual, labeled tab dividers to identify each. System deficiencies and non-compliant test results identified in the final test report shall be acknowledged by the responsible testing entity as corrected.

PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL

A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: Materials, equipment, and construction included under this specification shall be inspected in accordance with this section and subsequent sections of this division. Testing shall be performed by the Contractor in accordance with this and subsequent sections of this division.


No required test shall be applied without prior notice to the Construction Manager. 30 days before the commencement of any testing activity, the Contractor shall provide a detailed step-by-step test procedure complete with forms for the recording of test results, testing equipment used, and a place for identification of the individual performing or, if applicable, witnessing the test. Provide detail assistance to the Contractor in generating form 01660-A, customized for this project. Submit detailed form prior to testing per the requirements of Section 01660. B. TECHNICIAN QUALIFICATIONS: Field instruments and analyzers shall be calibrated and set up by a certified instrument technician qualified to calibrate the instrumentation. Technicians shall be qualified by completion and certification from training courses offered by The Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (ISA), the instrumentation and analyzer manufacturer's training courses, or technician training courses at a recognized trade school that specializes in instrumentation calibration. C. TEST EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS: Provide test equipment to conduct the specified tests that simulate inputs and read outputs with a rated accuracy at the point of measurement at least three times greater than the component under test. Test instruments shall have a current calibration sticker showing date of calibration, deviation from standard, name of calibration laboratory and technician, and date recalibration is required. Certified calibration reports traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology shall be included with the final test report. Provide a documenting calibration system to conduct process instrumentation calibration activities that consist of a documenting process calibrator and an instrumentation data management software system that captures the calibration results and electronically document instrument data, date of calibration, calibration procedures, and as-found and as-left instrument calibration data. Provide an instrument calibration system such as Fluke 743B with Fluke DPC/Track Instrumentation Management software or similar system. Calibration files shall be submitted with the final test report in hard copy and electronic formats that does not require specialized equipment or software to read and print the files. Provide buffer solutions and reference fluids for tests of analytical equipment. Vendor software tools may document the systems where a licensed copy of the identical software including connectors, cables, keys, interface cards and devices required for operation is submitted with the final documentation files.


D. FIELD TEST PROCEDURE DOCUMENTATION: Test procedures submitted for approval within 30 days from the date of Notice to Proceed. Test procedures for each analog and discrete loop in the process control system shall be organized and assembled for the project. Final test records shall be submitted in electronic form by scanning and converting the records and files to Adobe PDF format, to preserve actual signatures and signoffs. Test procedure documentation shall include a detailed, step-by-step description of the required test procedure, panel and terminal block numbers for points of measurement, input test values, expected resultant values, test equipment required, process setup requirements, and safety precautions. Test report forms for each loop, including forms for wiring, piping, and individual component tests, shall be included with the test procedure documentation. The actual test results shall be recorded on these forms and a final test report assembled as specified in paragraph 17030-3.05. Test report forms shall be preprinted and completed to the extent possible prior to commencing testing. Test report forms that document the field test procedures shall include the following information: 1. Project name 2. Process area associated with the equipment under test. 3. Instrument nameplate data. 4. Instrument setup and configuration parameters. 5. Time and date of test. 6. Inspection checklist and results. 7. Reference to applicable test procedure. 8. Expected and actual test results for each test point in the loop including

programmable controller data table or register values. 9. Test equipment used. 10. Space for remarks regarding test procedure or results, unusual or

noteworthy observations, etc.


11. Name, date, and signature of testing personnel. 12. Test witness’ name and signature. E. PERFORMANCE DEVIATION TOLERANCES: Tolerances shall be specified in Division 17. Where tolerances are not specified, refer to the manufacturer's published performance specifications. Overall accuracy requirements for loops consisting of two or more components shall be the root-summation-square (RSS) of the component accuracy specifications. Tolerances for each required calibration point shall be calculated and recorded on the associated test report form.

F. INSTALLED TESTS: Equipment and System Performance and Operational Testing - Section 01660 specifies testing of the mechanical, electrical, instrumentation and HVAC systems. The Contractor’s Quality Assurance Manager shall coordinate, manage, and supervise the quality assurance program that includes:

1. Testing plan with the sequence for the test work. 2. Calibration program for all instruments and analyzers. 3. Documentation program that records tests results. 4. Performance testing program systems.

Test forms provided shall conform to the requirements of reference forms 17000-A through 17000-K included in Section 01999. Additional or detailed forms shall be developed as necessary to suit complex instrumentation. Usage of terms used on test forms shall comply with ISA S51.1. G. WITNESSING: The Owner reserves the right to observe factory and field instrumentation testing and calibration procedures. The Construction Manager shall be notified prior to testing, as specified herein. 3.02 FACTORY TEST

A. FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST (FAT):

Not applicable.


3.03 PRE-OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING

A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: In general, tests shall be performed in the following order:

B. WIRING TESTS: Electrical power and signal cable ring-out and resistance testing. Conducted in accordance with Sections 16000 and 16030. Wiring tests shall not be conducted until cables have been properly terminated, tagged and inspected.

1. Power and Control: Per Section 16030. 2. Signal: Test form 17000-A.

C. NETWORK AND BUS CABLE INSPECTION AND TESTING:

Standardized networks and buses may be tested by a qualified independent network testing service. The following types of cabling and networks shall be tested by the Systems Integrator:

1. Ethernet system cabling Control and instrumentation bus cabling shall be tested and verified using the standards that apply to the specific cable and bus type as follows:

1. Ethernet Category 5E and Category 6: per TIA/EIA-568B standards

PRE-ACTIVE TESTING: Prior to energizing, cabling shall be inspected and tested to verify the following:

a. Media type and specifications.

b. Physical routing and project specific cable identification tagging.

c. Correct termination installation and connection of conductors to pins at terminations.

d. Record cable run length and compare to the manufacturer or industry standards to verify lengths are within specifications.

e. Locations and values of network termination resistance.

f. Integrity and grounding of cable shields.

g. Values of transient protection (surge) elements.


h. Firmware revision level of network devices available prior to energization.

i. Settings of dip switches and configuration parameters.

ACTIVE SYSTEM TESTING: After the cable or network system has been activated for testing, provide diagnostic monitoring and signal analysis for the bus network system to evaluate network and bus integrity and data transfer quality. The following parameters shall be measured, verified, and recorded:

a. Node addressing.

b. Signal attenuation before and after any repeater device and at the farthest point in the network.

c. Total network trunk voltage and current loading as applicable.

d. Baud rate, message traffic rate, percent bandwidth used, error rate, lost packet count.

e. Firmware revision level of the network devices.

f. Pre-active and active testing shall fall within the specified range of values established by the referenced standards.

g. Correct the functionality of networks and devices connected to the network.

D. PIPING TESTS:

1. Not applicable. E. INSTRUMENT AND COMPONENT INSPECTION: PICS components inspection activities include the following:

1. Compare and validate instrument type and nameplate data with the drawings, specifications, and data sheet.

2. Validate instrument identification tag.

3. Confirm instrument installation conforms to drawings, specifications, and manufacturer’s instructions.

4. Verify proper conductor termination and tagging.

5. Visual check for physical damage, dirt accumulation, and corrosion.


6. Verify including isolation amplifiers, surge protection, and safety barriers are properly installed.

7. Report deficiencies identified within 24 hours of discovery. No instrument or system component shall be tested until all deficiencies are addressed.

F. INSTRUMENTATION CALIBRATION:

1. Instruments and final elements shall be field calibrated in accordance with

the manufacturer's recommended procedures and tested in accordance with the Contractor's test procedure.

2. Individual Component Calibration and Testing shall not commence until

Instruments and Component Inspections are completed and documented to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

3. Analog instrument calibrated at 0, 10, 50, 90, and 100 percent of the specified full scale range. Each signal sensing trip and process sensing switch shall be adjusted to the required setting. Test data recorded on test forms as specified herein

4. Final element alignment tested and adjusted to verify that each final

element operates smoothly over the full range in response to the specified process control signals

5. Test data shall be entered on the applicable test forms at the time of

testing: Alarm trips, control trips, and switches shall be set to initial values specified in Section 17200 Instrument Index at this time. Final elements shall be checked for range, dead-band, and speed of response.

6. Any component that fails to meet the required tolerances shall be repaired

or replaced by the manufacturer. Repeat the specified tests until the component is within tolerance.

7. Install a calibration sticker on each instrument following successful

calibration that indicates the date of calibration, the name of the testing company, and personnel who calibrated the instrument.

8. Test forms as specified in Section 01999.

9. CERTIFIED TEST REPORTS: Field test and inspection activities include verification of instrument parameter setup, verification of instrument zero, and performance at three operating points within the instrument range. Instrument which fail to demonstrate proper performance shall be returned for re-calibration or replaced as agreed depending on the impact to the project as determined by the Construction Manager.


3.04 FUNCTIONAL TESTING

A. PROCESS CONTROL STRATEGY/FUNCTIONAL TESTING:

1. Control Strategy Testing shall not commence until the Loop Testing has been completed and documented to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

2. Control Strategy Testing is performed by the Programmer and consist of installing and debugging the PLC control logic program, verifying the interface points between the PLCs and field devices and equipment, and exercising the control strategies.

3. Provide qualified personnel to immediately correct any deficiencies in the Work that may be encountered during Control Strategy Testing. Failure of the Contractor to provide such personnel in a timely manner may prolong the time allotted to complete Control Strategy Testing.

B. FUNCTIONAL CHECKOUT:

Conducted to verify the operation of discrete and hardwired control devices, refer to Section 01660. Exercise the operable devices and energizing the control circuit. Operate control element, alarm device, and interlocks to verify the specified action occurs. 3.05 OPERATIONAL TESTING

System Acceptance Test (SAT) shall be performed after component and subsystem tests have been completed. The test of the completed system shall be performed in full operation and shall demonstrate that all functional requirements of this specification have been met. SAT shall demonstrate the following:

1. Each component of the system operates correctly with all other components of the system.

2. Hard-wired and software equipment interlocks perform correctly. 3. Process control sequences perform correctly. 4. PLC application program performs monitoring and control functions correctly.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 17110

INSTRUMENT AND CONTROL PANELS PART 1--GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. SCOPE: This section specifies requirements for panels, cabinets and termination cabinets for

instrument and control equipment for the Ashland WTP Process Improvements Project per the Panel Schedule herein.

Provide the instrument, control, and monitoring features indicated on the P&ID and

electrical drawings. Panels shall be arranged to separate control and instrument devices from power wiring. Panel shall be arranged for dedicated field wiring terminations rated for 600 Vac power, control, and instrument signal wiring. Panels shall be fabricated and labeled as a complete assembly in accordance with UL-508A standards.

Transmitters, Analyzers, signal conditioning modules and other equipment or devices as

specified in the other Division 17 sections. Panels that contain programmable logic controllers (PLC) units shall be as indicated in the

Panel Schedule. Specific panel devices are specified herein and in Section 16175 – Miscellaneous Electrical Devices.

PLCs shall comply with the specified products in Division 17. Panels that do not comply

with the specified products and specified logic method, hardwired or PLC logic, shall not be accepted. Cost to retrofit the panel as specified shall be borne by the panel supplier.

B. PANEL SCHEDULE:

Panel No. Spec / P&ID Features * Enclosure Type Panel Title E-Dwgs / Notes

1 PNL-01 17110 1, 3, 5 NEMA-4X Chemical Building Control Panel

Chlorine Building

1* - Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) or Remote I/O devices 2* - Panel mounted Operator Interface Station (OIS) 3* - Hardwired control logic required 4* - Windowed outer door and inner door for displays or devices. 5* - UPS 6* - Fans 7* - Heating 8* - Air Conditioning 9* - Sun/Rain Hood C. PANEL DESIGN:


1. GENERAL: Panel hardware and software is specified in other Division 17

sections. 2. CONTROL POWER DISTRIBUTION: Panel containing 120-volt powered

equipment shall use the din-rail power distribution method with fuses and blown fuse indication. Power is restricted to 120 Vac and 24 Vdc.

3. POWER SUPPLIES: Panel containing direct current powered

instruments or serving as the termination point for transmission loop powered field instruments shall contain direct current power supply system as specified herein.

4. AIR SUPPLIES: Not used.

5. ELECTRICAL CONTROL DEVICES: Pushbuttons, indicating lights,

relays, and similar equipment located in panels specified in this section shall comply with the requirements of Section 16175.

6. UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES: Panel mounted 120 Vac

input and 120 Vac output are specified in Section 17130.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. REFERENCES

This section contains references to the following documents that are part of this section as

specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.

Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect

at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids. If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.


Reference Title

EIA RS-310C Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment

NEMA 250 Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances

UL 94 Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances

UL 508A Industrial Control Panels This Section references other sections with associated work specified therein:

1. Section 01660 specifies Equipment and System Performance and Operational Testing with reference to Contractor’s Quality Assurance Manager that is responsible for startup commissioning of system including mechanical, HVAC, electrical, and instrumentation system.

2. Section 11010 Equipment Control Devices associated with Equipment

Systems. 3. Section 16000 specifies raceways, conductors, and device requirements. 4. Section 17030 Instrumentation and Control System Testing

5. Section 17310 Programmable Logic Controller, Operator Interface

Stations, and software requirements.

6. Section 17900 Control Specifications.

B. LISTED PRODUCTS: Equipment and components shall be UL listed for the purpose per Section 16000 or UL

recognized. The control panels shall have factory applied UL508A labels. C. FACTORY TESTING: Prior to shipment, the manufacturer shall test the functional operation of the control panel as

described in the control description Section 17030. D. SHIPMENT, PROTECTION AND STORAGE: Equipment shipment, protection and storage shall conform to the requirements specified

in Section 01605.


1.03 SUBMITTALS A. GENERAL: Submittals and transmittal procedures for submittals are defined in Section 01300.

Submit In accordance with the procedures set forth in Sections 00710 and 01300 that include drawings, information and technical data for equipment and as required in Section 17000. Submittal information shall be included in one complete submittal.

1. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements.

A check mark shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the Contractor, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. The Construction Manager shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.

2. A marked copy of specification section 17000. 3. A marked copy of specification section 17030. 4. A marked copy of specification section 01660. 5. A marked copy of specification section 16175. 6. A copy of the contract document Process and Instrumentation diagrams

relating to the submitted equipment, with addendum updates that apply to the equipment in this section, marked to show specific changes necessary for the equipment proposed in the submittal. If no changes are required, the drawing or drawings shall be marked "no changes required".

Failure to include copies of the relevant drawings with the submittal shall be cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further review.


7. Marked contract document Control Single Line diagrams related to the submitted equipment.

8. Marked product literature of all the enclosure electrical devices and

components mounted on or within the control panel. 9. List of miscellaneous items, cables, spare and replenishment parts, and

chemicals to be provided. 10. Dimensioned drawings:

a. Exterior panel b. Interior devices c. Door-in-door construction devices, where required.

11. Panel assembly drawings including sections showing clearances between

face and rear mounted equipment. 12. Nameplate engraving schedule:

a. Indicate engraving by line b. Character size c. Nameplate size. d. Panel and equipment tag number and description.

13. Heat load calculations for each cabinet based on the highest ambient

temperature listed in Section 17000 for the area in which the subject panel will be located.

14. Wiring drawings:

a. Schematic diagrams b. Internal wiring diagrams c. Connection diagrams

1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS Refer to Section 17000.


PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 FABRICATION

A. GENERAL: Panels shall be designed for the seismic requirements of Section 17000. Structures,

equipment, and devices shall be braced to prevent damage from specified forces. Equipment panels shall be capable of operation following a disturbance.

Nameplates with tag number and equipment description shall identify face-mounted

instruments. Instruments shall be mounted for access to components and ease of removal. Cutouts for future equipment shall be blanked off with suitable covers. Instrument tag numbers shall be identified on the panel rear.

Face-mounted equipment shall be flush or semi-flush with flat-black escutcheons. Face-

mounted instruments that are more than 6 inches deep, weigh more than 10 pounds, or exert more than a 4 ft-lb moment force on the face of the panel shall be supported underneath at the rear by a 1-inch x 1/8-inch thick steel angle.

Panels less than 72 inches high shall be provided with floor stands or wall mounted to raise

the top of the panel to 72 inches above the floor or work platform. Panels with specified requirements including stainless steel or aluminum mounting

requirements that are indicated on the project drawings or on the project details take precedence over the panel types or panel features indicated herein.

B. PANEL LAYOUT: 1. Provide 20 percent spare contiguous sub-panel area for future expansion. 2. Provide minimum of 10 percent spare terminal blocks, with a minimum of

10 analog, discrete, power.

2.02 COOLING Cooling shall be provided for panels where indicated in the Panel Schedule or if the cabinet

heat load calculations indicate that the interior temperature of the cabinet will exceed 115 degrees-F, under worst case conditions.

Panel air conditioning cooling requirements shall be a cooling system that does not

exchange cabinet interior air with ambient air. The cooling system shall be either a closed glycol loop heat exchange system or a CFC-free refrigeration system as required for the specified equipment and instrument complement and ambient temperature conditions.


2.03 PROTECTION COATING AND FINISH Panels located outdoors or located in corrosive areas shall be bottom coated with waterproof

coatings.

2.04 NAMEPLATES External door-mounted components and the panel description shall be identified with plastic

nameplates. Machine embossed metallic adhesive labels shall identify tag number of instruments inside panels. Nameplates shall be attached to panel surfaces, not to instruments.

The machine engraved laminated black phenolic nameplates with white lettering shall be

provided for panel-mounted equipment. Nameplate engraving shall include the instrument tag number and description in 3/32-inch minimum size lettering.

The machine embossed metallic adhesive labels shall identify tag number of instruments

inside panels. Nameplates shall be attached to panel surfaces, not to instruments. The nameplates shall be attached to the panel exterior with two part epoxy adhesive applied

in accordance with manufacturers instructions on NEMA-4X stainless steel panels. The nameplate wording may be changed without additional cost or time prior to

commencement of engraving. Submit nameplate legend with the panel submittal.

2.05 PANEL FEATURES A. Interconnection Wiring: Panel Interconnecting Wiring:

1. Panel control wiring: single conductor stranded copper NFPA No. 70 Type MTW No. 16 AWG minimum.

2. Panel instrument wiring: Twisted No. 16 AWG shielded pair or tri conductors.

3. Panel power wiring: Conductors specified in Division 16 and meet the

NFPA No. 70 NEC requirements for power including phase, grounded, and grounding conductors.

4. Wiring shall be supported independently of terminations by lacing to

panel support structure or by slotted flame retardant plastic wiring channels.

5. Wiring channels shall comply with UL 94, Type V.

6. Wiring channel fill shall not exceed 50 percent.


B. CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION: Wiring shall be tagged at terminations with machine printed plastic sleeves with

three-part wire numbers for instrument and control panel internal conductors: 1. Part-1: Prefix of the wire number shall be the instrument loop number or

equipment tag number. 2. Part-2: Code letter and wire colors per the following tables. 3. Part-3: Number that identifies individual circuit conductor [Rung Number]

[Terminal Number].

Code 120 Vac Conductor Color

L Power Black

C Control Red

N Neutral White

PG Ground Green

Code V dc Conductor Color

PS 24 Vdc Power Blue

S+ Signal (+) Black

SG Signal Ground White

EG

FV

Equipment Ground

Panel Foreign Voltage

Green

Yellow C. CONDUCTOR INSTALLATION AND PROTECTION:

1. Power and control wiring shall be carried in covered channels separate from low voltage signal circuits. An interior steel barrier shall be provided between AC control devices and the electronic equipment.

2. Terminal blocks shall be strap screw type rated for 600 volts. Each terminal

strip shall have a unique identifying alphanumeric code at one end and a vinyl-marking strip running the entire length of the terminal strip with a unique number for each terminal.


3. Numbers shall be machine printed and 1/8 inch high. Wire connectors shall be locking fork tongue or ring tongue insulated crimp type terminals. No more than two connections shall be made to one terminal. Terminal blocks shall be Buchanan 0621-1, Allen-Bradley 1492-F3175, or equal.

D. FIELD WIRING:

Field wiring shall be connected to separate dedicated terminal blocks in a dedicated

part of the panel where the field cables enter the panel. E. FUSE AND FUSE HOLDERS:

1. Fuses for 120 Vac circuits shall have a minimum of 12,000-amperes

interrupting capacity and blown fuse indicators. 2. Fuses for 24 Vdc circuits shall be fast acting glass tube type rated 1/8 or

1/10 amp for 4-20 mA loops. 3. Fuses for 24 Vdc circuits shall be 1/2 amp for the power supply to individual

instruments. 4. Fuse holders shall be tip-out or draw-out type. 5. Provide Phoenix Contact or equal products.

F. CONTROL POWER:

Panels with single 120 Vac control power source: 1. Provide direct current power supplies, as required for the load. G. PANEL POWER:

Panels with single 120 Vac control power source:

1. Provide a circuit for the panel light, outlet, and cooling load as required.

2. Provide a circuit as input to the control wiring and into the UPS, as required for the load.

H. ACCESSORIES:

1. Panels greater than 12” high x 12” wide shall include GFCI convenience receptacles and utility lights.


2. Receptacles and utility lights shall not be powered by the UPS, where included.

3. Print pocket made of the same material as the panel.

2.06 SURGE PROTECTION

Surge protector shall be as shown on the drawings.

2.07 PANEL GROUNDING

A. Each panel shall be provided with two copper ground bars.

1. One bar (NEC required) shall be bonded to the panel or panel frame or back-plate and to the facility grounding system.

2. Second (signal) ground bar shall be mounted on insulated stand-offs and

shall be bonded to the panel ground bar only at one point. B. Signal circuits, signal cable shields, and low-voltage DC power supply commons

shall be bonded to the signal ground bar.

C. Field analog wiring shields shall only be grounded at the signal ground bar. Test to verify that single ground point at panel signal ground bar.

D. Surge protectors and separately derived AC power supplies shall be bonded to the

frame ground bar. E. Panels exceeding 24-inches width shall contain ground bars shall be 1/4- by 1-inch

copper bars extending the entire length of the panel interior at the bottom of the panel.

2.08 PANEL DRAWING PROTECTION

Provide wiring diagrams in accordance with Section 01300. Provide a panel-wiring diagram

and schematic for each panel in a plastic bag or plastic container to avoid water damage and aging.

2.09 DIRECT-CURRENT POWER SUPPLIES Nominal 24-volt direct-current instrumentation and control power supply:

1. Convection-cooled as specified on the drawings and Section 17130. 2. Line regulation: 0.4 percent for line variations from 105 to 132 volts 3. Load regulation: 0.4 percent for load variations from 0 to full load. 4. Ripple and noise: Not exceed 100 mV peak-to-peak. 5. Hold-up time at maximum load: Not less than 16 milliseconds.


6. Continuous duty from 0 to 50 degrees C at rated load. 7. Output electronically current limited. 8. Over-voltage crowbar shutdown. 9. Output voltage:

a. Rated 28 Volts dc b. Adjustable plus or minus 5 percent c. Set to provide 26.4 volts to the panel direct current bus.

2.10 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM (UPS)

The UPS shall be as specified in Section 17130.

2.11 SPARE PARTS The following spare parts shall be provided:

1. Ten each of each type of light bulb used in the panels. 2. Five each of each type and rating of fuse used in the panels.

2.12 PRODUCT DATA

The following data shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300:

1. Manufacturer's operation and maintenance information as specified in Section 01730. Manual shall include final reviewed submittal and separate record of all final configuration, jumper, and switch settings.

2. Test results as specified in Section 17030-Part 2.

3. Manufacturer's certification for the performance of features of the specified equipment that cannot be readily inspected.

4. Special requirements for delivery of the information such as time, manner,

place, or quantity.

5. Installation and training forms specified in Part 3.

PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL

Floor mounted cabinets shall be mounted and shimmed to precise alignment so doors

operate without binding. Sealant shall be provided for conduit entering the panels.


Floor-mounted panels except in dry control rooms or electrical equipment rooms shall be mounted on 3-1/2-inch minimum height concrete pads or grouted bases as specified. Coating shall be provided for outdoor panels in contact on concrete. Field panels and cabinets shall be mounted in compliance with paragraph 17000-3.01 B.

Terminals and terminal blocks shall be sprayed after all terminations have been completed

with a silicone resin similar to Dow Corning R-4-3117 conformal coating. Provide panels with the Record As-built schematic, connection, and interconnection

diagrams mounted behind Plexiglas holder on the inside of the door.

3.02 OUTDOOR PANEL SHADE COVERS Not applicable.

3.03 PANEL POWER SUPPLY Power supply and conditioning equipment shall be mounted and connected in compliance

with the manufacturer's instructions. Line side disconnect switches shall be provided for power supply and conditioning

equipment. Line and load side overcurrent protection shall be provided for power supply and conditioning equipment in compliance with NFPA 70. Disconnect switches shall comply with Section 16175.

Small power supply and conditioning equipment may be mounted in the panel served.

Larger units shall be mounted adjacent to the equipment served. Where unconditioned power is brought into control panels, it shall be enclosed in metallic raceways within the panel.

Power supply and conditioning equipment larger than 5 kVA load capacity supported from

surfaces other than concrete shall be provided with sound isolators. Final raceway connections shall be a flexible conduit in compliance with Division 16.

3.04 FACTORY TESTING The control panel shall be assembled, interconnected, and functionally tested at the

assembly shop prior to shipment. The Owner shall have the option of witnessing the functional shop test. The Contractor shall notify the Owner at least two (2) weeks in advance prior of the scheduled functional shop test.


3.05 FIELD TESTING Field verify the following for Instrument and Control Panels:

1. Control circuits grounded with one terminal of each load device connected to the grounded conductor.

2. Control contacts installed in the ungrounded side of the circuit.

3. Signal and control wiring installed in separate wireways. 4. Barriers between the power wiring and the signal and control wiring.

5. Connected to the plant grounding system, as specified.

6. Top of wall-mounted panels shall be 72 inches above the floor.

7. Inner door contains a copy of the Record elementary and wiring diagrams. 8. Inner door contains a protected drawing holder.

9. Drawings enclosed in a transparent, protective jacket.

10. Functions as specified.

11. Mounted with stainless steel unistrut, fittings, and fasteners. 12. Tested in accordance with Section 16030 and Section 17030.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 17120

ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEMS PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section specifies requirements for annunciator systems required to support alarm points. Application requirements are specified in the instrument schedule, paragraph 17200-3.03. 1.02 REFERENCES This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

ISA S18.1 Annunciator Sequences and Specifications

IEEE C37.90.1 Surge Withstand Capability (SWC) Tests for Protective Relays and Relay Systems

PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 ANNUNCIATOR PANEL SYSTEMS Not used.


2.02 ALARM STROBE LIGHT Alarm strobe light shall be a high intensity 10,000 hour rated strobe tube enclosed in a sealed enclosure UL rated for Class 1, Division 1, Group D classified areas. Interior lens assembly shall be amber in color. Strobe light assemblies for 24-volt DC service and shall be Federal Signal Model 27XST-24VDC or equal. Strobe light assemblies for 120-volt AC service and shall be Federal Signal Model 27XST-120VAC or equal. 2.03 HORN Not used. 2.04 INTRINSIC SAFETY BARRIER Not used. PART 3--EXECUTION Annunciators shall be tested as specified in Section 01660.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 17130

POWER SUPPLY AND CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section specifies requirements for power supply and conditioning equipment required to support the instrumentation systems specified. 1.02 REFERENCES This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment


UL 1778 Uninterruptible Power Supplies

UL 1012 Power Supplies 1.03 PLANT ELECTRICAL SUPPLY SYSTEM Electric power for instrumentation and communication systems shall be obtained from the power distribution system specified in Division 16. This power is not regulated, wave forms may be distorted, and significant amounts of electrical noise may be present. The Contractor shall provide all necessary power supply and conditioning equipment to provide electrical power of the required voltages and current capacities and of adequate quality to ensure reliable operation of the


instrumentation and communication systems. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall assume that the power supply for instrumentation systems is 120 volts plus or minus 15 percent, 60 hertz plus or minus 3 hertz, 5 percent maximum harmonic distortion. PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL Except for power supply units which form an integral part of an individual piece of equipment, all power supply and conditioning equipment shall comply with UL 1012 and shall be approved by UL, CSA, or FM for the application. All power supply equipment shall be provided in redundant configurations such that failure of a single unit will not disable all or any part of the instrumentation and communication systems. Diode isolation shall be provided for redundant direct current supply units, and the power supply negative output terminal shall be grounded. 2.02 ALTERNATING CURRENT (AC) VOLTAGE REGULATORS Not used. 2.03 NOISE-SUPPRESSION ISOLATION TRANSFORMERS Not used. 2.04 DIRECT-CURRENT POWER SUPPLIES Direct-current supplies for bulk 24-volt nominal instrumentation power shall be convection-cooled inverter switching type. Line regulation shall be 0.1 percent for line variations from 105 to 132 volts, and load regulation shall be 0.5 percent for load variations from 0 to full load. Ripple and noise shall not exceed 150 mV peak-to-peak. Hold-up time at maximum load shall be not less than 20 milliseconds. Efficiency shall be not less than 79 percent. Power factor shall meet the requirements of EN6100-3.2. Power supply shall be suitable for continuous duty from 0 to 50 degrees C at 100 percent rated load. Leakage current shall not exceed 0.75 mA. Output shall be electronically current limited, and overvoltage crowbar shutdown shall be provided. Power supply output voltage shall be rated 24 volts DC with an adjustment range of 21.6 to 28.8 volts DC. Power supply output shall be set to provide 26.4 volts on the panel direct current bus. Power supplies shall be Lambda model JWS100-24/508 with EMI filter Lambda model MAW120222, or approved equal. 2.05 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM (UPS) Uninterruptible power supplies (UPS) shall be online type seamlessly providing emergency power for instrument systems in the event of site power loss. Input and output voltages shall be 120V AC, 1 phase, 60 hertz on NEMA rated plug and receptacles. Sufficient capacity, via gel


batteries, shall be provided to operate at rated load for a minimum of 15 minutes compliant with UL 1778 requirements. A manual maintenance bypass switch shall provide equipment isolation for maintenance actions or internal failure. Control outputs shall be provided, for remote monitoring, to identify UPS failure, maintenance bypass actuation and impending loss of backup power due to battery depletion. Control outputs shall have 120 VAC, 5A rated relay contacts for remote monitoring of fault status. UPS shall be installed in a NEMA 4X rated control panel specified in Section 17110. UPS shall be Liebert UPStation model GXT-700MT-120, or approved equal. 2.06 SURGE PROTECTION Not used. 2.07 PRODUCT DATA The following data shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Catalog data including performance parameters. 2. Wiring diagrams. 3. Applicable operation and maintenance information as specified in

Section 01730. PART 3--EXECUTION Power supply and conditioning equipment shall be mounted and connected in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions unless otherwise specified. Line side disconnect switches shall be provided for power supply and conditioning equipment. Line and load side overcurrent protection shall be provided for power supply and conditioning equipment in compliance with NFPA 70. Disconnect switches shall comply with Section 16175. Small power supply and conditioning equipment may be mounted in the panel served. Larger units shall be mounted adjacent to the equipment served. Where unconditioned power is brought into control panels, it shall be enclosed in metallic raceways within the panel. Power supply and conditioning equipment larger than 5 KVA load capacity supported from surfaces other than concrete shall be provided with sound isolators. Final raceway connections shall be a flexible conduit in compliance with Section 16110.

Power supply and conditioning equipment not designed for exposed mounting shall be housed in panels in compliance with Section 17110.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 17200

INSTRUMENT INDEX


This section specifies the Instrument Index and general requirements applicable to process instrumentation and analyzer systems consisting of process sensors, process indicators, signal conditioning modules, control and monitoring devices, transmitters, and accessories.

The Contractor shall examine the mechanical drawings and specifications to determine

actual locations, sizes, materials and ratings of process connections. Process taps shall be indicated on the pipe shop drawings as specified in Section 15050-2.04.

The work of the following Sections is related to the work of this Section. Other sections,

not referenced below, may also be related to the proper performance of this work. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to perform all the work required by the Contract Documents.

Section 01300: Submittals Section 01605 Shipment, Protection and Storage Section 01660: Equipment and System Performance and Operational Testing Section 01720: Record Drawings and Information Section 01730: Operation and Maintenance Information Section 17000: General Requirements for Instrumentation and Control Section 17030: Process Instrumentation and Control System Testing Section 17110: Control Panels Section 17900: Control Strategies


A. FACTORY TESTS: Where specified in the individual product specification section, factory tests shall be

performed at the place of fabrication and performed on completion of manufacture or assembly. The costs of factory tests shall be included in the contract price.

B. SHIPMENT PROTECTION AND STORAGE: Shipment protection and storage shall be as specified in Section 01605 and

Section 17000, paragraph 3.01(C).


1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. PROCEDURES: Sections 01300 and 17000. B. DESIGN AND APPLICATION: Standard instruments shall be modified as necessary to meet the specified application

requirements. C. INSTALLATION AND TESTING: Installation and testing shall be as specified in Sections 17000 and 17030.

PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 INSTRUMENT INDEX

The Instrument Index, paragraph 17200-3.03, lists instruments required for the project.

Instrument functions specified on this list shall be provided by the Contractor. Additional instrumentation devices such as process taps, seals, and other items required

completing the instrument loops due to characteristics of the equipment selected by the Contractor and not specified in the instrument index or on the contract drawings shall be provided at no additional cost to provide a complete working system. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Materials, equipment, and installation shall be tested and inspected in accordance with the requirements of Sections 17000 and 17030. 3.02 INSTRUMENT INDEX The following is an index of the instrumentation equipment, analyzers, and devices.

1. TAG NUMBER: Tag Number appears as a heading (PREFIX and NUMBER) and consists of a two, three or four letter prefix (indicating the instrument function) followed by a number identifying the process loop with which the instrument is associated. The Tag Number provides a means of identification for the instrument or device.


2. DESCRIPTION: Provides the functional description of the instrument or device

3. P&ID NUMBER: Lists the Process and Instrumentation Diagram on which the instrument or device appears.

4. SPECIFICATION: Provides the specification reference and INSTRUSPEC designation for the listed instrument or device.

5. SIZE: Provides application data relative to sizing the instrument; flow tube diameter, probe length, associated pipe sizes, etc.

6. RANGE: Provides the calibrated instrument range for each application.

7. SETPOINT: Provides the final calibrated controller or switch setpoint.

8. NOTES: Shows features, interlocks, and other information applicable to the listed instrument or device.

Instrument Index begins on next page.


3.02 INSTRUMENT INDEX

INSTRUMENT INDEX

Tag No. Description P&ID Spec Size Range Setpoint or PV-range

Notes

PNL-01 Chemical Building Control Panel

P101, P102

17000, 17110, 17130, 17315

60” x 38” x 12”

N/A N/A NEMA 4X

wall mounted

LE-01 / LIT-01

NaOCL feed tank 1 level sensor and transmitter

P101 17212-LUT N/A 1-33 FT. Field-

specified

LE-01 mounted on tank TK-01

flange. LIT-01

mounted on PNL-01 back

panel.

LYY-01 Tank 1 level signal isolator

P101 17271-YCC N/A 1:1 4-20mA Installed on

PNL-01 back panel

LI-01 NaOCL feed tank 1 level indicator

P101 17275-ISS 1/8 DIN -1999

to +1999

Field-specified

LI-01 mounted on

PNL-01 door front.

LSHH-01 Tank 1 containment area spill alarm float switch

P101 17216-LFS N/A N/A Field-

specified

Install float switch as close as

practical to containment area floor.

LE-01 / LIT-02

NaOCL feed tank 2 level sensor and transmitter

P101 17212-LUT N/A 1-33 FT. Field-

specified

LE-02 mounted on tank TK-02

flange. LIT-02

mounted on PNL-01 back

panel.



PNL-01 back panel

LI-02 NaOCL feed tank 2 level indicator

P101 17275-ISS 1/8 DIN -9999

to +9999

Field-specified

LI-02 mounted on

PNL-01 door front.

LSHH-02 Tank 2 containment area spill alarm float switch

P101 17216-LFS N/A N/A Field-

specified

Install float switch as close as

practical to containment area floor.


INSTRUMENT INDEX

Tag No. Description P&ID Spec Size Range Setpoint or PV-range

Notes

LAHH-09 Chemical tank containment area spill alarm strobe light

P101 17120-2.02 N/A N/A “ON” when energized

NEMA 4X mounted

outside on wall near

entry door.

PCL-01 NaOCL chemical feed pump 1

P102 11382 220 rpm 135 VA

2200:1 0-20 gph NEMA 4X


P102 11382 220 rpm 135 VA

2200:1 0-20 gph NEMA 4X


P102 11382 220 rpm 135 VA

2200:1 0-20 gph NEMA 4X

FI-04 / FSL-04 Clearwell chemical feed flow indicator with low flow switch

P102 17211-FVA 200mm 0-20 gph

Initial setting: 1 gph falling

Final setting:

Field-specified

Low flow switch is

integral to rotometer

PI-04 / PX-04 Clearwell chemical feed pressure indicator with diaphragm seal

P102 17211-PG, 17211-2.04

4 ½” dia gauge

¼” NPT 0-60 psi N/A

FI-05 / FSL-05 RM chemical feed flow indicator with low flow switch

P102 17211-FVA 200 mm 0-20 gph

Initial setting: 1 gph falling

Final setting:

Field-specified

Low flow switch is

integral to rotometer

PI-05 / PX-04 RM chemical feed pressure indicator with diaphragm seal

P102 17211-PG, 17211-2.04

4 ½” dia gauge

¼” NPT 0-60 psi N/A

FE-10 / FIT-10 Plant Flow Meter 1, magnetic flow meter

P103 17212-FM 24” Dia. 0.851-5.0 fps velocity

0-20 MGD

Installed in Chemical

Building in existing pipeline

LYY-10 Plant Flow Meter 1 signal isolator


PNL-01 back panel

FE-11 / FIT-11 Plant Flow Meter 2, transit time ultrasonic

P103 17212-FUS N/A 0.851-5.0 fps velocity

0-20 MGD

Installed in Chemical

Building on existing pipeline



PNL-01 back panel

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 17211

PROCESS TAPS AND PRIMARY ELEMENTS

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section specifies requirements for instrumentation elements that quantitatively convert the measured variable energy into a form suitable for measurement and process measurement accessories. Application requirements are specified in Section 17200.

A. SCOPE: This section specifies requirements for instrumentation elements which form a part of the process control systems specified in Section 17200. Application requirements are specified in the instrument schedule, paragraph 17200-3.03.

B. OPERATING REQUIREMENTS: The devices specified in this section quantitatively convert the measured variable energy into a form suitable for measurement and process measurement accessories. 1.02 REFERENCES

References are listed in Section 17000. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be provided as specified in paragraph 17200-1.03. PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 INSTRUMENTATION SPECIFICATION SHEETS (INSTRUSPEC) General requirements for primary elements specified in this section are listed on the INSTRUSPEC sheets referenced in paragraph 17200-3.03.


2.02 VALVES A. ISOLATION VALVES: Valves shall be full port ball valves with ASTM A276, Type 316 stainless steel trim and body and with Teflon seats and packing. Valves shall be Parker CPI, Whitey, Hoke, or approved equal. B. GAGE VALVES: Gage valves shall be machined from ASTM A276 bar stock and shall be provided with 1/2-inch NPT connections and integral bleed valve. Valves shall be Anderson, Greenwood & Company M9530, Hoke 6801L8Y, or approved equal. C. ROOT VALVES: Root valves shall be ASTM A276, Type 316 stainless steel bar stock with 1/2-inch NPT male process connection and three 1/2-inch NPT female instrument connections. One instrument connection shall be provided with an ASTM A276, Type 316 stainless steel bleed valve. ASTM A276, Type 316 stainless steel plugs shall be provided for unused ports.

Lagging type units shall be provided for insulated vessels and pipes. Root valve manufactures: Anderson, Greenwood & Company M5 AVS-44, Hoke 6802L8Y,

or approved equal. D. MANIFOLDS: Manifolds shall be three-valve bar-stock type. Manifold body shall be machined from ASTM Type 316 stainless steel bar stock. Valves shall be globe configuration with 316 stainless steel ball seats and Teflon stem packing.

Manifolds shall be designed for direct mounting to differential pressure transmitters in place of the flanges normally furnished. Fabricated manifolds or manifolds employing needle or soft seat valves are not acceptable. Purge taps, 1/8-inch NPT shall be furnished on manifolds where water purge is specified.

Manifold manufacturers: Anderson Greenwood M4TVS, Hoke 8123F8Y, or approved equal.


2.03 TUBING AND TUBING FITTINGS

A. STAINLESS STEEL TUBING:

Tubing shall be seamless annealed ASTM A269 Type 316 stainless steel 1/2-inch and 3/8-inch tubing shall have a wall thickness of 0.035 inches and 1/4-inch tubing shall have a wall thickness of 0.028 inches.

B. PLASTIC TUBING: Tubing shall be extruded from high molecular weight, low density polyethylene compound. Tubing shall be 1/4-inch outside diameter and shall be black, unless otherwise specified or shown. Tubing shall meet the standard ASTM #D-1693 test for stress cracking of base materials. Wall thickness shall be 0.040 inches plus or minus 0.005 inches. Maximum working pressure shall be 80 psig, at 100 degrees F, or higher.

Tubing manufacturers: Dekoron "P", Parker Hannifin "E", or approved equal.

C. TUBING FITTINGS: Tubing fittings shall be Type 316 stainless steel and shall be the double-ferrule swage type. Flare, ball sleeve compression or single-ferrule swage types are not acceptable.

Fitting manufactures: Crawford "Swagelok", Hoke "Gyrolok", or approved equal. 2.04 CHEMICAL SEALS A. DIAPHRAGM: Seal shall be the diaphragm type with flushing connection, Type 316 stainless steel body and Type 316L diaphragm unless otherwise specified.

Diaphragm seal manufactures: Mansfield and Green Type SG, Ashcroft Type 101, or approved equal. B. ANNULAR: Seal shall be the in-line full stream captive sensing liquid type. Metallic wetted parts shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Flexible cylinder shall be Buna-N unless otherwise specified. Seals shall be rated 200 psig with not more than 5-inch water column (WC) hysteresis.

Annular seal manufactures: Ronningen-Petter Iso-Ring, Red Valve series 40, or approved equal.


C. FILL FLUID: Chemical seals and associated instruments shall be factory filled as follows: Instrument side of seal, capillary tubing, and instrument shall be evacuated to an absolute pressure of 1.0 Torr or less; filled; and sealed. Provide silicone oil fill fluid, unless otherwise recommended by the seal manufacture.

Chemical seal manufacture: Dow Corning DC200, Syltherm 800, or approved equal.

2.05 BUSHINGS AND THERMOWELLS Bushings or thermowells shall comply with SAMA PMC17-10. Temperature taps shall be 1/2-inch NPT, and lagging extensions shall be provided on insulated vessels or pipes. Thermowells and bushings shall be machined from Type 316 stainless steel bar stock unless otherwise specified. 2.06 PURGE ASSEMBLIES

A. Not used. 2.07 PRODUCT DATA A. GENERAL:

In accordance with the requirements of this section and Section 17000, drawings, information, and technical data for all equipment shall be provided. All required product data for this section shall be included in one complete package. B. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: The following product data shall be provided:

1. Flow calculation for each differential-type flow element. 2. Record documentation shall include the data sheets specified in this

section. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. GENERAL: General requirements for the installation of primary elements specified in this section are listed on INSTRUSPEC sheets in Section 17200.


B. PROCESS CONNECTIONS:

1. GENERAL: Unless otherwise specified, process taps shall comply with Section 15050. Process connections shall be arranged such that instruments may be readily removed for maintenance without disruption of process units or draining of large tanks or vessels. Unions or flange connections shall be provided as necessary to permit removal without rotating equipment.

Where process taps are not readily accessible from instrument locations, an isolation

valve shall be provided at the instrument. Isolation valves shall also be provided for each instrument where multiple instruments are connected to one process tap. Tubing between the process connection and instruments shall be 1/2-inch stainless steel as specified herein.

2. SAFETY INSTRUMENTS: No valves shall be installed at pressure taps for safety instruments. Safety instruments shall not be connected to the same process tap as instruments used for control, indication, or recording except when annular chemical seals are used.

3. ROOT VALVES: Root valves shall be provided at all process taps, except as follows:

a. Temperature taps, where valves are unnecessary.

b. Pump discharge pressure taps where no instrument is permanently installed. Isolation valves shall be provided.

c. Process taps for safety instruments.

d. Where gauge valves are provided.

e. Where chemical seals are used.

4. GAUGE VALVES: Gauge valves shall be provided for each pressure gauge tap except where chemical seals are used. C. TUBING: Tubing shall be installed on supports spaced not more than 3 feet apart and shall run parallel of perpendicular to walls structural members, or intersections of vertical planes and the ceiling. Unless otherwise shown, tubing shall follow building surfaces closely or shall be carried in trays or conduit.

Tubing shall not be supported from piping or equipment except at process taps or connections to the device served. Tubes supported directly on concrete surfaces shall be spaced at least 1/8 inch from the concrete. Tubing support shall be one-hole malleable iron clamps with clamp backs as required. Bends shall be formed to uniform radii without flattening.


Ends of tubing shall be square-cut and deburred before installation in fittings. Fittings shall be used for splices, connections, and turns near final connections. Bulkhead fittings shall be used when tubing enters a panel. D, ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS: Final connections between rigid raceway systems and instruments shall be made with jacketed flexible conduit with a maximum length of 3 feet. 3.02 TESTING Refer to Section 17030 – Process Instrumentation and Control System testing. 3.03 INSTRUSPEC SHEETS INSTRUSPEC sheets for the primary elements listed in the following Table A are included in this paragraph 17211-3.03:

Table A, List of Analog Instruments--Primary Elements

INSTRUSPEC symbol Instrument description Instrument function

FVA Variable area flow meter Flow measurement

PG Pressure gage Pressure measurement

INTRUSPEC sheets begin on next page.


3.03 INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION SHEET--INSTRUSPEC Instrument Identification: FVA Instrument Function: Flow measurement Instrument Description: Variable area flow meter Power Supply: N/A Signal Input: Process Signal Output: Contacts rating shall be in accordance with Section

17216-2.01. Process Connection: Flange, ANSI B16.5, Class 150, raised face, unless

otherwise specified Product Data: Flowmeter shall be straight-through construction with a

borosilicate glass metering tube. Float shall be 316 stainless steel unless otherwise noted. 200-mm minimum length detachable aluminum scale shall be engraved in direct reading units.

Maximum working pressure shall be at least 150% of

maximum operating pressure at 200 deg. F. Accuracy shall be plus or minus 2.0 % of scale or better above 10% of scale.

When specified in paragraph 17200-3.03, flowmeter shall

be equipped with a hermetically sealed reed switch with a biasing magnet.

Switch shall be sealed in a shock absorbing housing and

shall be actuated by a permanent magnet embedded in the metering float. Switch shall be adjustable over the entire range of the meter.

Execution: Installation: Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions,

paragraph 17200-3.01, and the specified functional requirements.

Test: In accordance with paragraph 17200-3.02.


Application/ Calibration: Application, calibration, and set points shall be as specified

in paragraph 17200-3.03. Variable area flow meter manufacturers: 1. Brooks Instruments GT 1000 2. ABB VA Master 3. or approved equal.


3.03 INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION SHEET--INSTRUSPEC Instrument Identification: PG Instrument Function: Pressure measurement Instrument Description: Pressure gage Power Supply: N/A Signal Input: N/A Signal Output: N/A Process Connection: 1/4-inch male NPT Product Requirements: Pressure gages shall be 4-1/2-inch premium grade, glycerin

filled units with bourdon tube element, 270-degree milled stainless steel movement, phenolic case, and shatterproof glass window. Accuracy shall be 1 percent of span or better. All exposed metal parts shall be stainless steel.

Pressure gage manufactures:

1. Ashcroft Duraguage Figure 1279 2. Ametek 1981L 3. or approved equal.

Execution: Installation: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the

recommendations of API RP551 to the specified requirements.

Root valves shall be provided at all process pressure taps

except taps made for safety instruments. Gage valves shall be provided at the instrument where the instrument is not within sight of the root valve or where two or more instruments are connected to a single tap.

Safety instruments shall not be connected to the same process

tap as instruments used for control, indication, or recording. Unless otherwise specified, pressure instruments shall be located as close as practical to the process tap but shall be positioned to permit observation and maintenance. Pressure gages may be supported from the process tap if this location permits observation from the floor or a permanent work


platform. Pressure instruments shall be installed in such a manner that blowout discs are not obstructed.

Application/Calibration: Application, calibration, and set points shall be as specified in

paragraph 17200-3.03.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 17212

TRANSMITTERS

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section specifies requirements for transmitters. Application requirements are specified in the Instrument Index - Section 17200. 1.02 REFERENCES References shall be as specified in Section 17000. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be provided as specified in Section 17000. PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL Unless otherwise specified, measuring elements and transmitters shall comply with the following requirements: 1. Measured parameter output indicators complying with paragraph 17212-2.02 shall

be provided as shown on the drawings or specified elsewhere. Indicators, whether integral or separate, shall be calibrated in process units, and engraved on the indicator scale plate.

2. The two-wire type transmitters shall have operating power derived from the signal

transmission circuit. 3. Transmitters shall meet specified performance requirements with load variations

within the range of 0 to 600 with the power supply at a nominal 24 volts DC with the default range of 0 to 100% corresponding to 4 to 20 maDC.

4. Transmitter output shall increase with increasing measurement. 5. Time constant shall be adjustable from 0.5 to 5.0 seconds for transmitters used for

flow or pressure measurement and level transmitters used for flow measurement.


6. Transmitter output shall be galvanically isolated via electro-mechanical or optical technology.

7. Transmitter enclosures shall be rated NEMA 250, Type 4, unless otherwise

specified. 2.02 PROCESS PARAMETER OUTPUT INDICATOR

Provide digital LED or LCD indicators that are integral to the instrument housing. Displays shall be scaled in engineering units, over the calibrated range of the instrument. 2.03 INTRINSIC SAFETY BARRIERS Not used. 2.04 INSTRUMENTATION SPECIFICATION SHEETS (INSTRUSPEC) General requirements for instruments specified in this section are listed on INSTRUSPEC sheets in paragraph 17212-3.03.

Application requirements are specified in the Instrument Index, paragraph 17200-3.03, and/or on the drawings.

2.05 SIGNAL CURRENT ISOLATOR As specified in Section 17271. 2.06 PRODUCT DATA The following data shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Data specified in Section 17000-Part 2. 2. Test results. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION Installation requirements are specified in Section 17000-Part 3. 3.02 TESTING Testing requirements are specified in Section 01660.


3.03 INSTRUSPEC SHEETS INSTRUSPEC sheets for the transmitters listed in the following Table A are included in this paragraph 17212-3.03:

Table A: List of Analog Instruments--Transmitters

INSTRUSPEC

Symbol Instrument description Instrument function

LUT Ultrasonic level transmitter Level measurement

FUS Transit Time Ultrasonic flow transmitter Flow measurement

FM Magnetic flow transmitter Flow measurement



3.03 INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION SHEET--INSTRUSPEC Instrument Identification: LUT Instrument Function: Level measurement Instrument Description: Ultrasonic level transmitter Power Supply: 12-30 volts DC Signal Input N/A Signal Output: As specified in paragraph 17212-2.01 Process Connection: N/A Product Requirements Signal Converter/Transmitter: 1. Indicator: 4-digit LCD indicator with approx.

0.50 inch display, scaled in engineering units. 2. Accuracy: 0.25% of level range. 3. Analog Outputs: Two 4-20 mA into a minimum of

600Ω. 4. Discrete Programmable Outputs: Two Form C, four

Form A dry contacts rated 5A at 250 VAC, non-inductive.

5. Enclosure: NEMA 4X wall or back panel mounting 6. Accessories: Provide all necessary mounting

hardware and cable glands as required. Provide handheld infrared programming device, or programming software and cable as required.

7. Acceptable Manufacturer: a. Milltronics Hydroranger 200. b. Approved equal. Sensor: 1. Measuring range: 1 to 33 ft. 2. Beam Angle: 6° 3. Pressure limit: 120 psi 4. Temperature limits: -40 to +200°F. 5. Wetted Materials: PVDF 6. Cable: #16 to #20 TSP w/PVC jacket 7. Max. Sensor/Transmitter Separation: 1200 ft. 8. Rating: Class I, Div. 1, Groups A, B, C & D.


Instrument Identification: LUT (continued) Execution: Installation: Transducer shall be rigidly mounted inside chemical

storage tank on top flange. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the Engineer’s installation detail.

Calibration: System shall be calibrated in accordance with paragraph

17200-3.02.


3.03 INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION SHEET--INSTRUSPEC Instrument Identification: FUS Instrument Function: Flow measurement Instrument Description: Transit time ultrasonic Power Supply: 120 Vac, 60 Hz nominal Signal Input: Process Signal Output: Analog signal as specified in paragraph 17212-2.01 and

scaled pulse frequency. Output signal shall be 4-20 mA and three Form-C relays; 120VAC, maximum, 2A maximum for status and alarms fault alarms

Process Connection: Pipe mounting strap-on assembly Product Data: General: The flow meter shall be a fixed installation two channel

ultrasonic type operating as a dual path with sum, total, average or difference between readings. The flow meter shall be microprocessor based, utilizing the transit time flow measuring technique employing a coded burst shear wave transmission in conjunction with digital signal processing and cross correlation techniques. The measurement techniques shall measure real-time swirl and cross flow exhibited by a live Reynolds number factor. A 20-point linearization shall be included in flow meter electronics. The transit time flow meter shall not require a physical zero flow calibration of transducers or electronics. The meter shall be wet flow calibrated against a primary standard with an accuracy of ± 0.25%, or better, traceable to the U.S. National Bureau of Standards. Comparisons shall be made at or near the minimum flow rating, at mid-range and at or near the maximum rating. Two certified copies of the calibration results shall be furnished. Flow meter accuracy shall be ± 1% of scale, or better and repeatability shall be ± 0.2% of flow.


Instrument Identification: FUS (continued) Transducers: The primary element shall consist of two pairs of electro-

acoustic transducers. The transducers shall be mounted to the pipe by means of a strap-on assembly. The transducers shall be totally non-intrusive. The transducers shall be remote mounted from the electronics and shall have a temperature range of –4 to 122 degrees F.

Converter/ Transmitter: The converter/transmitter electronics shall be housed in a

NEMA 4X fiberglass enclosure with a viewing window. The flow converter/transmitter shall operate on 120 Vac, 60-hertz power. The flow meter shall have the ability to display, log and record volumetric flow rate, flow velocity, and totalized flow in both forward and reverse directions. The flow meter shall have internal memory for data logging of flow data and diagnostic values including signal strength, and speed of sound. These data shall be available for downloading to a PC via dedicated flow meter software. Programming shall be conducted via 39-key tactile feedback membrane keypad on the meter, or software via a PC. The meter shall have a high resolution programmable 64 x 128 pixel LCD dual local display with the capability to display graphical or tabular flow data, signal data, and complete diagnostics such as liquid sound speed, signal strength - upstream and downstream, signal quality - upstream and downstream, and signal location in the receiving window. Four real-time tabular parameters or dual graphical parameters may be viewed simultaneously on the flow meter display to provide self and application diagnostics to isolate any fault conditions or abnormal process conditions.

Execution: Installation: In accordance with manufacturer's instructions, paragraph

17200-3.01, and the specified functional requirements. The Contractor shall ensure that the transducers are

installed in strict accordance with the meter manufacturer's instructions.


Instrument Identification: FUS (continued) When the transmitter is mounted outdoors, a cabinet heater

and a rain/sun hood, in accordance with paragraph 17000-3.01 B.1. shall be provided.

Cable: The instrument manufacturer shall provide the signal cable

between the primary elements and the converter/transmitter. A sufficient length of cable shall be provided for installation of a continuous run between the primary elements and the converter/transmitter.

Test: In accordance with paragraph 17200-3.02. Application/ Calibration: Application, calibration, and set points shall be as specified

in paragraph 17200-3.03. Approved Manufacturers: Panametrics model DF868, or approved equal.


3.03 INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION SHEET--INSTRUSPEC Instrument Identification: FM Instrument Function: Flow measurement Instrument Description: Magnetic flow metering system Power Supply: 120 volts AC Signal Input: Process Signal Output: Analog signal as specified in paragraph 17212-2.01 and

scaled pulse frequency. Output signal shall be 4-20 mA. Process Connection: Flange, ANSI B16.5, Class 150, raised face. Product Requirements: General: Magnetic flow meter shall be provided as a system

consisting of a flow tube and separate converter/ transmitter complete with interconnecting cables. Converter/transmitter shall be suitable for full-scale flow rates from 0.851 to 5.0 feet per second. System error shall not exceed 2 percent over entire range.

Flow tubes located in lined or non-conductive pipelines

shall be provided with grounding spools or swages fabricated from ASTM A312, Type 316 stainless steel. Grounding spools or swages inside diameter shall be 1/16 inch smaller than flow tube inside diameter.

Where pipe run size is different from specified flow tube

size, uniformly diverging swages with a total angle between walls not exceeding 15 degrees shall be provided.

Excitation power requirements shall not exceed 100 volt-

amperes. Magnetic flow tube metering system shall be Krohne Optiflux 4000, or approved equal.


Instrument Identification: FM (continued) Flow Tube: Flow tubes shall be primer coated SAE 1008 steel full-

body flanged construction with 304 stainless steel measuring tube and Hastelloy C electrodes. Liner shall be Teflon.

Transmitter: The transmitter shall contain all electronics associated

with the magnetic flow meter system. Enclosures shall be rated NEMA 4X, have compartment for power, field connections and calibration adjustments separate from digital circuitry. Transmitter shall contain means to calibrate the metering system without use of external calibration units. The transmitter shall contain self-diagnostics and shall be interchangeable with other units of the same type without special re-calibration. Transmitter shall include an integral LCD flow indication calibrated in process units.

Adjustable dampening shall be provided. Provision for

accepting an external contact to force signal output to zero shall be provided. Where pulse frequency output is specified, pulse frequency shall cut out at flows below 2 percent of maximum range. Transmitter assembly shall be Krohne IFC 300W, or approved equal.

Execution: Installation: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,

API RP550, and the specified functional requirements. Spool piece shall be bolted to end of the flow tube and

the entire assembly slid into the pipe run as a unit. Flange bolts shall be tightened to tube manufacturer's specified torque.


Instrument Identification: FM (continued) Cable: The signal cable between the primary element and

transmitter shall be provided by the system manufacturer. A sufficient length of cable shall be provided for installation of a continuous run between the primary element and the transmitter.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 17216

PROCESS SWITCHES

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section specifies requirements for process activated switches. Application requirements are specified in Section 17200.

A. SCOPE: This section specifies requirements for instrumentation elements which form a part of the process control systems specified in Section 17200. Application requirements are specified in the instrument schedule, paragraph 17200-3.03.

B. OPERATING REQUIREMENTS:

The devices specified in this section quantitatively convert the measured variable energy into a form suitable for measurement and process measurement accessories. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. MANUFACTURER: Equipment furnished under this section shall be the products of firms regularly engaged in the design and manufacture of such equipment for a minimum of five years.

B. INSTALLER: Installation, calibration and testing of equipment furnished under this section shall be performed by qualified, skilled, certified technicians who are regularly engaged in such activities involving systems of similar complexity, and who possess all licenses and certificates required to perform such work. See Paragraph 17030-1.03.B.2 for additional information.

C. REFERENCES: References are listed in Section 17000. They are a part of this section as specified and modified.


1.03 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS Equipment provided under this section shall be suitable for operation under ambient conditions described in Section 01800. 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. GENERAL: In accordance with the procedures set forth in Section 01300, drawings, information and technical data for all equipment as required in Section 17000 and this section shall be submitted. All required information for this section shall be included in one complete separate submittal.

B. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION: In addition to the requirements of Section 17000, the following information shall be submitted: Data sheets for all instruments and accessories to be provided. Data sheets shall be in accordance with ISA 20. All applicable entries on the data sheet shall be completed. PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL Unless otherwise specified or indicated, switches shall comply with the following requirements: 1. Contact outputs used for alarm actuation shall be ordinarily closed and shall

open to initiate the alarm. 2. Contact outputs used to control equipment shall be ordinarily open and shall

close to start the equipment. 3. Contacts monitored by solid state equipment such as programmable

controllers or annunciators shall be hermetically sealed and designed for switching currents from 20 to 100 mA at 24 volts DC or currents from 2 to 10A at 250 volts AC as shown on the drawings.

4. Contacts monitored by electromagnetic devices such as mechanical relays

shall be rated NEMA ICS 2, designation B300.


5. Double barriers shall be provided between switch elements and process fluids such that failure of one barrier will not permit process fluids into electrical enclosures.

6. Switch electrical enclosures shall be rated NEMA 250, Type 4 minimum. 7. Contacts in Class I, Division 1 areas and monitored by solid-state circuits

shall be made safe by suitable intrinsic safety barriers as specified in paragraph 17120-2.04.

8. Switch range shall be selected so that the specified set point is at least

30 percent, but not more than 70 percent of the span between the upper range limit and the lower range limit.

2.02 INSTRUMENTATION SPECIFICATION SHEETS (INSTRUSPEC) Application requirements are specified in the instrument index, paragraph 17200-3.03, and/or on the drawings. 2.03 PRODUCT DATA The following data shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Data specified in paragraph 17000-2.02. 2. Test results as specified in Section 17030. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION Installation requirements are specified in paragraph 17200-3.01. 3.02 TESTING Testing requirements are specified in section 17030. 3.03 INSTRUSPEC SHEETS INSTRUSPEC sheets for the switches listed in the following Table A are included in this paragraph 17216-3.03:


Table A, List of Instruments--Switches

INSTRUSPEC Symbol

Instrument description Instrument function

LFS Float Switch, free-floating Level measurement



3.03 INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION SHEET--INSTRUSPEC Instrument Identification: LFS Instrument Function: Level measurement Instrument Description: Float switch, free-floating Power Supply: N/A Signal Input: Process Signal Output: Contact, in accordance with paragraph 2.01 of this section. Process Connection: N/A Product Data: Switch shall be free-floating type, suspended from an oil

resistant non-wicking waterproof cable. The cable shall be designed to support the weight of the float without additional strain relief and shall be permanently sealed where it enters the float body.

The conductors shall be a minimum size of 14AWG. The

switch shall be a single pole mercury type rated at not less than 10 amps at 120 Vac. The float switch shall be epoxy encapsulated and have Teflon coated stainless steel corrosion and impact resistant shell.

Execution: Installation: Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions,

paragraph 17200-3.01, and the specified functional requirements.

Test: In accordance with paragraph 17200-3.02. Application/ Calibration: Application, calibration and set points shall be as specified

in paragraph 17200-3.03. Approved Manufacturers: Anchor Scientific Roto*Float-SST, or approved equal.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 17271

SIGNAL CONDITIONING MODULES

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section specifies requirements for panel mounted signal conditioning modules. 1.02 REFERENCES This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

EIA RS-310C Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be provided as specified in paragraph 17200-1.03. PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL Unless otherwise specified, signal conditioning modules shall comply with the following requirements: 1. Analog signal inputs shall be 4 to 20 milliamperes DC into 600 ohms.


2. Analog signal outputs shall be 4 to 20 milliamperes DC into 600 ohms. 3. Power supply shall be 24 volts DC plus or minus 10 percent. Power supply

effect shall not exceed 0.005 percent per 1.0 percent change. 4. Modules shall be self contained din rail mounted units. 5. Modules shall be rated for continuous operation in an ambient temperature

of 0 to 80 degrees C. Ambient temperature effect shall not exceed plus or minus 0.01 percent per degree C within that range.

6. Span and zero adjustments shall be made by front accessible multi-turn

potentiometers. 7. Electronic trip modules shall be provided with LED indicators for relay

status. 8. Modules shall withstand 30 volts per meter radio frequency radiation

between 200 and 500 MHz with not more than 0.25 percent calibration effect. Modules shall also be provided with traps on the terminals to shunt conducted radio frequency interference to ground.

9. Signal and power supply terminals shall be galvanically isolated. All modules specified in this section shall be the product of a single manufacturer and shall be of matching construction. 2.02 INSTRUMENTATION SPECIFICATION (INSTRUSPEC) SHEETS General requirements for instruments specified in this section are listed on INSTRUSPEC sheets in paragraph 17271-3.03. Application requirements are specified in the instrument schedule, paragraph 17200-3.03, and/or on the drawings. 2.03 PRODUCT DATA The following data shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Data specified in paragraph 17000-2.02. 2. Test results as specified in paragraph 17200-3.02 B.


PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION Signal conditioning modules shall be installed in panels specified in Section 17110. 3.02 TESTING Testing requirements are specified in paragraph 17200-3.02. 3.03 INSTRUSPEC SHEETS The following INSTRUSPEC sheets are included in this section:


YCC Current to current isolating amplifier

Function module

INSTRUSPEC sheets begin on next page.


3.03 INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION SHEET--INSTRUSPEC Instrument Identification: YCC Instrument Function: Function module Instrument Description: Current to current isolation Power Supply: 24 volts DC, loop powered Signal Input: 4 to 20 milliamperes, into 50 ohms, isolated Signal Output: 4 to 20 milliamperes into 600 ohms, isolated Process Connection: N/A Product Requirements: Load presented to input signal shall not exceed 50 ohms.

Accuracy shall be 0.1 percent of span or better, time constant 50 milliseconds or less, temperature drift 0.015 percent of span per degree C or less over a range of 0 to 70 degrees C. Power supply effect shall not exceed 0.05 percent of span with power supplies provided. Module shall be Moore Industries model SIX, or approved equal.

Execution: Installation: Mount on DIN rail and connect in panels specified in Section

17110 in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to the specified functional requirements.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 17275

MISCELLANEOUS PANEL INSTRUMENTS

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section specifies requirements for miscellaneous panel mounted instruments used to provide process control and interface between the operator and the process. 1.02 REFERENCES References are listed in Section 17000. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be provided as specified in paragraph 17200-1.03. PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION (INSTRUSPEC) SHEETS General requirements for instruments specified in this section are listed on INSTRUSPEC sheets in paragraph 17275-3.03. Application requirements are specified in the instrument schedule, paragraph 17200-3.03, and/or on the drawings. 2.02 PRODUCT DATA The following data shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300: 1. Data specified in paragraph 17000-2.02. 2. Test results as specified in paragraph 17200-3.02 B.


PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION Instruments shall be installed on panels specified in Section 17110. 3.02 TESTING Testing requirements are specified in paragraph 17200-3.02. 3.03 INSTRUSPEC SHEETS The following INSTRUSPEC sheets are included in this section:


ISS Solid state indicator Miscellaneous panel instrument



3.03 INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATION SHEET--INSTRUSPEC Instrument Identification: ISS Instrument Type: Miscellaneous panel instrument Instrument Description: Solid state indicator Power Supply: 120 volts AC Signal Input: 4 to 20 mA into 600 ohms minimum Signal Output: N/A Process Connection: N/A Product Requirements: Indicator shall be a 3 ½ digit, 7 segment, scalable red LED

display. Resolution shall be plus or minus 0.25 percent of span, and calibrated accuracy shall be plus or minus 1.0 percent of span or better. Display shall have a backlit segment for process units’ indication. Provide an engineering units labeling kit with indicator. Indicators bezel shall rated NEMA 4X suitable for self supported panel mounting. Indicator shall be Red Lion Model PAXLCL00, or approved equal.

Execution: Installation: Mount and connect in panels specified in Section 17110 in

accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 17310

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (PLC) PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. SCOPE: This section specifies requirements for a solid-state programmable logic controller (PLC) designed to execute discrete and continuous control logic with high reliability in industrial applications. PLC system components are referenced by manufacturer's model number on the wiring diagrams in the Instrumentation Drawings. System components indicated on the Drawings shall be provided, as well as any ancillary or incidental equipment or devices, whether identified or not, that are required to support the identified system components and permit full use of the system capabilities. B. ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS: PLC systems, including associated system components, shall be as manufactured or endorsed by Control Microsystems Inc. The process control system architecture and configuration is based on products offered by Control Microsystems Inc. PLC equipment and accessories shall be modified as necessary to provide the specified features and to meet the specified operating conditions. PLC controller base shall be Control Microsystems SCADAPack 32, 32 bit controller with integrated Ethernet port. The controller base shall be configured with a 5606 lower I/O module including 16 digital inputs, 12 dry contact digital outputs and 8 analog inputs. Processor shall have 8MB DRAM, 4MB FLASH and 1 MB non-volatile SRAM. TelePACE ladder logic and C language software shall be firmware loaded-IEC enabled. I/O expansion base shall be Control Microsystems 5000 series model 5304 isolated analog output module. Substitutions will not be considered or accepted, PLC equipment must match Owners existing control system.



A. REFERENCES:

This section contains references to the following documents. They are a part of this section as specified and modified. Where a referenced document contains references to other standards, those documents are included as references under this section as if referenced directly. In the event of conflict between the requirements of this section and those of the listed documents, the requirements of this section shall prevail.

Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect at the time of Advertisement for Bids or Invitation to Bid (or on the effective date of the Agreement if there were no Bids). If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued.

Where document dates are given in the following listing, references to those documents shall mean the specific document version associated with that date, regardless of whether the document has been superseded by a version with a later date, discontinued or replaced.

Reference Title

IEEE 100 Standard Dictionary of Electrical and Electronics Terms

ISA S5.4 Instrument Loop Diagrams

ISA S20 Specification Forms For Process Measurement and Control Instrumentation, Primary Elements, and Control Valves


NECA-1 National Electrical Contractors Association – Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting

NFPA-70 National Electrical Code (NEC)

NEMA ICS 1 General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems

NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volt Maximum)

NEMA WD-1 General Requirements for Wiring Devices


C. FACTORY TESTS: See Section 17030 for testing requirements.


D. SHIPMENT, PROTECTION AND STORAGE:

Equipment shipment, protection and storage shall conform to the requirements specified in Section 01605.

E. WARRANTY:

In addition to the guarantee specified in the General Conditions, the PLC manufacturer shall provide a three year warranty for the PLC processor, input/output (I/O) systems, power supplies, racks, and communication interface products. The PLC warranty period shall commence on the date of initial shipment to the systems integrator. The terms of the PLC warranty shall provide for replacement of defective components, free of charge, at any time during the warranty period. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

Submittals and transmittal procedures for submittals are defined in Section 01300.

1. A copy of this specification section, with addendum updates included, and all referenced and applicable sections, with addendum updates included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements

2. A check mark shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If

deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the Contractor, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation.

3. The Construction Manager shall be the final authority for determining

acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the Contractor with the specifications.

4. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections, along

with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.

5. A copy of the contract document control diagrams and process and

instrumentation diagrams relating to the submitted equipment, with addendum updates that apply to the equipment in this section, marked to show specific changes necessary for the equipment proposed in the submittal. If no changes are required, the drawing or drawings shall be marked "no changes required".


6. Failure to include copies of the relevant drawings with the submittal shall be cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further review.

7. Complete “as constructed” PLC I/O list derived from the control wiring diagrams, submitted instrumentation equipment, control strategy requirements, change orders and site condition variances.

1.04 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION A. GENERAL: Each PLC system shall be configured as indicated on the Drawings and shall include system components required for a complete, fully functional PLC system including processors, input/output (I/O) bases, expansion bases, communication interfaces, and power and communication interface cabling. The PLC system I/O requirements shall be as defined in paragraph 17310.3.04. The Programmable Logic Controller input/output system addressing assignments shall be made by the Programmer. The programmer shall be notified of any discrepancies and shall be responsible for input/output point modifications. B. PROJECT SPECIFIC CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENTS: The PLC system shall consist of multiple networked processors serving both existing and new input/output subsystems. The PLC system processors shall support peer-to-peer, Ethernet information network communications between multiple PLC processors, computer based operator workstations, and other network compatible devices. PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER SYSTEMS Each PLC system shall be configured as indicated on the Process Control System Wiring Diagrams in the Drawings, and this Specification. In addition to the requirements of the configuration diagrams, the following ancillary equipment shall be provided with each PLC system: 1. Interconnect cabling between components of the same processor base. 2. Component mounting hardware as required for installation as detailed on

the Drawings.


2.02 INPUT / OUTPUT EXPANSION BASES Each I/O expansion base system shall be configured as indicated on the Process Control System Wiring Diagrams in the Drawings, and this Specification. In addition to the requirements of the configuration diagrams, the following ancillary equipment shall be provided with each I/O system: 1. Interconnect cabling between expansion bases and processor base. 2. Component mounting hardware as required for installation as detailed on

the Drawings. 2.03 RECORD DRAWINGS Submittal drawings specified in paragraph 17310-1.03 shall be provided as record drawings in accordance with Section 01720. The drawings shall be updated to indicate the final PLC system configuration including bill of materials, module layout for each chassis, individual module configuration switch settings, jumper positions, and final addressing of all communication network nodes. The drawings shall be prepared on a computer-aided drafting (CAD) system. Drawing size shall be 11-inch by 17-inch and shall be complete with borders and title blocks clearly identifying the project name and scope of the drawings. The CAD drawing files shall be converted to .DXF file format and submitted on 3.5-inch flexible storage media or CD-ROM media. 2.04 PRODUCT DATA A. OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS: Provide operation and maintenance instruction manuals in accordance with Sections 01300 and 01730. Operation and maintenance instruction manuals shall include hardware installation manuals, operations manuals and user manuals for all components within the PLC system. The PLC system operation and maintenance instruction manuals shall be submitted in triplicate. The PLC system operation and maintenance instruction manuals shall be the manufacturer’s original printed literature. Copies or reproductions of any kind will not be accepted


PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION SERVICES Installation shall be under the direction of factory trained personnel. The installation shall be certified by the manufacturer on Form 11000-A specified in Section 01999. 3.02 FIELD INSPECTION AND TESTING On-site inspection, testing, and certification of the completed PLC system installation shall be provided by the supplier of the PLC system. The PLC system supplier shall inspect the PLC installation including I/O subsystems, hardware configuration switch and jumper settings and certify the installation. The PLC system supplier shall monitor all PLC system diagnostic indicators, both hardware and software, and certify that the PLC system performance meets or exceeds the manufacturer’s published specifications. Fault or trouble conditions shall be investigated and resolved by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the PLC supplier. The PLC supplier shall certify in writing to the Construction Manager that the PLC system has been installed and configured in accordance with the manufacturer’s published guidelines. 3.03 TRAINING On-site training shall be provided for the Owner’s personnel on the operation and troubleshooting of the PLC system and fundamental programming techniques and familiarization with the supplied equipment. This training session shall not include process application program training. Application program training is specified in Section 17000. Training shall be conducted by a certified instructor in the direct employ of the PLC supplier. The training shall be structured as a lecture/lab course with hands-on lab exercises utilizing PLC system hardware similar to the hardware installed as work of this contract. Hardware simulators and programming terminals, to accommodate a class size of 10 students (maximum), shall be furnished by the PLC supplier. A minimum of six hours of formal training shall be presented in two three-hour sessions.


3.04 PLC INPUT/OUTPUT SUMMARY The Programmable Logic Controller I/O Summary provides a listing of PLC module requirements, and the assigned input/output points for the specified PLC system. The unassigned PLC I/O points shall be tagged as spare. The Programmable Logic Controller I/O Summary shall be submitted by the Contractor as specified herein and in Section 17315.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 17315

CONTROL SYSTEM PROGRAMMING AND DOCUMENTATION

PART 1--GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section contains requirements for control systems programming, program testing, progress tracking, and program documentation for the Ashland WTP Process Improvements Project in accordance with the requirements of Section 17900. The Contractor shall provide new chemical feed and storage monitoring application programs for the new PLC system in the Chlorine Building and existing HMI SCADA workstations located at the existing Control Building. The Contractor shall provide all software; applications programming; documentation; training; maintenance; and other materials, services and labor as required to provide complete, fully debugged, and operating systems as specified herein, in the schedules and control strategies, and on the drawings. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. CONTRACTOR'S PROGRAMMING MANAGER: The Contractor shall appoint a software engineer or qualified specialist as Programming Manager to manage, coordinate, and supervise the Contractor's programming work.

The Programming Manager shall have at least 5 years of total experience managing the programming and startup of similar instrumentation control systems, or experience managing at least five separate projects with the last project current or completed within the past two years. The quality assurance program shall include:

1. Definition of process area and systems, with test programming executed on a process by process basis.

2. Application programming for each process executed in sequential tasks.

B. RELATED SECTIONS:

Section 01660: Equipment and System Performance and Operational Testing

Section 17000: General Requirements for Instrumentation and Control

Section 17030: Process Instrumentation and Control System Testing


Section 17110: Panels

Section 17310: Programmable Logic Controller (PLC)

Section 17900: Control Strategies

C. DEFINITIONS: 1. Control System: Controllers and any associated Operator Interfaces

2. Controller:

a. Programmable Logic Controller (PLC), b. Other electronic controller.

3. Operator Interface (OI): a. Human Machine Interface (HMI), b. Other computer and display. 4. Process Area: Area comprised of one or more process systems: Refer to

Control Strategies Section 17900.

5. Process system: Packaged equipment system or subsystem. Examples: Equipment specifications and associated Panels in Section 17110.

6. Input and/or output I/O signals: a. Physically hard-wired b. Via data network 7. Programming Software: a. Controller, b. Operator Interface 8. Application Software: Operator Interface and/or Computer software used to

create reports, enable communications, or otherwise enhance Operator Interface functionality.

9. Application Programs: Programs created using Programming Software

and/or Application Software for control and interface for this project.


D. PROJECT LABELING

The items specifying project labeling herein shall include the following as a minimum: Owner’s name, facility name, project name, project number, and “Specification 17315” 1.03 SUBMITTALS

Submittal material shall be provided in accordance with Section 01300. Submittal requirements include the following:

A. QUALIFICATION SUBMITTAL:

Provide the following submittal in accordance with Section 01300-Submittals: 1. Programming Manager Qualifications and resume per paragraph 1.02A.

2. Proposed process systems breakdowns.

3. Example I/O interface summary per paragraph 2.02 D.

4. Initial schedule of operational testing for each process system.

5. Proposed final Application Program Software media type per Paragraph. 2.03 C.

B. DEFINITION SUBMITTAL:

Provide the following submittal after review of the Qualification Submittal, in accordance with Section 01300-Submittals: 1. Control descriptions per paragraph 2.02 C. 2. I/O Interface Summaries per paragraph 2.02 D. 3. Revised schedule of operational testing for each process area and system.

4. Provide a copy of this specification and the referenced and applicable sections with addenda updates included with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements.

5. Provide a copy of Section 17200 Instrument Index with Addenda updates

included, marked to indicate requested deviations from specified requirements.


7. Provide a copy of all applicable Instrumentation Drawings with addenda updates included, marked to indicate requested deviations from specified requirements.

8. Failure to include a copy of the specifications and drawings with the

submittal shall be cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration.

C. OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION SUBMITTAL:

Provide the submittal upon completion of testing and commissioning in accordance with Section 01730: Application Programming Documentation Volumes as specified herein. D. SOFTWARE SUBMITTAL: Application programs, Application software, and Application program media shall be turned over to the Construction Manager upon completion of the project as a submittal. PART 2--PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL The Programming Manager shall provide application programs, documentation, records, and software media as specified in the following paragraphs. 2.02 PROGRAMMING DOCUMENTATION A. DOCUMENTATION RECORDS: The Programming Manager shall develop a records keeping system to document progress and completion for each task in each process area or system. The following shall be kept current and available for inspection on-site at all times in a location designated by the Construction Manager: 1. Programming Manager's qualifications, project programming history,

including resume per paragraph 1.02 A. 2. List of names of project programmers with contact information. 3. Programming Documentation Volumes. 4. Application program media.


B. DOCUMENTATION: The Contractor shall develop and maintain an application programming documentation notebook. The application programming notebook shall include the following as a minimum: 1. Three-ring binder with front cover and spine labeled: “Process Control Programming Documentation for Ashland WTP Process

Improvements” including Project Labeling per paragraph 1.02 D. 2. Table of Contents with same labeling as the volume cover with tabs for each

section: 3. Section 1 – Control Description 4. Section 2 – I/O Interface Summary 5. Section 3 – Application PLC Control Program 6. Section 4 – Application SCADA Graphics Program 7. Section 5 - Reports C. CONTROL DESCRIPTION: Provide a control description outlining program logic operation and graphics screen operation for each process system. The Control Strategies Specification Section 17900 may be used as a basis. Provide details on Operator interaction, manual mode operation of field instruments and devices, setpoints, graphic indications used to operate each process area loop in accordance with the requirements of Section 17030. D. I/O INTERFACE SUMMARY: Provide I/O spreadsheets for each process system. Spreadsheets to include the following for each hardwired and networked I/O point:

1. Signal number/tag 2. Annotation description that may be logically abbreviated and that is

subject to approval. 3. Complete physical I/O channel designation and addressing or

communication I/O register designation. 4. True/False status designations for digital I/O.


5. Process range; engineering units and any multipliers; and raw signal range count for analog I/O.

6. Signals: Fixed point and scaled at the Controller with minimum four

significant implied digits of scaling. E.g.: 0 to 1400 at Controller for a pH range of 0 to 14 at Operator

Interface. 7. Provide Operator Interface scaling to display decimal digits required.

E. CONTROL LOGIC PROGRAM: Provide Controller program printout with annotation for the I/O, storage registers, results, and functions. Programs to include brief periodic descriptions of process area’s system and specific operation performed. Control elements annotated to indicate function, description/tag, range, or other details. F. SCADA GRAPHICS PROGRAM: Provide operator interface system program printouts: 1. Color prints of each graphic screen

2. Printout of Graphic I/O and Function Block database, including all data fields available.

G. REPORTS: Provide printouts of test reports in accordance with the requirements of Section 17030. 2.03 SOFTWARE MEDIA A. PLC PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE: Controller manufacturer’s original programming software media and documentation shall be provided as specified in Section 17310.

Upon receipt from the Manufacturer, the warranties and registrations shall be provided to the Construction Manager for completion by the Owner.

B. OPERATOR INTERFACE SOFTWARE: Operator Interface, (HMI) software manufacturer’s original software media and

documentation shall be provided by the Owner for the Contractor’s use. When programming effort is completed software materials shall be returned to the Construction Manger in a timely manner.


C. APPLICATION PROGRAMS: The software application programs shall be kept current on on-site media that shall be

CD-ROM as submitted and accepted. Media shall be permanently labeled “Process Control Programs for Ashland WTP Process

Improvements” including Controller or operator interface manufacturer’s programming software used name; model; and revision/version, and Project Labeling per paragraph 1.02 D. PART 3--EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION A. SCHEDULING:

The Contractor's Quality Control Manager specified in Section 01660, shall coordinate test scheduling and programming activities with the Programming Manager.

1. Process area and system testing schedules shall be coordinated prior to

Progress Meetings. 2. Programming Status briefings shall be presented at Progress Meetings. 3. No process system will be considered substantially complete until all

programming activities are determined complete by the Construction Manager.

B. RELATED CONTRACT DOCUMENT AND PRODUCT SUBMITTALS: The Contractor shall provide the Programming Manager with the referenced and pertinent

Specifications and Drawings with Addenda updates. The Contractor shall provide current reviewed product submittals marked to indicate

requested deviations from the specified and indicated requirements for the instruments, control panels, vendor or manufacture packaged control systems, etc. to the Programming Manager in a timely manner.

C. CHANGES: The Contractor shall provide copies of the pertinent contract correspondence which may

effect control system changes to the Programming Manager The Programming Manager may request information and clarifications in a Request For

Information that is routed through the Contractor.


D. TEMPORARY FACILITIES: The Contractor shall provide temporary power, network connections, personal

communication devices such as radios, work surfaces, and chairs as required for Programmer to insure controller and operator interface readiness prior to Testing and Commissioning. 3.02 PROGRAMMING EXECUTION

A. SCHEDULING: The Programming Manager shall coordinate with the Contractor and prioritize programming in the order of process system schedule completion. B. SEQUENCE TASKS: Control programming shall be performed in the following order: 1. Control Description approval. 2. I/O Interface Summary approval. 3. Program I/O and annotation. 4. Install controller program. 5. “Force” or simulate I/O and verify/debug controller program. 6. Install SCADA graphics database. 7. Install SCADA graphics application files. 8. “Force” or simulate I/O and verify/debug graphics. 9. Program and verify/debug reports. 3.03 TESTS The Construction Manager and Owner shall witness, Functional Tests, and Operational Tests outlined in Section 01660. Testing shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of Section 17030. Programming errors and field equipment failures shall be noted and corrected during tests. Keep test records on site and submit a log on the request of the Construction Manager. 3.04 TRAINING Training shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of Section 17000, paragraph 3.03 and Section 17310, paragraph 3.03.

**END OF SECTION**


SECTION 17900

CONTROL STRATEGIES Control and monitoring of the operation of plant processes and equipment are specified on individual control specification sheets (CONTROLSPECS). Each CONTROLSPEC is identified by a number as shown in the table below. These control strategies are not intended to apportion work or responsibility for work among subcontractors, suppliers and manufacturers, but are offered as an informational process guideline for testing, programming, start up, and checkout. They describe how the process control system is intended to operate, but do not necessarily include all components, field I/O points or controller actions required to make the system functional. Additional control description information for Vendor supplied packaged systems is shown in the equipment specifications. Additional programming requirements and system information is shown in Sections 17000, 17030, 17310 and 17315. Proper operation of the control system shall be coordinated to work with the actual equipment as submitted and as installed prior to testing, start up and check out. These control strategies work in conjunction with the drawings, equipment specifications and the Contractor’s submitted equipment.

Control Strategy Number

Page Number Title

1 2 Chemical Feed System

Control Specifications begin on next page.


CONTROLSPEC: 1 TITLE: CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEM

1.01 SCOPE This CONTROLSPEC specifies the control and monitoring of the following equipment:

Equipment Name Equipment Number

Chemical Dosing Pump 1 PCL-01



Chemical Storage Tank 1 TK-01

Chemical Storage Tank 2 TK-02 1.02 REFERENCES Equipment Specification Section: 11382 Process Drawings: P101, P102 Plan Drawings: E101, M301, M302, M303, M304, M305 1.03 DESCRIPTION A. PURPOSE: The purpose of the Chemical Feed System is to inject liquid sodium hypochlorite into chemical feed points in the Chemical Feed Building for disinfection. B. PROCESS DESCRIPTION:

1. CHEMICAL STORAGE TANKS: The Chemical Storage Tanks TK-01 and TK-02 store the chemicals for disinfection of the water treatment plant process. The tank levels are measured by ultrasonic level elements and transmitters which are temperature compensated. Tank levels are indicated on the transmitter display inside the local control panel, on digital panel meters on the local control panel door front and on the SCADA HMI graphics screen in the Control Room. High and low tank level warning alarms are calculated by the level transmitters which send alarm signals to the PLC when a high or low warning condition exists in the storage tanks. High and low level alarms for each storage tank are displayed on the SCADA HMI graphics screen in the Control Room. High level alarm activation for either storage tank indicates the tank level is nearing overflow and filling should cease immediately. Low level alarm activation for either storage tank indicates that the tank is drawn down to near empty and


needs to be refilled. A high level alarm float switch is installed in each chemical storage tank containment area near floor level. When a chemical overflow or leakage condition exists at either tank its float switch is activated sending an alarm signal to the PLC which sends an alarm signal to SCADA HMI system in the Control Room and turns on a warning strobe light at the Chlorine Building entrance. An individual high level alarm is displayed for each containment area on the SCADA HMI graphics screen. The local warning strobe light is a common alarm indication for both tanks. The high and low tank level and high level containment alarms are acknowledged and reset from the SCADA HMI graphics screen.

2. CHEMICAL DOSING PUMPS: There are three chemical dosing pumps.

The pumps are peristaltic metering pumps with adjustable speed controllers. Two pumps are selected to be the duty pumps, the other acts as standby pump. All the pumps are manually started either in LOCAL mode at the local pump control keypad or in REMOTE mode at the SCADA HMI graphics screen in the Control Room. When the pumps are in LOCAL mode they are manually started using STOP/START pushbuttons on the local pump control keypad. When the pumps are in REMOTE mode they are manually started using STOP/START graphics icons on the SCADA HMI graphics screen in the Control Building. Although the pumps may be remotely started and stopped, duty and standby pump selection is a manual operation which must be done locally at the pumps. Hand valves in the chemical feed pipelines must be opened and closed manually in a configuration which allows flow to the desired duty pumps and shuts down flow to the remaining standby pump. Pump speed control and dosing rate is also a LOCAL/REMOTE operation. In LOCAL mode the pump speed and dosing rate are constant adjusted using the local pump control keypad. In REMOTE mode the pump speed and dosing rate can either be constant or flow paced by the PLC using the SCADA HMI graphics screen for operation selection and adjustment. Each chemical feed pump has a common trouble contact which sends an alarm signal to the PLC and is displayed on a SCADA HMI alarm graphics screen. 1.04 OPERATOR CONTROLS

Location Control Item

Dosing Pumps START / STOP keypad pushbuttons

Dosing Pumps Pump operating parameter display and keypad mode control pushbuttons

SCADA HMI START / STOP graphic screen icons

SCADA HMI CONSTANT RATE / FLOW PACED RATE mode select graphic screen icons

SCADA HMI PUMP SPEED ADJUST graphic screen icon

SCADA HMI DOSING RATE graphic screen icon


1.05 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION: A. CHEMICAL DOSING PUMPS: 1. LOCAL OPERATION:

a. Select LOCAL at the local pump control keypad.

b. Select DOSING RATE and SPEED at the local pump control keypad.

c. Push the START pushbutton on the local pump control keypad. The pump will run continuously until the STOP pushbutton is pushed.

2. REMOTE OPERATION:

a. Select REMOTE at the local pump control keypad.

b. The pump is started and stopped and flow paced from speed reference signals from the PLC based on manual operator entry at the SCADA HMI graphic screen as described in Paragraph 1.03B.2.

Chemical Dosing Pumps will reset automatically after a power failure. 1.06 INTERLOCKS WITH OTHER EQUIPMENT

A. None.

1.07 STATUS DISPLAYS Operational running status is displayed as follows, typical for each device in system:

Location Status Visual Indication

Chemical Storage Tank Tank Fill Level Manual display on tank site glass

Local Control Panel Tank Fill Level Digital display on door front panel meter in engineering units

Local Control Panel Tank Fill Level Digital display on transmitter inside panel in engineering units

Local Feed Pump Pump Speed Digital display on local pump control keypad



Local Feed Pump Dosing Rate Digital display on local pump control keypad

Local Feed Pump Pump Running Digital display on local pump control keypad

Local Feed Pump Pump in LOCAL/REMOTE

Digital display on local pump control keypad

Local on Clearwell Feed Pipe Chemical Flow Rate Manual display on rotameter scale

Local on RM Feed Pipe Chemical Flow Rate Manual display on rotameter scale

Local on Clearwell Feed Pipe Chemical Feed Pressure

Manual display on pressure gage scale

Local on RM Feed Pipe Chemical Flow Rate Manual display on pressure gage scale

SCADA HMI Graphic Screen Tank Fill Level Digital display in engineering units

SCADA HMI Graphic Screen Pump Speed Digital display in engineering units

SCADA HMI Graphic Screen Dosing Rate Digital display in engineering units

SCADA HMI Graphic Screen Pump Running Pump graphic icon illuminated red in color, grey when stopped

SCADA HMI Graphic Screen Pump in LOCAL/REMOTE

Pop up adjacent to pump icon stating LOCAL or REMOTE mode


1.08 ALARM DISPLAYS Alarm conditions are displayed as follows, typical for each device in system:


Exterior Wall at Chlorine Building Tank Containment Overfill or Leakage

Strobe light at building entrance is ON

Local Control Panel Tank High Level Warning

Digital display on transmitter inside panel

Local Control Panel Tank Low Level Warning

Digital display on transmitter inside panel

Local Feed Pump Control Keypad Display

Chemical Feed

Pump Trouble

See Section 11382 for individual trouble alarms which are displayed at pump controller

SCADA HMI Graphic Screen Tank High Level Warning

Flashing RED/YELLOW alarm icon adjacent to tank with TANK HIGH ALARM text in icon field, alarm logged to historian screen

SCADA HMI Graphic Screen Tank Low Level Warning

Flashing RED/YELLOW alarm icon adjacent to tank with TANK LOW ALARM text in icon field, alarm logged to historian screen

SCADA HMI Graphic Screen Tank Containment Overfill or Leakage

Flashing RED/YELLOW alarm icon adjacent to tank with TANK CONTAINMENT SPILL ALARM text in icon field, alarm logged to historian screen

SCADA HMI Graphic Screen Chemical Feed

Pump Trouble

Flashing RED/YELLOW alarm icon adjacent to pump with PUMP TROUBLE text in icon field, alarm logged to historian screen

**END OF SECTION**